AUTODESK REVIT BUILDING 8.

1
®

Metric Tutorial

August 2005

Copyright © 2005 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state cation, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3D Props, 3D Studio, 3D Studio MAX, 3D Studio VIZ, 3DSurfer, ActiveShapes, ActiveShapes (logo), Actrix, ADI, AEC Authority (logo), AEC-X, Animator Pro, Animator Studio, ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Map, Autodesk, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk (logo), Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk University (logo), Autodesk View, Autodesk WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP, AutoSketch, Biped, bringing information down to earth, CAD Overlay, Character Studio, Cinepak, Cinepak (logo), Codec Central, Combustion, Design Your World, Design Your World (logo), Discreet, EditDV, Education by Design, gmax, Heidi, HOOPS, Hyperwire, i-drop, Inside Track, Kinetix, MaterialSpec, Mechanical Desktop, NAAUG, ObjectARX, PeopleTracker, Physique, Planix, Powered with Autodesk Technology (logo), RadioRay, Revit, Softdesk, Texture Universe, The AEC Authority, The Auto Architect, VISION, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual TugBoat, Visual LISP, Volo, WHIP!, and WHIP! (logo). The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3ds max, AutoCAD Architectural Desktop, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT Learning Assistance, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk Map, Autodesk Streamline, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, Buzzsaw.com, Cinestream, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignProf, DesignServer, Design Web Format, DWF, DWG Linking, DXF, Extending the Design Team, GDX Driver, gmax (logo), gmax ready (logo),Heads-up Design, IntroDV, jobnet, ObjectDBX, onscreen onair online, Plans & Specs, Plasma, PolarSnap, ProjectPoint, Reactor, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Visual Bridge, Visual Syllabus, and Where Design Connects.

Autodesk Canada Inc. Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc. in the USA and/or Canada, and/or other countries: discreet, fire, flame, flint, flint RT, frost, glass, inferno, MountStone, riot, river, smoke, sparks, stone, stream, vapour, wire. The following are trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc., in the USA, Canada, and/or other countries: backburner, backdraft, Multi-Master Editing.

Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright © 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright © 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright © 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. International CorrectSpell ™ Spelling Correction System © 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield ™ 3.0. Copyright © 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE ® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE ® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. © Pantone, Inc., 2002 Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright © 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin." Typefaces from the Bitstream ® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust © 1996. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts ............................................................................................... 1
Understanding the Basics ................................................................................................................................. 2 Navigating the Revit Building User Interface ............................................................................................. 4

Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .................................................................................. 11
Creating Your First Building Model ............................................................................................................... 12 Creating and Modifying the Exterior Walls of the West Wing ................................................................ 12 Adding the Interior Walls of the West Wing ............................................................................................ 24 Dimensioning the Building Model ........................................................................................................... 32 Adding Doors and Windows ..................................................................................................................... 41 Adding Floors and Floor Openings ........................................................................................................... 58 Adding a Roof and Ceiling ........................................................................................................................ 74 Adding Multi-Level Stairs .......................................................................................................................... 80 Creating the East Wing and Passageway .................................................................................................. 87 Scheduling the Building Model .............................................................................................................. 100 Rendering the Building Model ................................................................................................................ 104 Documenting the Building Model .......................................................................................................... 106

Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .......................................................................... 113
Modifying System Settings ........................................................................................................................... 114 Modifying General System Options ........................................................................................................ 114 Specifying File Locations ......................................................................................................................... 115 Specifying Spelling Options .................................................................................................................... 117 Modifying Snap Settings ......................................................................................................................... 118 Modifying Project Settings ........................................................................................................................... 120 Creating and Applying Materials ............................................................................................................ 120 Creating and Applying Fill Patterns ........................................................................................................ 123 Controlling Object Styles ........................................................................................................................ 125 Modifying Line Patterns and Styles ........................................................................................................ 128 Modifying Annotations ........................................................................................................................... 131 Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options ........................ 133 Modifying Project Browser Organization ............................................................................................... 134 Creating an Office Template ........................................................................................................................ 136 Choosing the Base Template ................................................................................................................... 137 Modifying Project Settings ...................................................................................................................... 137 Loading and Modifying Families and Groups ........................................................................................ 142 Modifying Views and View Templates ................................................................................................... 144 Modifying Render Scene Settings ........................................................................................................... 147 Modifying Import/Export Settings .......................................................................................................... 148 Setting up Shared and Project Parameters .............................................................................................. 149 Creating Named Print Settings ............................................................................................................... 151

Chapter 4 Ceilings ............................................................................................................................... 153
Creating Ceilings .......................................................................................................................................... 154 Creating Automatic Ceilings ................................................................................................................... 154 Creating Compound Ceilings ................................................................................................................. 156

Chapter 5 Openings ............................................................................................................................ 159
Cutting Roof Openings ................................................................................................................................ 160 Cutting a Dormer Opening in a Roof ..................................................................................................... 160 Creating a Perpendicular Roof Opening ................................................................................................. 164

Contents | i

Creating a Vertical Roof Opening ........................................................................................................... 167 Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings ................................................................................................... 170 Cutting an Opening in a Floor ............................................................................................................... 170 Cutting an Opening in a Ceiling ............................................................................................................ 173 Cutting an Opening Using the Shaft Tool .............................................................................................. 174

Chapter 6 Railings ............................................................................................................................... 177
Creating Railings .......................................................................................................................................... 178 Creating the Railing Layout .................................................................................................................... 178 Adjusting Railing Parameters .................................................................................................................. 180

Chapter 7 Roofs ................................................................................................................................... 185
Creating Roofs .............................................................................................................................................. 186 Creating an Extruded Roof ...................................................................................................................... 186 Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint ................................................................................................. 190 Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint ............................................................... 192 Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint .................................................................................................... 194 Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint ................................................................................................... 197 Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof ...................................................................................................... 199 Aligning Roof Eaves ................................................................................................................................ 201 Creating a Mansard Roof ........................................................................................................................ 202 Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits ............................................................................................................ 204 Creating Roof Fascia ................................................................................................................................ 204 Creating Gutters ...................................................................................................................................... 205 Creating Soffits ........................................................................................................................................ 206

Chapter 8 Stairs .................................................................................................................................. 209
Creating Stairs .............................................................................................................................................. 210 Creating the Main Lobby Stair Run ........................................................................................................ 210 Modifying the Main Lobby Stair Run ..................................................................................................... 215 Creating the Second Floor Lobby Side Stairs .......................................................................................... 221 Creating the Level 2 Landing Railings .................................................................................................... 224 Creating the Emergency Exit Stair Run .................................................................................................. 231 Creating a Semi-circular Exterior Stair Run ............................................................................................ 236 Working with the Stair Calculator .......................................................................................................... 241

Chapter 9 Walls .................................................................................................................................. 247
Creating Walls .............................................................................................................................................. 248 Sketching Walls ....................................................................................................................................... 248 Working with Compound Walls ............................................................................................................ 258 Working with Vertically Compound Walls ............................................................................................ 266 Joining Walls to Floors ............................................................................................................................ 276 Working with Foundation Walls ............................................................................................................ 278 Working with Wall Wraps ...................................................................................................................... 281 Assigning Wall Bottom and Top Attachments ....................................................................................... 283

Chapter 10 Curtain Systems ................................................................................................................ 287
Flat Curtain System ...................................................................................................................................... 288 Creating an Entrance .............................................................................................................................. 288 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System  ................................................................................................ 296 Curved Curtain System ................................................................................................................................ 299 Adding a Curved Curtain System  .......................................................................................................... 299 Adding a Custom Curtain Panel ............................................................................................................. 301 Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel  ...................................................................................... 304 Additional Curtain Systems ......................................................................................................................... 307 Sloped Glazings  ...................................................................................................................................... 307 Storefront System  ................................................................................................................................... 308 Curtain System by Lines  ........................................................................................................................ 311

Chapter 11 Creating Drawings ............................................................................................................ 315
Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project ........................................................................................................... 316 Creating a Drawing Sheet ....................................................................................................................... 316 Adding a Sheet to the Project .................................................................................................................. 323 Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet .......................................................................................... 324

ii | Contents

Creating New Views to Add to Sheets ..................................................................................................... 326 Using Legends .............................................................................................................................................. 333 Creating a Symbol Legend ...................................................................................................................... 333 Creating a Wall Type Legend .................................................................................................................. 335 Using a Legend View to Match Types ..................................................................................................... 337 Using Revision Tracking ............................................................................................................................... 339 Setting Up a Revision Table .................................................................................................................... 339 Sketching Revision Clouds ...................................................................................................................... 340 Tagging Revision Clouds ......................................................................................................................... 341 Working with Revisions .......................................................................................................................... 342

Chapter 12 Detailing ............................................................................................................................. 345
Creating a Detail from a Building Model ..................................................................................................... 346 Creating a Callout View .......................................................................................................................... 346 Detailing the View .................................................................................................................................. 350 Adding Detail Lines ................................................................................................................................. 356 Adding a Vapor Barrier and Insulation ................................................................................................... 359 Adding Break Lines ................................................................................................................................. 360 Adding Text Notes ................................................................................................................................... 363 Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views ......................................................... 364 Changing Detail Component Order in a Detail View ............................................................................ 364 Changing Visibility Settings in a Detail View ........................................................................................ 366 Creating a Drafted Detail ............................................................................................................................. 369 Creating a Drafting View ........................................................................................................................ 369 Creating a Detail in the Drafting View ................................................................................................... 369 Importing a Detail into a Drafting View ................................................................................................. 376 Creating a Reference Callout .................................................................................................................. 379

Chapter 13 Scheduling ......................................................................................................................... 381
Creating Type and Instance Schedules ........................................................................................................ 382 Creating a Window Schedule .................................................................................................................. 382 Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams ..................................................................................................... 385 Creating a Room Schedule ...................................................................................................................... 385 Creating a Room Color Diagram ............................................................................................................ 394 Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes ....................................................................................................... 396 Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions ..................................................................... 396 Scheduling Shared Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 401 Creating a Multi-Category Schedule ....................................................................................................... 401 Using Formulas and Filters in Schedules ...................................................................................................... 406 Creating a Level-Based Door Schedule with a Filter ............................................................................... 406 Creating a Wall Schedule with Filters and a Formula ............................................................................ 408 Scheduling Project Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 409 Creating a Room Schedule with Project Parameters ............................................................................... 410 Exporting Project Information with ODBC ................................................................................................. 411 Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access ............................................................................ 411

Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning ......................................................................................... 413
Setting the Base Elevation of a Project ......................................................................................................... 414 Setting the Base Elevation of a House ..................................................................................................... 414 Dimensioning ............................................................................................................................................... 416 Creating Dimensions .............................................................................................................................. 417 Controlling Witness Line Location ........................................................................................................ 422 Modifying Dimension Properties ............................................................................................................ 425 Working with Alignments and Constraints ........................................................................................... 426 Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions ......................................................................................... 432 Annotating ................................................................................................................................................... 434 Creating Angular Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 434 Sequentially Tagging Rooms ................................................................................................................... 435 Tagging Doors and Windows .................................................................................................................. 437

Chapter 15 Viewing .............................................................................................................................. 441
Viewing a Building Model ............................................................................................................................ 442 Exploring the Building Model ................................................................................................................ 442 Creating a Perspective View with a Camera ........................................................................................... 445

Contents | iii

Creating a Section View .......................................................................................................................... 451 Creating Elevation Views ........................................................................................................................ 453 Controlling Fill Pattern Colors ..................................................................................................................... 455 Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material ..................................................................................... 455 Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type ................................................................... 457 Creating a View Plan Region ........................................................................................................................ 459 Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan ................................................................................................... 459

Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .............................................................. 463
Rendering an Exterior View ......................................................................................................................... 464 Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model ....................................................................... 464 Adding Trees to the Site .......................................................................................................................... 468 Creating a Perspective View .................................................................................................................... 470 Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View ............................................................................................. 473 Rendering an Interior View .......................................................................................................................... 476 Adding RPC People ................................................................................................................................. 476 Creating the Interior Perspective View ................................................................................................... 478 Creating a New Render Scene ................................................................................................................. 481 Defining Daylights and Rendering the View .......................................................................................... 482 Creating and Recording Walkthroughs ....................................................................................................... 484 Creating a Walkthrough ......................................................................................................................... 484 Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position ........................................................................ 487 Recording the Walkthrough ................................................................................................................... 489

Chapter 17 Presentation Views ........................................................................................................... 491
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique ............................................................................................... 492 Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique .............................................................................................. 492 Using Advanced Model Graphics ............................................................................................................ 494 Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet ............................................................................................................ 496 Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique .............................................................................................. 499 Preparing the Elevation View for the Analytique ................................................................................... 500 Adding a Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet .......................................................... 502 Adding Section Views to the Analytique ..................................................................................................... 504 Preparing a Section View for the Analytique .......................................................................................... 505 Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View ............................................................................... 509 Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique ............................................................................... 510 Working with a Presentation View Template ......................................................................................... 514 Working in a Callout Analytique ............................................................................................................ 517 Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes .................................................................................................. 524 Creating Cutaway Isometric Views ......................................................................................................... 525 Creating Cutaway Perspective Views ...................................................................................................... 531 Annotating the Analytique ..................................................................................................................... 536

Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor ........................................................................... 539
Using Families and the Family Editor .......................................................................................................... 540 Introduction to Families ......................................................................................................................... 540 Introduction to the Family Editor .......................................................................................................... 542

Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .................................................................. 545
Creating a Door Family ................................................................................................................................ 546 Drawing the Door Plan View Components ............................................................................................ 546 Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry ................................................................................................. 550 Assigning Materials to the Door Components ....................................................................................... 553 Defining New Door Types ....................................................................................................................... 556 Creating a Window Family .......................................................................................................................... 558 Specifying the New Window Parameters ................................................................................................ 559 Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry ........................................................................................ 560 Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry ........................................................................................... 566 Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry .......................................................................................... 569 Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry ..................................................................................... 574 Assigning Materials to the Window Components ................................................................................. 584 Defining New Window Types ................................................................................................................. 587 Creating a Furniture Family ......................................................................................................................... 591 Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters ......................................................................................... 592

iv | Contents

Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry .................................................................................................... 597 Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry ..................................................................................... 600 Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry ..................................................................................................... 609 Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry .................................................................................................... 614 Defining New Furniture Types ................................................................................................................ 617 Creating a Baluster Family ........................................................................................................................... 619 Drawing a Baluster .................................................................................................................................. 619 Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run .............................................................................................. 621 Creating Profile Families .............................................................................................................................. 623 Drawing a Sweep Profile .......................................................................................................................... 623 Drawing a Rail Profile ............................................................................................................................. 624 Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile ................................................................................................................ 624 Drawing a Reveal Profile ......................................................................................................................... 625 Drawing a Host Sweep Profile ................................................................................................................. 626 Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path ................................................................................................... 627 Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls .................................................................................................. 629 Creating a Room Tag .................................................................................................................................... 631 Specifying Room Tag Parameters ............................................................................................................ 631 Creating an Annotation Symbol .................................................................................................................. 633 Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol ............................................................................ 633 Adding the New North Arrow to a Project ............................................................................................. 636 Creating a Titleblock Family ........................................................................................................................ 636 Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet ............................................................................................... 637 Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock .............................................................................................. 640 Adding the Titleblock to a New Project .................................................................................................. 649 Creating In-Place Families ............................................................................................................................ 650 Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family ............................................................................................... 651 Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family .......................................................................................... 658

Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques ................................................................. 661
Planning a Parametric Component Family .................................................................................................. 662 Determining Component Needs ............................................................................................................. 662 Selecting the Family Template ................................................................................................................ 663 Creating the Component Skeleton .............................................................................................................. 665 Adding Reference Planes ......................................................................................................................... 666 Adding Dimensions and Constraints ...................................................................................................... 671 Creating New Length Parameters ........................................................................................................... 674 Flexing the Component Model ............................................................................................................... 678 Adding Solid Geometry ................................................................................................................................ 680 Creating Solid Extrusions ........................................................................................................................ 680 Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry ............................................................................................ 682 Creating Additional Solid Geometry ...................................................................................................... 685 Testing the Family in a Project ..................................................................................................................... 693 Loading a Family into a Project .............................................................................................................. 693 Testing a Family Instance in a Project .................................................................................................... 694 Working with Nested Subcomponents ........................................................................................................ 697 Adding a Nested Component ................................................................................................................. 698 Creating Formula-controlled Parameters ................................................................................................ 702 Arraying Nested Subcomponents ............................................................................................................ 706 Reloading a Family into a Project ........................................................................................................... 711 Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters ..................................................................................... 712 Creating and Applying Subcategories ..................................................................................................... 713 Creating Material Parameters .................................................................................................................. 717 Controlling Component Visibility ............................................................................................................... 719 Assigning Detail Level and View Controls .............................................................................................. 719 Creating Component Types ......................................................................................................................... 722 Creating Multiple Component Types ..................................................................................................... 722 Creating Conditional Formulas .............................................................................................................. 723

Chapter 21 Area Analysis ..................................................................................................................... 725
Using Area Analysis Tools ............................................................................................................................ 726 Creating Area Schemes and Plans ........................................................................................................... 726 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans ................................................................................. 732

Contents | v

Chapter 22 Massing ............................................................................................................................... 735
Using Massing Tools ..................................................................................................................................... 736 Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model ...................................................................................... 736 Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model .......................................................... 741 Using Mass Family Files in a Project  ........................................................................................................... 743 Creating New Mass Family Types  .......................................................................................................... 743 Loading and Placing New Mass Families ................................................................................................ 744 Joining Mass Elements ............................................................................................................................ 747 Using Mass Elements with Design Options ................................................................................................. 750 Mass Elements in Design Options .......................................................................................................... 750 Creating Building Components from Mass Elements ................................................................................. 752 Creating Walls by Picking Faces ............................................................................................................. 753 Creating Floors by Picking Faces ............................................................................................................. 755 Creating Roofs by Picking Faces .............................................................................................................. 759 Creating Curtain Systems  ...................................................................................................................... 761 Editing Elements Created from Massings ............................................................................................... 763 Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility ............................................................................................................ 768

Chapter 23 Site ..................................................................................................................................... 771
Using Site Tools ............................................................................................................................................ 772 Creating a Toposurface ........................................................................................................................... 772 Adding Property Lines ............................................................................................................................. 777 Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings ...................................................................................... 781 Creating Topographic Subregions ........................................................................................................... 783 Grading the Toposurface ......................................................................................................................... 788 Adding a Building Pad ............................................................................................................................ 793 Adding Site Components ........................................................................................................................ 795 Tagging Site and Parking Components .................................................................................................. 798 Creating Parking Space Schedules ........................................................................................................... 799

Chapter 24 Grouping ............................................................................................................................ 801
Creating Groups ........................................................................................................................................... 802 Creating a Group ..................................................................................................................................... 802 Placing a Group ....................................................................................................................................... 803 Modifying a Group .................................................................................................................................. 804 Creating Nested Groups ............................................................................................................................... 805 Creating a Nested Group ......................................................................................................................... 806 Modifying a Nested Group ...................................................................................................................... 807 Working with Groups .................................................................................................................................. 809 Duplicating a Group ............................................................................................................................... 809 Creating a Detail Group .......................................................................................................................... 812 Using Attached Detail Groups ................................................................................................................ 813 Saving and Loading Groups .................................................................................................................... 815 Automatically Creating a Group ............................................................................................................. 816

Chapter 25 Structural .......................................................................................................................... 819
Adding Structural Walls ............................................................................................................................... 820 Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay .............................................................................................. 820 Sketching Structural Walls ...................................................................................................................... 821 Dimensioning and Modifying Walls ...................................................................................................... 830 Adding Structural Columns and Beams ....................................................................................................... 833 Adding Structural Columns .................................................................................................................... 834 Adding Structural Beams and Girders ..................................................................................................... 838 Adding Joists and Purlins ........................................................................................................................ 848 Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels .................................................................................................. 854 Defining New Levels ............................................................................................................................... 855 Duplicating the Existing Design ............................................................................................................. 856 Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation ......................................................................................................... 858 Creating a Framing Elevation ................................................................................................................. 858 Adding Structural Braces ......................................................................................................................... 860

Chapter 26 Sharing Projects ................................................................................................................ 865
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 866

vi | Contents

Using Worksharing in a Project ................................................................................................................... 866 Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals .......................................................................................... 866 Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets ................................................................................... 869 Working Individually with Worksets ..................................................................................................... 873 Using Worksets with Multiple Users ....................................................................................................... 876 Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users ......................................................................... 881

Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options .................................................................................. 885
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project ............................................................................................ 886 Creating the Structural Design Options ................................................................................................. 886 Creating the Roof System Design Options ............................................................................................. 896 Managing Design Options ...................................................................................................................... 903

Chapter 28 Project Phasing ................................................................................................................. 909
Using Phasing ............................................................................................................................................... 910 Phasing Your Model ................................................................................................................................ 910 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags ............................................................................................................. 915

Chapter 29 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates ....................................................... 919
Linking Building Models .............................................................................................................................. 920 Linking Building Models from Different Project Files ............................................................................ 920 Repositioning Linked Building Models ................................................................................................... 928 Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility ........................................................................................ 931 Managing Linked Building Models ......................................................................................................... 933 Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models ........................................................................................... 935 Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates ................................................................................................... 935 Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates ........................................................................................ 937 Scheduling Components of Linked Files ................................................................................................ 941 Working with a Linked Building Model ................................................................................................. 943 Managing Shared Locations .................................................................................................................... 944

Contents | vii

viii | Contents

Understanding the Concepts

1

In this tutorial, you learn the fundamental concepts of Revit Building. You learn how Revit Building works, the terms used when working with the product, and how to navigate the user interface.

In the lesson that follows, you learn many of the important features in Revit Building that contribute to a user-friendly design environment, enhanced productivity, and faster construction documents. You begin with the fundamental concepts that Revit Building is built upon. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, and how to navigate the user interface.

1

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit Building is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work.

What is Autodesk Revit Building?
The Revit Building platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit Building model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Building collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit Building parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Building provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This concept is important because it is this capability that delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Building: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Building coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Autodesk Revit Building keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit Building immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit Building uses two key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
Revit Building uses five software element classes: host, component, annotation, view, and datum. This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Building elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit Building. Hosts include walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings. Components include windows, doors, and furniture. Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce your documentation. Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date. Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together. In Revit Building, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.

Understanding Autodesk Revit Building terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Building are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, there are some terms that are unique to Revit Building, and understanding them is crucial to understanding the software. This section defines the basic terms used in Revit Building. The first term you need to know is "project." In Revit Building, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all the information for your building design,

2 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit Building makes it easy for you to alter your design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Another important term to understand is "level". Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan tiled next to it.

When creating your project, you add Revit Building parametric building elements to the design. All elements are considered categories. Revit Building classifies elements by model component elements and annotation elements. A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building. An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model. Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, six-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Most families are component family files, which means you can load them into your project and create them from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. Other families are called system families. These families, which include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Revit Building predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects. Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family can have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new type within the same family. Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Understanding the Basics | 3

Autodesk Revit Building terms

Navigating the Revit Building User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit Building is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit Building window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit Building uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit Building is much easier. In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.

Start a new project
1 On the Standard toolbar, click .

This creates a new project based on the default template.

4 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

The Title Bar
2 Place your cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open.

By default, new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. In addition, the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template that the project is based on.

The Menu Bar
3 On the View menu, click Zoom.

The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File, Edit, and View. You can choose commands by placing the cursor over the menu name and clicking. You then click the command name to run the command. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. TIP For example, the shortcut key for Zoom To Fit is ZX. While working in the drawing area, you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. A context menu appears with a list of all available commands. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected.

The Toolbar
4 On the Window menu, click Toolbar.

There are six toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. You can control the visibility of the six toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar.

The Options Bar
5 On the Modelling menu, click Wall. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options.

Understanding the Basics | 5

The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. 6 On the Modelling menu, click Door. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. On the left side of the Options Bar, notice a door type is specified.

The Type Selector
7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors.

The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. If you select the Door tool, the Type Selector displays a list of doors available within the project. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category.

8 On the Modelling menu, click Wall.

6 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

9 In the Type Selector, notice the list of walls that are available. You use the Type Selector in two ways. First, you can select a component type before you add it to the building model. For example, if you intend to add a door, the door type active in the Type Selector is the door type that is added when you insert it into the building model. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the building model. Within the drawing area, you can select any component and then change the type from the Type Selector.

The Design Bar
10 On the Window menu, click Design Bars. The Show Design Bars dialog box is displayed.

The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface, immediately below the Type Selector. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar, containing buttons grouped by function. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog box. 11 Click OK. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu.
■ ■ ■ ■

Basics tab—includes commands for creating most basic building model components. View tab—commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab—all the commands to create model elements Drafting tab—commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents Rendering tab—commands for creating rendered 3D images Site tab—commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab—commands for executing conceptual massing commands Area Analysis tab—commands for making area schemes and plans Structural tab—commands for adding structural components to your project Construction tab—includes commands for creating construction industry information

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

To access the commands within a tab, click the tab, and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu.

Understanding the Basics | 7

The Project Browser
12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. In the Project Browser, select Views (all).

You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views, schedules, sheets, reports, families, and groups of your current project. You can right-click in the browser to add, delete, and rename views, families, and groups. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans, elevations, 3D), family category (doors, walls, windows), and group name. You can expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or sign next to the name. To open a view, double-click the name. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area, making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. The browser is also dockable, so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. 13 In the Type Selector, scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser.

8 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

14 On the Settings menu, click Browser Organization. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. After you create a browser organization scheme, you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog box, click Cancel.

The Status Bar
16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. The cursor is displayed as a pencil. 17 Place your cursor near the center of the drawing area. Do not click.

Understanding the Basics | 9

TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. 20 Press TAB. 18 On the Design Bar. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. press F1 to get the topic associated with the window. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Building Help window. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons. Elevations: Elevation: Elevation 5. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. It highlights when the cursor is over it. Toolbar: From the Toolbar. You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. You can use this tri-pane. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. Autodesk Revit Building Help 21 On the Help menu. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. click . If there is no Help button displayed. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. Click the Help button. When you place the cursor over a component. click Autodesk Revit Help. The Status Bar also provides information. Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips. press F1 to get help on that dialog box. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. regarding selected components within a view. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. and the topic specific to the dialog box opens. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays. In the Status Bar. In this case. you can use the Status Bar and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component. There are several tools that help you find information. You can also press SHIFT+F1. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Building session.In the bottom left corner of the window. Windows: From any window. in conjunction with Tooltips. click Modify. find a keyword on the Index tab. 10 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts .

As you make design changes throughout this tutorial. common terms. and a roof . you create the shell of the west wing . This tutorial is designed to teach concepts as well as methods. and fundamental concepts before creating your first building model. While creating your first building information model.including all windows. For learning purposes. you can normally use various means to accomplish identical tasks. If you have not already done so. floors. you learn about the Revit Building parametric capabilities and ease of use. all views and schedules instantly update. before proceeding further. this tutorial uses a diversity of methods whenever possible. the design process might differ in a real-world scenario. You should understand the user interface. Understanding the Concepts. 11 . Because the design process in Revit Building is extremely flexible.Creating Your First Building Model 2 This tutorial is designed to familiarize you with the basic concepts and methods of creating a building model using Autodesk Revit Building. review the tutorial. The building model you create consists of an east wing and a west wing joined by a curtain wall passageway.mirror it to create the east wing. stairs. Therefore. For training purposes. and then add the passageway between them. doors.

you can. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. As you design the walls. ceilings. NOTE The dataset for this tutorial was created using the default template. 12 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . modify. click Open. and then add the passageway between them. you can assign the wall height to a level or a specific value. If you sketch the walls with the top constraint specifying a height. Minor modifications have been made for training purposes. You then add sketched components such as floors. at a later time.Creating Your First Building Model In this lesson. Notice that Level 1 and Level 2 are already defined. expand Elevations. Open m_First_Project. Add new levels 1 In the Project Browser. stairs. After adding dimensions.rvt located in the Metric folder. You then sketch the exterior and interior walls of the west wing. You then apply the new wall type to the existing walls. you begin with a project file based on a simple template to which you add several new levels. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. expand Views (all). you define the levels first so that you can set the top constraint when you first create the walls. Finally. and a roof. Creating and Modifying the Exterior Walls of the West Wing In this exercise. you render the model and document the project by adding schedules and views to sheets. and apply new wall types. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon. you sketch the exterior walls of the west wing. you add and modify doors and windows. Using the mirror tool. you use the west wing to create the east wing. you create. You can add and modify levels at any time during the design process. After sketching the walls. and double-click North. click Level. In this exercise. When you create walls. you create a new wall type with multiple wall sweeps and reveals. reassign the top constraint to a specific level.

5 Click Level 2 to create level 3 at the designated offset above it. Verify that Make Plan View is selected 4 Move the cursor over Level 2 and notice the prospective new level displays above it. it terminates the command in progress. This means that changes to the extents are applied only to the active view. ■ Select . this indicates that you can select and edit the values. When you select Level 4. Creating Your First Building Model | 13 . You can also use the ESC key to accomplish this. ■ ■ Enter 4000 mm for Offset. it changes the extent of that datum in all other parallel views. click Modify. The left and right extents of the new level are aligned and locked to the levels below. When you click Modify. provided those datums also have the 3D model extent control. the datum is in model extent mode. In this view. ■ ■ 6 Click Level 3 to add Level 4. 9 Click directly on the Level 4 text. notice the following: ■ There is a control titled 3D that displays at the ends of the datum. If you click the 3D control. the level name and height value displays with the color blue. This means that if you drag the control to resize the datum extent. With the 3D designation. 8 Select Level 4. This means that if you move the extents of one level line.3 On the Options Bar. the extents of the other level lines adopt the same change. This allows you to create a new level by picking an existing line and applying an offset. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the Project Browser. it toggles to 2D. notice that a floor plan and ceiling plan have been created for Level 3.

the floor plan would resemble the following illustration. This process reduces the amount of repetitive work and ensures consistency between each wing. a west wing. you could begin the model by simply sketching the exterior walls and then continuing the design process from that point. In the steps that follow. You can use the zoom tools located on the View menu. because the east wing is a mirror image of the west wing. and a curtain glass passageway connecting the two wings. In this view. North. West. 14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. right-click in the drawing area and use the zoom tools on the context menu. However. and then designing the passageway to connect the two. Sketch the exterior walls 13 This building model consists of an east wing. use the wheel on your mouse. 14 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Theoretically. In such a case. TIP The Level 4 ceiling plan view has also been renamed to Roof. 11 Click Yes to rename corresponding views. you can take advantage of the parametric capabilities of Revit Building by designing the majority of the west wing. and South elevation views.TIP You may need to zoom in to accomplish this. 12 In the Project Browser. mirroring it to create the east wing. tool on the toolbar. you create the exterior walls of only the west wing. double-click Level 1. notice that the name of the Level 4 floor plan is changed to Roof. or scroll the 10 Enter Roof and press ENTER. which define the East. there are four elevation symbols.

15 Move the cursor over the left elevation symbol and then over the elevation arrow. NOTE The far clip plane for the East. Creating Your First Building Model | 15 . Later in this tutorial. This means that each view is infinite. do not turn on the far clip planes at this time. North. you use this command to modify the view. You can activate the far clip plane in the element properties dialog box of each respective view. Do not click the symbol. click Wall. 18 In the Type Selector. For training purposes. click the Elevation: West symbol. select Basic Wall: Exterior . The drag handles control the left and right clip planes of the elevation view. A solid line with two drag handles displays on the West elevation symbol. Make sure you click the arrow and not the round part of the symbol. TIP You can turn off the visibility of the elevation symbols by using the Visibility/Graphics command found on the View menu. 16 In the drawing area. West. 17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and South elevation views are inactive.Brick on CMU. The name of the elevation view is displayed in a tooltip or in the status bar at the bottom of the drawing window.

Verify that Wall Centerline is selected for Loc Line. You can click the temporary dimension value and modify it. and use the directional arrows on your keyboard to move them into position as shown above. 16 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Temporary dimensions are primarily sketching aids. as shown. 24 On the View toolbar. click Modify. Select the drawing tool. vertical wall of the rectangle. 23 Click the arrows once to set the exterior face of the wall on the inside of the rectangle.19 In the Options Bar. click . The selected wall is red.000 mm wide and 24.000 mm long. By clicking the arrows. . 21 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you can flip the wall orientation. and click to complete the rectangle. specify the following options: ■ ■ Specify Roof for Height. TIP From the Settings ➤ Temporary Dimensions menu. This is a temporary dimension. Click the arrows a second time to return the exterior face to the outside of the rectangle. you can control the default witness line location for temporary dimensions and save the settings to the project. make sure you sketch the rectangle just to the right of the west elevation symbol. Move the cursor down and to the right until the rectangle is 12. TIP If necessary. ■ 20 Sketch the rectangle by clicking the upper left corner to specify the rectangle starting point. Also notice the dimension that displays. and flip arrows display on the exterior face of the wall. 22 Select the left. select the four walls by dragging a selection box around them. Because the west wing is later mirrored to the right.

27 Click the temporary dimension value and reset the rectangle width to 12000 mm. 26 Drag the wall to the right as shown and release the mouse button when the width of the rectangle is approximately double the original size. Notice that temporary dimensions also display in 3D views. The blue dots at the base of the wall are drag handles that allow you to modify the length of the wall. You do not need to enter 12000 mm. For example. TIP When entering a value. In addition. notice the shape handles (arrows) on top and bottom of the wall. you can enter 12000 and press ENTER. you can use these handles to modify the height or depth of the wall.25 Select the 24000 mm wall on the right. Creating Your First Building Model | 17 . you do not need to type the metric suffix.

including the brick surface pattern displays. click the Model Graphics Style control. When a surface pattern becomes too dense. it is displayed as solid fill. Notice that the brick surface pattern becomes solid fill after you zoom to fit. Notice the wall remains selected. and click Hidden Line. 33 On the View Control Bar. enter ZF. 18 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .28 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area and. This is the shortcut key for Zoom to Fit. 32 On the keyboard. Notice the material settings. click Modify. 31 On the View Control Bar located at the bottom-left corner of the frame. and click Shading with Edges. as shown. 30 On the Design Bar. 29 Draw a region around the corner. click Zoom in Region. The brick surface pattern displays. click the Model Graphics Style control.

you should click Duplicate to create a new component type. if you changed the Top Offset of the wall.Create and apply new wall type 34 Select the 24000 mm wall on the right as shown. You can then make changes to the type parameters without inadvertently modifying the components of the original type. any changes made to the type parameters would be applied to all components of the same type. and then apply it to the remaining walls. which control all components of the same type. In the upper half of the dialog box. In the steps that follow. it has no effect on components that are not selected. you would click Edit/New to access the type parameters. You could then make changes to the wall structure as needed. modify it. which control the selected component or components. To accomplish this. you cannot modify them within this dialog box. only the wall that you selected would change. Although you can scroll through the list of type parameters. The lower half of the dialog box contains the instance parameters. For example. If you change an instance parameter. However. Creating Your First Building Model | 19 . The Element Properties dialog box displays the parameters of the selected component. 35 On the Options Bar. you create a new wall type. you can see the list of type parameters. click . if you wanted to modify the wall structure. If your intent is to modify only the structure of the selected component. you add horizontal sweeps of soldier course brick to the wall structure. For example.

Exterior . You can specify the sample height to any value you want. the original wall type must remain unchanged. 20 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . enter the new wall name.36 In the Element Properties dialog box. For training purposes. 41 In the lower left corner of the Edit Assembly dialog box. and click OK. click Edit. click Edit/New. click Preview. enter 13500 for Sample Height. under the Value column for Structure. The sample height is the height of the wall in the preview pane. Therefore. The sample height does not determine the height of any walls in the project. you must create a new wall type before altering the wall structure.Brick on CMU with Soldier Course. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box. 38 In the Name dialog box. 40 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. click Duplicate. but you should specify a value high enough to allow you to create the desired wall structure. 37 In the Type Properties dialog box.

■ ■ ■ ■ 46 Click OK.Notice that the vertical structure tools are inactive. under Name. and click OK. In the Materials dialog box. Enter -50. When you select a layer. the corresponding layer is highlighted in the preview area. 49 Under Layers. 42 Under the preview pane. Enter 4000 mm for Distance. select Masonry . This should be the interior finish layer. This is because the preview is displaying a plan view. 48 Draw a region around the soldier course.0 mm for Offset. click Sweeps. Make sure the offset is a negative number. click Add. for View. select layer 9. Verify that Exterior is selected for Side.Brick Soldier Course. 43 Under Modify Vertical Structure. 44 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box. Verify that Base is selected for From. Click inside the Material field. make the following modifications: ■ ■ Select M_Wall Sweep-Brick Soldier Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. 47 Right-click in the preview area and click Zoom in Region from the context menu. select Section: Modify type attributes. Creating Your First Building Model | 21 . Notice the vertical structure tools are now active. 45 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box.

58 Click Add. under Modify Vertical Structure. Enter -50 mm for Offset. 57 Click Apply. click Add. Add reveals 54 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. 55 In the Reveals dialog box. Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. 51 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box. Select Masonry . Verify that the Offset is zero. 56 Specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select M_Reveal-Brick Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. click Reveals. and click OK.Add a second sweep 50 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. 53 Click OK. Verify that Base is selected for From. Make sure it is a negative number. Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. Enter 4000 mm for Distance. Select Flip. modify the settings as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select M_Wall Sweep-Brick Soldier Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. click Sweeps. 52 For the second wall sweep.Brick Soldier Course for Material. Verify that Base is selected for From. click Add. 22 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Enter 8000 mm for Distance.

click OK. 63 In the Element Properties dialog box. Select Flip.59 Specify the parameters for the second reveal: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select M_Reveal-Brick Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. 60 Click OK. Verify that the Offset is zero. click Zoom  ➤ Zoom in Region and draw a zoom region around the corner that includes one of the sweeps and a reveal. Notice some of the line weights in this view are rather heavy. 65 On the View menu. Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. Verify that Base is selected for From. You can also use the thin lines tool to temporarily apply thin lines globally to all views. This can be affected by the view scale for this particular view. 62 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Modify. click . 61 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. click OK. Enter 8000 mm for Distance. 64 On the Design Bar. 66 On the View toolbar. Creating Your First Building Model | 23 . click OK.

the corners of the sweeps and reveals wrap automatically. 69 On the View toolbar.Notice thin lines are applied to all the linework in this view. 71 In the Type Selector. They do not have sweeps or reveals. name the file m_First_Project-in_progress. Adding the Interior Walls of the West Wing In this exercise.rvt. you add the interior walls of the west wing. press and hold the CTRL key while you select each component. When finished. 72 On the Design Bar. 67 On the View Control Bar. Adding the Interior Walls of the West Wing. Exterior . Notice that. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Shading with Edges. 68 Enter ZF. This indicates that thin lines will continue to be applied globally to the project. Also notice the button remains activated. 73 On the File menu. click . 70 Select the three walls that are still the original wall type. TIP To select multiple components. and click Save. click Modify. This turns off thin lines globally. 24 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . after the new wall type is applied. 74 Navigate to your preferred directory. choose Basic Wall: Exterior . the interior walls resemble the following illustration. click Save As. click the Model Graphics Style control. This is the shortcut key for Zoom to Fit.Brick on CMU.Brick on CMU with Soldier Course.

■ 5 Using the following illustration as a guide. Select the Line sketching tool. click Wall. Sketch the main corridor 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. under Views (all). m_First_Project-in_progress. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. place the cursor over the north wall.135mm Partition (2-hr). and click. select Basic Wall: Interior . specify the following: ■ ■ Verify that Level 2 is selected for Height. 6 Move the cursor down. under Floor Plans. and click when it intersects the centerline of the south exterior wall. 5000 mm from the centerline of the west exterior wall. Creating Your First Building Model | 25 .rvt. . 4 In the Options Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. Verify that Wall Centerline is selected for Loc Line.

■ Draw a pick box from the upper-left to lower-right that includes both interior walls in their entirety. TIP The temporary dimension snap values are dependent on your zoom settings. 10 Select both interior walls using one of the following three methods: ■ ■ Select one of the interior walls. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Click to specify the wall start point. and select the second interior wall. the snap values decrease. click Modify. If you zoom into the model. press and hold CTRL. 26 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Draw a crossing pick from the upper-right to the lower-left that crosses both interior walls. 8 Move the cursor down. and click when it intersects the centerline of the south exterior wall.7 Move the cursor over the north exterior wall and 2500 mm to the right of the wall you added in the previous step.

79mm Partition (1-hr). The temporary dimensions are displayed for both walls. 11 On the Options Bar. 12 Using the following illustration as a guide. specify the selection color. click the Graphics tab. Add remaining interior walls 14 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. they display as red. This places both interior walls 4750 mm from the centerline of the closest exterior wall. and enter 4750 mm. click a temporary dimension value. TIP You can change the selection color by modifying the system settings. 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Wall. and under Colors. as shown. select Basic Wall: Interior . click Activate Dimensions.After the walls are selected. This allows you to analyze their location in relationship to each other and modify the location of both walls at the same time. click Modify. 16 Add four horizontal interior walls stretching from the centerline of the left exterior wall to the centerline of the left wall of the corridor. Notice that temporary dimensions do not display automatically when multiple components are selected. 15 In the Type Selector. On the Settings menu. Each wall should be 4800 mm from the previous wall. select Options. Creating Your First Building Model | 27 .

Use the dimensions shown in the following illustration when adding the walls. modify temporary dimension values to obtain exact placement.17 Add five horizontal interior walls stretching from the centerline of the right wall of the corridor to the centerline of the right exterior wall. 18 Add the final four interior walls in each corner of the right side of the building model. Dimension lines have been added for training purposes. as shown. 28 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . If necessary. The dimension lines have been provided for training purposes.

there is no immediate and obvious indication of the split location. 23 In the drawing area. you can click on the View toolbar. click Modify. place the cursor over the intersection of the right wall of the corridor and the short horizontal wall that intersects it as shown. 20 Enter ZR. you can activate it by opening the Windows menu and clicking Toolbar  ➤ Tools. click the tool a second time to turn thin lines mode off. This is the shortcut key for Zoom in Region. a thin line appears at the tip of the cursor. This places the view in thin lines mode.Use split tool to modify walls 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the above illustration and callout. When you are finished splitting the walls. 22 On the Tools toolbar. After splitting the wall. This line represents where the underlying object is to be split. 25 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . click Modify. As you move the cursor over the wall. and you can now split walls and lines. TIP If the lines within the floor plan display too thick. 24 Click to split the wall. The cursor displays as a cutting tool. NOTE If the Tools toolbar is not available. notice the exact placement of the cursor and the location of the proposed wall split. 21 Sketch a zoom region around the upper-right quadrant of the building model. Creating Your First Building Model | 29 .

click . and delete the segment. click Modify. split the right corridor wall. 30 Enter ZF. zoom in to the bottom right corner of the building model. 28 Using the same techniques learned in previous steps. 29 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 30 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 27 On the Standard toolbar. This is the shortcut key for Zoom To Fit.26 Select the short wall segment that you split from the right wall of the corridor.

Creating Your First Building Model | 31 . click . click . 37 Press and hold SHIFT and spin the building model by dragging one of the corners in any direction. Zoom in as necessary. After the second split. . 35 On the View toolbar. select Delete Inner Segment. 32 On the Options Bar. This tool allow you to spin the model in any direction. Notice the interior walls that you added and split. click 36 On the View toolbar. 31 On the Tools toolbar. NOTE Arrows have been added at the location of the two splits.There are two remaining splits to make. 33 Using the following illustration as a guide. 34 Press ESC to end the Split command. split the right wall of the corridor at the intersection of the two center horizontal interior walls. the inner segment is deleted automatically.

Level 1 . In the final section of this exercise.Dimensioned and Annotated. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Create and rename copy of Level 1 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Options Bar. The dimension styles available in the Type Selector are dependent on the type of dimension selected on the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). click Rename. right-click Level 1. select Individual References.rvt. Add a dimension line between two walls 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. ■ ■ For Prefer. and components that require dimensioning. When geometry is selected for modification. options.38 On the File menu. select Wall centerlines. click Save. You begin by adding a simple dimension between two walls. When you duplicate a view. the dimension value is displayed at its true size and is not selectable for modification. and click Duplicate. Permanent dimensions can appear in two different states: modifiable and non-modifiable. right-click Copy of Level 1. A permanent dimension is considered modifiable when one or more of the components that it references is selected for modification. Dimensioning the Building Model In this exercise. Next. you add dimension lines to the building model. specify the following dimension parameters: ■ Click . You create a dimension by selecting the dimension type. both permanent dimensions and temporary dimensions display. 2 In the Project Browser. Dimensioning the Building Model. ready for modification. should be open.Dimensioned and Annotated. the dimension value displays in blue and can be modified directly by clicking the value. it opens automatically in the Project Browser. m_First_Project-in_progress. select Linear Dimension Style: Diagonal . enter Level 1 . In that case. you constrain the building model using equality and locking constraints. and in the context menu. 32 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . you add a multi-segmented dimension string to modify the witness lines. and click OK. If the geometry referenced by a permanent dimension is not selected for modification.2. click Dimension.5mm Arial. The floor plan. 3 In the Rename View dialog box. For Pick. This is the aligned dimension option.

Click in the empty space of the drawing area to place the dimension line. move the cursor over the left exterior wall as shown. click Modify. click to select it. 8 Move the cursor over the right exterior wall as shown. click to select it. When a dashed line is displayed on the wall centerline. 9 Move the cursor just above the north wall. 10 On the Design Bar. When a dashed line displays on the wall centerline. Creating Your First Building Model | 33 .7 In the drawing area.

Notice that the dimension line and value displays as red. 15 Select the vertical exterior wall on the left. 13 Place the cursor over the blue control in the center of the left witness line. change it to 4750. Notice that a temporary dimension also displays. This is one of the ways in which a permanent dimension differs from a temporary dimension.11 Enter the keyboard shortcut ZR for Zoom In Region. 17 Click the temporary dimension value. Controls display on the value. This means you can modify the value by clicking it. 14 Click the control once and the witness line moves to the interior face of the wall. Click the control a second time and the witness line moves to the exterior face. Information is displayed in a tooltip. or in the status bar of the drawing window. and press ENTER. change it to 15000. In its current state. These controls allow you to modify and constrain the dimension. and a blue padlock displays. and draw a zoom region around the north exterior wall and dimension line. the value is not available for modification. Click it a third time to return the witness line to the wall centerline. Notice that the dimension value is not blue. Notice the selected wall moved to the left. on each witness line. 34 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . the dimension value displays as modifiable. indicating that the control moves the witness line. Notice the dimension value turns blue. and press ENTER. When you select a component referenced by a dimension witness line. The control at the bottom of each witness line controls the gap between the end of the witness line and the component it references. This behavior is similar to the witness line control on temporary dimensions. 16 Click the permanent dimension value. 12 Select the dimension line.

move the cursor to the left. Creating Your First Building Model | 35 . 21 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Entire Walls. vertical. click Modify. 23 Select the left. Click the symbol to make the temporary dimension permanent. In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.18 Place the cursor over the dimension symbol located beneath the temporary dimension value. Click Options. click Dimension. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. and click to place the dimension as shown. Add a multi-segmented dimension 20 Using one of the zoom methods learned previously. exterior wall. For Pick. and click OK. select Intersecting Walls. zoom out until you can see the entire building model. select Wall centerlines.

Modify witness lines 25 Select the multi-segmented dimension you added in the previous steps. NOTE Make sure you right-click the blue control and not the dimension line. and click Delete Witness Line.24 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 36 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . right-click the blue control on the witness line second from the top. 26 Using the following illustration as a guide.

click Edit Witness Lines. 28 Select the centerline of the interior wall where you previously deleted the witness line. WARNING Do not right-click a witness line. and in the context menu.27 Right-click the dimension line. it provides a different set of options on the context menu. Creating Your First Building Model | 37 .

29 After selecting the wall. click in the empty space of the drawing area to complete the editing process. or press ESC on the keyboard. Create constraints 30 Select the second interior wall from the top to the left of the corridor. NOTE There are two alternative ways of ending the dimension edit process: You can click Modify on the Design Bar. 38 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .

31 Drag the wall downward until the distance between it and the wall below it is approximately 2400 mm. Creating Your First Building Model | 39 .Notice that the dimension values become modifiable on each side of the witness line that refers to the selected wall.

Lock symbols offer the opportunity to constrain the building model by locking a dimension value or an alignment. 35 Select the multi-segmented dimension. 40 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .32 Select the multi-segmented dimension line. 33 Click the lock on the 2400 mm segment of the dimension. You can turn the lock on and off by clicking the lock symbol. the other moves with it and maintains the locked dimension value. 34 Select the same wall you moved previously and drag it upward approximately 1200 mm as shown. The relationship between these components is constrained. Notice that the dimension value for the locked segment remains unchanged as you move the wall. 36 Click the lock symbol on the 2400 mm segment to remove the constraint between the two walls. This dimension does not need to be precise. Notice a lock displays for each segment. if you move one component.

Next. Adding Doors and Windows. Creating Your First Building Model | 41 . 40 In the Project Browser. Notice that each segment displays an equal value. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Level 1. 37 Click the equality constraint to activate it.Notice an EQ symbol displays with a slash through it. select Save. and click OK. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. This is an equality constraint that makes all dimension segments equal. select Value for Equality Display. In the final section of the exercise. 41 On the File menu. click . you use the Paste Aligned tool to copy the Level 1 windows to Levels 2 and 3. 39 In the Element Properties dialog box. Notice that each segment is now equally spaced and the dimension values display EQ. You then add windows and use the mirror and array tools to save time and ensure consistency. you add doors and windows to the building model. Adding Doors and Windows In this exercise. 38 On the Options Bar. under Other. You begin by adding single flush doors. you load multiple new door types and add them to the building model.

the door resides on a level line. doors snap automatically to the closest available level. This is the mechanical room. Do not click at this time. 42 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . You can offset the door from the level. In addition. Add single flush doors to the building model 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. m_First_Project-in_progress. 3 In the north side of the building model. This is most evident when you add a door in an elevation or 3D view. however. you can flip the door opening immediately after placing it. Doors are wall-hosted families and can only be added to a wall. place the cursor over the right corridor for the room shown in the following illustration. A door symbol displays when the cursor is over the wall. select M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm. Regardless of the initial placement. the initial opening is based on the wall face from which the cursor approaches. 4 Approach the same corridor wall from inside the room.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 2 In the Type Selector. click Door. When you add a door.rvt.

Creating Your First Building Model | 43 . use the flip controls to adjust the opening. 7 Click each control to familiarize yourself with how the door controls work. specify a value of 600 mm. Press the Spacebar a second time. Notice the blue controls that display. When you are finished. You can use this to flip from left to right hand opening.5 Press the Spacebar once to flip the door hand. 6 Click to add the door with the opening inside the room. and modify temporary dimensions as shown. 9 Add an additional door of the same type to the small room above door number 1 as shown. After you add door number 2. 8 Click the temporary dimension value between the door centerline and the lower horizontal wall. The precise dimensions are not important. and press ENTER. return the door to the position shown in the following illustration. These control the door opening direction and the hand of the door (left or right). Do not be concerned with exact placement.

and select M_Double-Glass 2. as shown. Notice that a preview image of the selected door displays in the upper right corner of the dialog box. to zoom to fit. ZF. 15 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 17 Press and hold CTRL. Flip the door. 16 Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Doors folder. 14 On the Options Bar. 12 Enter the keyboard shortcut. Load and apply new door types 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 44 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .rfa.10 Zoom in to the bottom right corner of the building model and add a door of the same type to the room as shown. click Door. and select M_Double-Flush. click Load. 11 On the Design Bar.rfa extension. and set the temporary dimensions.rfa. click Training Files. All Revit Building families have an .

18 Press and hold CTRL. 21 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. These door families are now available in the Type Selector drop-down list. Creating Your First Building Model | 45 . select M_Single-Flush Vision: 0864 x 2032mm. add a door to each of the five rooms to the left of the corridor. a preview image does not display. Each door should open into the room. TIP Zoom in and out as necessary. 20 In the Type Selector.rfa. and select M_Single-Flush Vision.You can load multiple families at the same time. 22 In the Type Selector. 19 Click Open to load all three door families into the project. select M_Single-Flush Vision: 0915 x 2134mm. as shown. The distance between the door centerline and nearest wall centerline should be 600mm. When more than one family is selected.

23 Zoom in around the upper-right corner of the building model and add doors 9 and 10 as shown. 26 In the Type Selector. 24 Zoom in around the lower-right corner of the building model and add doors 11 and 12 as shown. This is door number 13 in the following illustration. The arrow has been added for training purposes. 25 Add the final M_Single-Flush Vision: 0915 x 2134mm door in the center of the building model and to the right of the corridor as shown. 46 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . select M_Double-Flush: 1730 x 2134mm. 27 Add a door to the right exterior wall opposite of door number 1. This is door number 14 in the following illustration.

it would be easier if the visibility of the wall surface pattern was turned off. under Elevations. Creating Your First Building Model | 47 . Notice that the brick surface pattern displays as you zoom into this view. Although there is no technical reason you cannot add a door in this view. NOTE The display of a surface pattern is zoom dependent. zoom in until the brick pattern displays.Add a door in elevation view 28 In the Project Browser. If your view displays solid fill. 32 Expand the Walls category. and clear Surface Pattern. and scroll down to Walls. 30 On the View menu. under Views (all). double-click North. 31 Click the Model Categories tab. 29 Zoom around the building model and level heads. select Visibility/Graphics.

NOTE The temporary dimensions refer to interior walls. 35 In the Type Selector. Changes to Visibility/Graphics are applied only to the open view.33 Click OK. as shown. 34 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. it has two basic requirements: it must be hosted by a wall and it must be associated with a level. the wall surface pattern will remain visible in all other views. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. In this case. Notice that the double doors on the north wall display without a tag. When adding a door. and down to Level 1. click Door. You can apply an offset if required. 36 Move the cursor over the wall at Level 3. Notice the door snaps to each level. 37 Add a double-glass door centered on Level 1. Tag a door in plan view 38 In the Project Browser. select M_Double-Glass 2: 1830 x 2134mm. 48 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . then Level 2.

40 On the Options Bar. 45 Add the final door centered on the lower exterior wall. click Door. clear Leader. 41 On the upper exterior wall. 39 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. as shown. This should be door number 15. 44 In the Type Selector. 43 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. TIP For each component type.Components are tagged in the view in which they are placed. click the double doors to add a tag. Creating Your First Building Model | 49 . 42 Zoom in to the lower exterior wall. NOTE Because the default door tag was not designed to display in an elevation view. the Type Selector and Options Bar remember the last settings used for that component. click Tag. verify that M_Double-Glass 2: 1830 x 2134mm is selected. a tag did not display when you added the door in the North elevation view.

52 Zoom in on the upper exterior wall. click Window. 53 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. select M_Andersen 400 C35: C35. Add windows to the building model 51 In the Project Browser. just like doors. 47 On the View toolbar. the window displays at the cursor. 54 In the Type Selector. click Modify. . you can flip the window after placement. under Floor Plans. 50 On the File menu. The window exterior is placed on the wall face closest to the cursor. As you move the cursor over a wall. Windows are wall-hosted components. 50 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Like doors. click 48 On the View toolbar. click .46 On the Design Bar. click Save. 49 Spin the model. and notice the doors you added.

59 Zoom around the window. the window is using a type tag that displays the window type number rather than the window mark. In the family editor. click the temporary dimension value and specify the correct distance.You can add windows in plan. click to place it as shown. materials. click Modify. 66 Add two C35 windows to the right of the exterior double door. 57 On the Design Bar. If you want to modify a window in a specific way but an instance or type parameter is not available to accomplish the task. go to Help. 63 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. When you add a window in a plan view. the designer creates the instance and type parameters that control geometry. Creating Your First Building Model | 51 . The designer can also create a window with few modifiable parameters. 55 Move the cursor over the exterior face of the left side of the upper exterior wall. The list of parameters can vary depending on the window family design. the default head or sill height is used to set the initial height of the window. You can load and assign tags that display the specific information you need in the format you prefer. 58 On the View toolbar. you can edit the family in place or open the window in the family editor. elevation. There should be a 1950 mm distance between the centerlines of the two windows. and reload it into the project. as shown. For more information on creating and loading annotation tags. 65 Zoom out so you can see the right side of the upper exterior wall. click Cancel. and visibility. 56 When the window displays at the tip of the cursor. Notice the list of instance parameters available for modification. 62 In the Element Properties dialog box. 64 Add a window to the right of the existing window as shown. and select it. In this project. 61 On the Options Bar. and 3D views. IMPORTANT  If necessary. click . click . modify it. 60 Make sure the distance between the window centerline and the left wall centerline is 1400 mm. click Window.

click . The copy option is selected by default. 72 Place the cursor over the middle of the exterior face of the right exterior wall.67 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. indicating that the midpoint of that component is ready to be selected. A tooltip is displayed. and make sure Copy is selected. and select the three remaining windows. click Mirror. 74 Move the cursor to the left. When you mirror a component or components. you can pick or draw the mirror axis. 71 On the Options Bar. 52 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . press and hold CTRL. You also have the option to mirror a copy rather than the selected component(s). click to select it. Mirror the windows 68 Zoom out until the building model fits within the view. click Modify. 73 When the triangular midpoint symbol displays on the exterior face of the wall. and click to set the mirror axis. the selected windows are to be mirrored across a horizontal axis residing on the midpoint of the east exterior wall. 70 On the Edit menu. 69 Select one of the windows on the upper exterior wall. In this case.

click Window. at the dimensions shown. 77 Add two windows to the left exterior wall. You tag the windows later in the exercise. 76 On the Design Bar. Notice that the mirrored windows are not tagged. Add and array windows 75 Zoom in to the room in the upper left corner of the building model.The windows are mirrored immediately after you specify the mirror axis. Creating Your First Building Model | 53 .

80 Select the two windows that you just added on the left exterior wall. Because all of the rooms on this side of the building model are equally spaced. Creating an array is a three-step process. Rather than manually add the rest of the windows on the left exterior wall. 82 On the Options Bar. click Array. and click to set the array start point. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that is selected for a linear array. 79 Zoom out in the upper left corner so you can see the two rooms with doors 4 and 5. 83 Move the cursor over the intersection of the left exterior wall and the intersecting interior wall shown below. you can use the array tool to finish the job. Select Constrain. For Move To. Clear Group And Associate. Enter 5 for Number. select 2nd.78 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 81 On the Edit menu. 54 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . You first click a point to specify the array start point. You then move the array to the second or last location. and click to set the array end point. it is an ideal situation to use an array.

86 On the bottom-right side of the building model. Add remaining level 1 window 85 On the Design Bar. add the final window to the right exterior wall and centered in the second room from the bottom. Notice the arrayed windows are not tagged. undo the step and try again. NOTE It is extremely important to make sure the new array is centered between the walls of the next room.84 Move the cursor down until the arrayed window group is centered in the room below the starting point. and click the similar intersection shown below to set the array end point. as shown. Because the rooms on the left side of the building model are of equal size. click Window. Creating Your First Building Model | 55 . If you make a mistake placing the array. any misplacement has a multiplier effect as the array continues down the wall.

you can use the paste-align tool to accomplish the same goal significantly faster. Paste align windows to Levels 2 and 3 91 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and notice the windows you added. 56 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 92 In the 3D Drawing area.87 If you are still using Thin Lines mode. drag a selection box around the entire building model. 90 Spin the model. click 89 On the View toolbar. Rather than use the same methods to add similar windows to levels 2 and 3. click Modify. on the View toolbar. turn it off by clicking 88 On the View toolbar. click . .

Don’t be concerned with precise placement or spacing between the windows and doors. Creating Your First Building Model | 57 . This is because the changes you made to the Visibility/Graphics of the North elevation view were applied only to that view. 104 On the Design Bar. 101 On the Options Bar. notice that windows need to be added above the double doors on the north and south walls. clear Tag on Placement. double-click North. Notice that when you add a window in elevation view. select Level 3. click Modify. 98 On the Design Bar. click Window. 105 Add C35 windows to the center of Levels 2 and 3 as you did in the previous steps. the window snaps to the default sill height which displays as a green dashed line. clear walls and doors from the selection. The spacing can be manipulated using some of the dimensioning tools you learned earlier. under Elevations. In this view. 103 In the Project Browser. under Elevations.This selects every component in the building model. click . click Window. The spacing will be modified in a later dataset. This leaves only the windows selected within the 3D view. 102 Add a C35 window in the center of Level 2 and Level 3 as shown below. 96 On the Edit menu. press and hold CTRL. notice the wall surface pattern displays. select Level 2. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. 99 In the Project Browser. 97 In the Select Levels dialog box. double-click South. and click OK. 95 On the Edit menu. 93 On the Options Bar. 100 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. After the windows are added to Level 2 and Level 3. 94 In the Filter dialog box. click Copy to Clipboard. and click OK. such as equality constraints.

roofs. you begin by adding a floor slab Level 1. m_First_Project-in_progress. click . Like walls.106 In the Project Browser. the respective layers interact according to the functional assignment within the Edit Assembly dialog box. Adding Floors and Floor Openings In this exercise. You add a more complex floor type to levels 2 and 3. under Floor Plans. click Tag All Not Tagged. select Window Tags. . double-click Level 1. you can select walls to define the border of the component. you add floors and floor openings to the building model. or ceiling. When sketching these components. In this exercise. and click OK. and ceilings are examples of sketched components. Notice that all the windows in the view are tagged. Adding Floors and Floor Openings. click 2 On the View toolbar. click Save. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. and all require their borders to be sketched. When walls intersect a floor. 58 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . You can also select or draw lines. Floors. Add a floor slab to Level 1 1 On the View toolbar. 107 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. 3 Spin the model and observe that floors are needed throughout the building model. 109 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box.rvt. 110 On the File menu. You also add elevators and plumbing components to the building model. 108 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. each of these components can have a compound structure. 111 Proceed to the next exercise. where three openings are required for the stairs and elevators. roof.

You are in sketch mode. you must either finish or quit in order to access other design modes. 14 On the View toolbar. click the flip arrows to flip the line. under Floor Plans. 12 Select Concrete . 7 On the Options Bar. Sketch. In addition. A magenta line displays with flip arrows. click Floor. the building model becomes unavailable for modification until you finish the floor sketch. verify that Pick Walls is selected. click Floor Properties. The Design Bar now has only one tab. You can click the flip arrows to move the floor boundary to either the interior or exterior face of a wall.300mm for Type. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. When in sketch mode. click Finish Sketch. 6 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 59 . 9 If the magenta line is not on the exterior face of the north exterior wall. clear Extend into wall (to core). click . Notice the floor on Level 1 that extends to the exterior face of the walls. 8 Click the upper exterior wall.4 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. 10 Select the three remaining exterior walls. and click OK. 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

60 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 18 Place the cursor over the upper exterior wall and. 19 Zoom in to the upper exterior wall. Notice the location of the magenta line.Add a floor to Level 2 15 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2. 17 On the Options Bar. the interior walls on Level 1 display as an underlay. click to select it. click Floor. verify that Extend into wall (to core) is selected. press TAB. The windows are not tagged because you did not add them within this view. when it highlights under the cursor. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In this view. When the chain of walls highlights. You can use TAB to select a chain of walls or lines at any time.

Add elevators and bathroom components 30 In the Project Browser. you paste-align the level 1 interior walls and components to level 2 before adding the level 3 floor. double-click Level 1. The line chain flips to each face of the core rather than the interior and exterior wall face. 26 Click Yes to join geometry and cut out the overlapping volume. select M_Elevator Center: 2032mm x 1295mm. A message displays asking if you want to join geometry and cut the overlapping volume out of the walls. After you add these components. 21 Use the flip arrows to place the magenta line on the exterior face of the core. the walls remain attached. Next. 29 Spin the model and observe the new floor on Level 2. and click to place it. under Floor Plans. A message displays asking if you want the walls that go up to this floor to attach to it. The interior walls of the building model are displayed in red. click . click 28 On the View toolbar. . To do this. These elevators are wall-hosted components. This occurs because the structural layers of the floor must cut through the interior finish layer of the wall in order to extend to the wall core. Attaching the walls ensures that if you change the floor elevation. Creating Your First Building Model | 61 . 25 Click Yes to attach the wall tops to the floor. 32 In the Type Selector. move the elevator into position. 23 Select Beam and Block 200mm for Type. 27 On the View toolbar. 22 On the Design Bar.20 Click the flip arrows. 33 Add two elevators in the center room on the right side of the building model. indicating that they are not attached to the floor. click Floor Properties. and click OK. you add elevators and plumbing components on Level 1. 24 Click Finish Sketch. click Component. as shown. 31 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. position the cursor on the wall.

34 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 35 Zoom in to the upper right corner of the building model. click Modify. 62 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 37 In the Type Selector. 36 On the Design Bar. and specify the dimension 1150 mm as shown above.TIP After adding the elevators. select M_Pedestal Sink-3D: Pedestal Sink. as shown. select each one. 38 Add the sink to the center of the room. toggle the temporary dimension witness line to the interior face of the adjacent wall. click Component.

43 Move the cursor 90 degrees to the left and click to set the rotation end point. Listening dimensions react to cursor movements and keyboard entries. click Modify. The component will rotate to the value. the second click specifies the rotation end point. when rotating the component. enter 90 on the keyboard and press Enter. click Rotate. In this case. you can type the wall length and press Enter rather than setting the wall end point. 41 On the Edit menu.39 On the Design Bar. when you sketch a wall. Creating Your First Building Model | 63 . Rotating an object requires two clicks. 40 Select the sink. TIP Although you can manually rotate the component. For example. 42 Place the cursor directly above the sink and click to set the rotation start point as shown. establish the direction of the rotation. The first click specifies the rotation start point. an angular value displays that responds to keyboard entries. When rotating. you can use the listening dimension to accurately rotate the component.

select M_Toilet-Commercial-Wall-3D: 480mm Seat Height.44 Drag the sink until it snaps to the center of the left wall face. 48 Use the same procedure to add a toilet and sink in the similar room at the lower right corner of the building model. 45 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 64 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . as shown. 46 In the Type Selector. click Component. 47 Add the toilet on the right wall.

(Do not include the exterior walls in the selection. Paste align interior walls 49 In an empty space within the drawing area. 50 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. doors. 56 Select Level 2.Before adding the final floor.) This captures all the internal walls. Depending on the exact placement of the windows you added in the north and south elevation views. and click OK. the interior walls. and click Zoom To Fit. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. you must add the openings for the stairwells and the elevators. 54 On the Edit menu. elevators. click . click Copy to Clipboard. and components. and plumbing fixtures can be paste aligned to Levels 2 and 3. 53 In the Filter dialog box. a message might be displayed stating that the new walls conflict with an existing insert. Creating Your First Building Model | 65 . doors. 51 Draw a crossing pick box beginning inside the upper-right corner of the building model and extending to the inside of the lower-left corner. In addition. click Modify. right-click. 55 On the Edit menu. 52 On the Options Bar. and click OK. clear Door Tags.

or ceiling in which you want the opening. zoom in to the upper exterior wall and notice that the center window conflicts with the left wall of the corridor. The message disappears once you click in the drawing area. roof. Therefore. 59 Correct the problem by moving the window away from the corridor wall. When you add a model opening. 60 Check the lower exterior wall for the same problem and correct it. 61 On the View toolbar. Ignore the warning and proceed with the next step. For more information regarding the warning. 63 Spin the model so you can see the interior walls and components on level 2. click .These conflict warnings alert you to problems in your layout. it is most likely because the center window intersects the corridor wall on Levels 2 and 3. . you add floor openings to accommodate the elevators and stairs. you can continue working and the warning dialog box closes automatically. double-click Level 2. 58 If you received the conflict message. You can drag the window or use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the window to a location that does not conflict with the interior wall. you can click the controls on the side of the dialog box. In the steps that follow. if necessary. 66 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . you are prompted to select the floor. it is often a good idea to create a view that makes the selection process more precise. 57 In the Project Browser. If you received this error. under Floor Plans. click 62 On the View toolbar. If you know the source of the problem.

Create a section view 64 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. and click Zoom To Fit. Adding a section is a two-click process. Creating Your First Building Model | 67 . click Section. drag the clip planes of the view so that you capture only the building model and set the depth just past the bathroom wall. 68 Click the section line. you can flip the view direction and modify the extents of the view. under Floor Plans. 69 Click the flip arrows to change the direction of the view towards the interior. move the cursor down and click just below the south exterior wall. 67 Place the cursor over the upper right corner of the building model. After you add the section. 66 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click to set the start point. as shown. The first click specifies the section head. 70 Using the shape handles. 65 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area. and the second click specifies the section tail.

click Opening.71 On the Design Bar. Similarly. 68 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Modify. Create a floor opening 73 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 74 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. 72 Double-click the section head. This view offers easy accessibility to all floors as well as the stairwells on the left and right. select it. select Pick a roof. 75 Place the cursor over the level 2 floor and. the referenced view opens. just as the level heads do in an elevation view. when it highlights. the section heads are linked directly to the view so when you double-click the section head. floor. or ceiling and cut vertically. and click OK. The section head is displayed in blue.

76 In the Go to View dialog box. select Floor Plan: Level 2. When locked. 77 Zoom around the stairwell in the lower right corner. click Lines. the Go to View dialog box displays and offers you a selection of views to choose from. Notice the locking constraints that display. Creating Your First Building Model | 69 . these constraints ensure that the opening adapts to any changes in the associated walls. 78 On the Design Bar. 80 Draw a rectangle that snaps to the interior wall faces of the stairwell as shown below. 81 Click each of the four padlocks to lock them. the sketch lines have been enhanced for training purposes. and click Open View. In the following illustration. select the rectangle drawing tool.Because you must be in a view parallel to the screen in order to edit a sketch. 79 On the Options Bar.

82 On the Design Bar. The modification of the opening is done for you in a dataset used later in this tutorial. 87 In the Go to View dialog box. or ceiling and cut vertically. 83 In the Project Browser. click Opening.NOTE Although the opening could account for the stair landings at this point. 92 Click Finish Sketch. and click Open View. 70 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . select it. 91 Draw a rectangle that snaps to the interior wall faces of the stairwell and lock the lines as shown. 90 On the Options Bar. 86 Place the cursor over the level 2 floor and when it highlights. 85 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. Add a second opening 84 On the Design Bar. it is often easier to add the stairs first and then modify the opening precisely to the location of the stairs. select Floor Plan: Level 2. floor. 88 Zoom to the stairwell in the upper right corner. click Lines. double-click Section 1. select Pick a roof. select the rectangle drawing tool. click Finish Sketch. under Sections (Building Section). 89 On the Design Bar. and click OK.

99 On the Design Bar. and click Open View. . you paste align these openings rather than sketch them again. select Pick a roof. double-click Section 1. 101 Draw a rectangle that snaps to the interior wall faces of the elevator shaft and lock the lines as shown. and click OK. select Floor Plan: Level 2. You have completed the three openings required for this level. under Sections (Building Section). 97 In the Go to View dialog box. or ceiling and cut vertically. 95 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. 94 On the Design Bar. when it highlights. select the rectangle drawing tool. 105 Spin the model so that you can see the vertical penetrations on level 2. 103 On the View toolbar. click Lines. 96 Place the cursor over the level 2 floor and. Creating Your First Building Model | 71 . click . After adding a floor to Level 3. 98 Zoom in to the elevators. floor. select it.Add an opening for the elevators 93 In the Project Browser. 102 Click Finish Sketch. click 104 On the View toolbar. click Opening. 100 On the Options Bar.

double-click Section 1. click to select it. The floor type you assigned to Level 2 is used for Level 3. Make sure you do not select Floors. clear everything except Floors (Floor opening cut). 118 On the Edit menu. and click OK. when the wall highlights under the cursor. 110 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls and. under Floor Plans. 108 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. verify that Extend into wall (to core) is selected. and. and click Zoom To Fit. 111 On the Design Bar. when the chain of walls highlights. 107 Right-click. 109 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). 120 Select Level 3 and click OK. Copy floor openings to Level 3 114 In the Project Browser. 112 Click Yes to attach the walls to the bottom of the floor. click Finish Sketch. 72 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 113 Click Yes to join geometry and cut volume. 115 Draw a pick box around Level 2 so that you capture the three openings you created previously.Add a floor to Level 3 106 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Building Sections). click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. click Floor. 117 In the Filter dialog box. press TAB. click Copy to Clipboard. double-click Level 3. click . 119 On the Edit menu. 116 On the Options Bar.

124 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click Zoom To Fit. Do not include the exterior walls. Paste-align components to Level 3 122 In the Project Browser. The vertical penetrations extend through Levels 2 and 3. click . under Views (all). 125 Draw a crossing pick box beginning just inside the upper right corner and extending to the lower left corner. Creating Your First Building Model | 73 . double-click Level 2. click Modify. 123 Right-click. under Floor Plans. and components to Level 3. The only remaining task in this exercise is to paste-align the Level 2 interior walls. doors.121 On the View toolbar.

hold the SHIFT key down and select the component. click Copy to Clipboard. you add a gable roof and ceiling to the west wing of the building model. this removes it from the selection set. NOTE If you receive a warning that a conflict exists with an insert. 126 On the Options Bar. and click OK. hold the CTRL key down and select it. 132 On the File menu. 130 Select Level 3 and click OK. 128 On the Edit menu. 131 On the View toolbar. clear Floors and Floors (Floor opening cut). 74 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Adding a Roof and Ceiling. click OK and go to the Level 3 floor plan. If you accidently select a component that does not belong in the selection set. 129 On the Edit menu. Adding a Roof and Ceiling In this exercise. click Save. click . click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name.TIP If you miss a component. click . Reposition one or both of the windows that may be intersecting the corridor wall. 133 Proceed to the next exercise. 127 In the Filter dialog box.

Both are sketched components and require you to define the border of the component. 3 On the Design Bar. If the sketch lines are on the interior side of the exterior walls.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 7 On the Options Bar. and verify that Overhang is 600 mm. under Floor Plans. 5 Select the left exterior wall so that the sketch line is left of the wall. click Pick Walls. 8 Select the upper exterior wall and the lower exterior wall. clear Defines slope. select Defines slope. Verify that Extend to wall core is clear. Add a gable roof to the building model 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. click Roof  ➤ Roof by Footprint. Creating a footprint roof is very similar to creating a floor. 6 Select the right exterior wall so that the sketch line is right of the wall. 4 On the Options Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 75 . under Views (all). 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click the flip arrows to move the lines outside of the exterior walls. double-click Roof. m_First_Project-in_progress.

12 On the View toolbar. 16 Press TAB to preselect the chain of exterior walls.9 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar.Timber for Type. click Finish Roof. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 14 Spin and zoom the building model until it resembles the following illustration. click Roof Properties. click 13 On the View toolbar. Notice the exterior walls are not connected to the roof. . 76 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . and click OK. click . select Warm Roof . 15 Move the cursor over the gable end wall until it is preselected.

Modify the roof 22 Select the roof. select Attach. Notice the drag handle on the roof ridge. Creating Your First Building Model | 77 . 18 On the Options Bar. for Top/Base. 23 Drag the roof ridge control upward to a point where the pitch is approximately doubled. 21 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 20 Select the roof. The exterior walls attach to the roof. for Attach Wall. 19 On the Options Bar. select Top.17 Click to select the entire chain of exterior walls. The exterior wall chain displays as solid red.

There are two methods to create a ceiling: ■ Using Auto Ceiling. 30 In the upper-left corner of the building model. you will use the auto ceiling method. double-click Level 3. you select a ceiling type from the Type Selector. 78 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Add a ceiling to Level 3 27 In the Project Browser. click Modify. This returns the roof to its original position. Notice the exterior walls adjust to the new roof pitch. the ceiling is normally outside the view range and is not visible after you add it. under Views (all). you can sketch the perimeter of a ceiling using the same pick and draw techniques learned when you added the floors and roof. Using the sketch method. select Compound Ceiling: 600 x 600mm grid. 28 On the Modeling tab of the Design Bar. click Undo Move. click inside the room to add a ceiling as shown. click Ceiling. 29 In the Type Selector.24 Release the drag handle at the new position. ■ In this case. TIP Although you can add a ceiling in a floor plan view. and then click inside highlighted rooms to add a ceiling. 25 On the Design Bar. 26 On the Edit menu. under Ceiling Plans.

select Compound Ceiling: 600 x 1200mm grid. as shown.31 Add a ceiling of the same type in the remaining rooms on the left side of the corridor and in both bathrooms. Creating Your First Building Model | 79 . 32 In the Type Selector. 33 Click within the main corridor and each stairwell to add a ceiling in each.

click Save. click Modify. under Constraints. Rather than repetitively creating the same stairs on each level and in each stairwell. and click OK. you begin by creating a set of stairs from Level 1 to Level 2. double-click the section head. 42 Proceed to the next exercise.34 In the Type Selector. 35 Add a ceiling to the three remaining rooms on the right side of the corridor. you modify the original stairwell to be a multistory stair and mirror a copy to the other stairwell. and select Shading with Edges. and from the context menu. click Properties. 36 On the Design Bar. enter 3900 mm for Height Offset From Level. 37 In the drawing area. 38 On the View Control Bar. 40 In the Element Properties dialog box. Adding Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. click the Model Graphics Style control. select Compound Ceiling: Plain. Adding Multi-Level Stairs. 41 On the File menu. 80 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 39 Right-click the ceiling over the elevator shaft on Level 3.

under Floor Plans. you create a set of U-shaped stairs similar to those in the following illustration. and use the temporary dimensions to specify the values shown in the following image. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell in the lower right corner of the building model. m_First_Project-in_progress.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt. Creating Your First Building Model | 81 . 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. In the steps that follow. double-click Level 1. In order to sketch the stairs accurately. 4 In the Type Selector. 5 Add the three lines as shown. Add stairs between Level 1 and 2 1 In the Project Browser. you first add temporary model lines that provide an underlay to trace over. the permanent dimension lines have been added as a training aid and the section line has been hidden temporarily. In the image below. under Views (all). select Wide Lines.

and then clicking the top endpoint of the same line. you sketch the stair run and trace the run over the two vertical lines. By default. The dimensions have been predetermined. 8 Sketch the second half of the run by clicking on the top endpoint of the left vertical line.NOTE It is important to dimension the lines to the interior face of the walls. and then specify the value. 7 Sketch the first half of the run by clicking on the bottom endpoint of the right vertical line. click Stairs. the Run tool is active. In the steps that follow. 82 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . You are in sketch mode. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Click on the temporary dimension witness line control until it moves to the interior face of the wall. for example: 550 mm. and then clicking the bottom endpoint of the same line. not to the centerline.

click Railings Type.The stair run is complete. and click OK. 10 In the Railings Type dialog box. select 900mm Pipe. click Finish Sketch. Creating Your First Building Model | 83 . 11 On the Design Bar. Specify railing type 9 On the Design Bar.

Notice that the model lines still display. and select Hide Object. 84 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . This makes the model lines more apparent. 13 On the View Control Bar. 12 Select the stairs. 14 Select the three model lines. click the Hide/Isolate control. and select Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. click the Hide/Isolate control. 16 On the View Control Bar. 15 Delete the three model lines.

click Modify. Use TAB or zoom in. click . under Views (all). Modify stairs 18 Select the stairs. 19 On the Options Bar. under Constraints. double-click Section 1. Creating Your First Building Model | 85 . under Sections (Building Section). 21 On the Design Bar. IMPORTANT Be careful not to select the railings.17 In the Project Browser. select Level 3 for Multistory Top Level. and click OK. as needed. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box.

NOTE At this time. 26 Place the cursor over the center of bottom edge of the Level 1 floor. you could modify the floor openings to accommodate the stair landings. When the midpoint symbol and tooltip displays. 27 Move the cursor upward and perpendicular to the floor. Do not select the railings. and select Copy. This is done in the next exercise using a new dataset. and click to set the mirror axis endpoint. 23 On the Edit menu. as shown. Copy west stairs to east stairwell 22 Select the stairs created in the previous steps. 24 On the Options Bar. click to specify the start point of the mirror axis. The cursor now snaps only to midpoints. 25 Enter the keyboard shortcut. 86 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . SM. click . click Mirror.

click Modify. 29 On the View toolbar. 31 On the File menu. click Save. Creating the East Wing and Passageway In this exercise. You add a curtain wall passageway between the wings with a suspended walkway between each of the upper floors.28 On the Design Bar. click Close. a new dataset is supplied with the building model saved at this point. . you create the east wing of the building model by mirroring the west wing. click 30 On the File menu. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. It has been modified slightly for training purposes. Creating Your First Building Model | 87 . Creating the East Wing and Passageway. NOTE Beginning with the next exercise.

click Ref Plane. Mirror the west wing 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You use this plane later as the mirror axis.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Open. Stair railings on Level 3 were added. Floor openings were modified to create stair landings. 4 Draw a pick box around the entire building model. If necessary. The following modifications have been made: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wall inserts on the north and south walls were evenly spaced. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. NOTE It is important to capture every component within this building model. This dataset is essentially the same dataset you saved at the end of the last exercise.rvt file located in the Metric folder. 3 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon. Additional 3D views were added. 2 Draw a vertical reference plane 12000 mm from the exterior face of the right exterior wall as shown. expand 3D Views. 88 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . zoom out before making the selection. Open the m_First_Project-West_Wing. under Views (all). and double-click 3D Southwest Isometric.

5 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. 9 Select the vertical reference plane you added previously. IMPORTANT Components selected in one view remain selected when you switch views. Creating Your First Building Model | 89 .The entire model displays as selected. double-click Level 1. 7 On the Edit menu. click and verify that Copy is selected. click Mirror. 6 Press and hold CTRL. and select the section line to add it to the selection set.

double-click Level 1. 21 Sketch the two curtain walls between the wings. The new components are numbered sequentially. click . If necessary. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify on the Design Bar. click 15 On the View toolbar. click Wall. Notice that the new wing is a mirror image of the original. 14 On the View toolbar. 11 If necessary. 10 After the mirrored copy displays. select Roof for Height. 13 On the Edit menu. 19 In the Type Selector. 12 Select the reference plane. . click Delete. 16 Spin and zoom the building model until it resembles the following illustration. Add the passageway walls between wings 17 In the Project Browser. a progress bar displays on the status bar as the mirrored copy is generated. select Curtain Wall: Exterior Glazing. under Floor Plans. 20 On the Options Bar. zoom out to see both wings of the building model. In addition. click the flip arrows to ensure the exterior face of the curtain wall is facing the outside.After you specify the mirror axis. as shown. notice that a new section view exists in the Project Browser. 90 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .

as shown below. When splitting the wall. 25 Split the face of the exterior brick wall at the intersection with the curtain wall. click Split Walls and Lines. 26 Using the same technique. 23 On the Tools menu. click . split the same exterior wall at the intersection of the exterior face of the wall hosting door 13 as shown. Creating Your First Building Model | 91 . select Delete Inner Segment. zoom into the intersection and make sure you split the wall where it intersects the exterior face of the elevator shaft wall.Split and delete exterior wall faces of each wing 22 On the View toolbar. 24 On the Options Bar.

92 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . you can use the Align tool to clean up the intersection.27 Enter ZF to Zoom to Fit. TIP If the split does not line up perfectly with the intersecting wall. 29 On the Tools menu. 30 On the Options Bar. click Split Walls and Lines. verify that Delete Inner Segment is selected. 28 Zoom in to the intersection of the passageway and the exterior wall of the right wing. Notice the segment between the splits has been deleted.

31 Using the technique learned previously. 39 Select both curtain walls so that the floor offset is on the exterior side of each wall. click Modify. Arrows refer to each split location. click . split the face of the exterior brick wall at the similar intersections shown below. 38 On the Options Bar. and clear Extend into wall (to core). click Floor. to turn off thin lines mode. 35 In the Project Browser. Add a floor to the Level 1 passageway 36 Adjust your zoom settings until you can see the perimeter of the entire passageway. under Floor Plans. enter 150 for Offset. Creating Your First Building Model | 93 . double-click Level 1. click 34 On the View toolbar. 33 On the View toolbar. 37 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 32 On the Design Bar.

In the following illustration. the sketch line weight has been increased for training purposes. 42 Select the edge of the floor on both the west and east wings. and click OK. click Floor Properties. under Floor Plans. there are two general rules that must be applied: You must have a closed loop and there cannot be intersecting lines. 46 On the Design Bar. 51 On the Design Bar. Add walkway to Level 2 49 In the Project Browser. click and Lock. . 52 On the Options Bar. and then select the center of the top horizontal line. click Lines. double-click Level 2. dimensions have been added for training purposes.40 On the Design Bar. 50 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 45 Continue cleaning up the intersections using this method. click the rectangle drawing tool. 41 On the Options Bar. click Floor. 53 Sketch a rectangle with the vertical lines attached to the level 2 floor of each wing and each horizontal line 1500 mm from the inner face of the curtain wall. When sketching. notice the overlapping intersections that must be cleaned up before the sketch can be finished. click Trim/Extend. NOTE In the following image. 43 On the Tools menu. 48 Click Finish Sketch. 47 Select Concrete 300mm for Type. the sketch should be a single closed loop as shown. 94 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . The general rule is that you should click the section of the line that you wish to keep. When finished. click Lines. In this case. 44 Select the center of the left vertical line.

58 On the Design Bar.54 On the Design Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 95 . select 1100mm for Type. 55 Select Beam and Block 200mm for Type. If necessary. 63 On the Design Bar. 61 On the Options Bar. 65 On the Design Bar. 59 On the Options Bar. and specify an offset of 50 mm. and click OK. 56 Click Finish Sketch. you can use the SPACEBAR to toggle the offset. click and . TIP Make sure the line intersections do not overlap. and click OK. click Floor Properties. click Railing Properties. zoom in when selecting the walkway edge to make sure the offset is correct. 60 Select the line at the top edge of the walkway so that the sketch line is offset inside the walkway. TIP When sketching. click . 66 Select the railing. use the trim tool to make the sketch a single line. as shown. click Finish Sketch. 64 In the Element Properties dialog box. 62 Draw two short lines to close the gap between the walkway and where it intersects each wing. click Lines. If they do. click Railing. Add railings to Level 2 walkway 57 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

TIP Press and hold CTRL while making multiple selections. Add a new section view 71 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. For the next mouse click. 73 On the Design Bar.67 On the Edit menu. click Modify. continuous line. 72 Add a section view to the center of the passageway. 96 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 68 On the Options Bar. 75 In the section view. click and Copy. click Section. You could create another railing on the other side of the walkway. click Mirror. 69 Enter SM. 74 Double-click the section head you created in the previous step. only midpoints will be snapped to. and modify the direction and shape handles. it is faster to mirror it. move the cursor to the right. and click to set the mirror axis. It should be noted that the reason both railings weren’t sketched at the same time is because a railing sketch has to be a single. as shown. 70 Click at the midpoint of the walkway for the mirror axis start point. however. select both railings and the walkway on Level 2.

click Roof  ➤ Roof by Footprint. 84 Select each curtain wall so that the offset is outside the curtain wall as shown. 82 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 83 On the Options Bar. and click OK. adjust the view so you can see the entire passageway. zoom in until you can see the railings and walkways. and verify that Overhang is 600 mm. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. If necessary. 78 In the Select Levels dialog box. 77 On the Edit menu. click Copy to Clipboard. Add roof to passageway 80 In the Project Browser.76 On the Edit menu. The only remaining task is to add a roof to the passageway. Creating Your First Building Model | 97 . under Floor Plans. 79 On the View toolbar. 81 Using the zoom commands. double-click Roof. check Defines slope. select Level 3. click .

85 On the Design Bar. 86 On the Options Bar. Exact dimensions are not important. as shown. clear Defines slope. 90 On the Design Bar. click . click Lines. 89 Using the techniques you learned earlier. click the center of each roof line to clean up each corner. 98 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . as shown. click Trim/Extend. click Finish Roof. 87 Sketch two vertical lines that intersect the horizontal lines. 91 On the View toolbar. 88 On the Tools menu.

Notice that the passageway roof needs to be joined to each wing. Creating Your First Building Model | 99 . 93 On the Tools menu. you select the edge of the passageway roof. and click Hidden Line. The two roofs are joined. First. 94 Click the left edge of the passageway roof. it is easier to demonstrate the roof joins in hidden line mode. 95 Click the outer edge of the main roof. Joining a roof is a two-click procedure. For training purposes. click Join/Unjoin Roof. In this case. and then the outer edge of the corresponding wing roof. you click the edge of the roof that you want to join. click the Model Graphics Style control. you select the edge of the roof or wall that you want it joined to. Second. Join the roofs 92 On the View Control Bar.

and click Save. and change the filtering so each level has a unique door schedule. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt 100 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . you duplicate the schedule twice. Scheduling the Building Model. The initial schedule contains all doors in the building model. 101 On the File menu. and select Shading with Edges.rvt. 102 Navigate to your preferred directory. 97 Spin the model so that you have access to the unjoined end of the passageway roof and the east wing roof. First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. click the Model Graphics Style control. click Save As. 99 Join the passageway roof and the roof of the other wing using the same technique learned in the previous steps. you create and modify a door schedule. 98 On the Tools menu. name the file First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. Finally. you modify it to filter by level. rename each schedule. click . After creating the schedule. Scheduling the Building Model In this exercise.96 On the View toolbar. 103 Proceed to the next exercise. click Join/Unjoin Roof. 100 On the View Control Bar.

4 From the Available Fields list. 7 Click OK. select Doors for category. and click OK. Select Instance. Creating Your First Building Model | 101 . select Project parameter. Select Common for Discipline. add the following as scheduled fields: ■ ■ ■ Level Mark Cost Notice that there is not an available field for Hardware. 10 Move Cost below Hardware. 8 Under Scheduled fields (in order). 9 Move Hardware so that it is directly below Family and Type. select Mark and click Move up until it displays at the top of the list. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Under Parameter Data. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. TIP If the View tab is not visible. Select Text for Type. select Family and Type under Available Fields. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. TIP You can also double-click an available field to add it to the scheduled fields.Create a door schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add. You can add custom fields and make them either type or instance parameters. right-click on the Design Bar and click View. 5 Click Add Parameter. Select Other for Group parameter under. on the Fields tab. click Schedule/Quantities. enter Hardware for Name.

22 Under Field formatting. Modifications to the schedule appearance display only when the schedule is added to a sheet. 14 At the bottom of the tab. 17 Under Fields. Therefore. select Cost. 12 Select Level for Sort by. 15 Select Mark for Then by. You can hide this field because you are sorting and grouping by level.11 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. The door schedule displays. 25 Click OK. 21 Under Fields. select Header and select Footer. the column is redundant. select Calculate totals. 24 Select Bold for Header text. select Grand totals and select Itemize every instance. select the column grip between Door Type and Hardware and move the grip to the right until the door types display in their entirety. 16 Click the Formatting tab. 18 Enter Door Type for Heading. 23 Click the Appearance tab. and under Field Formatting. 20 Select Right for Alignment. 26 In the door schedule. select Level. On the schedule. select Family and Type. Door Type will display as the column heading rather than Family and Type. 102 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 13 Under Sort by. select Hidden field. 19 Under Fields.

29 Click in the Hardware field for door mark number 1. 34 Repeat the process to rename the remaining copies to Door Schedule-Level 2 and Door Schedule-Level 3. enter Brass. each door is allowed a different value. 35 In the Project Browser.TIP In this view. This is because for this door type. Cost is a type parameter. under Schedules/Quantities. expand Schedules/Quantities. each schedule still lists all the doors for each level. 36 In the Element Properties dialog box. Duplicate and filter door schedules 30 In the Project Browser. Because you created the hardware parameter as an instance parameter. You now have a separate schedule for each level. and click OK. right-click Door Schedule. However. and click OK. 32 In the Project Browser. any changes made to column size are not retained when the schedule is added to a sheet. and click Rename. 33 In the Rename View dialog box. 31 Repeat the previous step to create a second copy of the door schedule. 28 Click OK. specify Level equals Level 1 for Filter by. Creating Your First Building Model | 103 . enter 500. and click Duplicate. and press ENTER. and click Properties. A message displays indicating that this change must be applied to all elements of the same type. click Edit for the Filter value. enter Door Schedule-Level 1. Modify the schedule 27 Click in the Cost field for door mark number 1. right-click Door Schedule-Level 1. right-click Door Schedule. under Schedules/Quantities. and press ENTER. under Other. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog box.

specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ Select New. and then render a 3D view using that scene.38 In the Element Properties dialog box. 41 On the File menu. modify the settings. Notice that the information is now filtered for each level. click . 42 Proceed to the next exercise. Rendering the Building Model. you create an exterior scene. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog box.rvt. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you capture the image and save it within the project. Rendering the Building Model In this exercise. click OK. select Exterior. click Save. Filter each schedule by their respective level. 40 In the Project Browser. 4 Click OK. click Settings. Under Type. 104 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . After rendering. under Schedules/Quantities. 39 Repeat the previous four steps for Door Schedule Level 2 and Door Schedule Level 3. First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. Create the exterior scene 1 On the View toolbar. 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. double-click each door schedule. Enter Exterior Scene for Name.

select Solid Color. 13 Under Raytrace Settings.Specify scene settings 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. This is the background color for the scene. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. 15 On the View toolbar. Creating Your First Building Model | 105 . 18 Drag a box around the building model as shown. and select Blurry Reflections and Blurry Transparency. click Environment. 17 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. 16 Spin the building model until it resembles the following illustration. click the Bars tab. 10 Click OK. 8 In the Color Picker dialog box. select Good for Quality. click . the building model should resemble the following illustration. under Background Color. 14 Click OK. click Region Raytrace. A color bar displays. under Scene Settings. under Scene Settings. G. 6 In the Environment dialog box. and B settings. 7 Click the color bar. This is a white background color. 11 In the Environment dialog box. The raytrace process begins and a progress bar displays on the status bar. 9 Specify a value of 250 for the R. click OK. When the rendering process is complete.

20 On the Design Bar. On the second sheet. you add this to a sheet. You add a floor plan and schedule to the first sheet. Documenting the Building Model. Documenting the Building Model In this exercise. and double-click {3D}. In the next exercise. click Save. First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. 21 In the Project Browser. you add two sheets with titleblocks to the project. you add a rendered view and an elevation view. This is the captured rendering from the previous steps. expand Renderings. An expandable branch called Renderings is added to the Project Browser. 23 Proceed to the final exercise. 22 On the File menu.19 On the Design Bar. click Capture Rendering. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt 106 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Display Model.

enter your name. 9 Click Owner. 8 Select the titleblock and zoom in to the lower right corner. The creator of this titleblock family did not want this text to be modifiable in the project environment. 7 Try to select the logo in the upper right corner. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Titleblocks are a family just like any other component.Add a sheet and titleblock to the project 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The titleblocks that are listed are loaded into the project. and press ENTER. Creating Your First Building Model | 107 . 4 Double-click the Titleblocks folder. Notice that several titleblocks are installed with the software. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. The text is not selectable by design. click Metric Library. click OK to use the loaded titleblock. You can create a titleblock family and load it into the project or navigate to it from this dialog box. click Load. The blue text is text that you can modify. 5 Click Cancel. click Sheet. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. You are prompted to select a titleblock.

and click OK. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Add View. Add a view to the titleblock 12 Zoom out until you can see the entire sheet. the next sheet and titleblock will be A102. Titleblock numbering is sequential and automatic. 15 Move the cursor to the center of the titleblock and click. 11 Enter First Building Model for Project Name. 14 In the Views dialog box. 108 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . If you add views of different scales.10 On the Settings menu. In this case. click Project Information. select Floor Plan: Level 1. Notice that your name is displayed for Client Name. the label displays As Indicated. and click Add View to Sheet. The Scale is blank and is filled in when a view is added to the titleblock. referring the reader to the view titles.

Creating Your First Building Model | 109 . and click OK. 23 Select the view. Relocate the view title 22 Drag the view title under the view. click Deactivate View. 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. click Activate View. clear Elevations. The titleblock becomes an underlay and the view becomes active. 20 Under Visibility. You can work on the building model within this view. 18 On the View menu. you activated the view specifically to turn off the elevation symbol visibility. 25 Drag the view to the lower left corner of the titleblock as shown. click Visibility/Graphics.16 On the Design Bar. 24 Adjust the view title length by dragging the shape handles under the extents of the view. Notice the elevation symbols display. and on the context menu. Notice drag handles display on the ends of the view title. and on the context menu. 17 Right-click the view. However. click Modify. 21 Right-click the view.

under Schedules/Quantities. Notice that the scale value has updated. 28 In the Project Browser.26 Zoom in to the lower right corner. drag Door Schedule-Level 1 onto the upper right corner of the titleblock. 27 Zoom out until the titleblock fits within the drawing area. 110 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .

29 Zoom in to the top of the schedule. 30 Using the column drag handles. adjust each column width so no text wrapping occurs. Creating Your First Building Model | 111 . 31 Zoom out and move the schedule into the upper right corner of the titleblock.

If you click this. the Scale label displays As Indicated. If necessary. 34 In the Project Browser. under Renderings. You can adjust the lengths of each section after the break. click Save. under Elevations (Building Elevations). Add various views to a second sheet 32 On the View tab of the Design Bar.TIP When the schedule is selected. 33 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. click Close. 36 On the File menu. modify the location and width of the view titles. drag {3D} to the upper right corner of the new titleblock. click Sheet. drag North to the lower left corner of sheet A102. the schedule breaks in half. You have completed your first building model. Because these two views have different view scales. 112 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 37 On the File menu. 35 In the Project Browser. click OK to use the default titleblock. notice the z symbol in the center edge.

In the first lesson. 113 . you learn how to modify your Autodesk Revit Building working environment. you modify project settings to control the appearance of the components and subcomponents within that project. which is independent of the project settings. and set it as your default template. you create an office template. In the second lesson.Modifying Project and System Settings 3 In this tutorial. you modify the system environment. Finally.

19 On the Design Bar. 3 In the Options dialog box. they are not saved to project or template files. 2 On the Settings menu. 11 In the Options dialog box. click Options. and your username when using worksets.rte in the Metric folder. 14 Click the General tab. click Options. 6 In the New Project dialog box. the elements causing the error display using this color. Set graphics settings 1 On the File menu. select Invert background color. 9 In the New Project dialog box. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Building working environment. click Wall. and select the wall. 114 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 15 Under Notifications. 12 Under Colors. 13 In the Color dialog box. and click OK. Select None for Tooltip Assistance. you learn how to control the system settings within Revit Building. 18 Sketch a simple straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. under Template file. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs. click Browse. notification preferences. click Training Files. 10 On the Settings menu. click OK. selection default options. 4 Under Colors. click the Graphics tab. click Modify. click New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Building project. click Close to close all open projects. and click Open. click the Graphics tab. Modifying General System Options In this exercise.Modifying System Settings In this lesson. 17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. These settings control the graphics. select yellow. 8 Select m_Tutorial_Default. click the value for Selection Color. 16 Click OK. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. journal cleanup options. specify the following options: ■ ■ Select One hour for Save Reminder interval. and click OK. 5 On the File menu. Notice that the drawing area is black.

These settings control location of important Revit Building files such as your default project template. Under Journal File Cleanup. click Modify. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). as well as the material and rendering libraries.Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Building sessions. 23 On the File menu. Specifying File Locations. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. clear Invert background color. 31 Click OK. do not save the changes. 30 Click the General tab and make the following changes: ■ ■ ■ Under Notifications. click No. the family template files. 27 Open the m_Settings. click Open. Your login name displays by default. click the Training Files icon. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. 21 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. the family libraries. 25 On the File menu. click Close. 22 Place the cursor over any of the icons on the toolbars. select your preferred Save Reminder interval. These files are used primarily in the software support process. Select Red for Selection Color.rvt file located in the Metric folder. 29 In the Options dialog box. click Close. 20 On the Design Bar. Under Username. 24 When prompted to save. If prompted. This setting controls only the tooltips that display within the drawing area. Modifying System Settings | 115 . click Options. click the Graphics tab and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Graphics. 26 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. 28 On the Settings menu. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. and select Normal for Tooltip Assistance. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Building session. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. Journals can be run in order to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. you specify your default file locations. 32 On the File menu. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. Notice that a tooltip is displayed even though you set Tooltip Assistance to None.

click . 4 Click Cancel. On the File menu. In the following illustration. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. notice the list of library names. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Building Open. and click the arrow that displays on the right side of the field. click Options. TIP To view a template. click Browse. 7 In the Options dialog box. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog box. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. When you are opening. 3 Under Default template file. You can modify the existing library names and path. saving. and click OK. such as in a large. 6 In the Browse for Folder dialog box. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog box. under Default path for family template files. 11 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog box. you can start a new project with that template. Load. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. This path is set automatically during the installation process. 2 In the Options dialog box. centralized. click the File Locations tab. click Browse. under Libraries. and you can create new libraries. 116 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Notice that there are industry-specific templates that you can set as your default template. select the folder to save your files to by default. click Browse. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. 8 Click Cancel. However. 5 Under Default path for user files. Each library path points Revit Building to a folder of families or training files. 10 Under Libraries. 12 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. Save. and change the name to My Library. or loading a Revit Building file. choose New  ➤ Project. and Import dialog boxes. and click Browse to select a template.Set file locations 1 On the Settings menu.

16 On the File menu. This path specifies the location of the AccuRender® texture library. view the current path. 18 Click Cancel. 24 Under AccuRender resource location. click My Library. If you work in a large office. or families. 21 Under Libraries.13 Navigate to C:\My Documents or any other folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Building projects. click the My Library icon. Notice that Revit Building navigates directly to the library path. select My Library. 14 Under Library Name. The library icons display in the order that they are listed in the Options dialog box. 17 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Specify rendering settings 23 Click the Rendering tab. 25 Click OK. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 20 Click the File Locations tab. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Building Open. templates. and click OK. This path is determined during installation. click Options. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. you may want to set up an office library on a network path in order to increase productivity and maintain office standards. and select it as the library path. and click OK. If you want to relocate this path. click Open. specify the new location here. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Building. Modifying System Settings | 117 . Save. Specifying Spelling Options. 19 On the Settings menu. and Import dialog boxes. 15 Click until My Library is at the top of the list. Load. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. 22 Click to delete the library.

click Edit. Modify snap increments 1 On the File menu. 22 In the text editor. 14 Click in the drawing area. 9 In the text editor. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click Exit. 19 In the Options dialog box. If prompted. This resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. click Options. In this exercise. click New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Building project. 5 In the text editor. 5 In the New Project dialog box. you modify snap increments. 17 Click OK. click Exit. and click Open. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click OK. click Restore Defaults. click Save. 23 On the File menu of the text editor. click OK. scroll down the list of building industry terms. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. delete sheetmtl-CU.rte in the Metric folder. click Modify. click Options. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. Modifying Snap Settings. 24 In the Options dialog box. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. 2 In the Options dialog box. 6 On the File menu. click Edit. 20 Under Settings. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. click Spelling. enter sheetmtl-Cu. click the Spelling tab. 4 Under Personal dictionary. You can turn snap settings on and off. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. you modify snap settings. under Template file. 2 In the New Project dialog box. 3 Under Settings. 118 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. work with snapping turned off. click Close. 16 On the Tools menu. 4 Select m_Tutorial_Default. click Training Files. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. click the Spelling tab. click Browse. 8 Under Building industry dictionary.Modify spelling settings 1 On the Settings menu. 12 On the Standard toolbar. 11 In the Options dialog box. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. 18 On the Settings menu. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. click Edit. Notice that there is also a building industry dictionary. click OK. 25 On the File menu. 21 Under Personal dictionary. and then click File  ➤ Exit. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. click Save. 7 On the File menu. click Text. 10 On the File menu. do not save the changes. click to open a new Revit Building project using the default template.

As you zoom in and out within a view. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. 9 In the Snaps dialog box. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. If it does not. These are shortcut keys that you can use at any time when working on the design. TIP To zoom while in the act of sketching. For example. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. 7 Under Dimension Snaps. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. If you do not have a wheel button. This is the increment that you added previously. click Wall. snapping reverts to the system default settings.6 On the Settings menu.. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. use the wheel button on your mouse. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. click Snaps. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. click OK. Modifying System Settings | 119 . You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. and move the cursor to the right. A listening dimension refers specifically to the dimension that appears while in the act of sketching. 10 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. This dimension reacts to the movement of your cursor and numerical keyboard entries. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys such as ZO to zoom out. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. notice the two-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. While sketching. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the context menu. enter SM and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. Revit Building uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. zoom out until it does so. 8 Under Object Snaps. and enter 500 . click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000.

and specify the wall endpoint. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. Do not set the wall end point. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. 22 On the Settings menu. you create a new material and apply it to a model component. and move the cursor to the right. 25 On the File menu. When you apply a material to a component. and the wall edges. annotations. lines. click Close. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. fill patterns. and do not save the file. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. click Snaps. you modify the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. Notice that snapping is once again active. 21 Move the cursor downward. and use it to complete the exercises. 120 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 24 Click OK. it defines the appearance of that component in shaded and rendered views. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. the midpoint. Using these options. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. If you move the cursor along the wall.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. You create and modify materials. and delete the value 500 . save the project file with a unique name. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint.. it will snap to the endpoints. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. and object styles. Modifying Project Settings. and click Wall. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 18 Enter SM. click Modify. Finally. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu.

3 Click Duplicate. click Materials. and select Masonry . 4 In the New Material dialog box.rvt located in the Metric folder. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model component in this project. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. you render a region to observe the changes. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. This creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. click Open. However. When a model component is loaded into a project. this material provides a good foundation for the new material. and click OK. all materials that are part of that component family are also loaded into the project. Notice that there is no Surface Pattern applied to this material. click the Training Files icon. In the steps that follow. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. nor is there an AccuRender texture applied. Create a new material 1 On the Settings menu. Masonry-Fieldstone. Open m_Settings.Fieldstone.Stone for Name. Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog box. enter Masonry . This list includes all materials required by loaded model components. 2 Scroll down. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view.In the steps that follow. Modifying Project Settings | 121 .

All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. expand Floor Plans. 28 In the Type Selector. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. 11 Under Offset. and click Edit. 23 On the right side of the Material field. 19 Click Duplicate.Modify material settings 5 Under AccuRender. 21 In the Value field for Structure. 122 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . The AccuRender texture Masonry . and click OK. and select Stone82. 8 In the Material Editor dialog box.75 for X and Y. click This is the material you created previously. 15 Click OK. click New  ➤ Use Current Material as Template. select Masonry .Fieldstone is now part of your AccuRender User library. and click OK. 7 In the Material Library dialog box. 24 In the Materials dialog box. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . enter Masonry . 27 Press CTRL. 25 Click OK three times. click Edit/New. click the Maps tab. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . click OK. 9 Select the entry under Image Mapping. expand Views (all). click to select a texture. and click OK. enter 0. and select the remaining two unchanged walls. select user from the list of libraries. 26 Select the right exterior wall. 10 In the Image Mapping dialog box. . and double-click Level 1. click OK.Fieldstone for the name. 13 In the Save Material As dialog box. Before closing the Materials dialog box. and click OK.Fieldstone for Name. In the next exercise. The upper wall now uses the Fieldstone on CMU AccuRender texture when you render it. click the Orientation tab. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. Apply the new material 16 In the Project Browser. you help prevent the appearance of repetitive patterns within the rendering.Fieldstone material. on the Material menu. 6 Navigate to BMCD2AR3\Bitmap Textures\Stone\. and click . 17 Select the upper exterior wall. 14 In the Material Library dialog box. 22 Click in the Material field for layer #1. notice that the Surface Pattern is still blank. By offsetting the X and Y values of the image map. 20 Enter the new wall name.Brick. 12 In the Material Editor dialog box. click Edit. Fieldstone on CMU.

This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. 31 In the drawing area. 30 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. click Display Model. In the exercise. Controlling Object Styles. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. and drag a rectangle around the area you want to render. Notice the roof did not render. In the following exercise. Modifying Project Settings | 123 . select Region Raytrace. 33 On the File menu. This is because a material has not been applied to the roof. and click Rendering. the fieldstone material that you created is displayed.rvt. TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. click . drag a rectangle around the 3D image.29 On the View Toolbar. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns. click Display Model on the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. right-click the Design Bar. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. you apply a material to default roofs and resolve this. click Save As. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. Zoom into the model. 34 Navigate to a folder of your preference. click Region Raytrace. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. When finished. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns. After you draw the rectangle around the 3D model. 32 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. the rendering process begins.

your training files can be found on C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\Revit Building\Training. and double-click East. 7 Under Custom.56 for Import scale. The location of these files can vary depending on the path you set during installation. 5 Click New. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. 12 Click OK. choose Model. and click OK. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. such as steel. Apply the fieldstone pattern 13 Select the east exterior wall. Drafting pattern density is fixed. m_Settings-in progress. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. The new model pattern is available in the Name list in the Fill Patterns dialog box. and enter . Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. expand Elevations. 2 On the Settings menu. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. 9 Select Fieldstone_Model. click Import. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. and click Open. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 11 Enter Fieldstone for Name.There are two types of fill patterns: model and drafting. 3 Under Pattern Type. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.rvt. 10 Under Custom. click Fill Patterns. 8 Navigate to the training folders installed with your Revit Building software. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model.pat from the Common folder. 124 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. select fldstn. TIP Typically. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog box. click Custom.

Controlling Object Styles You can use Object Styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents.” You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog box and apply it to all window types. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options.Fieldstone. adjust your zoom settings as needed. under Pattern Type. TIP If the pattern does not display. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. 21 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. In the Materials dialog box.14 On the Options Bar. select Model. click . click in the Material field for layer #1. 18 On the right side of the Materials field. For example. 27 On the File menu.Fieldstone material. 26 On the View Toolbar. click Save. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. notice that there is no surface pattern applied to the Masonry . click Edit. there are often multiple window types within a project. Controlling Object Styles. The east wall of the building displays as solid fill. 22 In the Materials dialog box. click Modify. 16 In the Value field for Structure. click OK. click Edit/New. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. 23 Click OK three times. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . 24 On the Design Bar. Object Styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. and click OK. Modifying Project Settings | 125 . click . you can set the window frame material to “By Category. 25 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. Object Styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. click to select a fill pattern. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. 19 Under Surface Pattern. click . 20 In the Fill Patterns dialog box.

m_Settings-in progress. Apply object styles 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D Model View.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 2 On the keyboard.rvt. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region) and drag a rectangle around the three left windows facing you. 126 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . expand 3D Views. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.

click . 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Other. click By Category. click OK. click Edit/New. click OK. and select 15 In the Materials dialog box. under Other. 18 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. click OK. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. . 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click Shading with Edges. click the Trim Exterior Material value. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify. and select the circular window on the second level. click Model Graphics Style. 12 On the Options Bar. click the Trim Exterior value. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. click . and select 8 In the Materials dialog box. click By Category. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. 11 Zoom out. 5 On the Options Bar. . click OK. click Edit/New. Modifying Project Settings | 127 . 4 Select one of the windows.3 On the View Control Bar. Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray.

25 In the Object Styles dialog box. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles. select Trim . 128 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . specify Trim . . click OK. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. and click OK. and click in the Material field. m_Settings-in progress. 21 Under Category.19 On the Settings menu. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. 22 Under the Windows category. expand Windows. 27 Under Category. 23 On the right side of the Material field. 20 In the Object Styles dialog box. 24 In the Materials dialog box. Notice that the material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. expand Windows. Notice that the external window frames are now white. and click OK twice.White for Trim material. 26 On the Settings menu. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click 29 On the File menu. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. 28 On the View Toolbar.Granite for name. click Include categories from all disciplines in the list above. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. select Trim. click .rvt. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. click Object Styles. click Save. click Object Styles.

8 On the Settings menu. m_Settings-in progress. select Roofs. and select Roof Line for Line Pattern. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog box. 9 In the Object Styles dialog box. 2 On the Settings menu. or you can use Object Styles to apply the change to all views. and click Hidden Line.Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. enter Roof Line for Name. click Line Patterns. There are two ways to apply the line style to the roof. is open with the 3D view active. now you must apply it. You have created a new line pattern. You can use the Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. 7 On the View Control Bar. click Object Styles. 10 Select Red for Line Color. The line style is applied to the roof in all views.rvt. under Category. click Model Graphics Style. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog box. 11 Click OK. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. Modifying Project Settings | 129 . click New.

Create a new line style 23 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. and click Hidden Line. 15 In the Object Styles dialog box. 130 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Object Styles. 19 Click the Model Categories tab. and select Black for Line Color. 16 Select Solid for Line Pattern. 18 On the View menu. and click OK. 21 In the Select Line Style dialog box. under Category. click Line Styles. 22 Click OK twice. Select Roof Line for Line Pattern. and select Roofs for Visibility.12 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click New. Notice the site topography and the property lines. double-click Site. click Visibility/Graphics. select Override and specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ Select 5 for Line Weight. double-click 3D Model View. Select Blue for Line Color. select Roofs. 14 On the Settings menu. 17 Click OK. 13 On the View Control Bar. 25 In the Line Styles dialog box. This overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. 20 Click Override for Line Style Projection. under Modify Subcategories. 26 Enter Zoning Setback for Name. Notice that the line style displays in this view also. 24 On the Settings menu. click Model Graphics Style.

and clear Zoning Setback. Modifying Project Settings | 131 . 28 Click OK. The -3000mm offset displays inside the property lines. Select Double Dash 5/8" for Line Pattern. Modifying Annotations. click Visibility/Graphics.) Click . 33 On the View Toolbar. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. 36 Click OK. Select Red for Line Color. 37 In the Project Browser. ■ 32 Click the upper-left corner of the property line to begin the rectangle. (Make sure you specify a negative value. click . under Floor Plans. expand Lines. click Save. 35 On the Model Categories tab. move the cursor to the bottom-right corner of the property lines. click Visibility/Graphics. Modifying Annotations In this exercise. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type number. 30 In the Type Selector. and click to set the rectangle endpoint. 42 On the File menu. expand Lines. click . 29 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 31 In the Options Bar. Notice that the line style has not been applied to the roof in this view because you applied the override to the 3D Model View only. specify the following: ■ ■ Click . select Zoning Setback. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Select 2 for Line Weight Projection. 39 On the Model Categories tab. double-click Level 1 Annotated. Notice the Zoning Setback lines appear in this view.27 For the Zoning Setback category. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. click Lines. 38 On the View menu. Enter -3000 mm for Offset. and clear Zoning Setback. 34 On the View menu. 40 Click OK. 41 On the View Toolbar. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view.

is open with the 3D View active. 7 Click OK twice.rvt. 4 Enter the name Linear . In the Type Selector. scroll down to Windows. 17 Click Load. 5 Under Text. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. click Dimension. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.Imperial dimension available. click the default value for Units Format. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. click Annotations  ➤ Loaded Tags. click Modify. navigate to the Annotations/Architectural folder of the Metric Library. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type number. 14 Click Cancel.Number. 11 Select any window in the east or west wall. Select Feet and fractional inches for Units.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. In the steps that follow. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. m_Settings-in progress. under Floor Plans. and that the tag displays the window type number rather than the window instance number. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. notice that there is a Linear . 6 In the Format dialog box: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. 132 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Notice that the windows on the east and west walls are tagged. 2 On the Settings menu. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. m_Settings-in progress. double-click Level 1 Annotated. click .Imperial and click OK. Load a new window tag 10 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Tags dialog box. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Linear. 15 On the Settings menu. under Category. click Duplicate. You have created a new dimension style.rvt. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. 3 In the Type Properties dialog box. 18 In the Open dialog box. 12 On the Options Bar. and select M_Window Tag .

verify that Create is clear. click Tag. notice that the label displays 1i. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. select one of the window tags that displays the type value. 28 Under Leader. 30 In the Type Selector. Under Category. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. click the three left-most windows. In the final section. dimension values display using this setting. Temporary Dimensions. you modify the temporary dimension settings. Specifying Units of Measurement. click Save. notice Window Tags appears twice. Unless overridden. 32 On the View Toolbar. Specifying Units of Measurement. you modify the detail level assignments.Number is now the assigned tag. . and Detail Level Options. Modifying Project Settings | 133 .Number. In the second section. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.rvt. m_Settings-in progress. 29 On the east wall. 25 On the left side of the north wall. 21 Under Loaded Tags. click M_Window Tag . A window instance tag displays on each selected window. 19 Click Open. In the first section. 27 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. 26 On the Design Bar. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. you modify three settings that have a broad impact on the project. click Modify. the other displays the instance value.Number. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.Number as the assigned tag. Temporary Dimensions. you specify the project units of measurements.Number. 24 On the Options Bar. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. select M_Window Tag . M_Window Tag . 22 Click OK. click 33 On the File menu. clear Leader. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . and click OK.In the preview image. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. Leave M_Window Tag . 31 On the Design Bar. click Tag All Not Tagged. Notice that both window tag types can coexist within the same view. 20 In the Tags dialog box. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps.

In this table. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 On the Settings menu. select Openings. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. Unless overridden. under Length. click Open. You do not select a view scale to move it. click Close. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. 12 Click OK. under Area. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. click the default value for Format. 13 On the File menu. and click OK. and click OK. Modifying Project Browser Organization. select Faces. In this project.Set units of measurement 1 On the Settings menu. 14 On the File menu. Open c_Project_Browser. 9 Under Doors and Windows. select 0 decimal places for Rounding. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 4 In the Project Units dialog box. 6 Click OK. Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. and click OK. click the default value for Format.rvt from the Common folder. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. click . click the Training Files icon. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. expand Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Temporary Dimensions. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. click Project Units. In this exercise. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. and expand 3D Views. 5 In the Format dialog box. click Save. 8 Under Walls. 2 In the Project Units dialog box. select meters squared for Unit suffix. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog box. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. 3 In the Format dialog box. 134 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Detail Level. select To the nearest 100 for Rounding. Specify detail levels 10 On the Settings menu. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Floor Plans. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. dimensions use these project settings.

and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . select Discipline.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. Modifying Project Settings | 135 . 8 Select Phase. and click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog box. expand each sheet set. In the Project Browser. 14 In the Project Browser. and click OK.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . and notice that each is grouped by discipline. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. click Browser Organization. and click Apply. Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 On the Settings menu. 10 In the Project Browser. under Sheets. On the Project Browser. 7 On the Settings menu. 5 On the Views tab. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. 4 On the Settings menu. 2 In the Project Browser. expand each view type. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. and click OK. expand both the Architectural and Structural views. 13 Select Sheet Prefix.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . click Browser Organization. expand Sheets (all). 12 Click the Sheets tab.Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. click Browser Organization. select Type/Discipline. notice that Views are grouped based on Phase.

21 In the Project Browser. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. Creating an Office Template. A well designed template will ensure office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. click the Folders tab. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog box. 20 In the Browser Organization dialog box. When you create new projects. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. named print settings. and click OK. click Browser Organization. you create a Revit Building template file and set it as your default template. It is mostly conceptual and designed as a road map with options for your consideration. and click OK. The lesson begins with choosing the right base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you would consider in order to make a template unique to your situation. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. You can save Project Browser organization schemes. navigate to your preferred directory. If you want to save this file. you create an office template. Proceed to the next lesson.Create a new browser organization name 15 On the Settings menu. In the lesson that follows. expand Complete. This lesson is intended to provide you with a blueprint of how to create your office template. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. and click OK. click Close. 22 On the File menu. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. 136 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . dimensions styles. and click New. expand 3D Views. and expand both Architectural and Structural. and view names. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. enter a unique file name. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. You can also save these settings in a template file. 16 Click the Views tab. levels. and Discipline. In this lesson. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. under Views. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. Although Revit Building provides many templates to choose from. View Type (Family and Type). you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. and render scenes in a template.

7 On the View menu.Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. 3 Under Template File. 13 Select the default template. for instance. in the drawing area. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. a group of settings are used to specify the project environment. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. and click Open. are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. structural or construction. expand Views. If you have additional projects open. and double-click North. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. click New ➤ Project. drag a zoom region around the level heads. In order to maintain office standards and reduce rework. 8 In the Project Browser. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. 14 Click Open. Creating an Office Template | 137 . click New  ➤ Project. the same rules apply. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of the structural tools. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying Project Settings. 6 In the Project Browser. you can establish the settings that are common to most projects. you can select it now. Other templates. For example. click Browse. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. If you want to use a template other than the default.rte template. 2 In the New Project dialog box. click Zoom  ➤ Zoom in Region and. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. Whenever you create a new project or template. Review existing templates 1 On the File menu. When you create the material. such as the structural template. when you create a new project. 5 Click OK. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. When you create a new template based on an existing template. expand Elevations. click Close. 9 On the File menu. each is modified in a way to make it useful to the applicable industry. Other than the default template. close them. you select the starting point for your office template. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. Notice there are a number of different templates to choose from. 10 On the File menu. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. 11 Under Create New. and click OK. 12 Under Template File. In that case. you modify the project settings for your new template. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. For example. select Project for Create new. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. click Browse. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. select Project Template. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template.

6 Scroll through the list of model and drafting patterns. You can align. and materials for different categories and subcategories of components or imported objects. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. you can do so by going to the Material menu and selecting New. During this exercise. You may want to save the material to a library located on a network path. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. rotate. For more details on modifying these settings. weights. line patterns. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. Choose the appropriate option. You can do this by setting the AccuRender Texture. click Fill Patterns. click to access the AccuRender Material Library. Specify object styles 9 On the Settings menu. specific modifications are not dictated. see the previous lesson. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. click Object Styles. 7 Create new fill patterns as needed. TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. If you create or modify new materials. 138 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Create and modify fill patterns 5 On the Settings menu. Modifying System Settings or refer to the Help documentation. and create the AccuRender material. line colors. Create and modify materials 1 On the Settings menu. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. If there are materials that are commonly used within your office or industry. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. 2 Scroll down the Name list. RELATED See Modifying System Settings for more information on creating new AccuRender materials. be aware that access to the original material library may be necessary at some point. If there are custom AccuRender materials that you want to add to the template.In this exercise. When you save a new AccuRender material designed to be used in an office template. Observe the materials that are already defined. 4 Click OK twice to close the Material Library and Materials dialog boxes. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. you may want to specify their appearance when rendered. click Materials. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. 3 Under AccuRender. you can set line weights. and move model patterns. or modify existing patterns. RELATED See Modifying Project Settings for more information on creating new fill patterns. create and modify them as needed. In the Object Styles dialog box. 8 Click OK when finished.

27 Modify existing line weights as needed. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. 21 Click the Model Line Weights tab. such as section lines and dimension lines. create new line subcategories. line color. The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of modeling components. click Line Styles. there are three tabs: one for model component line styles. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of objects such as walls and windows in perspective views. 18 If necessary. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. Modify line weights 20 On the Settings menu. or line pattern as needed. 33 Click OK. select it. 15 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog box. and click Edit. 13 Click the Annotation Objects tab. You can add and delete view scales. such as walls and windows in orthographic views. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for six different drawing scales. Modify line patterns 29 On the Settings menu. 17 For existing line categories. 11 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. modify the line weight.TIP When the material of a component is set to by category. 32 Add and delete line patterns as needed. 23 Add and delete view scales as needed. 24 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. click Line Weights. and scroll through the list of categories. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. In the dialog box. 22 Modify existing line weights as needed. and create new subcategories as needed. 31 To modify a line pattern. 14 Modify categories. 19 Click OK. 28 Click OK. create new subcategories. 12 If necessary. 30 Scroll through the list of line patterns. 25 Modify existing line weights as needed. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. one for perspective model line styles. Creating an Office Template | 139 . Modify line styles 16 On the Settings menu. 10 Click the Model Objects tab. 26 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. and one for annotation symbol line styles. click Line Patterns.

37 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. 44 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. click Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. 43 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. tags. select it from this list. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. 36 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. 42 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Radial. and click OK. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. and choose a decimal symbol. Modify Dimension Styles 40 On the Settings menu. Linear. For example. 48 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. and specify the properties. select it from this list. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. 35 Select the Type drop-down list. click Project Units. In the Tags dialog box. 57 Click OK. 49 To load new annotation tags. click Duplicate. 50 After you have loaded the necessary tags. Volume. The tag assignments in this dialog box dictate the default tag for each category. Modify loaded tags 47 On the Settings menu. and dimensions. angular. 140 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . To see the details of a particular style. 56 Specify the Slope option. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. Specify project units 51 On the Settings menu. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Linear. and specify the properties. 53 Modify the unit settings if necessary. 46 Repeat the previous five steps for angular and radial dimensions. 38 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. The arrowheads configured within this dialog box can be applied to text notes. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog box. click Format. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. click Duplicate. 45 Click OK. On the Settings menu. To see the details of a particular style. name the style. and radial dimensions are modified separately. 52 Under Length. and Angle settings. 39 Click OK. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Angular. when you add a door with the tag option selected. 41 Select the Type drop-down list. 54 Click OK. ■ ■ On the Settings menu. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. click Load. click Annotations  ➤ Loaded Tags.Modify arrowheads 34 On the Settings menu. 55 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. name the style.

Specify detail levels 62 On the Settings menu. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. TIP In the drawing area. To move the view scales. click Temporary Dimensions. Medium. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog box. you may only want to add generically named settings that would be applicable to most projects. Rename. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. 72 Click OK. 59 Under Walls. click the Views tab. Rename. When you create a new view. 66 In the Browser Organization dialog box. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. 67 Delete. you can save rendered scene settings to a template. click Detail Level. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. 68 If necessary. 69 Click the Sheets tab. see Modifying Project Browser Organization. 63 Review the table. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. The detail level is based on view scale. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. Using the arrows between the columns.Specify temporary dimensions 58 On the Settings menu. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. or Edit existing organization types. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. For example. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. In a typical project. 60 Under Doors and Windows. Although these settings can be saved within a template. Modify project browser organization 65 On the Settings menu. Creating an Office Template | 141 . and move view scales as needed. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. create new browser organization types. create new browser organization types. 70 Delete. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. there are several additional commands that control the project environment. or Fine. click the arrows between columns. 64 Click OK. click Browser Organization. However. 61 Click OK. In such a case. 71 If necessary. Additional project settings 73 On the Settings menu. or Edit existing organization types. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command.

you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. and click OK.Each of these areas are covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. You can find additional information in Help. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. Phases Project Phasing Area Settings Area Analysis View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. you do both. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. If you have not completed the previous exercise. 3 To modify. modify. or modify a door. titleblocks. Use the instructions in the table below to load. However. you may want to delete. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. In the Element Properties dialog box. create. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog box. and click Open. create. Obviously. Use the table below as a checklist. For example. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views. If necessary. and the poche depth. This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. or load a new door type. See Modifying Render Scene Settings Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings Render Scene If necessary. and electrical fixtures. Depending on the intended use of this template. It is important to understand that you should not load every conceivable family into a template file. you can create scene settings and save them to the template. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. furniture. In addition. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. there are some important thoughts to consider. You can load any family or group into a template. notice the list of doors already loaded. or electrical fixtures. you can move onto the next component type. Links to associated tutorials are provided. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. Each command is available on the Settings menu. 74 Proceed to the next exercise. or add to this selection. you would have to scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you changed a window within a project. you can set the default contour line interval. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. See Modifying Views and View Templates. Although the options are endless. the section cut material. if you loaded every window type you could find. you should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. phase filters. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups. See Setting up Shared and Project Parameters. or use the Project Browser. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. and make modifications in each area as necessary. select from the Options Bar. 2 In the Type Selector. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. do so before starting this exercise. Select it. you can set up the phases. This could be useful for things such as hardware. click Door. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Modify door type 142 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Site Settings If necessary. select Edit/New. select Load. For example. you can create and modify area schemes if there are default settings applicable to most projects. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. If necessary. you could load detail components. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. Although this is possible. If necessary. Make modifications. If this selection is satisfactory. In the steps that follow.

4 Click OK. (The titleblock name may vary depending on the template you started with. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. Click Duplicate. 6 On the File menu. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. and click OK. Enter Name.) 9 Expand the titleblock.Goal: Create new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog box. Notice that there is a titleblock symbol loaded. Press ESC twice to return to the template. Use Project Browser to modify families 7 In the Project Browser. 8 Expand Annotation Symbols. Notice that each family category is listed. and select the titleblock type. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. select Edit/New. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. Creating an Office Template | 143 . and click OK. Modify type properties. expand Families. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load Group. click Load from Library.

see Creating a Titleblock Family. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. This titleblock is currently part of the template. 2 Select Architectural Plan for Name. In addition. 12 Click OK. In this exercise.10 On the Options Bar. and click Delete. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. Notice it has Revit Building in the upper-right corner. click View Templates. right-click the component. Create and modify view templates 1 On the Settings menu. In this exercise. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. Modifying Views and View Templates. . These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. In addition. click 11 Click <<Preview. you can apply a view template to any view. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. 144 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . At any time. you will first modify view templates. click Load. To load a titleblock. View Range. 13 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. RELATED For more information. Detail Level. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project/template. load. To do so. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. Discipline. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. you created new projects using different templates. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. You may want to load a titleblock applicable to your office and then delete this titleblock. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. create. you create the views required for your template.

under Floor Plans. In addition. and then click OK. 21 In the Project Browser. After applying the template. duplicate. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. 8 On the View menu. ceiling plans. and double-click Level 1. click Apply View Template. and apply the appropriate template. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the Name drop-down list. 18 If you modified any other view templates. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. double-click South. right-click Level 1. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. duplicate. and elevations. the view is not linked to the template in any way. 11 Click Apply. click Apply. 12 In the Project Browser. If necessary. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. click Apply View Template. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 16 On the View menu. Rename. under Elevations. in the context menu. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. select Make Plan View. This options means that every time a new plan view is created. double-click Site. click Level from the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. expand Floor Plans. and click OK. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. 22 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. review the floor plans. Notice the level names. You can also duplicate or delete the view. Creating an Office Template | 145 . 13 On the View menu. review the existing floor plans. the view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. or delete them as needed. 20 In the Project Browser. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. Black level heads have no associated views. Make sure you are still in the South Elevation view. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. 4 If necessary. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. and click OK. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. 6 Click OK. or delete this view. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. 24 In the Options Bar. 15 In the Project Browser. 27 Recreate additional levels as needed. 23 To add additional levels to the template. and. notice that you have the option to rename. open the view from the Project Browser. click Apply. expand Views. Upon the application of the view template.By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. click Apply View Template. under Floor Plans. you can rename this view according to your preference. Blue level heads have associated plan views. double-click Level 2. select Site Plan.

on the View toolbar. click Schedule/Quantities. Create and modify schedules 37 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. you may want to modify the view properties of any new views. expand 3D Views. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views  ➤ 3D Views. 32 To create additional 3D views. You can use this tool. On the Filter tab. assign filters. 41 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. modify settings as needed. modify settings as needed. 36 To save the view. 38 If you want to add schedules to your template. 31 Rename the 3D View. under 3D Views. on the View toolbar. On the Appearance tab. to orient and save the view. You are prompted to select a titleblock. click 29 In the Project Browser. modify settings as needed. and select Rename. click . supply a view name.Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. and click OK. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. You can add schedules to a template. go to the View menu. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. If you have already loaded your office titleblocks into the template. select one. select and order required fields. 34 Click the arrow on the right side of the Dynamic View dialog box. click 33 On the View toolbar. 35 You can use Orient to a Direction or Orient to a View to set the camera location and target. select the category type. Add sheets to the template 42 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click {3D}. Dynamically Modify View. and modify their properties accordingly. click . 39 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. On the Formatting tab. To do so. 146 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Sheet. This can save significant time and ensure office standards are maintained. and click OK. If necessary. and click View Properties. 40 Click OK. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. 30 In the Project Browser.

TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the titleblock. ■ Background Image: Lets you map images to your background. if not. 5 Specify the background color. 10 Under Plant Season. 44 To rename or renumber the sheet. and a Clouds tab appears. select the Clouds option. under Scene Settings. ■ Automatic Sky: Treats the background as a sky. place. Create and modify an exterior scene 1 On the Settings menu. You can still add views to the sheet. After the sheet is created. Clouds: Adds procedurally generated clouds to the background. jpeg. 3 Click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ You can also save and load environmental settings. 8 Under Scene Settings. 3 Color Gradient: Lets you vary the color between three selected colors. you could render basic scenes much faster and with greater consistency without the need to spend time modifying these settings. go to the View menu. or targa. and then click OK. tiff. choose the appropriate season for plant rendering. 2 Under Type. Modifying Render Scene Settings. exterior-default. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. Alpha Channel: Lets you use the image's alpha channel (embedded pixel-by-pixel masking information). 45 Create new sheets as needed. and provide a name for the scene. while in winter. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. Choose from bitmap. a deciduous tree in summer appears in full bloom with leaves. which is included on the Revit Building CD. ■ ■ ■ 6 Specify the Advanced features: TIP As you select options. Different seasons directly affect any AccuRender plants in the view. To do so. for example. the relevant tab appears. To later add a titleblock to a sheet. settings. you can install AccuRender by running the install program on the Revit Building CD. and changes the color automatically depending on the sun and sky conditions. 2 Color Gradient: Lets you vary the color between two selected colors. 7 Click OK. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. if one exists. Background images are available from the AccuRender software. TIP You can drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. and click OK. 43 Add views to the sheet by selecting Add View from the View tab of the Design Bar. it is completely bare. and click Rename. click Environment. 9 Specify the date and time. for example. Creating an Office Template | 147 . select Exterior. Modifying Render Scene Settings You can create interior and exterior scene settings and save them within the template. for example. click Render Scene. By adding a default interior and exterior rendered scene setting to the template. and colors. right-click the sheet in the Project Browser. and click New  ➤ Place Titleblock. select the titleblock and delete it. select the default titleblock. Haze: Simulates effects from slight “depth cues” to dense fog. click Sun. Solid Color: Specifies a single color that appears behind your rendering. Ground Plane: Adds an infinite plane to your rendering. Be sure that you have installed this software.

Shadows based on the size of the light source are calculated. Higher values cause longer rendering times. Setting the quality to Better or Best reduces meshing artifacts. but provides the highest quality. AccuRender always processes transparent faces. ■ 12 Specify the Radiosity Settings: ■ Select Quality: Click the Quality drop-down list to choose an option: Draft. click Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. the quality also is lower. click New. such as jaggy shadows or light leaks. Good. The number of bounces determines how many levels of reflections or transparencies are permitted. Higher values cause the color of reflected light to more closely approximate the color of the reflecting surface. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. but also increases the solution time. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. This setting is effective for region raytraces. When you import a DWG or DXF file. Select Blurry Reflections to affect the look of reflections in glass. This value is used both for the initial number of steps when you first use the Radiate command and for any subsequent calculation by clicking Continue from the Options Bar. Increasing the antialiasing level adds considerable rendering time.11 Specify Culling options: ■ Select Back Face Culling to eliminate rendering on model faces that do not face the camera eye. ■ Specify the Solution Goal: This limits the radiosity calculation to a certain number of steps. Radiosity quality affects the relative coarseness of the mesh and the amount of time to process the solution. 16 Repeat the steps you performed when creating an exterior scene. Meaningful values are between 0 and 1. Draft provides the lowest quality and fastest speed. Medium. Select Recalc Radiosity Lights to recalculate the shadows cast during the radiosity preprocess. when used in conjunction with high antialiasing and soft shadows it can produce very high quality renderings with fewer radiosity artifacts. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 On the File menu. ■ Select Soft Shadows to produce more realistic shadow edges.Default. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. Antialiasing is a process in which more than one ray is shot for each pixel in an attempt to better resolve the value of the pixel. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. Specify the Color Bleeding value: This controls the color saturation of reflected light. for example Interior . Better. These scenes are now part of the template and will provide users with two basic rendering scenes. This is a very time consuming operation but. ■ 13 Specify Raytrace Settings: ■ Select Quality: Click the Quality drop-down list to choose an antialiasing option: Draft. Select View Culling to eliminate rendering model faces that lie outside the area being raytraced. This works on opaque faces only. 15 Provide a name for the new interior scene. Back face culling decreases rendering time and space. Medium. Select Blurry Transparency to affect the look of material seen behind glass. Good. Best is the slowest. ■ Set values for Reflection and Transparency bounces. Better. and click OK. 148 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Best. Best. 17 Click OK when finished. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN. Modifying Import/Export Settings. however. ■ ■ ■ Create and modify an interior scene 14 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box.

specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Building line weight. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. select Save As. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. Revit Building presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. When you create a multi-category schedule. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. and so on. You can save these mappings to a text file. and click Save. and so on. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules.The Export Layers command maps Revit Building categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. name the file. Modify export layers for DGN 4 On the File menu. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. name the file. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. therefore. and click Save. These settings are retained within the project template. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. name the file. click Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. Modify import line weights 7 On the File menu. They cannot be shared with other projects. 9 Select Save As. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. 2 For each category. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. click Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. for example. you can define additional parameters that are not included in either the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. Project Parameters are those parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project.txt for MicroStation). If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. project parameters. windows. and click Save. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Building program installation directory. When scheduling. Multi-Category Tags employ Shared Parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer Name and Color ID Cut Layer Name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. For example.txt for AutoCAD or exportlayersdgn. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. Creating an Office Template | 149 . project parameters. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. see Scheduling Shared Parameters or Scheduling Project Parameters. 8 In the dialog box. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with Shared Parameters). The layer names are stored in a text file (either exportlayers. Using Shared Parameters. and they become the set mappings for the project. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. In this exercise. doors. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. you could use Shared Parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. Creating Named Print Settings. When you import a DWG or DXF file. TIP Color ID in the Export Layers dialog box corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. select Save As. and related multi-category tags and schedules. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. detailed instructions are not supplied since each office has a unique set of needs. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. 5 For each category.

18 Under Type. 28 Add shared project parameters as needed. click Add. After the file is named. 16 Under Name. 30 On the File menu. If this template will be used by multiple people within an office. 27 Click OK. 20 Select the element categories this parameter applies to. and click OK when finished.Set up shared parameters 1 On the File menu. 5 Enter the group name. or use the Help documentation for assistance. 3 Name and save the file. 14 Click Add. 2 Click Create. 25 Click OK. click Project Parameters. 24 Click Select. click New. and select Shared Parameter. After you have created the multi-category tags within the Family Editor. 10 Click OK. and click Open. select a parameter discipline type. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. click Shared Parameters. under Groups. select the tag. add required parameters. 19 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. and click OK. 8 Under Parameters. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. Create and load multi-category tags 29 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. you may want to save the file to a network location. enter a parameter name. 6 Create as many groups as needed. This allows you to name the external parameter file. 17 Under Discipline. 22 Add project parameters as needed. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. and specify the Type. 31 Navigate to the directory. 23 To add a shared project parameter. click New. you can create a list of parameters. 11 For each parameter group. select a group that you want to add parameters to. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. select a parameter value type. 7 Under Parameter group. click Load from Library  ➤ Load Family. and assign which categories this parameter applies to. you can load them into the template. 21 Click OK. and choose a shared parameter. If a file already exists. Set up project parameters 13 On the Settings menu. The tag is now part of the template. 26 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance or a type parameter. For information on creating multi-category tags. you can begin creating parameter groups. select Project parameter. 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. For each parameter group. 9 Name the Parameter. 150 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.

TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. 33 Select <Multi-Category> for Category. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. paper placement. you can select the printer for each set of named settings within the Print Setup dialog box. you should save it to a network path. 2 Under Name. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. click Setup. make minor modifications if necessary.rte). click Schedule/Quantities. 4 Click Save As. 36 When you have completed the schedule. you can set options such as sheet sizes. Depending on your office environment. you need only select a setting. 9 In the Print dialog box. 3 Under Settings. select Template Files (*. Creating Named Print Settings. 37 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. 11 Click OK when finished. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. click Print. 38 Proceed to the final exercise. For each printer. By going first to the Print command. 35 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. 7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. 6 Modify the printer settings. Create named print settings 1 On the File menu. save the file as a template. If you need to share this file with others. By creating named settings within the template. 14 Under Save as type. and the percent of actual size. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. Your template is complete. and create new settings for this printer. and make it your default template file. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. click Setup. The only remaining task is to save it. Creating Named Print Settings In this exercise. you create named print settings. 15 Name the template. select the first printer for which you want to create named settings. click OK. and create additional settings as needed. 34 Under Name. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. 5 In the New dialog box. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. click Save. enter a name for the schedule. click New. and click Save. Creating an Office Template | 151 .Create multi-category schedules 32 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select a different printer. and print. Save the template 12 On the File menu. and click OK.

By investing the time to individualize your template. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. 19 Click OK. go to the File menu. If you have a project. you could delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. you modified settings. select it. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. You can also set this template as your default template. loaded components. 18 Select the template. In this lesson. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. you ensure that office standards are maintained. In addition. and click Open. click Browse. 17 Select Browse. Set the template as your default template file 20 On the Settings menu. 152 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . This can provide a good starting point for a template. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. and saved them to a template. 24 Click OK. 23 Navigate to the template location.Use the template 16 To use the template. In addition. 21 Click the File Locations tab. click Options. 22 Next to Default template file. and click New  ➤ Project. and click Open.

You also learn how to change the surface pattern of a ceiling grid. and how to create a compound ceiling. you learn how to create automatic ceilings in Revit Building. You learn how to add ceilings by selecting room boundaries to automatically place the type of ceiling that you select. 153 . You can also create ceilings by sketching them. For more information. see the online Help.Ceilings 4 In this tutorial.

Creating Automatic Ceilings In this exercise. 3 In the Type Selector. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1. when the room boundary highlights. and then change the surface pattern of one of the ceiling grids. click Ceiling.rvt located in the Common folder. you learn how to add ceilings to an RCP view of a simple building model. you learn how to create ceilings with the AutoCeiling command. expand Ceiling Plans. You add four different types of ceilings.Creating Ceilings In this lesson. 4 Move your cursor into the upper center room and. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Open. You can create automatic ceilings in an RCP (reflected ceiling plan) view of the building model. After you add ceilings to the model. 154 | Chapter 4 Ceilings . Create automatic ceilings 1 In the Project Browser. Open c_Ceiling. select it. click the Training Files icon. The ceiling is displayed. You also learn how to create and add a compound ceiling to the building model. select Basic Ceiling : 600 x 1200mm grid. you can change the surface pattern of the ceiling grids.

under Materials and Finishes. 9 Select the 600 x 600mm ceiling grid located in the room on the left. NOTE You select one of the grids or the entire ceiling using the TAB key. click Duplicate. click Modify.Interior . select Finishes . and click OK. 7 Select the room on the left and the room on the right. select Basic Ceiling : 600 x 600mm grid. select it. 10 On the Options Bar. under Name.Wood Diagonal Strips 150mm. Change the ceiling grid surface pattern of room on the left 8 On the Design Bar. when the room boundary highlights. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. it displays in the Type Selector. and then click . click OK. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. When selected.5 Select the lower center room and. click Edit/New. click OK. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. Creating Ceilings | 155 . 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. 15 In the Materials dialog box. 6 In the Type Selector. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. click in the Material type parameter Value field. The new ceiling material is applied to the ceiling. 13 In the Name dialog box. click . enter Wood Diagonal Strips 150mm.

NOTE This common dataset is used in several imperial and metric datasets. and double-click First Floor. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Open. you change the project to Metric. click the Training Files icon. The original project units are imperial. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you learn how to create a compound ceiling. You create a new ceiling type. click Save As. Create a new ceiling type 1 In the Project Browser. In the steps that follow. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.18 If you want to save your changes. add layers of material to the ceiling type.rvt located in the Common folder. expand Views (all). on the File menu. and then add the ceiling to the building model. Close the exercise file without saving your changes. expand Ceiling Plans. Creating Compound Ceilings In this exercise. Open c_Condominium. 156 | Chapter 4 Ceilings .

and click OK. Creating Ceilings | 157 . select Finishes . 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. 8 On the Options Bar. click Insert twice to add two new layers. specify Millimeters for units. 14 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. enter 12 mm 16 Click OK. 17 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. select Compound Ceiling: Ceiling 1. under Thickness. click . enter 20 mm Layer 4: Core Boundary Layer 5: Structure [1]. click Ceiling. under Layers. click Preview to display the current layers. click Edit for the Structure type parameter value. 7 In the Type Selector. under Material. select Metal . click Project Units. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box.Furring. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 13 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. under Thickness. under Material. under Construction. click OK. enter Gypsum board on metal furring. 11 In the Name dialog box. click the format button for length. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. click OK. click Duplicate.Specify metric project units 2 On the Settings menu. under Material.Gypsum Wall Board. 4 In the Format dialog box. 5 In the Project Units dialog box. select Metal . 3 In the Project Units dialog box. click Edit/New. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box.Interior . click OK. 15 Define the five layers as follows and in the following order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Layer 1: Core Boundary Layer 2: Structure [1]. Add the compound ceiling 19 Move your cursor into the common area of the model and click to insert the Gypsum board on metal furring channels ceiling. enter 45 mm Layer 3: Structure [1]. under Thickness.Cold Rolled Channel.

Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and click Fine. TIP You can use the zoom commands to zoom into the ceiling. 21 On the View Control Bar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. expand Sections (Type 1). click the Detail Level control. click Save As. 22 The compound ceiling is visible in the section view of the first floor. 23 If you want to save your changes. You can also apply thin lines from the View menu. on the File menu. 158 | Chapter 4 Ceilings . and double-click Section 1.View the compound ceiling in a section view 20 In the Project Browser under Views (all).

roof. you create an opening for an existing dormer and cut two openings in the roof in order to visualize the difference between a perpendicular and a vertical cut. floor. you cut floor and ceiling openings that expose the stairs beneath them.Openings 5 You can cut openings through roofs. 159 . you have the option to cut perpendicularly through the face of a roof. In addition. floors. or ceiling. and you can create an opening in a roof specifically for a dormer. You can cut vertically through a selected floor. or ceiling. When creating a hosted opening. In the exercises that follow. or ceilings using the Opening command.

Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. you create an opening for an existing dormer and cut two openings in the roof in order to visualize the difference between a perpendicular and vertical cut. 160 | Chapter 5 Openings . View current dormer construction 1 In the current 3D View. This allows you to precisely define the borders of the opening. In this case. Cutting a Dormer Opening in a Roof In this exercise. the view range of a wireframe view was modified to display the entire dormer roof.Cutting Roof Openings In this lesson. and you should create a view where you can see the dormer geometry. you cut an opening in a roof with an existing dormer. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. the project must have an existing dormer. notice the existing dormer.rvt located in the Metric folder. To use the Opening tool to cut a dormer opening. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Open. click the Training Files icon.

right-click the Design Bar. The view range was modified so the cut plane captured the entire dormer. and double-click Attic View. and. expand 3D Views. under Views (all).2 In the Project Browser. and double-click Roof . The dormer windows are above the roof so they do not display. select Pick a roof to be cut by a dormer opening. This view has been set up specifically for the dormer. expand Views (all). WARNING Do not select the dormer roof. Select the main roof to be cut. click to select it. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. This is an interior 3D view. 3 In the Project Browser. Cutting Roof Openings | 161 . The display is wireframe so each dormer component can be seen and selected when defining the borders of the opening. expand Floor Plans. click Opening. and click Modelling. The camera is located in the attic and is pointing to the dormer interior. and click OK. Create the dormer opening 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. when the edges of the roof highlight. NOTE If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. Notice no opening exists in the roof for the dormer. 6 Move the cursor over the main roof.Dormer. You need to cut an opening in the roof to accommodate the dormer.

you define the boundary of the dormer opening. a side face of a wall. and. when it highlights. select it. an edge of the roof to be cut.Next. 7 Place the cursor over the dormer. or a model line on the face of the roof to be cut. 162 | Chapter 5 Openings . 8 Zoom in around the dormer. Valid boundaries are a joined roof or its bottom face. and select the exterior face of the three walls that define the dormer. Sketch lines display along the border between the dormer roof and the selected roof. a bottom face of a floor.

9 On the Design Bar. click Finish Boundary. double-click Attic View. 13 Zoom out to see the entire plan view. click Modify. Although the overlapping lines are not a problem.Notice the sketch lines overlap in places. and the horizontal line on the bottom dormer wall does not extend to the corners. 12 On the Design Bar. Cutting Roof Openings | 163 . The dormer opening in the roof is apparent. 10 Select the lower sketch line. 11 Drag each control to the corner until it intersects with the vertical sketch line on that side. 14 In the Project Browser. the gaps in the bottom sketch line need to be closed. and notice the drag controls on each end. under 3D Views.

Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Create a perpendicular opening 1 On the View toolbar.15 On the File menu. click . click the Training Files icon. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. NOTE If you want to save this file. click Close.rvt located in the Metric folder. 164 | Chapter 5 Openings . In the left pane of the Open dialog box. select Save As from the File menu. 2 Using the spin function. Creating a Perpendicular Roof Opening In this exercise. spin the model around so that you can see the side of the roof without the dormer. you create a roof opening that is perpendicular to the roof face. click Open.

floor. Cutting Roof Openings | 165 . 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. or ceiling and cut perpendicular to face. and click OK. click Modify. The opening on the right is cut vertically. 7 On the Options Bar. In the following illustration. click Opening. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. right-click the Design Bar. 8 Sketch a rectangle in the center of the roof. and.3 On the Design Bar. select Pick a face of a roof. click . when it highlights. the opening on the left is cut perpendicular to the face. which is the side of the roof without a dormer. and click Modelling. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select it. 6 Move the cursor over the exterior face of the main roof.

click Finish Sketch. 10 Place the cursor over the edge of the opening. 166 | Chapter 5 Openings . and. select it.9 On the Design Bar. when it highlights.

Create a vertically cut opening 1 On the View toolbar. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. change the shape. 2 Using the spin function. 11 On the Options Bar. . dimension it. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.rvt located in the Metric folder. click . and constrain it like any other element. NOTE If you want to save this file. select Save As from the File menu. and click Finish Sketch. you create a roof opening that is cut vertically through the roof. Cutting Roof Openings | 167 . click 12 On the File menu. Creating a Vertical Roof Opening In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. notice the tool displays. spin the model around so that you can see the side of the roof without the dormer. You can move it. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. If you want to modify the shape of the sketch.The opening is an element independent of the roof. click Open. click Close.

In the following illustration. select Pick a roof. the opening on the right is cut vertically through the face. The opening on the left is cut perpendicular. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. or ceiling and cut vertically. 6 Click OK. and click Modelling. click Modify. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box.3 On the Design Bar. when it highlights. floor. right-click the Design Bar. and. 7 Move the cursor over the main roof. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select it. 168 | Chapter 5 Openings . click Opening.

11 Sketch a rectangle in the center of the roof on the side without the dormer. 10 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. expand Views (all).Dormer. 8 In the Project Browser. 14 Place the cursor over the edge of the opening. select it. it is easier to sketch the boundary on a plan view. click Finish Sketch. and. Cutting Roof Openings | 169 . expand Floor Plans. when it highlights. click Lines. 13 On the View Toolbar. and double-click Roof .Because the cut is vertical. click . click . 12 On the Design Bar.

Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Close. 170 | Chapter 5 Openings .rvt located in the Metric folder. you cut openings in a floor to accommodate a set of stairs that are already in place. . expand Views (all). NOTE If you want to save this file. If you want to modify the shape of the sketch. you created a roof opening that was cut vertically through the roof. In this exercise. and constrain it like any other element. change the shape. click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. dimension it. you cut an opening on the second level of a building model to accommodate a set of existing stairs. expand Sections (Filled Arrow). Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. select Save As from the File menu. Cutting an Opening in a Floor In this exercise. 15 On the Options Bar. click 16 On the File menu. notice the tool. click the Training Files icon. You can move it. and click Finish Sketch. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings In this lesson. Cut a floor opening 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Section 1. The exercises in this lesson must be done sequentially.The opening is an element independent of the roof.

and the second click specifies the end of the plane. 3 Add a vertical reference plane similar to the following illustration. In the following illustration. floor. you add a reference plane to mark the stair head height. or ceiling and cut vertically. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The first click specifies the start point. click Ref Plane. click Opening. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. Before cutting the floor opening.Notice that there is not an opening for the stairway in the ceiling or the floor. The opening on the left is cut perpendicular to the face. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings | 171 . the opening on the right is cut vertically through the face. Adding a reference plane is a two-click process. and click OK. This is useful when sketching the opening in a plan view. make sure that the plane intersects the fifth stair tread from the bottom. and click Modelling. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. and the level 1 and 2 lines. However. right-click the Design Bar. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Pick a roof. The length of the plane does not have to be precise. a section view provides an excellent vantage point to select faces or planes to cut. When cutting a floor or ceiling for a stairway.

If you intend to complete the next exercise. You are prompted to select a view. Otherwise. and click Open View. under Views (all). select Floor Plan: Level 2. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 Sketch a rectangle that borders the interior face of the wall. and the reference plane you added previously. and click Wireframe. 9 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch.6 Select the floor on Level 2. 11 Zoom in around the upper right corner where the stairs are located. you may close the project with or without saving it. click . 172 | Chapter 5 Openings . under Sections (Filled Arrow). NOTE The next exercise requires this project in its current state. Notice the new floor opening. do so now. 8 On the View Control bar. 14 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Design Bar. double-click Section 1. click Model Graphics Style. click Lines. the stairs. 7 In the Go To View dialog box.

and the right and lower border of the stairs and floor you added in the previous exercise. Use the following illustration as a guide. 2 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. 3 Select the ceiling below level 2. 8 In the Project Browser. click Opening. select Pick a roof. under Views (all). Notice the new ceiling opening. 9 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). select Reflected Ceiling Plan: Level 1. right-click the Design Bar. you cut a ceiling opening for the stairwell. click . double-click Level 1 Interior View. 4 In the Go To View dialog box. or ceiling and cut vertically. the interior face of the wall. Dataset Continue using the dataset you were using in the previous exercise. under 3D Views. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings | 173 . Cut a ceiling opening. under Sections (Filled Arrow). and click Open View. 6 Sketch a rectangle that borders the reference plane. floor. and click OK. double-click Section 1. and click Modelling. click Finish Sketch.Cutting an Opening in a Ceiling In this exercise. 7 On the Design Bar. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. 5 On the Options Bar.

Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you cut an opening through several levels of a building model to accommodate a set of existing stairs and to account for the possibility of extending the stairs up another level. When using the shaft tool to cut an opening. The length of the plane does not have to be precise. and double-click Section 1. you must sketch in a plan view. you add a reference plane to mark the stair head height. Before cutting the opening. The first click specifies the start point. NOTE If you want to save this file. expand Views (all). Notice that there is not an opening for the stairway in the ceiling or the floor. Add a reference plane 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Add a vertical reference plane similar to the following illustration. Adding a reference plane is a two-click process. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Cutting an Opening Using the Shaft Tool In this exercise.rvt located in the Metric folder. and the second click specifies the end of the plane. and the level 1 and 2 lines. click Open. expand Sections (Filled Arrow).10 On the File menu. make sure that the plane intersects the fifth stair tread from the bottom. 174 | Chapter 5 Openings . click Close. click Ref Plane. However. click the Training Files icon. however. select Save As from the File menu. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings.

and click Wireframe. select Floor Plan: Level 2. and the reference plane you added previously. and click Open View. If you selected level 2 for the base constraint. 11 Sketch a rectangle that borders the interior face of the wall. under Constraints. click Opening. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. the ceiling of level 1 would remain intact. 14 Click OK. 10 Zoom in around the upper right corner where the stairs are located. and click OK. This accounts for the possibility of extending the existing stairs up another level. click Model Graphics Style.4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Views (all). ■ ■ Select Up to level: Roof for Top Constraint. click Properties. under Sections (Filled Arrow). 16 In the Project Browser. the stairs. Entering a value for base offset ensures that the shaft opening does not cut through the floor at level 1. 8 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. double-click Section 1. and click Modelling. Enter 3400 for Base Offset. select Create shaft opening. but does cut the ceiling of level 1. click . right-click the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 6 In the Go To View dialog box. 12 On the Design Bar. 7 On the View Control bar. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings | 175 . click Lines. specify the following parameters: ■ Select Level 1 for Base Constraint. 9 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box.

Using the shaft tool. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you can cut a single opening through every floor.Notice the shaft opening that cuts through several levels. ceiling. 176 | Chapter 5 Openings . and roof that interferes with the defined volume of the opening.

balusters. and panels. posts. you learn how to create a railing and customize it using design information for rails. 177 .Railings 6 In this tutorial.

Open five component families 1 On the File menu. Project is selected under Create new. such as panels. 178 | Chapter 6 Railings . Make certain that you draw the line from bottom to top because these starting and ending points are used to justify the railing later. click Lines. select M_Baluster . M_Baluster . 7 On the Options Bar. Before you lay out the railing.Custom3. The railing layout in this exercise is based on these custom components.rfa. and click OK. between the balusters. verify that DefaultMetric. click New ➤ Project. You also learn how to use a pattern editor to place balusters and posts and how to customize the railing with additional components.Square w Ball. 6 On the Design Bar.rte is selected as the Template file from the Metric Templates folder. M_Baluster Panel 1. 3 On the File menu. select Chain. M_Post . and click Open. navigate to Metric Library/Balusters.rfa. you learn how to create and place a railing using design information such as the shape and finish material of the rails. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family.Creating Railings In this lesson. 2 In the New Project dialog box.rfa.rfa . Creating the Railing Layout In this exercise. you need to load railing components from the library provided in the drawing template. Sketch a plan view of two railing lines 5 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Newel. and M_Post . 4 In the Open dialog box. click Railing.rfa.Custom4. you create a railing and add components to it. press the CTRL key. 8 Draw a 4300 mm vertical line from bottom to top as shown.

Matte for Name. select M_Rectangular Handrail : 50 x 50 mm for Profile. TIP You may need to zoom in until the angular dimension increments by a single degree.Paint Finish . 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. In row 2. 18 In the Edit Rails dialog box. select Metal . click Insert. enter Top for Name. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. and then click 17 In the Materials dialog box. 15 In the Edit Rails dialog box. enter Railing with Glass Panel for Name. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Metal . click in the Material field. In row 2.9 Draw a second 4300 mm line at an angle of 37 degrees as shown. click Duplicate. 13 In the Name dialog box. click Railing Properties. click in the Material field.Paint Finish . and click OK. click Edit for Rail Structure. In row 2. enter -25 mm for Offset. Matte for Name. click Edit/New.Dark Gray. In row 2. enter 300 mm for Height. and click OK. and then click . 19 In the Materials dialog box. in row 2. Specify the railing parameters 10 On the Design Bar. . enter Bottom for Name. and click OK. Creating Railings | 179 . 16 In row 1.Dark Gray. and then do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In row 1.

and then click Duplicate. 25 In row 4. 29 In row 3. Select Bottom for Base. Adjusting Railing Parameters. click Save As and save the exercise file as Training_Railing. click OK. 34 On the File menu. Select Bottom for Base. select M_Post.Newel : 150mm for Baluster Family and enter 0 mm for Space. select M_Post. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select M_Baluster .Glass for Baluster Family. Lay out the main baluster pattern 22 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. Enter 380 mm for Dist.Custom 3 : 25mm for Baluster Family. 32 On the Toolbar. from previous. under Posts. click Finish Sketch.Newel : 150mm for Baluster Family and enter 0 mm for Space. Enter 380 mm for Dist.rvt. A new row is displayed. 23 In row 2. you change the pattern of balusters and posts with the pattern editor to show different design options for the railing. from previous. in row 1. IMPORTANT Completing this tutorial is required to successfully complete some exercises in the tutorial on Stairs.20 In the Edit Rails dialog box. 180 | Chapter 6 Railings . select M_Post . 31 On the Design Bar. Adjusting Railing Parameters In this exercise. 33 On the View menu. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 230 mm for Dist. click . click on row 2. click Shading with Edges. from previous. 30 Click OK three times. under Main pattern. 21 In the Type Properties dialog box. 24 In row 3. 28 In row 2. 26 Select Beginning for Justify. click Edit for Baluster Placement. Lay out the post pattern 27 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. under Construction. Select M_Baluster Panel 1: 600mm . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Glass Panel for Name.Square w Ball : 60mm for Baluster Family and enter 50 mm for Top offset.

expand Elevations. 7 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify and select the railing. under Construction. under Main pattern. click Edit for Baluster Placement. click Edit/New. View the end justification option 3 On the Design Bar. under Main pattern. The railing layout reflects the assigned end justification option. click . 18 Click OK three times. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Spread Pattern To Fit for Justify. click Edit/New. under Construction.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. View the beginning justification option 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in on the left side of the railing. click . select Center for Justify. View the center justification option 9 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . The railing layout reflects the beginning justification option that you assigned in the previous exercise. View the spread pattern to fit option 14 On the Options Bar. and double-click East. Creating Railings | 181 . The railing layout reflects the assigned center justification option. select End for Justify. click Edit/New. under Main pattern.rvt. 17 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 4 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. 13 Click OK three times. under Construction. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 8 Click OK three times. 12 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. Training_Railing. expand Views (all).

22 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 35 On the Toolbar. under Construction. 34 Click OK three times. select Beginning for Justify. under Main pattern.The railing layout reflects the assigned spread pattern to fit justification option. and spacing options. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box. click . 33 Under Posts. and select Truncate Pattern for Excess Length Fill. click Edit for Baluster Placement. click . 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. 27 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 23 Click OK three times. under Construction. click .Custom3 : 25mm for Excess Length Fill. click Edit/New. View post options 29 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. click . The railing layout reflects the assigned beginning justification. enter 54 degrees for Angle. under Main pattern. select M_Baluster . The railing layout reflects the assigned beginning justification and truncated excess length fill options. click Edit/New. 26 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Construction. 32 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. custom baluster excess length fill. View the custom baluster with specified spacing excess length fill option 24 On the Options Bar. click Edit for Baluster Placement. under Main pattern. You cannot assign base top and bottom offset parameters to excess length fill balusters. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box. Observe that the balusters that occur in the excess length fill area extend below the bottom rail. and enter 150 mm for Spacing. select Angles Greater Than for Corner Posts At. 28 Click OK three times. click Edit for Baluster Placement. select Truncate Pattern for Excess Length Fill. 21 In the Type Properties dialog box. View the truncate pattern excess length fill option 19 On the Options Bar. 25 In the Element Properties dialog box. 182 | Chapter 6 Railings .

43 In the Project Browser. enter 380 mm for Dist. Since the angle is less than 54 degrees. a corner post does not occur. enter 0 mm for Dist. double-click East. 44 On the File menu. under Elevations. from previous. In row 4. Creating Railings | 183 . The railing layout reflects the assigned distance and justification options. 41 Under Posts.The railing layout reflects the assigned minimum angle limit for the corner post option. 38 In the Element Properties dialog box. Select Spread Pattern To Fit for Justify. click . under Construction. from previous. Specify the final railing layout 36 On the Design Bar. under Main pattern. 40 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. select Each Segment End for Corner Posts At. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 42 Click OK three times. click Modify and select the railing. do the following: ■ ■ ■ In row 2. click Edit/New. click Save As and save the exercise file as Training_Railing.rvt. 37 On the Options Bar. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box.

184 | Chapter 6 Railings .

Roofs 7 In this tutorial. gutters. you learn how to add fascia. and soffits to the roofs that you create. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Autodesk Revit Building. In addition. 185 .

5 In the Go To View dialog box. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. Creating an Extruded Roof In this exercise. 186 | Chapter 7 Roofs . you learn to create several different types of roofs. click Open. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. select Name. click the Training Files icon. Open m_Roofs. Before you can sketch the roof profile. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and mansard roofs. and click OK. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. and double-click Level 1. 1 In the Project Browser. shed. including hip. You create roofs from footprints and by extrusion: the two roof creation methods in Revit Building. You do not need to create the work plane. expand Floor Plans. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. gable. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog box. 4 Click OK. expand Views (all).Creating Roofs In this lesson.rvt located in the Metric folder. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. Creating Roofs | 187 . you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. 9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions.Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face.

click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. sketch the roof profile. Next. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. click Lines. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 188 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 13 On the Options Bar. select Chain. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections.11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2.

click . and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. expand Views (all). 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. 19 On the Tools toolbar. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. expand Sections (Type 1). 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. press CTRL. Next. The roof should resemble the following illustration.16 On the View toolbar. click to display the model. click Modify. and then select the exterior face of the wall. Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. and double-click Section 1. press TAB. 18 Select the edge of the roof. 17 On the Tools toolbar. click . 21 In the Project Browser. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. Creating Roofs | 189 . and select the second wall. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway.

25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. 190 | Chapter 7 Roofs . and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. click to view the completed breezeway roof in the model. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. click Attach for Top/Base. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint.24 On the Options Bar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 26 On the View toolbar. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch.

By default. 4 On the Options Bar. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. verify that Floor Plan: Garage Roof is selected. and enter 600 for Overhang. 5 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. click Finish Roof. click . Creating Roofs | 191 . click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. select both slope definition lines.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 12 On the Design Bar. 10 Press CTRL. 8 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. m_Roofs. 7 On the Options Bar. clear Defines slope. 2 In the Go To View dialog box. sketch the roof footprint. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. under Dimensions. and click Open View. The Element Properties dialog box is displayed. and click OK. 6 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. 3 Next. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Walls.rvt. verify that Defines slope is selected. Next. 13 When you see the informational dialog box. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

3 On the Options Bar. and enter 600 for Overhang. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. clear Defines slope. expand Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. click to view the gable roof and attached walls in the model. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.rvt. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. When you complete the roof. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. and double-click Level 3. m_Roofs. click Pick Walls. and then verify that a dashed green line displays to the exterior side of the walls.14 On the View toolbar. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint. 192 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. press TAB.

click Modify. add new slope lines to the roof.6 Click to select all the walls. click Lines. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. 15 On the Options bar. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Defines Slope. select Defines Slope. 13 On the Options Bar. click Finish Roof. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. Next. 9 Using automatic snaps. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. click . 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 17 When you see the informational dialog box. Creating Roofs | 193 . 8 On the Options Bar. Next. sketch the chimney opening. 10 On the View menu. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan.

expand Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. m_Roofs. and enter 600 for Overhang. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Verify that a dashed green line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. expand Views (all). 3 On the Options Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint. click to view the new roof in the model.rvt. and double-click Level 2. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. select Defines slope.18 On the View toolbar. 194 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Walls. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint.

verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 7 On the Options Bar. using the following illustration for guidance. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. 10 On the Options Bar. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. Next. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. close the roof sketch. and click . select the left vertical slope definition line. clear Defines Slope. click Lines.Next. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 9 On the Tools toolbar. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. click . Creating Roofs | 195 . 11 To trim the first line segment.

The Element Properties dialog box is displayed. and click OK. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. 21 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. 16 On the View toolbar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.Next. 14 Under Constraints. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. click Finish Roof. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. click 17 Click to display the model. join the two remaining walls to the roof. Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. 196 | Chapter 7 Roofs . raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. click Roof Properties. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. to use the Dynamic View tool to view the back of the house. click Modify. Next.

25 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Roofs. and enter 300 for Overhang. and double-click Level 2.23 On the Tools toolbar. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint. 4 On the Options Bar. Creating Roofs | 197 . click . 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. expand Floor Plans. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. expand Views (all). 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. clear Defines Slope. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise.rvt. click Pick Walls.

198 | Chapter 7 Roofs . select Defines slope. click Modify. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. click Roof Properties. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. Next. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select the left vertical roof line. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. enter 0 for Overhang. and click OK. Verify that a green dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls. 13 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. click Finish Roof to complete the roof.5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. you add a slope-defining line. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. press TAB. 8 On the Tools toolbar. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. 19 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 10 To trim the first line segment. and press ENTER. 6 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. 16 Under Constraints. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. Next. click .

Before you can add slope arrows. expand 3D Views. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Tools menu. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines.20 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to rotate the model. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. Creating Roofs | 199 . 3 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. m_Roofs. 5 On the View menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. click . 1 In the Project Browser. To help locate the position of each split. 4 In the Project Browser. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. expand Views (all). click Split Walls and Lines. click to activate the roof footprint sketch. click Ref Plane. and double-click 3D. and enter 600 for Offset. and double-click Level 2. expand Floor Plans. you need to add two reference planes.

Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. verify is selected. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. click Modify. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click 19 Under Constraints. select Slope for Specify. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. 20 Under Dimensions. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. Next. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . and then click OK. 18 Press CTRL. 14 On the Options Bar. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: ■ Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. . click Slope Arrow. Aligning Roof Eaves. add two new slope arrows. select both slope arrows. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. clear Defines Slope. 12 On the Options Bar. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. 22 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. 200 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.15 to add the second slope arrow. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. and move the cursor to rotate the arrow.Next. enter 500 for Rise/1000. click Modify.

2 Select the gable roof over the garage. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. 10 On the Options Bar. The eave lines display with a dimension. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. Creating Roofs | 201 . This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. select Defines Slope. 13 On the View toolbar.rvt. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. click to display the model. expand Views (all). you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Align Eaves. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. When eave heights differ. When you sketch a hip roof. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition).Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. 12 On the Design Bar. When aligning eaves. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. click . and click OK. Next. and double-click Garage Roof. select a method to align the eaves. click . 5 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. the adjacent eave heights must align. m_Roofs. expand Floor Plans. under Dimensions. 3 On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. on the Options Bar. click Finish Roof.

under Constraints. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Open m_Mansard_Roof. click . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Open. click Save As. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. and double-click North. click the Training Files icon. 1 In the Project Browser. 202 | Chapter 7 Roofs . Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. expand Elevations. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. click Modify. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.rvt located in the Metric folder. Creating a Mansard Roof. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box.14 If you want to save your changes. on the File menu. expand Views (all). 3 Select the roof and. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. on the Options Bar.

click Lines. and click OK. press TAB. expand Views (all). 10 On the Options Bar. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. Next. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. and then select Defines slope. click . 14 On the Options Bar. under Dimensions. click to display the model. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. click Finish Roof. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 17 On the View toolbar. click . and select the remaining three lines. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. click to display the model with the complete mansard roof. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating Roofs | 203 . 7 In the Project Browser. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000.6 On the View toolbar. and double-click Level 3.

7 In the Type Properties dialog box. you can easily create its fascia. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Open. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. under Construction. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 1 On the File menu. and Soffits In this lesson. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. enter Built-up Fascia. Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. 5 On the Options Bar. 2 In the Open dialog box. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click the Training Files icon. After you create a roof. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and open the Roofs folder.rfa. 8 In the Name dialog box. 204 | Chapter 7 Roofs . gutters. and soffits in Revit Building. click Save As. Gutters. and soffits. and click Open. open the Profiles folder. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. open the Metric Library folder. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. on the File menu.rvt located in the Common folder. Open c_Condominium.18 If you want to save your changes. and click OK. click .rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. 3 Press CTRL. click Duplicate. Creating Fascia. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. gutters. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. and click OK twice. you learn how to create roof fascia. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium.

you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model.11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. Creating Gutters. Gutters. Creating Fascia. Creating Gutters In this exercise. and Soffits | 205 . 13 Proceed to the next exercise.

click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof.rvt. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. and click OK. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. 10 Click to place the gutter. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. under Construction. click . you learn how to place a roof soffit.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating Soffits In this exercise. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. 3 In the Properties dialog box. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the Materials dialog box. and then click . click Duplicate. 206 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. c_Condominium. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. Creating Soffits. click in the Value field for Material. and click OK three times.

expand Views. click Finish Sketch. 1 In the Project Browser. Gutters. expand Views (all). Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. 3 On the Design Bar. click Pick Roofs. expand Floor Plans.rvt. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Roof. expand 3D Views. and double-click 3D. 5 On the Design Bar. c_Condominium. and Soffits | 207 . Creating Fascia. 4 Select the roof. 6 In the Project Browser.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

and then select the soffit to join them. on the File menu. click Join Geometry. 208 | Chapter 7 Roofs . click Save As. 8 Select the roof. 9 If you want to save your changes.7 On the Tools menu. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

209 . and semi-circular runs of stairs. and work with a stair calculator. You learn to create special feature stairs.Stairs 8 In this tutorial. you learn how to create and modify straight. add railings to your landings. u-shaped.

expand Floor Plans. use the Stair Calculator to add a straight run of stairs to your drawing.Creating Stairs In this lesson. expand Views (all). specify the start point for the stair run. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. risers and stringers. under Graphics. If you add stairs to a drawing in plan view. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you can display both of the levels that you are working with. select Level 2 for Underlay. Open the m_Stair_Exercise. railings from another project.rvt file located in the Metric folder. 4 Click OK. Draw a straight stair run 5 Zoom in on the entry way. click Stairs. Creating the Main Lobby Stair Run In this exercise. The outline of the level 2 floors and wall display as an underlay. you learn how to create runs of typical and special feature stairs with the stairs aligned correctly between the levels in your project. click the Training Files icon. and double-click Level 1. You learn to work with different stair components. View the first level lobby and second level underlay 1 In the Project Browser. click View Properties. The level where the stairs end displays as a screened background after you select it as an underlay. click Open. 2 On the View menu. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 210 | Chapter 8 Stairs . and then modify. The level where the stairs originate displays as your current working level. you create and align a straight run of stairs to provide access from the first level to the second level of the building model. such as treads. 7 Using the following illustration as a guide. add.

9 On the Design Bar. Creating Stairs | 211 .8 Specify the stair run endpoint as shown. click Finish Sketch.

12 Select the front edge of the second level as the alignment line as shown. 11 On the Toolbar. click . The top edge of the stair run is now aligned with the front edge of the second level. 212 | Chapter 8 Stairs . 13 Select the top edge of the stair run as the entity to align as shown.Align the top edge of the stair run with the front edge of the second level 10 Zoom in on the top of the stair run.

Align the stair run centerline with the wall centerline
14 Select the wall centerline as the alignment line as shown. TIP On the Options Bar, click Wall centerlines on the Prefer menu.

15 Select the stair run centerline as the entity to align as shown.

The stair run centerline is now aligned with the wall centerline.

16 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click lobby stair view.

Creating Stairs | 213

Specify new main lobby stair parameters
17 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Sections, and double-click Stair Section. 18 On the View menu, click Thin Lines.

TIP Hold the cursor over the stairs to see the risers and treads. 19 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 20 On the Options Bar, click .

21 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 22 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 23 In the Name dialog box, enter Lobby Main Stairs for Name, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 8 Stairs

24 In the Type Properties dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Treads, enter 255 mm for Minimum Tread Depth. Under Treads, select Stair Nosing - Radius : 20 mm for Nosing Profile. Under Treads, enter 50 mm for Tread Thickness. Under Risers, clear End with Riser. Under Risers, select Straight for Riser Type. Under Risers, enter 20 mm for Riser Thickness. Under Risers, select Extend Tread Under Riser for Riser to Tread Connection. Under Stringers, select Match Level for Trim Stringers at Top. Under Stringers, enter 305 mm for Stringer Height. Under Stringers, enter 65 mm for Stringer Carriage Height. Under Stringers, enter 180 mm for Landing Carriage Height. .

25 Under Materials and Finishes, click in the Value box for Tread Material, and click

26 In the Materials dialog box, select Finishes - Interior - Carpet 1 for Name, and click OK. 27 Click in the Value box for Riser Material, and click .

28 In the Materials dialog box, select Finishes - Interior - Carpet 1 for Name, and click OK. 29 Click in the Value box for Stringer Material, and click .

30 In the Materials dialog box, select Wood - Cherry for Name, and click OK. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK. Because you specified ending the stair run with a tread instead of a riser, a warning dialog box displays, telling you that the actual number of risers is different from the desired number of risers. 32 Click OK to ignore this warning message. 33 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Dimensions, enter 1220 mm for Width. 34 Click OK.

The stair section reflects the new assigned parameters. 35 On the File menu, click Save As, and save this exercise file as Training_Stairs.rvt. 36 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying the Main Lobby Stair Run.

Modifying the Main Lobby Stair Run
In this exercise, you use design information about a railing from another project and create special feature stairs with concave stringers from the straight run of stairs you completed in the previous exercise.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Changing the railing type
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click lobby stair view. 2 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press CTRL, and select both railings. 3 In the Type Selector, select Railing : Railing with Glass Panel.

Creating Stairs | 215

NOTE If the panels do not display in the railings, go to the Type Properties of the railing. Click Edit next to the Baluster Placement parameter. If selected, clear the check box for the User Baluster Per Tread on Stairs option. Notice that the railing start post is offset above the level of the floor.

Adjust the railing start post offset
4 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select one of the railings. 5 On the Options Bar, click .

6 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Baluster Placement. 8 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box, under Posts, in row 1, enter -200 mm for Base offset. 9 Click OK three times. 10 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

The railing start post is now at floor level.

Change the stair shape in plan view
11 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 12 Zoom in on the stair run. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 14 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 15 Press and hold CTRL, select the left and right stair run boundary lines, and delete them.

216 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Draw the left boundary arc
16 On the Design Bar, click Boundary. 17 On the Options Bar, click .

18 Specify the intersection of the bottom riser and inside wall face as the arc start point as shown.

19 Specify the left end of the top riser as the arc endpoint.

Creating Stairs | 217

20 Specify a point to the left of the stair run for the arc midpoint approximately as shown.

Mirror the left boundary arc
21 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the left boundary arc. 22 On the Toolbar, click .

23 Select the stair run centerline as the mirror axis.

Draw the new first riser
24 On the Design Bar, click Modify, select the first riser and delete it.

218 | Chapter 8 Stairs

25 On the Design Bar, click Riser. 26 On the Options Bar, click .

27 Specify the lower end of the left boundary arc as the arc start point as shown.

28 Specify the lower end of the right boundary arc as the arc endpoint as shown.

29 Specify the intersection of the front wall edge and the stair run centerline as the arc midpoint as shown.

Creating Stairs | 219

30 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

31 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click lobby stair view.

The stair run from the first floor main lobby is now complete. 32 On the File menu, click Save As and save the exercise file as Training_Stairs.rvt. 33 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Second Floor Lobby Side Stairs.

220 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Creating the Second Floor Lobby Side Stairs
In this exercise, you create and align runs of side stairs with railings.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Specify the lobby side stair run parameters
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.

2 On the View menu, click View Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Graphics, select Level 3 for Underlay, and click OK.

4 Zoom in on the upper left of the lobby area. 5 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Stairs, and then click Stairs Properties. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Lobby Main Stairs for Type, and click Edit/New. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 8 In the Name dialog box, enter Lobby Side Stairs for Name, and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Risers, select End with Riser. Under Risers, select None for Riser Type. Under Construction, enter -300 mm for Extend Below Base. Under Stringers, select Do not trim for Trim Stringers at Top. Under Stringers, select None for Right Stringer. Under Stringers, select None for Left Stringer. Under Stringers, select 1 for Middle Stringers. Under Stringers, enter 100 mm for Stringer Carriage Height. Under Treads, select Front, Left and Right for Apply Nosing Profile.

10 Click OK. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Dimensions, enter 1220 mm for Width, and click OK.

Creating Stairs | 221

Place the lobby side stair run
12 Specify a point near the left edge of the landing for the stair run start point, and then specify a point to the left for the stair endpoint. NOTE The exact location of the stair run is not critical. You specify its final location in subsequent steps. 13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Move the stair run into the corner of the level 2 opening
14 Zoom in on the upper left side of the stair run. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify, hold down CTRL, and select the stair run and both railings. 16 On the Toolbar, click .

17 Specify the upper left endpoint of the railing as the move start point as shown.

18 Specify the upper left corner of the level 2 opening as the move endpoint as shown.

The top of the stair run is now positioned in the corner of the level 2 opening.

222 | Chapter 8 Stairs

19 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click {3D}.

Specify a new side stair run railing type
20 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select both railings. 21 In the Type Selector, select Railing : 900mm Pipe. Notice that both railings are on the outside of the treads. This is because the original stairs that you duplicated, the main lobby stairs, have left and right stringers that hosted the railings. Because the lobby side stairs have only a center stringer, you need to flip the railings so they rest on the stair treads. 22 Select each railing, right-click, and click Flip Orientation.

Mirror the lobby side stair run
23 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 24 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select the side stair run and both railings. 25 On the Toolbar, click .

26 Specify the main lobby stair run centerline as the mirror axis as shown.

Creating Stairs | 223

The lobby side stair run is mirrored to the right side of the lobby.

27 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D}.

The lobby side stairs and railings are now complete. 28 On the File menu, click Save. 29 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Level 2 Landing Railings.

Creating the Level 2 Landing Railings
In this exercise, you create and modify railings for a landing and then extend the railings from the side stairs in the previous exercise to the railing on the landing.

224 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Sketch the left side level 2 landing railing path
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2. 2 Zoom in on the level 2 landing. 3 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the left main stair railing. 4 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, select Chain. 7 Click to specify the sketch line start point approximately as shown.

8 Move the cursor down and specify the next sketch point as shown.

9 Move the cursor to the right and specify the sketch endpoint as shown.

Creating Stairs | 225

10 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the left railing sketch line of the main stairs. 11 Select the endpoint of the sketch line for the railing as shown.

12 Drag the arc sketch line endpoint up to the right end of the new horizontal sketch line as shown.

13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

14 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click Level 2 Landing.

226 | Chapter 8 Stairs

15 Zoom in and on the View toolbar, click

to reorient the view to look as shown.

Create the right side level 2 landing railing
16 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 17 Select the right lobby main stair railing and delete it. 18 Select the left lobby main stair railing. 19 On the Toolbar, click .

20 Specify the lobby main stair centerline as the mirror axis as shown.

The new lobby main stair and level 2 landing railing layout is mirrored to the right side of the stair run.

21 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Level 2 Landing.

Creating Stairs | 227

Extend the lobby side stair railing onto the landing
22 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 23 Zoom in on the left side of the level 2 landing. 24 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the upper lobby side stair railing.

25 On Options Bar, click Edit. 26 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 27 Click to specify the right endpoint of the railing sketch line for the line start point as shown.

28 Move the cursor 440 mm to the right and specify the sketch line endpoint as shown.

228 | Chapter 8 Stairs

29 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 30 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D} and zoom in on the railing extension.

The railing now extends onto the landing.

Modify the railing extension parameters
31 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the extended railing. 32 On the Options Bar, click .

33 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 34 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select No Connector for Tangent Joins. 35 Click OK twice.

Creating Stairs | 229

36 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the extended railing. 37 On the Options Bar, click .

38 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select Add Vertical/Horizontal Segments for Tangent Joins, and click Edit for Baluster Placement. 40 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box, under Posts, in row 2, select None for Baluster Family. 41 Click OK three times.

42 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the extended railing. 43 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 44 Select the 440 mm railing extension sketch line segment. 45 On the Options Bar, select Custom for Height Correction and enter 170 mm. 46 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

230 | Chapter 8 Stairs

47 On the File menu, click Save. 48 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Emergency Exit Stair Run.

Creating the Emergency Exit Stair Run
In this exercise, you create a u-shaped run of stairs in plan view, and then add a railing and extend the stairs to another level in a three-dimensional (3D) view. When you are adding stairs that turn corners in plan view, it is easier to align the stairs if you mark the edge of the landing with a reference plane first.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset from the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Draw a reference plane
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom in on the stairwell on the left side of the building.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 4 On the Options Bar, click and enter 528 mm for Offset.

5 Move your cursor over the left edge of the exterior wall and place a vertical reference plane to the left of the exterior wall face as shown.

Creating Stairs | 231

select for Stringer Material Value. Specify the exit stairs parameters 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Metal . Dark Gray Matte for Name. 14 Under Materials and Finishes.Paint Finish. 8 Under Dimensions. and click OK. is at 864. 15 In the Materials dialog box.Paint Finish. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. select for Riser Material Value. under Treads. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box.The new reference plane. 17 In the Materials dialog box. 18 Click OK three times. Dark Gray Matte for Name.5 mm as indicated by the temporary dimension. and then click Edit/New. measured from the exterior wall centerline. select 180mm max riser 275mm tread for Type. and click OK. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. and click OK. enter Exit Stairs for Name. 10 In the Name dialog box. click Stairs. Draw the exit stairs 19 Click to specify the midpoint of the landing edge as the stair run start point as shown. enter 915 mm for Width. and then click Stairs Properties. select for Tread Material Value. click Duplicate.Exterior: Precast Concrete Panels for Name. select Finishes . 16 Under Materials and Finishes. 232 | Chapter 8 Stairs . 20 Move the cursor up 2040 mm and specify the stair run next point as shown. select Metal . 13 In the Materials dialog box. enter 255 mm for Minimum Tread Depth.

The exit stair run layout is complete.21 Move the cursor to the right and specify the intersection of the next-to-last riser line and the reference plane as the stair run next point as shown. 22 Drag the cursor down and specify the intersection of the landing edge and the reference plane as the stair run endpoint as shown. Creating Stairs | 233 .

expand Views (all). View the exit stairs 24 In the Project Browser. and double-click Exit Stairs. expand 3D Views. click Finish Sketch. 25 Zoom in on the exit stairwell. 26 Hold CTRL and select two of the exterior walls of the exit stairwell. 234 | Chapter 8 Stairs .23 On the Design Bar. and the exit door.

click Modify. 34 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 31 On the Options Bar. click Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Object. under Construction.27 On the View Control Bar. click Edit/New. Specify a new railing type 28 Zoom in on the stair run. under Posts. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. 30 In the Type Selector. select M_Baluster . Creating Stairs | 235 . click Edit for Baluster Placement. click . 29 On the Design Bar. and select both railings. The selected objects are hidden. 35 Click OK three times. hold down CTRL.Round1 : 25mm for Baluster Family. select Railing : 900mm Pipe. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. in row 2. and the exit stairs are visible.

Add another exit stairs flight 36 On the Design Bar. 37 On the Options Bar. click Save. Creating a Semi-circular Exterior Stair Run In this exercise. Creating a Semi-circular Exterior Stair Run. under Constraints. and select the exit stairs. and click OK. you create a semi-circular run of stairs and then modify the winders and the railing. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. 40 On the File menu. 38 In the Element Properties dialog box. 236 | Chapter 8 Stairs . click Modify. click . click Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. select Level 3 for Multistory Top Level. Turn on the display of the exit stairwell exterior walls and exit door 39 On the View Control Bar.

select for Monolithic Material Value. Under Stringers. 8 Under Materials and Finishes. TIP You can use the shortcut key SM to snap only to midpoints.rvt. and double-click Level 1. select Monolithic Stairs. select Concrete . 16 Click to specify the midpoint of the concrete slab edge as the stair run center point as shown. enter 200 mm for Maximum Riser Height. enter 300 mm for Stringer Carriage Height. Under Construction. enter 1300 mm for Width. enter 0 mm for Nosing Length. enter 200 mm for Landing Carriage Height. Under Risers. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Construction. enter 0 mm for Landing Overlap. and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. Creating Stairs | 237 . 2 Zoom in on the exterior concrete pad above the north exterior wall of the building. Training_Stairs. select 9 In the Materials dialog box. and click Edit/New. select 16 for Desired Number of Risers.Cast-in-Place Concrete for Name. Draw the semi-circular stair run 14 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. and then click Stairs Properties. Specify the semi-circular stair run parameters 1 In the Project Browser. select Extend Tread Under Riser for Riser to Tread Connection. enter Semicircular Stairs for Name. Under Stringers. for Tread Material Value.Cast-in-Place Concrete for Name. click Stairs. Under Risers. Under Treads. and click OK. expand Views (all). enter 1 mm for Tread Thickness. click Run. expand Floor Plans. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. select 180mm max riser 275mm tread for Type. Under Risers. click OK. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box under Dimensions. select Concrete . 11 In the Materials dialog box. click . 7 In the Type Properties dialog box.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. 15 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click Duplicate. Under Treads. 6 In the name dialog box. enter 5 mm for Riser Thickness.

as shown. and click to specify the arc end point. 18 On the keyboard. 19 Move the cursor counterclockwise until the display indicates that there are 0 risers remaining. 238 | Chapter 8 Stairs .17 Drag the cursor to the right along the slab edge. and press ENTER. The semi-circular stair run is complete. enter 1310 for Radius as shown.

and double-click Exterior Stairs. expand Views (all). TIP You may need to select the outer railing and flip its orientation to align it to the pad. expand 3D Views. click Finish Sketch.20 On the Design Bar. Modify the semi-circular stair run parameters 21 In the Project Browser. Creating Stairs | 239 .

The underside of winder parameter is smooth. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 23 On the Options Bar, click .

24 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 25 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select Stepped for Underside of Winder. 26 Click OK twice.

The underside of winder parameter is stepped with no overlap. 27 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 28 On the Options Bar, click .

29 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 30 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, enter 300 mm for Landing Overlap. 31 Click OK twice.

240 | Chapter 8 Stairs

The underside of winder parameter is stepped with a 300 mm overlap.

Specify new semi-circular stair run railing parameters
32 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select both railings. 33 In the Type Selector, select Railing : 900mm Pipe.

34 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save. 35 On the File menu, click Close.

Working with the Stair Calculator
In this exercise, you create two sets of stairs side by side within a new project. The first set of stairs uses the default settings to calculate the slope. The second set of stairs uses the stair calculator to calculate the slope of the stairs. After creating both stairs, you add dimensions to them to see how the tread depth and stair slope adjust based on the changes made in the stair calculator.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤  Project. In the New Project dialog box, under Template File, click Browse. Open the DefaultMetric.rte file located in the Metric Templates folder.

Creating Stairs | 241

Create a set of stairs using the default settings
1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Stairs. 2 On the Design Bar, click Stairs Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Industrial and Assembly for Type, and click OK. 4 In the center of the Level 1 Floor Plan, click to specify the stair run start point, move the cursor vertically upward until the stair risers are complete, and click to specify the end of the stair run.

5 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 6 On the View Toolbar, click .

When you created these stairs, the slope was calculated automatically. In the steps that follow, you create a set of stairs using the stair calculator to define the stair slope.

242 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Create a set of stairs using the stair calculator
7 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Stairs. 9 On the Design Bar, click Stairs Properties. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Industrial and Assembly for Type, and click Edit/New. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 12 In the Name dialog box, enter Industrial and Assembly - Calculated Slope, and click OK. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Calculation Rules. 14 In the Stair Calculator dialog box, select Use Stair Calculator for slope calculation. The Stair Calculator computes actual tread depth using the following Calculation Rule equation: X * Rise + Y * Depth = Z X is the value to multiply the actual riser height indicated by the stair properties; Y is the value to multiply the actual tread depth, and Z is the result that lies within threshold minimum and maximum values range based on either design standards or building codes. 15 Enter 680.0 mm for Z, enter 695.0 mm for Maximum Result for Stair Calculator, and enter 670.0 mm for Minimum Result for Stair Calculator. 16 Click OK. 17 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 19 To the right of the stairs you created previously, click to specify the stair run start point, and move the cursor vertically upward until the stair risers are complete. NOTE When specifying the stair run starting point, try to align it with the bottom of the stairs you created previously. This allows you to make a better comparison of the slope when you view the stairs together in a 3D view at the end of the exercise.

20 After all the risers have been created, click to specify the stair run end point. 21 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. Notice the stairs created using the stair calculator have a longer run than the first set of stairs you created. 22 On the View menu, click Zoom  ➤  Zoom in Region, and draw a zoom region around both sets of stairs. 23 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 24 On both sets of stairs, add dimensions to the bottom tread and the stair run as shown.

Creating Stairs | 243

25 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 26 Select the right stair run, Industrial and Assembly - Calculated Slope. 27 On the Options Bar, click .

28 In the Element Properties dialog box, notice the Actual Tread Depth is 332.2 mm. Within this project, the project units are set to display length dimension values on screen rounded to the nearest 1 mm. Even more exact dimension values are displayed to the nearest .1 mm where appropriate in the Element Properties dialog box. In this case, the actual tread depth dimension is 332.2 mm; it becomes 332 mm when rounded to the nearest 1 mm in the drawing area. The actual tread depth is determined by using the following Calculation Rule equation derivation: Tread = (Z - X * Riser) / Y Substituting with the current values (X = 2, Y = 1, Z = 680 mm and Riser = 173.9 mm) yields: Tread = (680 - (2 * 173.9))/1 Tread = (680 - 347.8) Tread = 332.2 mm 29 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 30 On the View Toolbar, click 31 On the View Toolbar, click . and spin the model as shown.

244 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Notice the difference between the slope of the two stairs. 32 On the File menu, click Close. You can close the project file without saving your changes. This completes the Working with the Stair Calculator exercise. This also completes the Stairs lesson.

Creating Stairs | 245

246 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Walls

9

247

Creating Walls
In this lesson, you learn about walls. Sketch wall segments, work with compound walls, and create new wall types. Create curtain and foundation walls, join walls to floors, and assign wall top and bottom attachments.

Sketching Walls
In this exercise, you use sketching tools to draw and modify straight and arc wall segments, and then add a floor with an opening.

Draw the first exterior wall segment
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project.
■ ■ ■ ■

In the New Project dialog box, under Template file, click Browse. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box, click the training files icon. Select the m_Tutorial_Default.rte file located in the Metric folder, and click Open. In the New Project dialog box, click OK.

2 Zoom in on the center of the viewing window. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 4 Specify the wall segment start point, and drag the cursor to the right 2900 mm.

5 Click to specify the wall segment endpoint and select the dimension. 6 Enter 3000 mm for the new horizontal dimension.

7 Press ENTER.

The wall segment length is updated with the new dimension.

Draw the second exterior wall segment
8 Specify the right endpoint of the first wall segment as the second wall segment start point.

9 Drag the cursor down 2100 mm, and click to specify the wall segment endpoint.

Both vertical and horizontal dimensions display.

248 | Chapter 9 Walls

Draw the third and fourth exterior wall segments
10 Specify the lower end of the second wall segment as the third wall segment start point. 11 Press and hold SHIFT, drag the cursor to the right 2400 mm, and click to specify the third wall segment endpoint.

NOTE Hold down SHIFT as you drag the cursor to constrain your drawing direction orthogonally. 12 Specify the right end of the third wall segment as the fourth wall segment start point. 13 Hold down SHIFT, drag the cursor up 2100 mm, and click to specify the fourth wall segment endpoint.

Stretch the fourth exterior wall segment
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 15 Select the fourth wall segment and select the upper drag control.

Observe that the first wall segment has an assigned lock icon that references the alignment of the first wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment endpoint. 16 Drag the cursor up to 3600 mm.

Only the fourth wall segment is stretched. 17 Select the drag control again, and drag the cursor down to 2100 mm. 18 Click the first wall segment lock icon to lock the alignment of the first wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment endpoint.

Creating Walls | 249

19 Select the drag control again, and drag the cursor up to 2900 mm.

Observe that the first wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment endpoint maintain their alignment. The second wall segment stretched as well to accommodate the new position of the first wall segment. Locking the alignment ensures that this relationship between wall segments is maintained.

Draw the fifth and sixth exterior wall segments
20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 21 On the Options Bar, select Chain. 22 Specify the upper end of the fourth wall segment as the fifth wall segment start point. 23 Drag the cursor to the right 5500 mm, and click to specify the fifth wall segment endpoint.

24 Drag the cursor down 5500 mm, and click to specify the sixth wall segment endpoint.

250 | Chapter 9 Walls

Draw the seventh, eighth, and ninth exterior wall segments
25 Drag the cursor to the left 7000 mm, and click to specify the seventh wall segment endpoint.

26 Drag the cursor down 2100 mm, and click to specify the eighth wall segment endpoint.

27 Drag the cursor to the left 3900 mm, and click to specify the ninth wall segment endpoint.

Move the eighth wall segment
28 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the eighth wall segment. 29 Drag the cursor to the right until the centerline of the eighth wall segment aligns with the fourth wall segment centerline.

Creating Walls | 251

30 Click the eighth wall segment lock icon to lock the alignment of the eighth wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment centerline. 31 Select the eighth wall segment, and drag the cursor to the right 2100 mm to specify the new wall segment location

Observe that the eighth wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment centerline maintain their alignment. The third, fifth, seventh, and ninth wall segments are stretched as well to accommodate the new position of the eighth wall segment. Locking the alignment ensures that this relationship between wall segments is maintained.

Draw an arc wall segment
32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 33 On the Options Bar, click .

34 Specify the left end of the ninth wall segment as the arc start point.

252 | Chapter 9 Walls

35 Specify the left end of the first wall segment as the arc endpoint. NOTE Do not snap the cursor to 180 degrees.

36 Move the cursor along the preview arc wall, and click to place the arc wall. 37 Select the radius value, and enter 4900 mm.

38 Press ENTER.

Creating Walls | 253

Move wall segments by modifying dimensions
39 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the fourth wall segment. 40 Select the 3200 mm dimension value, and enter 4000.

41 Press ENTER.

254 | Chapter 9 Walls

Both the fourth and eighth wall segments are shifted 800 mm to the right.

Draw a diagonal exterior wall segment
42 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 43 Specify the midpoint of the fifth wall segment as the diagonal wall segment start point.

44 Specify the midpoint of the sixth wall segment as the diagonal wall segment endpoint.

45 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 46 On the Toolbar, click .

47 Select the left side of the fifth wall segment as the first wall segment to trim.

48 Select the diagonal wall segment as the wall segment to trim to. 49 Select the lower side of the sixth wall segment as the next wall segment to trim.

Creating Walls | 255

50 Select the diagonal wall segment as the wall segment to trim to.

Draw a floor by picking walls
51 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Floor, and then click Pick Walls. 52 Place the cursor over one of the walls, press TAB, and click to select the entire chain of walls.

All of the wall segments are highlighted. 53 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Sketch a rectangular floor cutout
54 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening. 55 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box, select the first option, and click OK. 56 Place the cursor over the edge of the floor until it highlights, and click.

256 | Chapter 9 Walls

57 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 58 On the Options Bar, click .

59 Using the following illustration as a guide, specify an approximate location for the first corner of the rectangular floor opening.

60 Specify the second corner of the rectangular floor opening, creating a 1800 mm X 3000 mm floor opening.

TIP The cursor snaps to dimension values based on the zoom of the view. To get the rectangle to the exact dimensions, you may need to zoom in. 61 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 62 On the Toolbar, click .

63 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 64 On the Toolbar, click .

65 In the Dynamic View dialog box, select Spin, and then, while holding the left mouse button down, move the cursor in the viewing window to orient the view as shown.

Creating Walls | 257

This completes the Sketching Walls exercise.

Working with Compound Walls
In this exercise, you work with compound walls. Convert generic wall styles to new custom wall styles, add dimensions, edit fill patterns that display in section views, and apply surface patterns.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the m_Gallery.rvt file located in the Metric folder.

Access wall properties
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 Zoom in on the upper part of the floor plan. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify. 4 Select the 200 mm exterior wall.

258 | Chapter 9 Walls

Enter 50 mm for Thickness.5 On the Options Bar. click . Click in the Material field.Exterior Insulation and Finish System.GRG (Glass Reinforced Gypsum). and in the Materials dialog box. Enter 135 mm for Thickness. and in the Materials dialog box. ■ Creating Walls | 259 . and click OK. 13 In row 1. click Insert twice. do the following: ■ ■ Click in the Function field. under Name. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ Click in the Function field. under Name. click . and select Finish 2 [5]. and click Up. .EIFS . select Finishes . and select Structure [1]. Enter 15 mm for Thickness. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Name. Click OK. click Duplicate. ■ 15 In row 5. select Wood . 8 In the Name dialog box. ■ 14 In row 3. and select Finish 1 [4].Exterior . 10 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. enter 200 mm Stud Wall for Name. and click Down twice. and in the Materials dialog box. Add two layers to the new wall type 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Click OK. click . click Edit/New.Interior . Click in the Material field. Click in the Material field.Stud Layer. 11 Select row 2. click Edit for Structure. 12 Select row 3. select Finishes . do the following: ■ ■ Click in the Function field. under Layers.

16 Click Preview. 17 Click OK three times. Add a wall centerline dimension 23 Zoom in on the lower part of the floor plan. expand Families. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. 21 Select Generic . 24 On the Design Bar. The style of the selected walls is updated in the building model. 19 Zoom in on the left end of the new 200 mm Stud wall segment. 22 In the Type Selector. right-click. select Wall centerlines for Prefer. and click Select All Instances.200mm. select Basic Wall : 200 mm Stud Wall. 260 | Chapter 9 Walls . click Dimension. 26 Select the upper horizontal wall segment centerline as the first dimension point. Specify the view detail level 18 On the View Control Bar. Assign the new wall style to the remaining exterior walls 20 In the Project Browser. and expand Basic Wall. expand Walls. 25 On the Options Bar.

27 Select the lower horizontal wall segment centerline as the second dimension point. The vertical wall centerline to centerline dimension displays. 30 Select the upper horizontal wall segment exterior face as the first dimension point. Creating Walls | 261 . select Wall faces for Prefer. Add a wall face dimension 29 On the Options Bar. 28 Specify a point to the left as the dimension location point.

The vertical wall exterior face to exterior face dimension displays. 34 Select the left vertical wall segment exterior core face as the first dimension point.31 Select the lower horizontal wall segment exterior face as the second dimension point. Add a wall core face dimension 33 On the Options Bar. select Faces of core for Prefer. 262 | Chapter 9 Walls . 32 Specify a point to the right as the dimension location point.

35 Select the right vertical wall segment exterior core face as the second dimension point. 36 Specify a point below as the dimension location point. Creating Walls | 263 . The horizontal wall core face to core face dimension displays.

The new Gypsum pattern is assigned to the gypsum wall board representation in section view. and under Cut Pattern. 46 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 264 | Chapter 9 Walls . 42 In the New Pattern dialog box. Assign the new gypsum fill pattern to a wall layer in section view 44 On the Settings menu. select Gypsum. 41 In the Import dialog box. click OK.Create a custom gypsum fill pattern 37 In the Project Browser. 48 Zoom in on the gypsum board representation in the wall section. 39 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 50 On the View Control Bar. Enter Gypsum for Name.pat. and click OK. Enter 0.25 for Import scale. and click Open. select Custom. 45 In the Materials dialog box. Assign a masonry surface pattern in a 3D view 49 In the Project Browser. and double-click Callout of Section 3.GRG .Dense for Import.Interior . click New. click Materials. select Finishes . 40 In the New Pattern dialog box. expand 3D Views and double-click {3D}. click Fill Patterns. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sand . select revit. click for Pattern. 47 In the Materials dialog box. 38 On the Settings menu. 43 Click OK twice. and click Import. expand Sections (Callout 1).Glass Reinforced Gypsum. navigate to \Program Files\Autodesk Revit Building\Data.

51 On the Settings menu, click Materials. 52 In the Materials dialog box, select Masonry - Concrete Blocks, and under Surface Pattern, click 53 In the Fill Patterns dialog box, select Model for Pattern Type, select Block 8x16, and click OK. 54 In the Materials dialog box, click OK. 55 Select the low circular wall segment. 56 On the Options Bar, click . for Pattern.

57 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 58 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Edit for Structure. 59 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Layers, in row 2, click 60 In the Materials dialog box, select Masonry - Concrete Blocks. 61 Click OK four times. 62 Zoom in on the low wall segment. for Material.

Align a masonry surface pattern in an elevation view
63 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations, and double-click East.

64 Zoom in on the right retaining wall.

Creating Walls | 265

65 Zoom in on the upper left corner of the wall. 66 On the Toolbar, click .

67 Select the building wall edge as the alignment reference.

68 Select the CMU edge as the line to align.

The upper left corner of the CMU pattern is now aligned with the upper left corner of the retaining wall. This completes the Working with Compound Walls exercise.

Working with Vertically Compound Walls
In this exercise, you modify vertically compound walls and create and modify wall layers in sections view.

266 | Chapter 9 Walls

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Townhouse.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Access the exterior wall properties
1 On the Settings menu, click Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog box, click the button under Format next to Length. 3 In the Format dialog box, select Millimeters for Units, and click OK. 4 Click OK in the Project Units dialog box. 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the right front exterior wall.

6 On the Options Bar, click

.

7 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 9 If the Preview pane is not displayed on the left side of the Edit Assembly dialog box, click Preview. 10 On the Preview pane, ensure that Section: Modify type attributes is selected for View.

The wall section displays at its default sample height of 6096 mm.

Creating Walls | 267

Assign split regions to the wall section
11 Right-click in the preview window and click Zoom In Region. 12 Zoom in on the bottom of the wall section. 13 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Split Region. 14 Specify a point up 300 mm from the bottom of the wall on Layer 1: Masonry - Brick as the first split point.

15 Specify a point up 300 mm from the first split point on Layer 1: Masonry - Brick as the second split point.

Merge split regions in the wall section
16 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Merge Regions. 17 Select the upper split line as the region to merge.

268 | Chapter 9 Walls

The previously split regions are now merged.

Adjust the split line location
18 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Modify. 19 Select the split line, and click the 300 mm dimension value. 20 Enter 3680 mm.

Creating Walls | 269

21 Press ENTER. 22 Zoom out on the wall section.

The split line now occurs 3680 mm above the bottom of the wall.

Adjust the sample wall height
23 Scroll up to view the top of the wall. 24 Move your cursor over the top of the wall and press TAB until the outer boundary of the wall is highlighted (watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the interface to be sure you are highlighting the outer boundary), and then click to display the lock icon and the 6096 mm dimension value. 25 Click the 6096 mm dimension value, and enter 5500 mm.

270 | Chapter 9 Walls

26 Press ENTER. The sample wall height is now 5500 mm.

Add another split line
27 Zoom in on the existing split line. 28 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Split Region. 29 Specify a point up 240 mm from the existing split line on Layer 1: Masonry - Brick as the new split point.

The new split line now occurs 240 mm above the previous split line.

Creating Walls | 271

Add a new layer to the wall style
30 Under Layers, select row 1, and click Insert. 31 In row 1, select Finish 1 [4] for Function. 32 Select for Material.

33 In the Materials dialog box, under Name, select Masonry Brick - Soldier Course, and click OK. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Layers, select row 1. 35 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Assign Layers. 36 On the Preview pane, select the 240 mm high region between the split lines as shown. Place the cursor at the bottom of the region to select it.

37 Click OK three times. 38 Zoom in on the front brick wall.

The soldier course displays in the exterior wall.

272 | Chapter 9 Walls

Specify allowance for layer extension
39 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the front brick wall. 40 On the Options Bar, click .

41 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 42 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 43 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, on the Preview pane, zoom in on the bottom of the wall. 44 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Modify. 45 Select the outer boundary of the wall at the masonry brick layer.

46 Click the lock icon to unlock the masonry brick layer for layer extension. 47 Click OK three times.

Modify extended layers
48 In the Project Browser, expand Sections (Callout 1), and double-click Wall Detail. 49 Select the brick wall.

50 Using the drag control at the bottom of the brick wall, drag it down into the concrete wall approximately as shown.

Creating Walls | 273

51 On the Tools menu, click Join Geometry. 52 Select the brick layer of the wall as the first layer to join.

53 Select the concrete foundation wall as the second layer to join.

The concrete foundation wall is cut away to accommodate the brick course.

54 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the brick wall. 55 On the Options Bar, click .

56 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Constraints, enter -150 mm for Base Extension Distance, and click OK.

274 | Chapter 9 Walls

Add a wall sweep
57 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the brick wall. 58 On the Options Bar, click .

59 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 60 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 61 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Sweeps. 62 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box, click Add and do the following:
■ ■

Select Sill : Sill for Profile. In the Material field, click Concrete. Click OK. , and in the Materials dialog box, under Name, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place

■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 3860 mm for Distance. Select Base for From. Select Exterior for Side. Enter -90 mm for Offset.

63 Click OK. 64 On the Preview pane, zoom in on the applied wall sweep in the wall section.

65 Click OK three times. 66 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click 3D perspective. 67 Zoom in on the front wall, and view the sill.

Creating Walls | 275

This completes the Working with Vertically Compound Walls exercise.

Joining Walls to Floors
In this exercise, you work with joining walls and floors in section view.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Floor_wall_joins.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Draw the level 2 50 mmx255 mm wood joist floor
1 On the Settings menu, click Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog box, click the button under Format next to Length. 3 In the Format dialog box, select Millimeters for Units, and click OK. 4 Click OK in the Project Units dialog box. 5 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.

6 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Floor. 7 On the Options Bar, select Extend into wall (to core). 8 For all four walls, select the outer edge of the wall core. Use the flip arrows to toggle the selection. TIP You can select each wall or use the TAB key to select the chain of walls.

276 | Chapter 9 Walls

9 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Wood Joist 255 mm for Type, and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 12 When prompted to cut the geometry from the walls, click Yes. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Sections, and double-click Section 1. 14 Zoom in on the wall at Level 2.

The level 2 floor extends into the wall structural layer.

Draw the level 1 50 mmx255 mm wood joist floor
15 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Floor. 17 On the Options Bar, select Extend into wall (to core). 18 Select all four walls on the centerline (click each wall while pressing Ctrl).

19 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box, verify that the Type is Wood Joist 255mm, and click OK. 21 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 22 When prompted to attach the walls to the bottom of the floor, click Yes. 23 In the Project Browser, expand Sections, and double-click Section 1. 24 Zoom in on the wall at Level 1.

Creating Walls | 277

The foundation wall is trimmed by the level 1 floor. This completes the Joining Walls to Floors exercise.

Working with Foundation Walls
In this exercise, you create and modify concrete foundation walls and footings.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Wall_Functions.rvt file located in the Common folder.

1 On the Settings menu, click Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog box, click the button under Format next to Length. 3 In the Format dialog box, select Millimeters for Units, and click OK. 4 Click OK in the Project Units dialog box. 5 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

6 On the View menu, click View Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Graphics, select T.O. Footing for Underlay, and click OK. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 9 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall : Foundation - 305 mm Concrete. 10 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Select T.O. Footing for Depth. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. Select Chain. Enter 305mm for Offset.

11 Specify the outside upper left corner of the building as the first foundation wall segment start point, and then specify the outside lower left corner of the building as the first foundation wall segment endpoint.

278 | Chapter 9 Walls

12 Proceed in a counterclockwise direction and draw the remaining five foundation wall segments. Snap to the outside corners at each foundation wall segment endpoint. 13 In the Project Browser, expand 3D Views, and double-click {3D}.

Create a new 610 mm concrete footing wall type
14 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click T.O. Footing.

Creating Walls | 279

15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 16 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall : Foundation - 305 mm Concrete. 17 On the Options Bar, click .

18 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 19 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 20 In the Name dialog box, enter Foundation - 610mm Concrete for Name, and click OK. 21 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 22 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Layers, in row 2, enter 610 mm for Thickness.

23 Click OK three times.

Draw the 610 mm concrete footing
24 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Select Unconnected for Depth and enter 305 mm. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. Select Chain. Enter 460 mm for Offset.

25 Specify the outside upper left corner of the foundation as the first footing wall segment start point and then specify the outside lower left corner of the foundation as the first footing wall segment endpoint. If a warning about the objects not being visible in the current view is displayed, close the warning dialog.

280 | Chapter 9 Walls

26 Proceed in a counterclockwise direction and draw the remaining five footing wall segments. Snap to the outside corners at each footing wall segment endpoint.

27 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D}.

The concrete foundation walls and footings are now complete. This completes the Working with Foundation Walls exercise.

Working with Wall Wraps
In this exercise, you assign different wall wrap conditions to a window opening.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Wall Functions.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Creating Walls | 281

Assign window wall closure parameters
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom in on one of the level 1 windows.

Neither the interior nor the exterior wall components wrap around the window opening. 3 Select the window. 4 On the Options Bar, click .

5 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select By host for Wall Closure. 7 Click OK twice.

Assign an interior wall wrap parameter
8 Select the wall. 9 On the Options Bar, click .

10 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 12 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Default Wrapping, select Interior for At Inserts. 13 Click OK three times.

The interior metal stud wall with gypsum board now wraps around the window opening.

Assign an exterior wall wrap parameter
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the wall. 15 On the Options Bar, click .

16 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 17 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 18 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Default Wrapping, select Exterior for At Inserts. Both would wrap gypsum and brick. Exterior wraps only the brick. 19 Click OK three times.

282 | Chapter 9 Walls

The exterior brick wall now wraps around the window opening. This completes the Working with Wall Wraps exercise.

Assigning Wall Bottom and Top Attachments
In this exercise, you assign wall bottom attachments to a curved floor in 3D view and wall top attachments to reference planes in elevation view.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Attach_Top_Bottom.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Attach wall bottoms to floor surface
1 Select all four wall segments.

2 On the Options Bar, click Attach for Top/Base, and select Base for Attach Wall. 3 Select the floor as the object to attach to.

The walls are projected down to attach to the floor.

Creating Walls | 283

Attach wall tops to reference planes 4 In the Project Browser. expand Elevations. 5 Select the south wall. and double-click South. and select Top for Attach Wall. 284 | Chapter 9 Walls . click Attach for Top/Base. 6 On the Options Bar. The south wall is projected up to attach to the first reference plane. 7 Select the first reference plane as the object to attach to. expand Views (all).

11 Select the second reference plane as the object to attach to. Creating Walls | 285 . click Attach for Top/Base. and select Top for Attach Wall. 9 Select the north wall. under Elevations. The north wall is projected up to attach to the second reference plane. 10 On the Options Bar. double-click North.8 In the Project Browser.

This completes the Assigning Wall Bottom and Top Attachments exercise. 286 | Chapter 9 Walls .12 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views and double-click {3D}. This also completes the Walls lesson.

and you can change these elements individually. and they are not windows. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. Like walls. To switch panel types. grid lines. 287 . curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. you select the grid. Like windows. to resize the system. For example. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. To change grids. Unlike windows. and mullions. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. you need to change the length of the wall. panel.Curtain Systems 10 Curtain systems are not walls. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. you need to select a panel. or you can use a specific curtain system command. This affects the entire curtain system. You can add curtain systems with the wall command.

and double-click Ground Floor. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. 1 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. 288 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems .Flat Curtain System In this lesson. click Open. Creating an Entrance In this exercise.rvt file located in the Metric folder. you create a curtain system using the wall command. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. expand Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in on Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. click Wall. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. expand Views (all). you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. 4 On the Type Selector. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Open the m_Curtain_Walls.

6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. 7 Zoom in on the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. Flat Curtain System | 289 .

expand Views (all). and click OK. top and base attachments. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. 10 Zoom in on the curtain system you just added. 12 Under Constraints. specify Up to level: TOP OF ROOF for Top Constraint. expand 3D Views. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. and double-click Southeast Isometric. click Orient ➤ Northeast. 290 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . and room bounding. top constraint. 9 On the View menu. 13 Specify 1200 for Top Offset.8 In the Project Browser. 11 Select the curtain system and click .

and click Rename. and click OK. You are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. click Elevation. Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. 22 Place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line.Right now. Flat Curtain System | 291 . 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click GROUND FLOOR. under Floor Plans. right-click on the elevation name Elevation 1 . 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar.a. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. the curtain system is a single glazed panel. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and resize the crop boundary as shown. click Curtain Grid. 20 In the drawing area. using curtain grids. 18 In the Project Browser. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation.

hold CTRL and select SECOND FLOOR. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. one larger than the other. FOURTH FLOOR. SIXTH FLOOR. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. 29 In the Select Levels dialog box. Click to place another grid line. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. 27 On the Edit menu. 28 On the Edit menu. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. 25 On the Design Bar. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. click Curtain Grid. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. 292 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. click Modify. click Modify. click Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and click OK.23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. Click to create a vertical grid. and SEVENTH FLOOR. FIFTH FLOOR. THIRD FLOOR. click Copy to Clipboard. 26 Hold CTRL and select the 3 grid lines you just placed. 33 On the Design Bar.

and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. 38 Using the same method. The segment line style changes to dashed. and on the Options Bar. you add a doorway to the curtain system. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. click Add or Remove Segments. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. You do not use the Door command. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step.Next. and then select the segment above it. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. Instead. The two segments are removed. Flat Curtain System | 293 .

You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. 294 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 43 Delete the dimensions. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. 40 On the Options Bar. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. Use the following picture as a guide. and lock them. select One Segment.39 On the Design Bar. 42 Place dimensions as shown. click Curtain Grid. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels.

click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. Now. 54 On the Design Bar. click in any white space to exit the editor. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. and click Wireframe.rfa. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. This changes the graphics style of the view. under Elevations. Next. double-click Entrance Elevation. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. and click Open.TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). These panels schedule as doors. select M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. The panel changes to a double door. not as curtain panels. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. click Modify. 52 On the Type Selector. 56 In the Project Browser. Flat Curtain System | 295 . 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. 55 In the Project Browser. 49 On the File menu. Next. 50 In the Doors folder. under Floor Plans. on the new curtain system you added. 57 On the View Control Bar. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. They are part of the curtain panel category. click . Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel.

click Shading with Edges for Graphics Style. Name the file m_rvt8_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. click Wireframe for Graphics Style. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. 68 On the File menu. 296 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems .59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. The glazed panels display in blue. 62 Click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. and Material specifies the shading and patterning.rvt. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. click . This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. and the solid panels display in white. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. 61 With the panel still selected. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. 66 On the View Control Bar. 60 On the Type Selector. click System Panel : Solid. click Save As. 63 Click OK twice to close the Type Properties and Element Properties dialog boxes. 65 On the View Control Bar.

2 On the Options Bar. select Grid Line Segment. select All Empty Segments. so you remove them next. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. however. 6 On the Options Bar. select Entire Grid Line. 9 Delete the mullions below them. You are going to change some mullion joins.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Mullion. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. Flat Curtain System | 297 . 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. because they reduce the doors’ size by their widths. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in on the set of doors. there are a few that you do not want. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions.

Changing mullion joins 10 On the View Control Bar. 13 Click the top mullion control. 298 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. Two mullion join controls display. click Hidden Line for Graphics Style. 12 Click the lower mullion join control. 11 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors.

Finally. you add a curtain system using the wall command. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 10 Place the second point at the lower right side. you can also right-click and select Break at Join from the Join Conditions menu to break the mullion at both joins. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 14 On the Design Bar. Finally. 6 Under Constraints. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. 16 Save the file. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. Curved Curtain System | 299 . you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. click Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. and click OK. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. 15 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Type Selector. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. under Floor Plans. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR for Top Constraint. double-click Southeast Isometric. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. click . click Wall. Curved Curtain System In this lesson. 9 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. 5 Click . You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. double-click Ground Floor. 2 Zoom in on the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. 1 In the Project Browser. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. 8 On the Options Bar. 7 Enter 1200 for Top Offset. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. click Modify.TIP After selecting the vertical mullion.

double-click East.11 Finish the arc by clicking at the top of the arc. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 13 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. 300 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . you place grids on the system. Divide the halves into quarters. and then sixteenths. 14 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. eighths. 16 Zoom in on the cylinder. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. click Curtain Grid. Next. 15 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. You are going to use one of these snaps points. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint.

Using walls as panels 18 Using a selection box. Curved Curtain System | 301 . Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. to filter out all other elements 20 Save the file. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. you change some panels in the system. select the bottom layer of panels. Remember to click from the selection except Curtain Walls. Next. click Modify. 19 On the Type Selector. click Basic Wall: Generic . This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system.300mm.17 On the Design Bar.

9 Select the extrusion. under Elevations. 7 Start the sketch at the upper lefthand reference line intersection and finish at the lower righthand reference line intersection. 2 In the Metric templates folder. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Model Lines. click . and on the Options Bar. double-click Metric Curtain Wall Panel. 11 On the Design Bar. 1 On the File menu. and click OK. . and click . specify Glass for Subcategory. 5 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 10 Under Identity Data. enter 100 for Depth. and on the Options Bar. click 12 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. click New ➤ Family. 302 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems .rft. 8 On the Design Bar. click Lines.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. double-click Exterior. 3 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Options Bar.

17 Load the Curtain Panel . select Curtain Panel . 20 On the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. 26 On the Type Selector. and click Flip Orientation. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. click System Panel . 21 Select the curved arc curtain wall. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family.Solid. All the panels change to the solid panel. 14 On the File menu. Curved Curtain System | 303 . click curved curtain system.Pattern. click Modify.Pattern. 15 Close the family file by clicking Close on the File menu. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. and save the family as Curtain Panel . click Save As. right-click and select Select Panels along Horizontal Grid from the Select Panels menu. 19 Highlight a panel in the arc. . double-click FOURTH FLOOR.rfa family. 25 Highlight a panel in the arc.Pattern. 23 On the View toolbar. and then click . 24 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Project Browser. and return to your project file. 16 On the File menu. 22 Right-click. Hold Shift and spin the model so that you can see the The curved curtain system’s structure now matches that of the main part of the building. right-click and select Select Panels along Horizontal Grid from the Select Panels menu. All fifth floor panels are selected. under Floor Plans. All fourth floor panels are selected.rfa.13 On the Design Bar.

except at the GROUND FLOOR level. and select Radius and specify 50 mm for the radius. double-click Metric Profile. 5 In the Metric Templates folder. 27 Save the file. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. click New ➤ Family.rft. click Family Category and Parameters. For vertical mullions. enter 8 for Sides. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click . 6 On the Settings menu. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 304 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . under Elevations. 7 Specify Mullion for Profile Usage. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. and click OK. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. double-click East. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. click Lines.The finished arc wall should look like the following picture. 8 On the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Options Bar. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 On the File menu. click Mullion.

and click OK. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. Curved Curtain System | 305 . Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. clear Fine. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog box. 13 On the Options Bar. 17 Open the m_Cylinder Mullion . 15 On the File menu.rfa file from the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Detail Components folder.10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. 11 On the Design Bar.detail. Click again to specify the ending point. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click the Training Files icon. click Detail Component. click Visibility. 19 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown.

and click Visibility. and click OK. 27 Load the Cylinder Mullion. specify Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion for Profile. 29 Click . double-click Southeast Isometric. 21 Select the detail component. click Mullion. 31 Click . under 3D Views. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. right-click and use Select Mullions on gridline from the Select Mullions menu. 38 On the Options Bar. 28 In the Project Browser. and click OK.rfa family.rfa. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. 41 In the Project Browser. 24 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. select Circular Mullion for Family. 306 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 22 In the Family element visibility settings dialog box. double-click GROUND FLOOR.20 On the Design Bar. and click DELETE. After the new profile is loaded. 26 On the File menu. 25 Close the family file by clicking Close on the File menu. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. select All Empty Segments. and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. You have placed more mullions than you want. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. click Duplicate. 23 On the File menu. click Modify. 34 In the Type Properties dialog box. it can be added as a mullion type. 40 On the Design Bar. 33 Click Edit/New. 36 Under Construction. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. so next you remove the unwanted ones. under Floor Plans. click Save As. click Modify to exit placing mullions. clear Coarse and Medium. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 30 On the Modelling tab. and return to the project file. 37 Click OK twice.

43 Save the file. 4 On the Design Bar. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. and you can click to select them all. double-click TOP OF ROOF. In this lesson. and press TAB. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in on the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. click Pick Walls. and a ruled curtain system. a storefront system. select Defines slope. under Floor Plans. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. All the inside faces highlight. Additional Curtain Systems | 307 . and then apply those custom elements to the system. TIP To chain select all the walls. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. you learned to create a curved curtain system. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 1 In the Project Browser. make custom curtain panels and mullions. 5 On the Options Bar.

18 On the View Control Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. Storefront System In this exercise. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. 308 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 9 Under Constraints. 13 Zoom in on the skylight. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. click System Family: Sloped Glazing for Family. 16 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. select Entire Grid Line. click Roof Properties. and click OK. click Finish Roof. 14 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Shaded with Edges for Graphics Style. 12 On the View Control Bar. double-click Southeast Isometric. click Modify. 11 In the Project Browser. click Hidden Line for Graphics Style. click Mullion. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. under 3D Views. 10 On the Design Bar. 19 Save the file.7 On the Design Bar.

4 On the Type Selector. 1 In the Project Browser. click Wall. 2 Zoom in on the wall at the eastern-most area of the model. This curtain wall cuts the original wall. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Unconnected for Height. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 5 On the Options Bar. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. Additional Curtain Systems | 309 . You are going to place a storefront system in this wall.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and enter 2400. 7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. under Floor Plans.

and click . enter 10200 mm. The Justification (Grid 1) specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. This specifies an exact length for the wall. and the Spacing (Grid 2) is set to 2400 mm. you find Number (Grid 1). 310 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . You see these same parameters for Grid 2. For this wall. 12 Select the storefront wall. and Offset (Grid 1).8 Click the temporary dimension. or end. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. 10 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. Click OK. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog box and return to the Element Properties dialog box that displays the instance parameters. The Layout (Grid 2) is set to Fixed Distance. The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. 11 Zoom in on the new storefront wall. even if the wall height changes. Under the Pattern heading. enter 45 for Angle (Grid 1) and 15 for Angle (Grid 2). By setting the Angle (Grid 1) value. and the Spacing (Grid 1) is set to 1524 mm. The type parameters under the Pattern heading create the predefined layout. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. The Offset (Grid 1) is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. 13 Click Edit/New to open the Type Properties dialog box. Justification (Grid 1). For more information about these curtain wall parameters. The Number (Grid 1) is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. The Grid 2 counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. To see how the grid layout is defined. the Layout (Grid 1) is set to Maximum Spacing. Angle (Grid 1). click Modify. and press ENTER. center. This means that the panel heights will be exactly at a 2400 mm height. 9 On the Design Bar. which is specified in the type. double-click Southeast Isometric. see the Revit Building help. 14 After you have looked at the Pattern parameters.

2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 17 Select a curtain grid. Additional Curtain Systems | 311 .16 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Hidden Line for Graphics Style. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. and select All Empty Segments on the Options Bar. click Mullion. under 3D Views. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the View Control Bar. double-click Southeast Isometric. 18 Save the file. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront.

Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. making sure Thin Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. A panel between the 2 lines is created. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the thin line. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. 312 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 8 Select the highlighted line. 6 Click the highlighted line.5 Place the cursor at the bottom edge of the SECOND FLOOR. and highlight the thin line.

click Curtain Grid. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. click System Panel : Solid. 9 Select the panel. 15 On the Type Selector. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 14 Highlight a top level glazed panel. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. 12 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. 16 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. embed a curtain system inside another wall. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. Additional Curtain Systems | 313 . 10 Click OK to close the Element Properties dialog box. Finally. and define a ruled curtain system. 17 Save the file. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. quarters.A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. and click . Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. quarters. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. and then eighths. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. 13 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. right-click and use Select Panels along Grid 2 from the Select Panels menu. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. and then eighths. Next. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system.

314 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems .

you can add different views of the building model directly to the sheet. and schedules. Sheets are defined by borders. 315 . and are accessible from the Project Browser. To create a printed or plotted set of drawings from the views in your building model. you learn how to create drawings from a building information model in an Autodesk Revit Building project. elevation. The model views that you can add to sheets include plan.Creating Drawings 11 In this tutorial. usually contain a title block. three-dimensional views. section. begin by first creating sheets. which are a type of view in a project. Depending on the type of drawing that you want to create.

Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. and observe that the changes are made in the floor and furniture plan views of the building model. you enter the project information and create a drawing sheet with a title block that displays the project information. Open m_Drawing_Exercise located in the Metric folder. You turn off the visibility of the furniture in the duplicated view to create a floor plan view and rename the original view as the furniture plan. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. You then add the floor plan view to the sheet. click the Training Files icon. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Creating a Drawing Sheet In this exercise. You also reorient the swing of one of the doors in the floor plan view on the sheet. you create a drawing sheet that includes a floor plan of the first level of the building model. adjust the view scale. how to create new views from a building model. You begin by duplicating an existing floor plan view that includes furniture. 316 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . you learn how to create sheets within an Revit Building project. Next. and dimension the exterior walls of the building to complete the floor plan drawing sheet. click Open. The project used in the following exercises is a small office building model. how to add views to the sheets.

A copy of the Level 1 Floor plan view is displayed in the Project Browser.Copy the Level 1 floor plan view to create a Level 1 Furniture plan view 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. right-click Level 1. 3 Right-click Copy of Level 1. click Visibility/Graphics. and specialty equipment in the Level 1 Floor Plan view 6 On the View menu. click the Model Categories tab. lighting fixtures. The changes in visibility are applied to this view only. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. expand Views (all). and specialty equipment continue to display in the Level 1 Furniture plan. furniture. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. furniture. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 317 . and click OK. Turn off visibility for casework. and specialty equipment are no longer displayed in the Level 1 floor plan view. enter Level 1 Furniture. double-click Level 1 to redisplay the floor plan. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 10 Click OK. 2 Under Floor Plans. Enter the project information to display in the title block of the drawing sheet 11 On the Settings menu. 8 Select Include categories from all disciplines in the list above. click Edit for Project Address. and click Duplicate. furniture. click Project Information. Casework. 5 In the Project Browser. 9 Under Visibility. Casework. and expand Floor Plans. 4 In the Rename View dialog box.

15 Continue to change the remaining type parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 31 March. 2005 for Project Issue Date. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. and click View. Enter J. 16 Click OK. The text fields of the title block on the sheet automatically display the corresponding project information that you entered in step 14. Smith for Client Name. Enter Client Approved for Project Status. MA 12345 14 Click OK. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. 17 On View tab of the Design Bar. click Sheet. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar.13 In the Edit Text dialog box. Enter Residence for Project Name. select A0 metric. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. and click OK. right-click. 18 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 318 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project.

select Floor Plan: Level 1. 21 When the title block highlights. and select the title block. click . 25 In the Views dialog box. 24 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Identity Data. The Level 1 floor plan view is displayed on the drawing sheet. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 319 . on the Options Bar. expand Sheets (all). but the scale of the view is too small for the drawing sheet.Unnamed. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A101 . 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click to place the view in the center of the drawing sheet. and you can modify it within the sheet by activating the Level 1 floor plan view and changing its scale. enter Ground Floor Plan for Sheet Name. 19 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar.NOTE The Project Path parameter in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. 26 Move the cursor to the center of the drawing sheet. 23 Ground Floor Plan is displayed in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. and click Add View to Sheet. View scale is a property of the view. click Add View. and click OK.

and click View Properties. you would see that the scale of the Level 1 floor plan view is now 1:20. and click View Properties. select 1:20 for View Scale. click Activate View. under Graphics. 320 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . on the View menu. and drag the grips that display on the scale to lengthen it. The scale of the view on the sheet changes. 32 Select the viewport. 29 In the Element Properties dialog box. The border and the title block are no longer grayed out. indicating the view is deactivated. indicating that the Level 1 floor plan View is active and you can modify it. 28 Right-click the view. 31 Select the viewport and from the Type Selector. Any changes that you make to it on the sheet while it is active display when you open the Level 1 floor plan view. and click OK. If you were to open the Level 1 floor plan view. Center the view on the sheet and reposition the drawing scale 30 On the View menu. 33 Drag the viewport to the center of the drawing sheet. right-click.27 With the view selected. click Deactivate View. The border and title block are grayed out. click Viewport : Title w Line.

■ 38 Dimension the west exterior wall of the building by selecting the outer faces of the north and south exterior walls and placing the dimension to the left of the west wall. as shown in the following illustration. 40 Click the control arrows until the door swings open to the interior. 36 On the Options Bar. and select Wall faces for Prefer. click . and select the door on the north exterior wall (in the upper right corner). and click to place the dimension. 37 Dimension the north wall of the building: ■ Select the outer face of the west exterior vertical wall. and click Activate View. click Dimension. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 321 . and then select the outer face of the east exterior vertical wall.Dimension the exterior walls of the building 34 Right-click on the viewport on the drawing sheet. as shown in the following illustration. 35 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. This creates aligned dimensions that originate at the wall faces. Reorient the door in the upper exterior wall 39 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor above the north exterior wall. click Modify.

The two dimensions that you added to the view in the previous steps have been added to this view. 43 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Level 1. the change is also made in the Level 1 Furniture plan. however. are specific to the view in which they are created. the changes are made within the building model and not restricted to the current view. but the door reflects the change you made to its orientation in the Level 1 floor plan. This means that when you reoriented the door swing in the Level 1 floor plan. and click Deactivate View. double-click Level 1 Furniture. 322 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . Adding a Sheet to the Project. When you change the geometry of the building model while the view is activated. and the door is updated. Dimensions.41 Select the view. right-click. 42 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. The dimensions that you added to the Level 1 floor plan view are not displayed.

2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. the new sheet. m_Drawing_Exercise.Furniture Plan Level 1. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box.Adding a Sheet to the Project In this exercise. under Identity Data. A102 . enter Furniture Plan Level 1 for Sheet Name. 3 Select the title block. select A0 metric. and adjust the scale of the view to create a furniture plan drawing. Furniture Plan Level 1 is displayed in the title block as the sheet name. In the Project Browser. and click OK.rvt. and click OK. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and on the Options Bar. add the furniture plan view. under Sheets (all). you add a new sheet to the project. click . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 323 . is displayed. The sheet is incrementally named A102. click Sheet. Add a new sheet to the project 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

Change the lamp type in the furniture plan 1 In the drawing area. 6 On the View Control Bar.Change the scale of the view before you add it to the sheet 5 In the Project Browser. and click Activate View. 5 Select M_Floor Lamp 1 : 100watt Halogen in the Type Selector to change the lamp type. 8 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Design Bar.Furniture Plan Level 1. click Modify. and click to place the view. m_Drawing_Exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and select 1:20. 9 Center the cursor in the drawing area of the sheet. under Floor Plans. and then observe that the changes are also made in the Level 1 Furniture plan. right-click on the view on sheet A102. 4 In the Type Selector. verify that M_Floor Lamp 2 : 150 watt Incandescent is displayed. under Floor Plans. double-click A102 . 2 Zoom in on the lower left corner of the building. You change a lamp type and the length of an interior wall in the furniture plan view on Sheet A102. double-click Level 1 Furniture. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 324 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 7 In the Project Browser. and select the lamp next to the lounge chair. under Sheets (all). click the scale value. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. click and drag Level 1 Furniture onto the sheet.rvt. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet In this exercise.

12 Proceed to the next exercise. and press ENTER. 7 On the Design Bar. furniture. 11 Select the same wall you selected in step 8 to view the change in dimension. and notice that Moves with Nearby Elements is selected in the Options Bar. 8 Select the wall as shown in the following illustration. The changes made to the lamp. enter 5200 mm. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 325 . 10 On the Window menu. click Modify. chair. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets. and file cabinet adjacent to the wall move when the wall is resized. select Floor Plan: Level 1 Furniture. and the wall position in Sheet A102 are reflected in the Level 1 Furniture plan view.6 Select one of the furniture components. 9 Click the temporary dimension value of the distance between the wall and the centerline of the exterior horizontal wall. The desk.

Create a callout view 1 In the Project Browser. you learn how to create new elevation. and section views of the building model and add them to a single drawing sheet. 4 On the Design Bar. and move it to the position shown in the following illustration. 3 Draw a rectangle around the room in the lower left corner of the drawing to define the boundaries of the room. click Callout. A callout tag is placed inside the walls of the building model.rvt. and select the dashed callout view border. under Floor Plans. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.Creating New Views to Add to Sheets In this exercise. click Modify. 326 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . m_Drawing_Exercise. callout. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Select the blue border grip adjacent to the view tag. double-click Level 1 Furniture.

click Sheet. click Add View. and double-click the callout tag to display the callout view. 10 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and select 1:20. select A0 Metric.Unnamed. TIP You can also drag the Floor Plan: Callout of Level 1 Furniture view from the Project Browser to place it on the sheet. select Floor Plan: Callout of Level 1 Furniture. 11 In the Views dialog box. Change the callout view scale. and add the callout view to a new sheet 7 On the View Control Bar. is displayed under Sheets (all) in the Project Browser. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 327 . click Modify.6 On the Design Bar. click the scale value. A103 . and click OK. and click to place the view. and click Add View to Sheet. 12 Move the cursor to the upper left corner of the sheet. The new sheet. 9 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. position the view.

double-click Level 1 Furniture. the elevation symbol points to the closest wall. 17 Move the cursor to the lower left room. and place it on the sheet 15 Adjust your zoom to display the lower left corner of the view. click Modify. 18 On the Design Bar. and click to place the elevation symbol. 14 Zoom in around the view tag of the callout. and zoom out to view the elevation extents. select the elevation symbol arrow. Create a new elevation view. The tag now displays the drawing sheet and detail number.13 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. The elevation extents do not display when you select the body of the elevation symbol. As you move the cursor. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor in the drawing area. 328 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 16 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Elevation. center it in the room so that it points north.

21 In the Project Browser under Views (all). The symbol is displayed as in the following illustration. and click Add View to Sheet. Add the new elevation views to sheet A103 22 In the Project Browser under Sheets (all).a and Elevation 1 . select Elevation: Elevation 1 .Unnamed. and notice that two new elevation views display: Elevation 1 . expand Elevations.c. 25 Click to place the elevation next to the callout view on the drawing sheet. click Add View.19 Select the body of the elevation symbol. 23 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 24 In the Views dialog box. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 329 .a. double-click A103 . 20 Select the box under the elevation symbol to create a new elevation view 180 degrees from the first elevation view you created when you placed the elevation symbol.

28 Zoom in on the elevation tag in the lower left room. double-click Level 1 Furniture.Furniture Plan Level 1. and add it to the sheet 29 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. The sheet (drawing) number and detail IDs of the views are displayed in the symbol. double-click A102 .c to the sheet either with the Add View command or by dragging it from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 27 In the Project Browser. 330 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . under Sheets (all).26 Add Elevation 1 . 30 Zoom in on the right side of the building. Create a section view.

32 In the Options Bar.31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 33 Add a section line that cuts through the right side of the building: ■ Click outside the north exterior wall of the building to place the start point of the section line and the section head (section tag). ■ 34 Click the arrows at the head of the section line to flip the section so it points to the west. click Section. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 331 . Move the cursor down and click outside of the south exterior wall of the building to place the section tail and complete the section line. select 1:50 for Scale.

click Save As. 44 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Add View. 39 Right-click on the view. on the File menu. modify the building model from your sheets. 43 Place the section view on the drawing sheet as shown in the following illustration. and click Activate View. and click OK. click Custom for View Scale. 45 Close the exercise file. add views to your sheets. and click View Properties. select Section: Section 1. you learned how to create new drawing sheets. 38 Right-click on the viewport. elevations. By completing the exercises in this lesson. 37 In the Views dialog box.35 In the Project Browser under Sheets (all). The drawing sheet is now complete. and click Add View to Sheet. and click Deactivate View. 36 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and to create new views of your building model. 40 In the Element Properties dialog box. and sections. 332 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . double-click A103 . 41 Enter 25 for Scale Value.Unnamed. under Graphics. such as callouts. 42 Right-click on the view.

Upgrade : 6 mm M_Wall Tag : 12mm Door Tag metric Window Tag metric Using Legends | 333 . On construction documents. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. you add the completed symbol legend to a cover sheet for the construction documents.Filled Level Head . Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or noteblock. doors. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. and door frames. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ M_Section Head . door frame schedule. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. enter Symbol Legend for Name. and click OK. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Building building model. Finally. Open m_Legends. 6 Add the following symbols to the legend view. and click Rename. windows. 3 Right-click Legend 1. 4 In the Rename View dialog box. click Open. click Symbol. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Add symbols to the legend 5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that identifies them. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click New ➤ Legend. 2 In the Project Browser. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. click the Training Files icon. expand Legends. On construction documents.Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. and so on).rvt located in the Metric folder.

expand Sheets (all). 15 Working from the top down. 14 Enter Detail Callout (detail #/sheet #) for the text note. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. click Modify to end the command. 17 In the Project Browser. 12 Under Text. 334 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Marker (Level name/Elevation in mm) Wall Tag (Wall Type #) Door Tag (Door #) Window Tag (Window Type #) Place the symbol legend on a sheet 16 In the Project Browser.Cover Sheet to open it in the drawing area. verify that Text : 3mm is selected. and double-click A100 . select Text : 6mm. enter 3mm for Name. drag it to the lower-right corner of the cover sheet. click . you create a text type with the necessary size. click Symbol Legend. and click OK twice. 8 In the Type Selector. On the Design Bar. and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. click Text. and click to place it. click Edit/New.Create a text type 7 Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. 9 On the Options bar. 18 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. 13 In the Type Selector. You do this by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. enter 3mm for Text Size.

2 In the Project Browser. Creating a Wall Type Legend. Using Legends | 335 . 4 In the Rename View dialog box. 19 On the File menu.rvt. and click Rename. click Legend Component. Add components to the legend 5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Save As. enter Wall Type Legend for Name. Creating a Wall Type Legend In this exercise.The symbol legend is added to the project cover sheet. expand Legends. click New ➤ Legend. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. 3 Right-click Legend 1.Brick on CMU for Family. 7 Select Section for View. 8 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. You then add the completed legend to a project cover sheet. 20 Navigate to your preferred directory. and click OK. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. 6 On the Options Bar.138mm Partition (1-hr) directly below the first wall. name the file m_Legends_in progress. m_Legends_in progress. and click Save. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 Repeat the procedure to place a wall of type Interior . select Walls: Basic Wall: Exterior .rvt.

verify that Text : 3mm is selected. 16 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the remaining text annotations on the upper wall component.Add text to the legend 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Options bar. and click Modify on the Design Bar. 13 Click in the far left portion of the Brick on CMU wall to specify the leader start point. 11 In the Type Selector. click Text. 14 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. The text note with leader is added to the legend. click to add a single-segment leader. 17 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. 336 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 15 Enter (1) Layer 16mm GWB.

draw a detail line that extends as far as the longest component callout. select Medium Lines. you use the Match Type tool to convert a wall in the floor plan to the component type used in the Wall Type Legend. click Wall Type Legend. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. Place the legend on a sheet 25 Using extension reference lines. 21 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2.Add titles to the legend components 18 In the Type Selector. 28 On the Design Bar. and enter Wall Type 1. drag it onto the sheet. 27 In the Project Browser. You capture the wall type properties in the tool. The wall type legend is added to the project cover sheet. click Save. 19 On the Options Bar. and click to place it above the symbol legend. add an identical detail line below the lower component. 20 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. Using a Legend View to Match Types. 24 Below the title text of the upper component. double-click A100 . click Modify to end the command. click Detail Lines. select Text : 6mm. Using a Legend View to Match Types In this exercise. 23 In the Type Selector. click to add text without a leader. 22 On the Design Bar. and then select the wall to which you want to apply the same properties.Cover Sheet to open it in the drawing area. 29 On the File menu. Using Legends | 337 . 26 In the Project Browser.

2 On the Window menu. Match a component type 3 On the Tools toolbar. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. select the wall type 1 component. click Tile. select Medium for Detail Level. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. The open drawings are both visible. 338 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings .Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. so that you are zoomed in to the walls. m_Legends_in_progress. 4 In the Wall Type Legend view. Tile views in the drawing window 1 Close all project view drawings except Floor Plan: Level 1 and Wall Type Legend. click . 7 Click on the wall at the top of the view. 5 In the floor plan view. 6 Draw a rectangle around the upper-left corner of the floor plan. enter ZR to zoom to a specific region.rvt. 8 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing.

If you select By Sheet. In general. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. When you use this option. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. 4 Click on the value for Description. verify that By Project is selected for Numbering Method. Specify a revision numbering method 1 On the Settings menu. click Close.The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 1 from the Wall Type Legend. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Revisions. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog box. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. Using Revision Tracking | 339 . and enter Moved window and added second window to Living Room. For example. 10 Proceed to the next lesson. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. 2 In the Revisions dialog box. Using Revision Tracking. Open m_Revisions.rvt located in the Metric folder. you use the Revisions command to open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. 6 Verify that Visible is selected. the revision is locked and issued to the field. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. When Issued is selected. or changes in building material availability. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. 9 On the File menu. In this exercise. Using Revision Tracking Revit Building provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. You can create a sequence of revisions. if the active revision is number 1. and enter a date. click Open. contractor inquiries. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Add a revision to the project 3 Click on the value for Release Date. Using the table. These changes can be due to owner requests. yet as concise as possible. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. click the Training Files icon. 5 Verify that Issued is cleared.

8 On the File menu. m_Revisions-in progress. you make changes to the project floor plan. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. and press ENTER. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select the window. Modify a window 1 In the Project Browser. The selected window is moved to the left 900 mm.rvt. name the file m_Revisions-in progress. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched.If Visible is not selected. 2 Double-click Level 1 to open it in the drawing area. enter 1200 mm. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project.rvt. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. and click Save. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. In most instances. 9 Navigate to your preferred directory. including revision number and revision date. 3 In the small empty room. Sketching Revision Clouds. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. 7 Click OK. expand Views. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. and expand Floor Plans. 4 Select the dimension value to the left of the window. 340 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . click Save As. Revision clouds have read-only properties.

14 On the Design Bar. 8 Click to place the second window. Tagging Revision Clouds. m_Revisions-in progress. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. click near the windows you have changed. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click Modify to end the command. 13 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. 7 Move the cursor to the right until the distance from the midpoint is 1800 mm. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. Revit Building is now in sketch mode. 12 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. click Save. 11 In the drawing area. and click 6 Select the midpoint of the casement window as the start point.Add a window 5 Verify that the modified window is still selected in the drawing area.rvt. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified windows. Add a revision cloud 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Using Revision Tracking | 341 . on the Edit toolbar. you load a revision tag into the project. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Finish Sketch. 15 On the File menu. click Revision Cloud. 9 On the Design Bar. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing.

If the cursor is just inside the cloud. 9 Click to place the tag. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. In the Tags dialog box. browse to Annotations\M_Revision Tag. under Floor Plans. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. and click Open. click Tag. Working with Revisions. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. click OK. click Save. and because the revision is the first in the project. the cloud is tagged as number 1. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. click Tags. clear Leader. 8 In the drawing area. m_Revisions-in progress. 10 On the File menu. 3 In the Tags dialog box. Add a revised view to a sheet 3 In the Project Browser. and drag it onto the sheet view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Tag a revision cloud 7 On the Options Bar. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box.rvt. 6 In the Tags. 5 In the Open dialog box. you create additional revisions in the revision table. click New ➤ Sheet.Load a revision tag 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You then issue a revision. and click OK. on which you place a revised view. you create a sheet view in your project. A new sheet view is created in the project. 4 In the drawing area. 2 On the Options Bar. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. you need to add one. select Level 1. verify that A0 Metric is selected.rfa. 4 Click Load. click to place the floor plan. Create a sheet view 1 On the View menu. dialog box. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud. scroll down to Revision Clouds. Working with Revisions In this exercise. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. 342 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 5 Enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. 6 Draw a rectangle around the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. Because you chose to number by project. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed.

14 Click OK. Create additional revisions 10 Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. NOTE After you issue a revision. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. Using Revision Tracking | 343 . You do this by issuing the revision. On the Settings menu. you can no longer modify it. You can continue to add revisions. 15 On the File menu. under Add. 13 If you want to hide issued revisions in the drawing. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing.The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. click Close. 12 Enter the appropriate information for this revision. clear Visible for each issued revision. you prevent further changes to the revision. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. enter a name for Issued to. click Revisions. and click OK. 9 Select Issued. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. On the Settings menu. 8 In the Revisions dialog box. click New. Issue a revision 7 After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. 11 In the Revisions dialog box. click Revisions.

344 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings .

like a standard detail that you want to add to a library. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. In this tutorial. plywood.Detailing 12 In this tutorial. 345 . The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. you learn how to create details in Autodesk Revit Building. These components scale with the building model. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. you also learn how to change the detail component display order and visibility settings in a detail to create depth and show varying levels of detail. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. and metal studs.

Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. Modify the section view 1 In the Project Browser. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. The section line that you see in the floor plan indicates that a section view has been added to the project. you trace over the building model geometry. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. The callout defines the extents of the callout view. In the callout view. add detail components. expand Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes.rvt located in the Metric folder. you create a callout view that references the foundation sill of the house. Open m_Cape_House. click the Training Files icon. and double-click First Floor. you detail the foundation sill of a small house. You create the callout view by adding a callout to the section view. 346 | Chapter 12 Detailing . The callout view is a larger view of the area that you define in the section view with the callout. expand Floor Plans. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. In order to detail from the building model. Creating a Callout View In this exercise. click Open.

click Modify and select the section line. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 347 . 3 Click the break symbol to create a gap in the section line. Blue grips and a break symbol display on the section line. 4 Select and move the blue grips of the interior end points of the section line so the section line is displayed as in the following illustration.2 On the Design Bar.

348 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select 1:5 for Scale. and click the tab in the context menu. 6 Double-click the head of the section line to display the section view. and select the callout border. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. click Callout. 9 Add the callout by drawing a rectangle around the left side of the foundation: ■ Click in the section view where the upper left corner of the callout rectangle displays in the following illustration. ■ Reposition the callout head 10 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. 11 Select the grip near the callout head and move it to the bottom left side of the view as shown in the following illustration. right-click in the Design Bar. click Modify. The callout border and tag highlight and display blue grips.Add a callout to the section view to specify the callout view 5 On the Design Bar. Click in the section view where the lower right corner displays. click Modify.

The callout view is displayed. select the First Floor level line. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 349 . 16 In the view. Select Hidden Line for Model Graphics Style. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. click View Properties.Display and modify the callout view 12 On the Design Bar. 13 On the View menu. Notice that the alignment of the level is locked to the site level. change the following instance parameters: ■ ■ Enter Section Detail @ Foundation Sill for View Name. click Modify and double-click the callout head. 15 Click OK.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Cape_House. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. select Wide Lines. Detailing the View In this exercise. click Lines. select Chain and click . You start by adding a filled region that represents the sloped grade outside of the foundation wall. and an anchor bolt. TIP If you do not see the Filled Region command. 3 In the Type Selector. you detail the view of the foundation sill. TIP Enter SO on your keyboard to turn off snapping as you sketch. 350 | Chapter 12 Detailing . siding.17 Proceed to the next exercise. sub-flooring. Detailing the View. They are also view specific. 2 On the Design Bar. turn off the display of some of the Design Bar tabs. click Filled Region. 5 Trace the region representing the sloped grade using the following illustration for reference. Notice that the Design Bar is now in Sketch mode and the model geometry is grayed out.rvt. as well as detail lines. Exact dimensions are not important. Create a filled region that represents the sloped grade outside the foundation wall 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and then add detail components to the detail that represent lumber. which means that any detail components. 4 On the Options Bar. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. region objects. and insulation objects.

11 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 9 In the Name dialog box. select <Invisible lines>. 14 In the Type Selector. click in the Fill Pattern type parameter Value field. enter Earth for Name.6 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. If you are zoomed in too far. The earth fill pattern is displayed in the filled region. NOTE You may have to zoom out to view the earth fill pattern in the filled region. 12 Click OK three times. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. 15 On the Design Bar. the pattern does not display. click Edit/New. click Modify and select the two lines shown in the following illustration. click Finish Sketch to complete the filled region. 13 On the Design Bar. select EARTH. click Region Properties. under Name and Pattern. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 351 .

select M_Dimension Lumber-Section 38X235.rfa. 18 In the Open dialog box. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the lumber. select the following lumber components: ■ ■ ■ 38X140 38X235 38X286 20 Click Open. select M_Dimension Lumber-Section. 352 | Chapter 12 Detailing . click Detail Component. navigate to Detail Components\Structural\Wood in the Metric Library. 22 Press the Spacebar to rotate the Lumber Section counter-clockwise.Add lumber detail components 16 On the Design Bar. 19 At the bottom of the dialog box. click . 21 In the Type Selector. 17 On the Options Bar. 23 Place the 38X235 Lumber component in the detail view as shown in the following illustration.

Section: 38x140. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 353 . and place it in the detail view. select M_Dimension Lumber. 25 In the Type Selector.24 Place a 38X235 lumber component as shown in the following illustration.

Add a plywood detail component to the exterior wall face 29 Place another plywood component on the exterior face of the wall as shown in the following illustration. 28 Place the plywood component above the last 38X235 that you added as shown in the following illustration. select M_Plywood : 25mm. TIP You may need to use the Align tool to place the plywood component.Add a plywood detail component to represent the sub-flooring 26 On the Design Bar. 354 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 27 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component.

until enough lap siding displays to cover it. click Detail Component. ■ ■ 40 Click OK twice. Verify Detail Rotation is set to None. and click 31 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click to place the lap siding. Select Inside. and click OK. change the following type parameters: ■ ■ Select m_lap siding for Detail. 37 In the Type Properties dialog box. 36 In the Element Properties dialog box. select the plywood on the exterior face of the wall. 38 In the Name dialog box. click Modify. click Repeating Detail. click . 35 On the Options Bar. enter Lap Siding for Name.30 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. Add an anchor bolt detail component 32 On the Design Bar. Verify Fill Available Space is selected for Layout. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box. 33 In the Type Selector. When you place the repeating detail component. . Move the cursor up along the plywood component. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 355 . Add a lap siding to the exterior wall as a repeating detail component 34 On the Design Bar. this parameter determines the appropriate spacing between the repeated components so that they fill the space that you select evenly. and click OK. select m_anchorbolt and place it in the detail view as shown in the following illustration. enter 19 mm for Thickness. 41 Add the lap siding to the plywood on the exterior face: ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the plywood detail component. click Edit/New.

42 Proceed to the next exercise. Select and move the blue grips on the repeating detail line to shorten or lengthen the lap siding. 2 In the Type Selector. on the Design Bar. Adding Detail Lines. you add lines to your detail. meaning they display only in this view. they are view specific. 356 | Chapter 12 Detailing . click Wide Lines. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. Like detail components. click Detail Lines.NOTE You may need to move your cursor above the crop region of the detail view to place the lap siding along the entire length of the plywood. click Modify and select the repeating lap siding detail component. 3 Sketch detail lines to enclose the bottom end of the lap siding as shown in the following illustration. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. If you need to make modifications to the lap siding after you place it. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. The lap siding is displayed along the plywood. m_Cape_House.

click Detail Lines.4 On the View menu. and click OK. 12 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Type Selector. Create a filled region that represents the15 mm gypsum board 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 13 Trace over the interior wall face as shown in the following illustration. 9 Add two more detail lines as shown in the following illustration. select Chain. select . select Medium Lines. The model geometry that displays underneath the detail components and lines is grayed out. and click . click Filled Region. 6 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Type Selector. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. sketch a 20 x 100 mm baseboard. select Medium lines. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 357 . click View Properties. select As underlay for the Display Model instance parameter. 8 Using the underlay inside wall face and floor as references.

19 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. click in the Fill pattern type parameter value field. and click OK.14 On the Design Bar. 17 In the Name dialog box. 21 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. under Name and Pattern. 358 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter Plasterboard for Name. select Gypsum-Plaster. 20 Click OK three times. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. 18 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Finish Sketch to view the gypsum board. click Edit/New. click Region Properties.

If there were no filled region to represent the foundation walls. you turn off the display of the model geometry. select . click Edit/New. enter Vapor Barrier for Name. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Adding a Vapor Barrier and Insulation In this exercise. 25 Trace a rectangle over the foundation wall. Adding a Vapor Barrier and Insulation. you add a vapor barrier and insulation to the detail. 30 In the Type Properties dialog box. 28 In the Type Properties dialog box. click in the Fill pattern type parameter value field. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 359 . 29 In the Name dialog box. 33 On the Design Bar.Create a filled region that represents the foundation wall 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. 31 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. under Modify Subcategories. click Filled Region. 27 In the Element Properties dialog box. Near the end of this lesson. click Duplicate.rvt. Add a vapor barrier 1 On the Settings menu. and click OK. click New. 3 In the New Subcategory dialog box. under Name and Pattern. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. select Medium Lines. click Finish Sketch to view the concrete filled region. click Region Properties. select Concrete. and click OK. 32 Click OK three times. m_Cape_House. click Line Styles. 26 On the Design Bar. the region would be blank. 2 In the Line Styles dialog box. enter Concrete for Name. 23 In the Type Selector.

Adding Break Lines. 7 In the Type Selector. 8 On the Options Bar.4 Under Lines Styles. click Detail Lines. 11 On the Options Bar. select Vapor Barrier. Add insulation 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. make the following changes to Vapor Barrier: ■ ■ ■ Select 3 for Line Weight/Projection. 12 Sketch the insulation: ■ ■ Click at the top and to the right of the exterior wall face underlay of the wall to specify the start point. 360 | Chapter 12 Detailing . click and enter 28mm for Offset. 9 Click the right face of the interior wall to create a line as shown in the following illustration. Select Dash for Line Pattern. enter 120 mm for Width and 65 mm for Offset to center. you add break lines to the detail. Move your cursor down to the top of the 38x140 and click to specify the endpoint. 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Select Black for Line Color. click Insulation. 5 Click OK to complete the new line style. Adding Break Lines In this exercise.

7 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. verify that M_Break Line is selected. select M_Break Line. Add a break line to the top of the wall section 1 On the Design Bar. 8 Place the break line approximately in the center of the floor as shown in the following illustration. 4 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. click Modify. and select the crop boundary of the detail view. Add a break line to the floor 6 On the Design Bar.rvt. 3 Place the break line at the top of the wall section as shown in the following image. 2 In the Type Selector. 5 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the view displays as in the following illustration. m_Cape_House. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 361 .

Turn off the visibility of model components to view detail components only 11 On the View menu. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. 10 On the Tools toolbar. When you turn the display model off. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view.9 On the Design Bar. as shown in the following illustration. click View Properties. 362 | Chapter 12 Detailing . click Modify. NOTE You may need to drag the shape handles of the break line to resize it to the illustration. and select the break line. click and rotate the break line until it displays as shown in the following illustration. and click OK. select Do not display for Display model. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added previously.

Enter the text.rvt. and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the File menu. m_Cape_House. 3 On the Options Bar. 6 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 4 Add the leaders and notes shown in the following illustration: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the detail to set the location of the arrow. click Text. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 5 If you want to save your changes.13 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 363 . Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Click again to set the location of the text box. Adding Text Notes. select 4 mm text for Text size. you add text notes to complete the detail. click to create a leader with two segments. 2 On the Type Selector. click Save As. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. Click again to set the elbow position of the leader.

Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 364 | Chapter 12 Detailing . while other model elements. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. You also learn how to override line styles and detail level settings for each model element. Within a detail view. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Open c_Office_Building. The filled regions in the detail section view do not overlap properly. you can arrange the order in which detail components display. you learn to modify the display of detail components in your detail views. and double-click Basement. such as walls and windows. 2 Double-click the section line head to display the section view. you change the order in which detail components in a detail view of a kitchen sink and cabinet display. click Open. For example.rvt located in the Common folder.Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views In this lesson. Open the detail view 1 In the Project Browser. Changing Detail Component Order in a Detail View In this exercise. A detail component can display in front or in back of all other components. you can set only doors in a detail view to display in fine detail. The section line that you see in the top right corner of the floor plan indicates that a section view that cuts through the kitchen sink and cabinet has been added to the project. or can display in front of or in back of specific components. display in coarse detail. click the Training Files icon.

behind the cabinet. Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views | 365 . select it. click .Display the sink in front of the cabinet 3 Move your cursor over the kitchen sink detail component. on the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. and when it highlights. The sink now displays as if it was in front of the cabinet detail component. click . 4 With the sink selected. Display the sink behind the cabinet 5 Select the sink and. The sink is now sent to the back of the drawing.

366 | Chapter 12 Detailing . double-click Level 1. a cabinet. Open four different views 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. select Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. Display the furniture in the basement view in halftone 4 On the View menu. you change the visibility settings of several views by overriding line styles. 5 Click in the window containing the Floor Plan: Basement view and draw a zoom box around the furniture as shown in the following illustration. Select the base cabinet and try the various depth options on the Options Bar. and overriding detail level settings. select Zoom ➤ Zoom In Region. and a simple fill pattern. Changing Visibility Settings in a Detail View In this exercise. select Tile. 3 On the View menu. using halftone. Changing Visibility Settings in a Detail View. 2 On the Window menu.rvt.There are three stacked detail components in this detail: a sink. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. c_Office_Building. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

click the Model Categories tab. select Visibility/Graphics. and select Halftone. 16 Move the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box so you can view the floor plan. select Visibility/Graphics. 12 On the View menu. click the Annotation Categories tab. scroll down to Furniture. The door tags are not displayed. select Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. The furniture within this view is displayed in halftone. 7 On the View menu. Turn off door tags in the Level 1 Floor Plan 11 In the Project Browser. Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views | 367 . expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1. 9 Under Visibility. 13 On the View menu. 14 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. expand Floor Plans. 15 Clear the Visibility for Door tags. 10 Click OK. and click Apply. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box.6 Maximize the window containing the Floor Plan: Basement view.

Select 8 for Line Weight. click Override under Line Style Cut for Walls. All the walls in this view are displayed as coarse regardless of the settings in the View Properties dialog box. Select Solid for Line Pattern. 21 Click OK twice. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Override. 20 In the Select Line Style dialog box. The walls in this view display in a coarse level of detail while the rest of the floor plan is displayed in a fine level of detail. select Coarse for Detail Level. 18 For Walls. Change the cut line style for walls in the view 19 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. and click Apply. Select Black for Line Color. 368 | Chapter 12 Detailing .Display walls in coarse detail in the Level 1 Floor Plan 17 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. The cut line style of the walls is now significantly heavier. click the Model Categories tab.

Select 1:5 for Scale. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. Creating a Drafting View In this exercise. 5 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 In the Project Browser. you create a door detail in this new drafting view. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. 3 Click OK to create the new drafting view. Creating a Drafted Detail | 369 . on the File menu. The new drafting view. Create the new drafting view 1 On View menu. These details do not update with changes to the building model. click New ➤ Drafting View. The building model is no longer displayed in the drawing window because you have created a drafting view that is not associated with the building model. Open m_Drafting_views. you create a drafting view that is not associated with a building model.22 If you want to save your changes. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog box. you create a door detail in the new drafting view. is displayed in the Project Browser. and save the exercise file with a unique name. named Door Detail. Creating a Detail in the Drafting View. After you create a drafting view. In the next exercise. expand Views (all). You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. 23 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. enter the following: ■ ■ Enter Door Detail for Name. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Building or by importing details from an existing detail library. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. click Open. click the Training Files icon. click Save As. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you learn how to create a drafted detail. Creating a Detail in the Drafting View In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.rvt located in the Metric folder. and expand Drafting Views.

5 Permanently dimension the door jamb sketch so that the dimension values match those in the following illustration.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Detail Lines. m_Drafting_views.rvt. 370 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 2 In the Type Selector. TIP You may want to use the Chain option when you sketch the door jamb. and then use the Split and Trim tools to complete the sketch. you can change its value by clicking Modify on the Design Bar and selecting one of the lines the dimension references. When the dimension value displays in blue. 4 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. After you create a dimension. 3 Sketch the door jamb shown in the following illustration. You can also use the Rectangles sketching tool to create the basic shapes. and click the tab in the context menu. you can change it. right-click in the Design Bar. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. select Wide Lines. Create a drafted door detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. On the Design Bar. 16 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 11 On the Design Bar. enter Sand. 14 In the Name dialog box. and click OK. clear Length dimension snap increments. click Duplicate. and click OK 3 times. Under Dimension Snaps. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. The detail with filled regions (the gypsum wall board with the sand drafting pattern) is displayed. and click OK. click Snaps. click Edit/New. click . click Filled Region. under Name. click Finish Sketch. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box.Create filled regions 6 You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. 8 On the Options Bar. 21 Sketch the 50 mm x 15 mm door trim as shown. Creating a Drafted Detail | 371 . 9 Turn off automatic snapping to facilitate sketching in close detail: ■ ■ On the Settings menu. click Lines. 18 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. 17 Under Pattern Type. click for the Fill pattern type parameter. 19 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Type Selector. select Wide Lines. verify Drafting is selected. 10 Sketch two 15 mm thick rectangles as shown. select Sand. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box.

22 On the Design Bar. 25 Add an overall dimension of the door jamb. click Dimension. and add 2 dimensions to the door trim. 372 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 24 Drag the door jamb dimension controls to pull the dimensions away from the detail. Adjust witness lines 23 Select each door jamb dimension.

TIP You may find it helpful to temporarily hide the dimensions in the view when sketching the door. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the lumber. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. Add the dimensional lumber for the header 29 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Sketch a door 26 On the Design Bar. and click OK twice. 28 Draw lines that represent the door as shown. 35 In the Type Properties dialog box. Select the desired dimensions. 37 Place the lumber component in the detail. click . click Detail Lines. and click OK. enter 38 x 125. and click Hide Object from the context menu. select M_Dimension Lumber 38X140. click Detail Component. 30 In the Type Selector. 31 On the Options Bar. click Duplicate. Creating a Drafted Detail | 373 . 34 In the Name dialog box. 36 Press the Spacebar to rotate the Lumber counter-clockwise. select Medium Lines. click the Hide/Isolate command. and on the View Control Bar. 27 In the Type Selector. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 125 for the Width type parameter.

41 Add two break lines as shown. 374 | Chapter 12 Detailing . select Break Line.38 Stack another 38 x 125 directly above the one that you placed in the previous step to complete the header. TIP Rotate and move the bottom break line to adjust its masking element. click Detail Component. Add two break lines 39 On the Design Bar. 40 In the Type Selector.

Place the drafting view on a new sheet 45 On the View menu. 48 Select Door Detail. 44 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. expand Views. 46 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. verify that A0 metric is selected. and expand Drafting Views. click Text. 49 Click to specify an insertion point. click Modify to end the command. click to create a leader with two segments. and drag it onto the sheet. 47 In the Project Browser.Add text notes to complete the detail 42 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 43 In the Options Bar. click New ➤ Sheet. Creating a Drafted Detail | 375 . 50 On the Design Bar.

select New ➤ Drafting View. 376 | Chapter 12 Detailing . and then click Open. Create a new drafting view 1 On the View menu.51 Proceed to the next exercise. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. 5 In the Import/Link dialog box. enter the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Rail Detail for Name. The detail that you import is in DWG format. you must explode it. In order to modify it. under Layer/Level Colors. Import a complete detail in DWG format 4 On the File menu. The detail is imported as an import symbol. select m_Rail_detail. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.dwg from the Metric folder in the Training Files.rvt. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. After you explode it. the DWG entities are converted into Revit Building elements. click Import/Link ➤ DWG. 3 Click OK. DGN. select Preserve colors. 6 At the bottom of the Import/Link dialog box. DXF. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the detail. Enter 5 for the Scale value. m_Drafting_views. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog box. Select Custom for Scale. 7 On the View menu.

and select all of the text blocks in the detail. 15 In the Color dialog box. The text retains the DWG layer color. press and hold CTRL. and click OK 3 times. 10 If an error dialog box displays. The text is displayed as black after you click in the drawing area. and click Full Explode. click . click the button in the Color type parameter Value field. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Modify. select black. and the text within the detail is converted to Revit Building text. The lines of the detail are converted to detail lines. click Edit/New.Explode the imported detail 8 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify. 12 On the Options Bar. 9 Right-click. Change the text color to black and add text leaders 11 On the Design Bar. click Delete Element(s). Creating a Drafted Detail | 377 . and then select the detail.

and select the bottom text note. 378 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 20 Proceed to the next exercise. 18 Select and move the leader grips to position the leader as shown. 19 Add leaders to the remaining text notes to complete the detail as shown. Creating a Reference Callout.Add leaders to the text notes 16 On the Design Bar. click . click Modify. A leader is added to the text note. MET STUD FRAMING. 17 On the Options Bar.

5 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble over the upper left door corner. expand Sections. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Section 1. expand Views (all). The callout head displays the detail and sheet information (1/A101) because the referenced drafting view is already placed on this sheet.Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. NOTE When a view has been placed on a sheet view. it appears in the Reference other view list with the detail number and sheet number displayed after the view name. and select Drafting View: Door Detail (1/A101). click Callout. The section view is displayed. select Reference other view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Display the reference view 7 On the Design Bar. 4 Zoom in on the Level 1 doors. Creating a Drafted Detail | 379 . m_Drafting_views. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the door detail that you previously created. click Modify.rvt. The door detail that you drafted previously is displayed. and double-click the callout. 6 Select the callout. 3 On the Options Bar. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser.

on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Save As. 380 | Chapter 12 Detailing .8 If you want to save your changes. Otherwise.

you learn how to create different types of schedules in your Autodesk Revit Building projects.Scheduling 13 In this tutorial. 381 .

you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. or a schedule that lists every window in the building. or you can group components of the same type into a single line item. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model. you learn how to create type and instance schedules. you can list each component as a separate line item. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. creating an instance schedule. You begin by creating an instance schedule.Creating Type and Instance Schedules In this lesson. creating a type schedule. 382 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . When you schedule building components in Revit Building.

and click View.Next. Open m_Schedules. Creating Type and Instance Schedules | 383 . Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. click the Training Files icon.rvt located in the Metric folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Create a new window schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. or a schedule that lists the windows by window type. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. under Category. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. select Comments and click Add. Finally. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 7 Click OK. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. click Open. click the Fields tab. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. you change the window instance schedule to a window type schedule. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 6 Under Scheduled fields. 4 Under Available fields. and click OK. 5 Using the same process. select Windows. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.

click Close. on the Options Bar. in large building models with many views. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. and double-click Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. 384 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 9 In the warning dialog box that is displayed. this can be a time-consuming process. and click View Properties. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box.Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 8 Select any cell in the first row of the window schedule and. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 12 Right-click on the schedule. 11 In the Project Browser. click Show. 14 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. under Other. click the Sorting/Grouping tab. expand Schedules/Quantities. sorted by type mark. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. NOTE By clicking Show. The window schedule is displayed. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. 10 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog box. 16 Click OK twice. However. 15 Select Type Mark for Sort by.

18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 21 If you want to save your changes. clear Itemize every instance. click Save As. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 19 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 22 Close the exercise file. and click View Properties. you learn to add schedules and schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 385 . click Edit for the Sorting/Grouping instance parameter. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. The window type schedule is displayed. 20 Click OK twice. on the File menu. you create a room schedule from the floor plan of a large building model. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson.Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 17 Right-click on the schedule.

and click OK.rvt located in the Metric folder. right-click in the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the New Schedule dialog box. 5 Under Available fields. click Schedule/Quantities. click Open. and click View. select Number and click Add. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. Several rooms and room tags exist in the floor plan. under Category. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon. expand Views (all). select Rooms. expand Floor Plans.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 386 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . click the Fields tab. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. Open m_Schedules. and double-click flr 3 to make it the active view.

The room Number is 1. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Tagged. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 7 Under Scheduled fields. next to Rows:. 9 To the right of Header text. Next. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. you define the font for the schedule headers. select Bold to display the schedule headers in bold font. 10 Click OK.6 Using the same process. Add new rooms to the schedule 11 On the Options Bar. 8 Click the Appearance tab. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. click New. because the room is not tagged with a room tag. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 387 .

12 Using the same process. double-click flr 3. Add two room tags to the floor plan 16 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. add a second room. and select Conference from the list. and enter 30. None of the rooms have tags placed on them. 14 Select Room in the Name column for Room 1. 15 Select 1 in the Number column for Room 1. 388 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 13 Select Room in the Name column for Room 29. 17 Zoom in on the right side of the building. The second room is displayed at the bottom of the list and is numbered sequentially. and enter Conference to change the room name.

23 In the Project Browser. 20 Move your cursor into the large room in the upper right corner of the floor plan. expand Schedules/Quantities. TIP If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not active. click Room Tag. 21 On the Options Bar. and click to place the room tag. The boundaries of the room highlight before you place the room tag. select 30 Conference for Room. and verify that Horizontal is selected. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 389 . select 29 Conference for Room. 19 On the Options Bar. and double-click Room Schedule to view the updated room rows. and click Drafting. right-click in the Design Bar. 22 Place the room tag in the small room across from the large conference room.18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

390 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . double-click flr 3. 28 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Room Schedule to view the 11 rooms that you added to the schedule. select Auto for Room. click Room Tag. 25 On the Design Bar. 26 On the Options Bar.Add eleven additional room tags 24 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 27 Place the room tags as shown in the following illustration.

and select the seven room tags shown in the following illustration. press and hold CTRL. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 391 . double-click flr 3. and select the tags in the three remaining rooms named Room. under Floor Plans. 33 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. press and hold CTRL. 31 On the Design Bar. The name in the room tag is now Circulation. click . and click OK. locate the room with an area of 92. select Services for Name.11 square meters. 34 On the Design Bar. under Identity Data. 35 With the room tags selected. click . and zoom in on the room. 30 In the Project Browser. 36 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify. and select Circulation for Name. click Modify. select Office for Name.Modify room tags 29 In the schedule. 32 With the room tags selected.

under Category. and Wall Finish. press and hold CTRL. 392 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 41 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. Define three new room styles 42 On the Options Bar.Add a schedule key 37 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 40 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. and click OK. 45 On the Options Bar. Enter Paint for Wall Finish. select Base Finish. click Schedule/Quantities. and enter Std Office. 46 Add information to the rows so that the schedule displays as shown in the following illustration. select Rooms. 38 In the New Schedule dialog box. click New to add a row to the schedule. 43 In the new row. and click Add. Floor Finish. click the Key Name field. 39 Select Schedule keys. enter the following information in the row: ■ ■ ■ Enter Vinyl for Base Finish. 44 Using the same process. click New twice to add two rows to the schedule. under Available fields. Enter Carpet 1 for Floor Finish.

select Exec Offices for Room Style. under Schedules/Quantities. 48 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 51 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 53 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit for Fields. select Room Style. press and hold CTRL. and select the room tag in the large conference room (29) in the upper right corner of the floor plan. and click Add. and select the room tags in the three offices (37. double-click Room Schedule. under Other. View the room schedule 54 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 56 Under Other. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 393 .Apply the new room styles to the room schedule 47 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. click . select Exec Offices for Room Style. 38. double-click flr 3. 49 On the Options Bar. 59 Click OK twice to update the schedule. under Available fields. 57 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 52 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 39) in the lower right corner of the floor plan. click . 58 Change the order of the schedule as shown in the dialog box below. under Other. click View Properties. 55 On the View menu. 50 In the Element Properties dialog box.

Creating a Room Color Diagram. select Services from the list in the Room Style column.60 For the rooms in the schedule that are named Services. 61 Proceed to the next exercise. 394 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. you create a room color diagram based on the names of the rooms in the floor plan.

click Color Fill. click the color button for Conference. 9 In the Color dialog box. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 395 . scroll all the way to the left. click OK. click Edit Color Scheme. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. Change the fill colors that are applied to the conference rooms 6 On the Design Bar. and click the color green. under Views (all).rvt. click PANTONE. 11 Click OK three times. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog box. and double-click flr 3. 10 In the PANTONE® Color Picker. m_schedules. 2 Zoom out so you can view the entire building model. The rooms in the floor plan automatically change color. 7 On the Options Bar. 4 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. The fill color in the rooms named Conference are displayed as green. and select the color legend. expand Floor Plans.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Create a room color diagram 1 In the Project Browser. A legend displays at the tip of your cursor. 5 In the alert dialog box.

you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. Open c_Schedules_2. click the Fields tab. and click OK. select Services for Room (10) in the Name column. on the File menu. The color diagram and legend reflect the changes that you made. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 396 | Chapter 13 Scheduling .rvt located in the Common folder. click Schedule/Quantities. 15 If you want to save your changes. 16 Close the exercise file. 4 Under Available fields. number. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. select Project Units from the Settings menu and change the appropriate formats to metric. double-click Room Schedule. select Walls. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 2 In the New Schedules dialog box. click Open. select the following fields and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. 14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. and click View. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.Change the name of the single room named Room 12 In the Project Browser. NOTE Because the next two lessons use common files. 13 In the Room Schedule. To display graphics with metric values. and level. you learn how to schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Building components. under Schedules/Quantities. You also learn how to create a furniture schedule that includes room name. right-click in the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. graphics are displayed with imperial values. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. Create a new wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon. under Categories. double-click flr 3. click Save As. Room no longer displays in the key/legend.

expand Schedules/Quantities.Schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes 6 In the Project Browser. The Assembly Code and Assembly Description fields display in the schedule. 9 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. 10 Click OK twice. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes | 397 . under Other. 7 Right-click Wall Schedule. and click Properties to view the element properties of the wall schedule that you created. click Edit for Fields. add Assembly Code and Assembly Description to the schedule.

under Views (all).Partitions . 13 Click OK. and double-click Level 1. 12 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog box. 398 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . and then click in the schedule.Partitions. 14 Click OK in the dialog box that explains that the change will be applied to all elements of the chosen type. and click . expand Floor Plans. expand C1010 . All of the walls of this wall type are updated. and select C1010115 .Interior Construction.Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project within the schedule 11 In the wall schedule. expand C .Brick Veneer w/ Stud. click in the Assembly code column in the first row of the schedule.Fixed Partitions. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project from the building model 15 In the Project Browser. expand C1010100 .Interiors. expand C10 .

under Schedules/Quantities. and select C1010145 . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes | 399 . under Identity Data. double-click Wall Schedule. and then click . click . 17 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. double-click Furniture Schedule.16 Select one of the Interior . click in the Assembly Code field. expand C10.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. expand C. 21 Click OK three times. Schedule building model components by level and room 23 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities. expand C1010. expand C1010100. 19 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Edit/New.5 1/2" Partition (1hr) walls. 22 In the Project Browser.Partitions . 20 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog box.

and click to place it. Change the appearance of the schedule 33 Zoom in on the schedule on the sheet. 29 Click OK twice. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. click Sheet. and then add Level and Manufacturer to the schedule. and click OK. and click Properties. select Room for Select available fields from.24 In the Project Browser. 27 Add Room: Name and Room: Number to the schedule. right-click Furniture Schedule. 31 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. Place the Furniture Schedule on a new drawing sheet 30 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 400 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 25 In the Element Properties dialog box. 34 Adjust the row length in the schedule by selecting and moving the blue grips that are displayed on the top of the schedule. 28 Select Furniture for Select available fields from. 32 Drag the furniture schedule from the Project Browser onto the sheet. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : 30 x 42 Horizontal. under Other. click Edit for Fields.

you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in pre-defined instance and type parameters either within family components or within the project template. ensuring consistency across families and projects. These shared parameters can be added to any family. adding the shared parameters to a family. Creating a Multi-Category Schedule In this exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Building multi-category schedules. The following exercise demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters.35 Split the schedule into multiple segments by clicking the blue break line that is displayed on the right border of the schedule. on the File menu. and creating a multi-category schedule. 36 Select the blue crosses that are displayed in the center of each schedule segment to reposition the schedule segments as shown. you create a multi-category schedule. click Save As. 38 Close the exercise file. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 401 . and are defined and stored in an external file. 37 If you want to save your changes. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. regardless of category. The new schedule segments are automatically placed to the right of the original schedule and are top aligned.

click New. 9 Add three additional parameters. 5 In the New Parameter Group dialog box. enter a file name. The shared parameter file (TXT) is created. and Lock Set. click Create. Hinge. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. verify that Hardware is selected for Parameter group. enter Hardware. If you are working on a network. and click OK.You create shared parameters. and assign Text for Type. Create parameters in the Hardware group 6 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. and click Save. add them to a door family. create a multi-category tag that you use to tag a simple floor plan. 2 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. select Text for Type. Create a shared parameter file 1 On the File menu. and then generate the multi-category schedule. click OK. enter Closure for Name. click New. You store all of your hardware-related parameters within this group for use in the project. 7 Under Parameters. 10 After you add the parameters. under Groups. ID. Shared parameters are saved to an external file. Create a new parameter group to store individual parameters 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. 3 In the Save As dialog box. make sure you save your shared parameter files in a location where other users can access it. Click OK if the alert box indicates that the shared parameter file does not exist. 402 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . and click OK. click Shared Parameters.

rfa located in the Common folder. ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Yale for Lock Set. select Instance. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 403 . 16 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 21 Click OK. click Close to close the file. 12 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 22 Save the file as NewDoor in an appropriate location. click Family Types. 23 On the File menu. Enter N/A for Closure. click Open. 15 In the Family Types dialog box. The parameters are displayed in the Family Types dialog box. Enter Chrome for Hinge. under Parameters. so that you can use it later in this exercise.Add the shared parameters to a family 11 On the File menu. and click Select. You are now working in the Family Editor. 20 Assign the new parameters the following values by entering them in the corresponding Value field. select ID. 17 In the Shared Parameters dialog box. click the Training Files icon. select Shared parameter. and click OK. setting them as Type parameters. and click OK. 13 Open c_ Door. 19 Repeat the steps for the other parameters. under Parameters. click Add. The Family Types dialog box displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. Enter 1 for ID. 14 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.

27 Click at the intersection of the reference planes in the drawing window to display the Select Parameter dialog box. select Filter parameter.rft in the Annotations folder. Open. select ID. click Close to close the file. click Label. Use the multi-category tag in a project 40 On the File menu.e. 37 Draw a rectangle around the tag. as shown. 32 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 38 Save the file as HardwareTag in an appropriate location. 33 Click OK. 34 Zoom in to the tag at the intersection of the reference planes. 30 In the Shared Parameters dialog box. 25 In the New dialog box. 39 On the File menu. 26 On Design Bar. A multi-category tag must have at least one label with an external parameter set as a filter parameter.rvt located in the Common folder. click Add. 41 In the Open dialog box. and click OK twice.. and click Open. 31 Under Parameters. 35 On the Design Bar. under Parameter Group. click . select c_Hardware_Plan. This option ensures that this tag attaches only to a component with that same filter parameter (i. NOTE If you do not specify a filter parameter for the tag. the tag cannot attach to any component. 29 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 404 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . click Select. select Hardware. 28 In the Select Parameter dialog box. ID). 36 On the Options Bar. click Lines. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. select Multi-Category Tag. and click Open.Create a multi-category tag 24 On the File menu.

add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ID Mark Type Family Closure Lock Set NOTE Do not be concerned with duplicate ID and Lock Set fields. 51 In the New Schedule dialog box. 44 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Multi-Category from the list. select the multi-category HardwareTag that you just loaded. click Schedule/Quantities. and load into the project the multi-category tag files HardwareTag. Notice that the HardwareTag is reading the shared parameter that you created earlier and attached to the Door family. click Tag All Not Tagged to quickly tag all the components with the filter parameter. 48 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Notice that you can highlight only those components that have the filter parameter that you set earlier to ID. and click OK. and click OK. click Tag. 47 Click to place the tag. 45 In the Type Selector.rfa that you just created. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 43 Replace any existing doors by selecting them and changing their type to the NewDoor type that you just loaded. select Multi-Category Tags for Category. 53 Click OK. 52 In the Schedule Properties dialog box.rfa and NewDoor. Create a multi-category schedule 50 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 46 Move your cursor into the drawing window. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 405 . 49 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box.42 On the File menu.

Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. However. click Schedule/Quantities. on the File menu. View the third floor of the building 1 In the Project Browser. you create two schedules. you want to filter out all doors that are not on level 3 to include only the 11 doors listed above. Open m_First_Project-West_Wing. click the Training Files icon. expand Floor Plans. Creating a Level-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. The first schedule that you create is a level-based door schedule that uses a filter to exclude all of the doors that are not on floor three of the building model.UK_Single-Flush: SO 1010 x 2410 mm If you created a standard door schedule. 54 If you want to save your changes. click Open. all of the doors in the project would be scheduled. you create a level based door schedule. The second schedule that you create is a wall schedule that calculates the cost of the walls in the project.M_Single-Flush Vision: 915 x 2134 mm 3 .M_Single-Flush Vision: 864 x 2032 mm 3 . In the left pane of the Open dialog box. There are 11 doors of the following types on this level of the building model: ■ ■ ■ 5 . Using Formulas and Filters in Schedules In this lesson. expand Views (all). The floor plan is displayed. and double-click Level 3. based on wall area. click Save As. 406 | Chapter 13 Scheduling .The multi-category schedule is displayed. Create a new door schedule for level flr 3 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 55 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. You use both filters and a formula to create the second schedule. and save the exercise file with a unique name.rvt located in the Metric folder.

under Other. and it causes the schedule to include only the doors on Level 3. enter Doors . 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Level. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. select Hidden Field. click the Fields tab. and select (none) for Filter. and specify the following options: ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort by. 4 Click OK. click the Filter tab. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 6 Under Available fields. and click View Properties. 15 Click OK twice. Verify New Construction is selected for Phase. Verify Schedule building components is selected. 12 Right-click the schedule. and click OK. The counts for the door types represent the door schedule for the entire model. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 11 Under Field formatting. click Edit for Filter. Under Name. The schedule includes the count and type for only doors on floor 3.Level 3. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Level in the first menu. select the following fields. Clear Itemize every instance to group the like door types into one row. 14 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. Using Formulas and Filters in Schedules | 407 . Hide the Level field in the schedule so it is used only to filter the doors that are not on level 3 and not included as a column in the schedule 9 Click the Formatting tab. select Doors. 10 Under Fields. This filter checks each door in the project to see which level it is associated with. Select equals in the second menu. Select Level 3 in the third menu.3 In the New Schedule dialog box. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Sill Height Head Height Width Level 7 Click the Filter tab.

select Cost. click Schedule/Quantities. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. Verify Schedule building components is selected. click once so the schedule represents only the doors on Flr 3. 8 Clear Itemize every instance to group the like wall types into one row. Verify New Construction is selected under Phase. click the Fields tab. The schedule is displayed. 9 Click the Formatting tab. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. select Calculate totals so that the total area of the each type is calculated.16 On the Standard toolbar. 11 Under Heading. 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Cost Area 6 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. Creating a Wall Schedule with Filters and a Formula In this exercise. 14 Since no cost has been assigned to these wall types. select the following fields. you create a wall schedule that provides a total cost of all of the walls in the project based on the total square footage of each wall type. enter Cost/Sq. enter a cost value for each type in the schedule. select Walls. 7 Select Family and Type for Sort by. 13 Click OK. 408 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 10 Under Fields. and then under Field Formatting. 12 Under Fields. m to more accurately represent the data. Create a new schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Area.rvt. Creating a Wall Schedule with Filters and a Formula. m_First_Project-West_Wing. 3 Click OK. Use the cost values in the following illustration. The wall type information for each wall is updated when you enter this data. 5 Under Available fields. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

Verify that Number is selected for Type. They cannot be shared with other projects and. 29 Close the exercise file. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Other. Select Fixed for Units. 27 Select Grand totals to have the schedule display the sum of any row for which you selected Calculate totals on the Formatting tab. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Total Cost for Name. on the File menu. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog box. This is because you did not select to calculate the totals for that field. NOTE The /(1 m^2) in the formula is required to make the resulting value unitless.Determine the total cost for each wall type by multiplying the total area of the wall by the cost per square foot 15 Right-click the schedule. m column. 25 Click OK. 21 Under Fields. Scheduling Project Parameters In this lesson. click Edit for Fields. The schedule is displayed. click Calculated Value. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 20 Click the Formatting tab. Scheduling Project Parameters | 409 . 23 Click Field Format. and click OK twice. Select 2 decimal places for Rounding. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 19 Click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. you cannot use them to tag objects. select Total Cost. Enter Area * Cost/(1 m^2) for Formula. 22 Under Field formatting. unlike shared parameters. select Calculate totals to ensure that a total of all the walls is returned. click Save As. and click View Properties. Project parameters are instance or type parameters that you can use to schedule information specific to the project that you are working with. click the Sorting/Grouping tab. without the value it would have a unit of area. 24 In the Format dialog box. 17 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. you learn how to schedule project parameters. Notice that there is no grand total displayed for the Cost/Sq. 28 If you want to save your changes.

2 In the Project Parameters dialog box. and click Drafting. 5 Click OK. you create a room schedule for the following office floor plan that includes the project parameter. Under Categories. 7 Tag the rooms as shown in the following illustration. click the Training Files icon. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. either by entering it directly. right-click in the Design Bar. 410 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . click Room Tag. Create a project parameter 1 On the Settings menu. click Open. or by entering it in the properties of the room tag. select Rooms to associate the Occupant parameter with the Room category. Enter Occupant for Name. Assign the new Occupant parameter to the project and create the room schedule 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The new project parameter Occupant is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog box. After you create the schedule. click Project Parameters.rvt located in the Metric folder. Open m_Office_2. You begin by adding the Occupant parameter to the project and creating the room schedule to include the Occupant parameter as a column in the schedule. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 4 Click OK. TIP If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not active. click Add to create the new parameter. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Project Parameter. Occupant.Creating a Room Schedule with Project Parameters In this exercise. you can add information to the Occupant column in the schedule.

you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. click Schedule/Quantities. 15 Close the exercise file. 11 Under Available fields. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. under Categories. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. click the Fields tab. 10 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 13 Add names to the occupant field by entering them directly in the schedule or by entering them in the room tag properties. select the following fields. 14 If you want to save your changes. 9 In the New Schedule dialog box. on the File menu. select Rooms to create a room schedule. The Occupant field is displayed in the schedule. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Area Department Occupant 12 Click OK to generate the schedule.8 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Exporting Project Information with ODBC | 411 . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. click Save As. and click OK.

click Create. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). under Database. 6 Click Finish. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog box. used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Open. so that each table of elements includes an “Id” column. click OK in the dialog box. click OK.mdb for Database Name. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. click the Training Files icon. select a location for the database file. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog box. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. 9 Under Directories. and click OK to create the database. Revit Building creates two tables for the following categories of elements: one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project (see below). 3 Click New. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialog boxes. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. under Database Name. enter Revit_Project. These parameters are exported as well and contain the ID of the key element. and some instance tables include a “RoomId” column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. 8 In the New Database dialog box. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Building exports. and click Next. Additionally. instance tables include a “TypeId” column containing the ID of the instance’s type. in addition to the Id column. and click Next. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click the File Data Source tab. For example. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. and open the database in Microsoft Access. Open c_Schedules_2. 10 When the confirmation displays. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. 412 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. 13 Close the exercise file. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. 1 On the File menu. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project.rvt located in the Common folder. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables.

and how to annotate and dimension your Autodesk Revit Building projects.Annotating and Dimensioning 14 In this tutorial. 413 . you learn how to change the base elevation of a project.

the elevation value of the second level of the house (4000 mm above Level 1) reports an elevation of 14000 mm. For example. and not 4 m. if a project is built on a plateau at 1500 m and Level 2 is 4 m above the base elevation. click the Training Files icon. you relocate the base elevation of a small house from 0 m to 10000 m. and double-click South.rvt located in the Metric folder. expand Views (all). Shared levels report an elevation value relative to an origin that you establish when you relocate the project. For example. you can relocate the project at a base elevation of 1500 m and define the levels as shared so that Level 1 reads 1500 m. After you define the levels as shared and relocate the project. and not 1504 m. expand Elevations. and Level 2 reads 1504 m.Setting the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. Setting the Base Elevation of a House In this exercise. You accomplish this in Revit Building by defining levels as either project or shared levels. Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. if a project is built on a plateau at 1500 meters and Level 2 is 4 meters above the base elevation. Level 1 reads 1500 m. Project levels report elevation as it relates to other levels in the project. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at sea level. click Open. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. Open m_simple_house. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. while Level 2 reads 4 m. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 414 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .

and click OK. enter Level . Setting the Base Elevation of a Project | 415 . click Duplicate. you would change the parameter for all the levels in the Project. The south elevation is displayed. However. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. select Shared for Elevation Base. Relocate the project 9 On the Tools menu. 8 Click OK twice. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. The elevation of the other levels remains the same. and press ENTER. In order for Level 1 to report the global elevation after the project is relocated. click Edit/New. By selecting the Level 1 line. 3 On the Options Bar. select Level : Level . click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. 6 In the Name dialog box. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Constraints. 10 Select the Level 1 line. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. By entering 10000 mm in this step. 12 On the View menu. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . to better demonstrate how shared levels work.Shared. and you must create a new level type. If you did that now. enter 10000 mm.2 Select the Level 1 line. you specify the point from which you want to relocate the project. 14 In the Type Selector. you specify the new location of the project.Shared. The reported value of Level 2 changes to take the value of the global elevation into consideration. 13 Select the Level 2 line. 11 Move the cursor above the elevation line.

15 In the Project Browser. permanent dimensions are created automatically. there are two types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. as well as other views of the building model. In this case. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. and save the exercise file with a unique name. under Elevations. 18 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. on the File menu. double-click North. Dimensioning In this lesson. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your designs. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view. 17 If you want to save your changes. 416 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . define the roof level as shared. so it reports an elevation of 18000 mm. except when you sketch profiles to create families. click Save As. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. 16 Using the same method. In Revit Building.

select it. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Dimensioning | 417 . click the Training Files icon. linear.Creating Dimensions In this exercise. click Dimension. radial. multi-segmented. you learn how to create and modify different types of permanent dimensions. The different types of dimensions that you can add include aligned. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. dimensions are aligned and snap to wall centerlines. 4 Move the cursor over the wall at the very bottom of the view. 3 When the centerline of the wall highlights. 2 Without making any changes on the Options Bar. click Open. that you can add to your drawings. move the cursor over the top straight wall on the floor plan. Open m_Dimensions. and when the centerline of the wall highlights. By default. Create permanent dimensions 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select it. and angular dimensions.rvt located in the Metric folder. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.

and click to set the location of the dimension. indicating that the dimension can be modified. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way. The lock displays as locked. click Dimension. 6 Click the lock. Create multi-segmented dimensions 7 On the Design Bar. 8 Dimension the four vertical walls: ■ ■ Select the four vertical wall segments sequentially. A lock symbol that is unlocked displays next to it. Move the cursor below the lowest horizontal wall. outside of the wall. The dimension displays in the drawing.5 Move the cursor to the left. An unlocked lock symbol displays next to each dimension segment. 418 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . In addition. indicating that the dimension segments are not equal in length. and click to place the dimension. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the referenced walls without first unlocking the dimension. an equal symbol with a slash through it is displayed.

and click to place the dimension. The slash no longer displays through the equal symbol. click 12 Dimension the curved wall: ■ ■ . 11 On the Options Bar. Select the curved corner wall to display the radial dimension. click Dimension. and the are dimensions permanent and constrained to each other.9 Click the equal symbol to make all dimension segment lengths equal. Move the cursor to the inside of the curved wall. Dimensioning | 419 . Create a radial dimension 10 On the Design Bar. indicating that the segments are now equal.

17 Dimension the curved wall again: ■ ■ Move your cursor over the inside face of the wall until it highlights. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. click and select Wall faces for Prefer. 18 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing window.13 On the View menu. The dimension is snapped to the wall center. click Dimension. and press DELETE. click Modify. Select the inside face of the wall. 14 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. and place the dimension as shown in the following illustration. 16 On the Options Bar. select the dimension line of the radial dimension. the default dimension option. and zoom in around the curved wall. 420 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .

Dimensioning | 421 . as shown in the following illustration. and then select the inside face of the vertical wall above it.You can now view the radial dimension within the floor plan. 20 Dimension the slanted wall at the top right in the floor plan: ■ ■ Select the inside face of the slanted wall. and click to place the dimension. click and verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer. You can override the cursor tracking by toggling with the spacebar. Move your cursor to the right. Create a linear dimension 21 On the Options Bar. The linear dimension tool has a more restricted selection filter so that you can select only points. and then select the bottom point of the exterior face. 22 Dimension the vertical wall at the top right in the floor plan: ■ ■ Select the top point on the exterior face of the wall. Notice that the Prefer and Pick options are no longer available on the Options Bar. Create an angular dimension 19 On the Options Bar. click . Move your cursor to the left to size the dimension arc. and depends on the cursor tracking behavior. The dimension is always constrained to either the horizontal or vertical axis. and click to place the dimension.

you specify their origin on the Options Bar. 3 Move the cursor over the bottom wall. Controlling Witness Line Location In this exercise. m_Dimensions. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. and press TAB repeatedly. and change the origin of dimension witness lines. you learn to add. Override dimension defaults 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice that only the wall faces highlight when you move the cursor over them. in some cases. 2 On the Options Bar.23 On the Design Bar. 5 Hover the cursor near the center of the bottom wall. When you place dimensions. 24 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. select it. delete. 4 Alternate the cursor position over the inner and outer bottom wall face. verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer. including the wall centerline. for a multi-segmented dimension. 6 When the outside face of the wall highlights. because the Prefer wall face option is selected instead of the Prefer wall centerline option. but do not select anything. click Modify. 422 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. For example. click Dimension. Controlling Witness Line Location. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. a different wall selection choice highlights. However. Each time you press TAB.

Dimensioning | 423 . click Modify.7 Move the cursor over the middle horizontal wall. 9 Place the dimension as shown in the following illustration. and select it. 11 Select the dimension line shown in the following illustration. press TAB until the wall centerline highlights. 8 Move the cursor to the top horizontal wall and select the exterior face. Edit dimension witness lines 10 On the Design Bar. The dimension highlights and control boxes display on each witness line.

The witness line moves to the wall centerline. The witness line moves to the inside wall face. 424 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .12 Click once on the control box on the lowest witness line. but do not select it. 14 Move the cursor to the control box on the witness line at the top wall. 13 Click the control box again.

Modifying Dimension Properties. m_Dimensions. and click Delete Witness Line. 17 Select the outside face of the top wall. IMPORTANT Be careful to right-click the witness line and not the control box on the witness line. The witness line is deleted. a shortcut menu with different options is displayed. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Modify and select the dimension that you modified in the previous exercise. you learn to modify the type parameters of dimensions. Modifying Dimension Properties In this exercise. Change the type parameters of the floor plan dimensions 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The full dimension string is displayed again. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. 18 To end the editing command.15 Right-click the control box. Dimensioning | 425 . If you right-click the control box. 16 Right-click the remaining dimension line and click Edit Witness Lines. click in the drawing area away from the floor plan.

5 Click OK twice. change the following type parameter values: ■ ■ Under Text. when sketching walls. then Up for Read Convention. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. For example. allowing you to lock the alignment of the walls. As you create components. 8 Proceed to the next exercise.2 On the Options Bar. alignments can be made and locked with minimal effort. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the File menu. click Edit/New. click Save As. Working with Alignments and Constraints. a lock symbol immediately displays. A locked alignment is a constraint that is maintained if any of the components is moved or modified. select Right. or close the exercise file without saving your changes. enter 5 mm for the Text Size. 6 On the Design Bar. you learn to align components and lock their alignment to better work with them in your drawings. Under Text. click . Working with Alignments and Constraints In this exercise. Aligning components is similar to dimensioning components with a value of zero. 426 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . 7 If you want to save your changes. if two or more walls are colinear. The dimensions update as shown in the following illustration. click Modify.

The short horizontal wall on the left moves to align with the upper horizontal wall.rvt located in the Metric folder. click the Training Files icon. When you align two components. click 2 Align the walls: ■ ■ . indicating that the Align command is active. indicating that the alignment of the two walls is now locked. The lock symbol displays as unlocked. and select Wall centerlines for Prefer. 5 On the Options Bar. while the second component moves to complete the alignment. Select the exterior face of the uppermost horizontal wall.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. The symbol changes to a closed lock. Select the exterior face of the short horizontal wall on the left. 3 Click the lock. Align the three short horizontal walls below the two walls that you aligned 4 On the Tools toolbar. click . The cursor displays two arrows at its tip. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. the first component that you select remains fixed in position. 6 Select the lower center wall to define it as the fixed wall to which the other walls will align. select Multiple Alignment. indicating the two walls are not constrained to each other. Dimensioning | 427 . click Open. Open m_Alignment. Align the two uppermost horizontal walls in the floor plan 1 On the Tools toolbar.

The wall on the left moves with the middle wall when you drag it. 10 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the short horizontal wall on the right. 8 Click the lock to lock the alignment of the walls. but the wall on the right does not because the alignment between the two walls is not constrained (locked).7 Select the short wall to the left. Do not lock this segment of the alignment. click Modify. 11 Select the middle wall and drag it downward. 428 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .

NOTE Because you are not aligning walls.12 On the toolbar. click once to undo the move. Align doors in the floor plan 14 On the Tools toolbar. 13 Click the right wall. and then click the lock to align the wall with the middle wall. 15 On the Options bar. 16 Select the centerline of Door 4 on the upper right side of the model. click . the Prefer wall faces or centerline option on the Options Bar does not apply to the doors. select Multiple Alignment. Move the walls to verify the alignment. Dimensioning | 429 .

22 Slide the door up or down the wall and notice how the other doors move with it. 430 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . 20 Select Door 1 and lock it to constrain it to the other doors.17 Select the centerline of Door 3 to the left. 18 Click the lock to constrain the movement of the doors. Door 3 aligns with Door 4. 19 Select Door 2 and lock it to constrain it Doors 3 and 4. 21 On the Design Bar. click Modify and select one of the aligned doors.

Align the windows in the floor plan 23 On the Tools toolbar. The second window does not align because it is already constrained by a locked dimension. 26 Select the window on the far left in the lower wall. and select the dimension between the second window and the right wall.28 to align the windows. 24 On the Options Bar. Dimensioning | 431 . clear Multiple Alignment. on the Design Bar. 25 Select the window in the upper horizontal wall on the left side of the floor plan. The two windows align. click and repeat steps 27 . click . 28 Select the far right window in the top wall. indicating the constraint. 31 On the Tools toolbar. A lock is displayed. 29 To view the constraint. 27 Select the far right window in the bottom wall. 30 Click the lock to unlock it. click Modify.

you learn how to automatically dimension a linear wall with openings (windows) by selecting the wall. 33 Proceed to the next exercise.32 Align the remaining windows. as shown in the following illustration. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions In this exercise. 432 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . You want to dimension the wall so that the width of each window displays in the dimension string.rvt. instead of selecting the wall and all the openings as dimension references. 1 View the lower horizontal wall and notice that it includes five windows. Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions. m_Alignment.

4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. indicating the start and end of the dimension string. click Save As. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. the windows). Select Entire Walls for Pick. and that the window widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.2 On the Design Bar. 8 If you want to save your changes. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . and then Widths. The two vertical walls highlight. Verify Wall centerlines is selected for Prefer. Dimensioning | 433 . These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings (in this case. 3 On the Options Bar. click Dimension. Click Options. select Openings. 6 Select the lower horizontal wall. 5 Click OK. 7 Move your cursor below the lower horizontal wall and click to add the dimension.

click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar. sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan. click . 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1. Creating Angular Dimensions In this exercise.rvt located in the Common folder. tag doors and windows. expand Floor Plans. You learn how to: ■ ■ ■ ■ create angular dimensions. click Open. Create angular dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. 434 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . click the Training Files icon. 4 Dimension the three windows near the east entrance by selecting the centerline of each window and placing the dimensions as shown in the following illustration. you dimension the three windows on a floor plan. You learn how to create angular dimensions and how to use an equality constraint to space the windows equally. Open c_Area.Annotating In this lesson. you how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Building. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. rotate tags with building components.

Tag rooms sequentially 1 On the View menu. click Room Tag. 3 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. The enclosed area that represents the room highlights to indicate that it will be tagged. you sequentially tag the rooms on the floor plan. Sequentially Tagging Rooms In this exercise.rvt. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. c_Area.5 Click the equal sign associated with the angular dimension string to equally space the windows. and click to place the room tag. Annotating | 435 . Sequentially Tagging Rooms.

and select the room tag. 436 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . The room tag number displays in blue.4 On the Design Bar. click Room tag. 7 Continue to place room tags. and press ENTER. indicating that it can be edited. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. click Modify. 5 Zoom in on the tag number. enter 101. Move the cursor into the room below the one previously tagged. ■ The second tag that you place displays the sequential number 102. Sequential letters are also supported. click it. 6 Place another room tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Click to place the new tag.

3 On the Options Bar. click Door. Tagging Doors and Windows. as shown in the following illustration. to add a tag with a leader. 4 Place the door with the tag in the room at the bottom left. verify that Tag on placement is selected. c_Area. Add a door and tag 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Door. and clear Leader. You learn how to add a door to the floor plan that includes a tag. Annotating | 437 . 2 In the Type Selector. select Tag on Placement to add a tag when you place the door in the floor plan. 6 On the Options Bar. select a door type that you want to add to the floor plan.8 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. and to tag doors and windows that are not tagged. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and select Leader. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. 7 Place the door as shown in the following illustration. Place a door with a door tag and leader 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you learn how to place door and window tags.

and click OK.Place a door without a tag 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 10 Place the door below Door 6. select Create. and then click OK. The door is tagged with a tag and leader. Tag a door after placing it 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the door is placed without a tag. 16 Under Leader. 9 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. click Tag All Not Tagged. select Window Tags. clear Create. 438 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . 12 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. verify that Door Tags is selected for Category. click Door. Tag the windows in the floor plan 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag All Not Tagged. All of the windows that were not tagged are now tagged. clear Tag on placement. 13 Under Leader. under Category.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the File menu. or close the exercise file without saving your changes.17 If you want to save your changes. Annotating | 439 . click Save As.

440 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .

how to control fill pattern colors. and how to use plan regions within floor plans and reflected ceiling plans. 441 . You learn how to access and create building model views and how to change the visibility of building components and annotation within views. you learn how to change the visibility of detail components. you learn to create and customize views of building information models.Viewing 15 In this tutorial. More specifically.

scroll down and click the Training Files icon. you learn how to access different views of the building model. TIP If the Project Browser does not display. you learn to create and customize user-defined views of a building information model. on the Standard toolbar. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. sections. including elevation and three-dimensional views. and learn how to control the visibility of building components and annotation within them. You create elevations. The Project Browser is displayed by default between the Design Bar and the drawing area. A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model. locate the Project Browser.Viewing a Building Model In this lesson. Both hidden lines and window tags display in the east elevation view. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. expand Views (all). Open an elevation view of the building model 1 On the left side of the drawing area.rvt located in the Metric folder. click Open. 2 In the Project Browser. The current file name is displayed in the Project Browser title bar. expand Elevations. 442 | Chapter 15 Viewing . and three-dimensional (3D) views. You also learn how to control the visibility of different building components and annotation within building model views. and double-click East. click . Open m_Viewing_Exercise. Exploring the Building Model In this exercise.

This hides the lines that show through to the exterior of the elevation view. Turn off the display of window tags in the elevation view 4 On the View menu. Viewing a Building Model | 443 . This change is applied only in this elevation view. This change is applied only to the active view.Display the elevation view with hidden lines 3 On the View Control Bar. click . click Model Graphics Style. The window tags are no longer displayed in this view. click the Annotation Categories tab. and click Hidden Line. click Visibility/Graphics. 7 Under Visibility. 8 Click OK. scroll down and clear Window Tags. Notice that window tags continue to display in the view. The 3D view is displayed in a new viewing window. the east elevation. The default name of the view is {3D}. The east elevation view displays with hidden lines. Create a 3D view of the building model 9 On the View toolbar. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Elevation: East dialog box. 6 Select Include categories from all disciplines in the list above.

. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera. 11 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand This means you are in pan mode. 17 In the Rename View dialog box. 14 View the Dynamic View dialog box in the lower left corner of the screen. 12 Pan the view by clicking and dragging the cursor in the drawing area. Notice that the view name is updated in the title bar of the viewing window and in the Project Browser. 16 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. zoom. You can pan. right-click {3D}. and click Rename. and click OK. expand Views (all). and expand 3D Views. double-click My 3D View. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. click X to close the view. and spin the building model by clicking the appropriate button in this dialog box. Save the current 3D view 15 In the Project Browser. 444 | Chapter 15 Viewing .10 On the View toolbar. 13 Press and hold CTRL. you can enable pan mode by pressing and holding the middle wheel button while moving the mouse. under 3D Views. enter My 3D View. Notice that the view continues to display with hidden lines and no window tags. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass This indicates that you are in zoom mode. 18 In the upper right corner of the viewing window. . The view follows the movement of the cursor. 19 In the Project Browser. you can enable zoom mode by rolling the middle wheel. click to reorient the view.

3 Add the camera to the view by specifying two points: one for the camera position and the other for the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing. outside of the dimension lines.Creating a Perspective View with a Camera In this exercise.rvt. and double-click Level 1. eye height. click Camera. and click View. Viewing a Building Model | 445 . Create the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. After you specify the second point (the view target). expand Views (all). 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. as shown in the following illustration. Cameras define the eye point. m_Viewing_Exercise. Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building. the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default in a perspective view. right-click in the Design Bar. you create a perspective view of the building model with a camera. expand Floor Plans. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and distance from the target.

down. 7 In the Dynamic View dialog box. 446 | Chapter 15 Viewing . click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. Press and hold the left mouse button. 9 To move the camera forward and backward in the view: ■ ■ ■ Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view. Move the cursor up. click Dynamically Modify View. You can use the walkthrough controls in this dialog box to move the camera position and change the view. Change the camera projection settings 6 On the View menu.4 Select the blue grips that display on the crop region of the view and move them to resize the view so the view includes the entire building model. and sideways to see how the view changes. Press and hold the left mouse button. 5 On the View menu. 8 To move the camera eye position higher or lower: ■ ■ ■ Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view. click the Walkthrough tab located at the bottom of the dialog box. Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward.

click Tile.10 To rotate the camera around the target: ■ ■ ■ Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view. Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view. height. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. 11 Adjust the view as shown in the following illustration. Viewing a Building Model | 447 . Change the camera position. Four views of the model display in the drawing area. 13 On the View menu. Press and hold the left mouse button. You may need to reposition the view with the other controls. and target 12 On the Window menu.

15 In the Project Browser. 17 In My 3D View. 16 Right-click. The camera and the view direction of the camera are displayed in the appropriate views. and click Show Camera.14 In the Project Browser. 448 | Chapter 15 Viewing . and move it to another location. The border of the window that contains the Level 1 view highlights. double-click Level 1. select the camera target point (the magenta grip). under Floor Plans. click 3D View 1. under 3D Views.

Click OK. ■ 3D View 1 immediately updates to show the change. under Camera. Viewing a Building Model | 449 . right-click. click to create a new 3D view. 20 On the View Control Bar.3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera. Use a section box to clip the model 19 On the View toolbar. In the Element Properties dialog box. 18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties: ■ ■ Select the camera in My 3D View. and click Properties. TIP The updated view depends on the location of the camera before you change the elevation values. enter 15000 for Eye Elevation and 1700 for Target Elevation. click Model Graphics Style. 21 Rotate the view as shown in the following illustration. and click Shading.

23 In the Element Properties dialog box. A rotation tool is also displayed. 450 | Chapter 15 Viewing . The section box highlights and grips are displayed on its faces.22 On the View menu. select Section Box. as shown in the following illustration. 25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model. under Extents. A section box is displayed around the model. and click OK. 24 Click the section box. click View Properties.

and maximize this view. you create a section view by sketching a section line in a plan view. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Viewing a Building Model | 451 . double-click Level 1.26 Click and hold the rotation tool and rotate the section box around the model. expand Floor Plans. Creating a Section View. Sketch a section line in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Creating a Section View In this exercise. m_Viewing_Exercise.

NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio. 8 Select the section line. double-click the section head. 7 In the Go To View dialog box. and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the following illustration. 4 On the Design Bar. right-click. expand Sections (Callout 1). or in the Project Browser. select Floor Plan: Level 1. and double-click Section 1. 3 Click to the left of the left wall of the building model. Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line. 6 Select the section view. You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the fill pattern. The box represents the extents of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section. click Modify. and click Open View. and click Find Referring Views. View the section 5 To view the section.2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Section. 452 | Chapter 15 Viewing . and then click to the right of the lower right wall to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration.

15 Double-click the section head to display the section view. click Modify. Creating Elevation Views. and select and move the section depth grip under the lower wall. Notice the change in the view direction. click Modify. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 12 Select the section line. m_Viewing_Exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. double-click Level 1. 14 On the Design Bar. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor. Creating Elevation Views In this exercise. Add an elevation symbol 1 In the Project Browser. Viewing a Building Model | 453 . you learn to create an elevation view in a project by adding an elevation symbol to a plan view. Change the view direction of the section 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.9 On the Design Bar.rvt. 10 Double-click the section head to display the section view. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Level 1. Notice the change in section depth. click Elevation. 13 Click the control arrows to flip the section view. under Floor Plans. Control arrows are displayed near the section tag.

and click. You may need to adjust your zoom settings to see the elevation symbol. 5 On the Design Bar.b. double-click Elevation 1 . The elevation is named Elevation 1 . View the elevation 6 To view the new elevation. Make sure the elevation symbol is pointing towards the lobby doors. 9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view. under Elevations. Elevation 1 . move the cursor around the building model. 7 In the Project Browser. double-click the elevation symbol arrow. 4 To create an elevation view of the building lobby. indicating the possible elevation views that you can create. place the cursor inside the building facing the lobby entrance. Elevation 1 . Do not select the arrow. click Modify. double-click Level 1. Notice that the elevation symbol arrow points to the nearest wall as you move through the building model.a by default. 454 | Chapter 15 Viewing .3 Without clicking in the drawing area. The check mark in the right box indicates the current elevation view. under Floor Plans. 8 Select the center of the elevation symbol. The elevation symbol is displayed with four check boxes.b. 10 In the Project Browser.a.

Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 455 . You can control the fill pattern color of the cut and surface patterns for objects that obtain their fill pattern definition from materials. floors. In addition. 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. in a compound wall. on the File menu. you learn to control the fill pattern color of a material and set the coarse scale fill pattern color of a wall type. you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type.11 If you want to save your changes. where each layer is assigned a different material. a shade of gray. in this case. and applies to phasing override materials as well. and other families. You change the color of the cut and surface patterns in the brick material assigned to the exterior wall in the building model. you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types. such as the one below. roofs. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and the insulation color to pink. This means that in views with a coarse level of detail. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors In this lesson. Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material In this exercise. This includes walls. such as Brick on CMU. For example. you can set the fill pattern color for the brick to red. you learn to control the fill pattern colors of a material.

3 In the Materials dialog box. 5 In the Color dialog box. click Materials. Open c_Showroom. and double-click Wall/Floor Join .Filled). select Masonry . 456 | Chapter 15 Viewing . In the left pane of the Open dialog box. expand 3D Views. and click OK twice. View the surface pattern of the exterior brick walls 6 In the Project Browser under Views.Brick for Name.Level 3. A color is assigned to both the Surface Pattern and Cut Pattern options in the dialog box. Notice the different fill patterns assigned to each layer within the floor and wall structure. scroll down and click the Training Files icon. 2 On the Settings menu.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. The brick cut pattern is displayed as red. The surface pattern of the brick is black.rvt located in the Common folder. click Color. expand Sections (Section Head . expand Views (all). click Open. 4 Under Cut Pattern. 7 Zoom in on the brick pattern of the exterior walls. and double-click 3D. select red. Each layer is designated by the material settings of the layer. Change the color of the brick cut pattern for the exterior walls 1 In the Project Browser.

and double-click Level 1. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type. The floor plan in the view is displayed in the Coarse level of detail as indicated by the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 457 .Brick for Name. View the detail level setting of the view 1 In the Project Browser. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type In this exercise. you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type. click Color. click Materials. expand Views (all).rvt. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. select Masonry .Change the brick surface pattern from black to white 8 On the Settings menu. 10 Under Surface Pattern. and click OK twice. The walls in the floor plan that you work with are displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail. 9 In the Materials dialog box. 11 In the Color dialog box. You change the coarse scale fill pattern from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. select white. The surface pattern of the brick is now white. c_Showroom.

click Modify.Change coarse scale fill pattern color of the arced wall 2 Select the south arced wall. select a shade of gray. Notice that the surface pattern and color of the brick wall are not applied because the detail level is set to Fine. double-click Level 2. and click . 5 In the Color dialog box. click Detail Level. 11 Zoom in on the arced wall. 7 In the Fill Patterns dialog box under Name. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. right-click. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click Properties. click the button in the Coarse Scale Fill Color value field. select Solid fill. and click OK. 458 | Chapter 15 Viewing . and click Fine. The wall type is displayed as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern parameter value field. including the current view. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. View the arced wall in fine detail 9 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click Save As. and click OK three times. 10 On the View Control Bar. under Graphics. 8 On the Design Bar. 13 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 12 If you want to save your changes. under Graphics. the Coarse Scale Fill Color parameter (under Graphics) is set to black and the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern is set to none. on the File menu. click Edit/New. By default. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

or pattern. By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height. Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan view. Plan regions do not work with linked Revit Building files. you work with a split-level building model that requires a different view range than the rest of the view. refer to the online Help for more information. the plan regions cannot overlap each other. and you cannot control their visibility. line type. it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan. If you create more than one plan region in a file. If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit Building. you can display the stepped portion of the walls in the Level 1 floor plan. line color. you create a plan region in the Level 1 floor plan of the following building model. Plan regions are closed sketches that you can create in floor plan and reflected ceiling plan (RCP) views only. Creating a View Plan Region | 459 . Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan In this exercise. although they may have coincident edges.Creating a View Plan Region In this lesson.

Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. The stepped portion of the project walls and windows are not displayed because the cut plane does not intersect any of the model geometry above this height. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. so you can view the height of the walls and windows. click Open. click Plan Region. View the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. Add a plan region to view the stepped portion of the model 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. and click View.rvt located in the Metric folder. expand Views (all). the south elevation is also displayed. scroll down and click the Training Files icon. 460 | Chapter 15 Viewing . The cut plane height of the view range for this view is 1200 mm. In the following illustration. expand Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Open m_Plan_Region. and double-click Level 1.

On the Options Bar. The Level 1 floor plan should display as shown in the following illustration. As the cursor moves across it. click Lines. 10 On the Design Bar. Press ESC to end the command. click Finish Sketch. click Edit for View Range. and then click OK twice. top and bottom clip planes. You use the view range property to control cut plane. click . and view depth) in the view range is the same as the level used to define the corresponding plane in the parent view. enter 4000 for the Top Offset. The plan region is no longer visible. you specify that the level used to define each plane (cut plane. and the view depth plane. 9 Click Apply. under Extents. 5 Select the red dashed line. 4 Move the cursor across the area where you sketched the plan region. the plan region is displayed as a red dashed rectangle. This means that the plan region view is going to cut all geometry at 2800 mm above Level 1. and enter 2800 for the Cut plane Offset. 3 In the Level 1 view. click Modify. view range. By selecting Parent View’s Level. and click Properties. ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box.Plan regions have a single property. Creating a View Plan Region | 461 . 8 Because the top clip plane value cannot be set lower than the cut plane. as it is displayed with hidden lines in this view. that is similar to the view range for plan views. ■ ■ ■ Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the top left. 7 In the View Range dialog box. the top and bottom clip planes. select Parent View’s Level (Level 1) for Cut plane. Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the bottom right. sketch the plan region using the blue tick marks for guidance: ■ On the Design Bar. right-click.

12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.The following illustration demonstrates how the level 1 floor plan view is being viewed with the plan region. 11 If you want to save your changes. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the File menu. 462 | Chapter 15 Viewing .

to place and render decals to create signs.Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 16 In this tutorial. 463 . billboards. AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit Building that is used to produce rendered views. and to create walkthroughs of your building information model. you learn to use the AccuRender® Radiosity and Raytrace features in Autodesk Revit Building to create rendered interior and exterior views of your building information model. and posters.

add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site. you: ■ ■ ■ change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a building model and render it with the AccuRender Raytrace feature. define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall. You learn to create and apply materials to a building model. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. You work with a building model that already has material applied to it. change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt. You also learn to create a new material and apply it to a building component.Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view. When you complete these changes. you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. 464 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you select a scene that defines the model environment. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. After you create the perspective view. and create the perspective view that you want to render. the floor. In this exercise.

TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. Verify that the material defined for the exterior finish layer (Layer 1) of the building model is Masonry .Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . click Wall.Cavity Wall . and click Edit/New. click the Training Files icon. click Open. right-click in the Design Bar. Open m_Cohouse. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. Rendering an Exterior View | 465 .rvt located in the Metric folder.Brick. and click the tab in the context menu. verify that Co-house . under Construction. View the finish material of the exterior walls 1 Verify that the 3D view of the townhouse building model is displayed.Heavyweight block is displayed for Type. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 6 Click Cancel three times to return to the 3D view of the building model without making any changes to the exterior finish at this time. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit for Structure.

466 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 28 Select one of the curtain wall mullions on the exterior face of the building. under _accurender.Brick. Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt 13 On the Design Bar. Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions 20 On the Settings menu. and click . under Construction. When Curtain Wall Mullions: Rectangular Mullion displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen. 8 In the Materials dialog box. select Site . expand Metals. 22 In the New Material dialog box. 21 In the Materials dialog box.Running. select the curtain wall mullion again. 27 On the Design Bar.200mm. click in the Material field that contains Default Floor. verify that Floor : Floor 1 displays in the Type Selector. click Duplicate. 25 Under Name. expand Masonry and click Brick. A preview of the brick texture that is currently assigned to the walls is displayed in the right pane of the Material Library.Change the brick texture of the exterior wall finish material 7 On the Settings menu.Plain. and click 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Materials. under Name. select Carib. click Modify. 12 Click OK twice. You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step. 14 On the Options Bar. 10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog box. 23 Under AccuRender. click Edit for Structure. under _accurender. click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building. for Layer 2. 19 Click OK four times.Asphalt. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. 11 Under Name. 26 Click OK twice. 18 In the Materials dialog box. and click Aluminum. select Polished. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. TIP If you do not select the curtain wall mullion on the first selection. under Name. 24 In the Material Library. enter Aluminum. click Edit/New. 9 Under AccuRender. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. click Materials. Polished and click OK. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Name. press TAB to cycle your selection through different building model components. select Masonry . .

and draw the rectangular region shown in the following illustration. verify that New is selected. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . and click OK. producing a photorealistic effect. click Region Raytrace. under Materials and Finishes. click Edit/New. under Name. Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made 34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. and curtain wall mullions are rendered (this takes a few moments).29 On the Options Bar. floor. and then click 32 In the Materials dialog box. select Exterior under Type. and curtain wall mullions to which you made material changes. click in the Material field. Polished. Rendering an Exterior View | 467 . 36 In the Scene Selection dialog box. 35 Move the cursor over the building model. 33 Click OK three times. The portion of the building that you selected is raytraced and the materials that you changed and applied to the exterior walls. click No. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box. Make sure the region includes the exterior walls. select Aluminum. This completes the changes in materials and textures that you make for the building model. 37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. floor. .

the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the season and location specified in the render scene settings. Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. 39 Proceed to the next exercise.38 On the Design Bar. Cnst.rvt. and double-click 1st Flr. you place two different types of trees on the building site. Adding Trees to the Site. click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building model in hidden line wireframe. expand Floor Plans. In a later exercise. when you render an exterior view of the model. expand Views (all). 468 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse. Add red maple trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser.

2 Zoom out so you can easily view the area surrounding the building model. 4 In the Type Selector. and click Site. The tree that you selected in this step is a red maple.Deciduous : Acer Rubrum . click Site Component. Available tree types are listed in the Type Selector by their Latin names. Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the following illustration.9 Meters. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. and click to place a tree. select M_Tree . right-click in the Design Bar. Rendering an Exterior View | 469 . 5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.

7 In the Type Selector. m_Cohouse.Create a new type of tree. under Other. 13 Under Name. Creating a Perspective View. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. click Duplicate. and then click display the Plant Library. to . 18 Proceed to the next exercise. under Identity Data. and click Site Component. 470 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . expand Trees and Shrubs. and add it to the site 6 On the Design Bar. 16 Move the cursor to the building site. click Modify. and place two black oak trees. 12 In the Plant Library. Black. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter 7000mm for Plant Height. and click Deciduous. and click OK. The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site. under accurender. and click OK. select any of the deciduous trees. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click in the Value field for Plant Name. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. 17 Press ESC to end tree placement. as shown in the following illustration. enter Black Oak. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box.rvt. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. 15 Under Other. 10 In the Name dialog box. click Edit/New. select Black Oak for Type Comments. select Oak. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK twice.

2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera. view open. Rendering an Exterior View | 471 . 3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration. on the View tab of the Design Bar. Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera.Place a camera in the first floor view 1 With the 1st Flr. The new perspective view is displayed. click Camera. Cnst.

right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective view name). Cnst. Cnst. 5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. expand 3D Views. 6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr. 472 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . The red triangle represents the FOV (field of vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view. view. and click Show Camera. double-click 1st Flr.Modify the camera position and back clipping plane in the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under Views (all).

enter Exterior. you select a scene and specify time. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View. right-click 3D View 1. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View In this exercise.rvt. under 3D Views. You must define a scene because this is the first time settings are being applied to this view. lighting. date. and environment settings that you use to render the view.7 In the Project Browser. m_Cohouse. and click OK. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Exterior. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. place. Rendering an Exterior View | 473 . and click Rename. 8 In the Rename View dialog box.

click Settings. and click Sun. click the Solar Angles tab. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the minutes precisely. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog box. 5 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog box. 7 Under Date. and drag the slider to set the time to 2:30 PM. Time. 6 Select By Date. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. under Scene Settings. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box.Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. click OK to accept the existing scene (Scene 1). 474 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. enter 10 (October) for Month and 5 for Day. 8 Under Time.

9 Click the Place tab. 11 Scroll down. under Scene Settings. 17 Under Advanced. click Environment. 20 In the Name list. The Ground Plane tab displays. 21 Click OK twice. click Raytrace. and click OK. 16 In the Environment dialog box. 22 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. 26 On the Design Bar.) 14 Click OK. 15 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. 23 Under Raytrace Settings. under _accurender. and select Boston. and enter bo. Dark. select Grass. select Ground Plane. click Image Size. under Scene Settings. 12 Click the Settings Tab. click Site.20 for Cloudiness. Render the perspective view 24 On the Design Bar. MA. click No. This setting produces a level of cloudiness in the sky that ranges from 0 (no clouds) to 1. select Autumn for Plant Season. 19 In the Material Library.00 (many clouds. 27 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 28 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. 25 Enter 150 for Resolution. USA. 13 Enter . click . Rendering an Exterior View | 475 . 18 Click Material. 10 Click in the Cities list. select Good for Quality. under Background Color. The rendered exterior perspective view is displayed. Rye.

click Save As. expand Renderings.Save the rendered view 29 On the Design Bar. Redisplay the rendered view 31 In the Project Browser under Views (all). on the File menu. 476 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . RPC people are represented by a circle in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. click Display Model to end rendering and redisplay the wireframe perspective view of the building model. you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor. 30 On the Design Bar. To create the rendered scene. define the view and render scene settings. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 32 If you want to save this exercise. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view. The rendered view is saved in the project and can be accessed from the Project Browser. Adding RPC People In this exercise. Rendering an Interior View. you add two RPC people to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. click Capture Rendering. you render an interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. and double-click Exterior to display the rendered view of the townhouse that you saved. and finally.

rvt. 7 Repeat steps 4 . 5 On the Options Bar. 2 Zoom in on the left side of the living room as shown. m_Cohouse. Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render 1 In the Project Browser under Views (all). click Component. Cnst. Rendering an Interior View | 477 . 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar.6 to select and place M_RPC Male: Alex to the right of Cathy and facing up and to the left (northwest).Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 6 Click to place Cathy to the right of the sofa and below the table. select Rotate after placement. and double-click 2nd Flr. expand Floor Plans. select M_RPC Female: Cathy. and then move the cursor to rotate her so she is facing up and to the right (northeast). 4 In the Type Selector.

rvt. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera.8 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Camera. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. 478 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. Specify the target point of the camera in front of the corner of the table. Creating the Interior Perspective View. m_Cohouse.

4 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. 3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Rendering an Interior View | 479 . Cnst.The interior perspective is displayed. double-click 2nd Flr. double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view. 5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display more of the view.

13 In the Element Properties dialog box. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 10 On the View toolbar.Resize the perspective view 6 On the Options Bar. 480 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . enter 178 mm for Height. and click OK. and click OK. and click Rename. click to display the 3D view of the building model. select Section Box. and select the section box. under Extents. 7 In the Crop Region Size dialog box. Grips are displayed on the section box. 8 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 9 In the Rename View dialog box. 12 On the View menu. A section box is displayed around the building model. 11 On the View menu. click the dimensions for Size. under Size. right-click 3D View 1. click View Properties. enter Interior. and click OK. click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it. enter 229 mm for Width. 14 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

Rendering an Interior View | 481 . you reduce the rendering time. double-click Interior to display the interior perspective view. This process allows you to limit the geometry that will be rendered when you create a rendering of your interior view. under 3D Views.15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you want to render is visible. you create a render scene to specify the time. Display the interior perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. date. place.rvt. Creating a New Render Scene. m_Cohouse. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a New Render Scene In this exercise. By limiting the geometry. and environment settings used to render the view.

such as windows and doors. Define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall 1 In the Project Browser. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. select {3D}. under Scene Settings. and click Save. 8 Under Date. MA. and click Sun. click the Solar Angles tab. select New. enter 6 (June) for Month and 6 for Day. When you define daylights for the curtain wall panels. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. select Summer for Plant Season. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 17 In the Environment dialog box. Dark. under accurender. under Background Color. click Settings. select Ground Plane. click OK. 9 Under Time. and enter bo. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View. 482 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 11 Click in the Cities list. 7 Select By Date. 19 Click Material. 10 Click the Place tab. You can select families with transparent materials. m_Cohouse. click Environment. under Use View’s Section Box. 18 Under Advanced. select Grass. The Ground Plane tab displays. select Interior. as daylight sources. USA. 12 Scroll down. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to precisely adjust the minutes. under Scene Settings. 14 Click Save. 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. 23 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. 21 In the Name list. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. 22 Click OK twice. and select Boston. 4 Under Type. 24 Under Scene Settings. you define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall and render the view. you allow sunlight to pass through the panels when you render the view. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View In this exercise. 16 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog box. and click OK. Rye. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. Time. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. under 3D Views. 13 Click the Settings tab. 6 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog box. specify a file location and name for the scene settings. 20 In the Material Library. on the Main tab. 15 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog box. click Site. double-click {3D}. and drag the slider to set the time to 8:30 PM. The 3D view of the building model with the section box is displayed. and enter Interior Scene for Name.Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. and click OK.rvt.

Render the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. click Radiate. double-click Interior. Light bounce is calculated for each individual light. which can take several minutes. the following rendered view is displayed. click OK. 6 In the Radiosity Information dialog box. select Medium (150 dpi) for Resolution. and click The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people. The RPC people do not display in the view until you raytrace them in the next steps.2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. click Raytrace. Rendering an Interior View | 483 . When radiate completes. 5 On the Design Bar. Curtain Wall 1). 7 On the Design Bar. 3 Select the curtain wall on the second floor (Walls: Curtain Wall. The radiosity process. 8 On the Options Bar. begins. click Daylights. .

You learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. 484 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 10 Close the exercise file. you must select or define a scene.9 If you want to save your changes. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shaded or Shaded with Edges AccuRender (Raytrace) IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option. which is the path that a camera will follow through your building model. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. and save the exercise file with a unique name. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. click Save As. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. elevation. Usually you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. but you can also define it in a 3D. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building model in Autodesk Revit Building. The walkthrough path is a spline. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. or section view. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. on the File menu. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. In a plan view. you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player independent of your Revit Building software.

TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. and click to specify the start point.rvt located in the Common folder. right-click in the Design Bar. click Settings ➤ Project Units. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. Open c_Townhouse. and click the tab in the context menu. or the first key frame. verify that Perspective is selected to create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. 5 Specify four additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown in the following illustration. If you prefer to use Metric values. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. of the walkthrough. The floor plan of the first floor of the townhouse is displayed. click Walkthrough. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 485 . click the Training Files icon. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and change unit formats as desired. and double-click 1st Floor. expand Floor Plans. and ends in the far corner of the living room. proceeds through the dining room.You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Open.

The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog box. If it is not. and double-click Walkthrough 1. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser under Views (all). click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height. 12 On the View menu. and click OK.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. on the Options Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). select the crop boundary. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. 486 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . expand Walkthroughs. 9 On the Options Bar. 8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. and select the crop boundary. click . verify Field of view is selected. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown in the following illustration. 11 Under Change.

13 On the Options Bar. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of 300 frames in the walkthrough. 14 Click . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 487 . c_Townhouse. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. press ESC. 17 Click . click Edit Walkthrough. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. proceed to the next exercise. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar.rvt. 16 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog box. and click OK. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. enter 1 for Frame. The walkthrough plays. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame).

You can move any camera target or key frame position. 488 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. click Edit Walkthrough. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the following illustration. double-click 1st Floor. select Path for Controls. clear Far Clip Active. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. and click OK. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. click . The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. 2 On the Options Bar. 5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). under Extents.

perhaps to 6” wide x 4” height. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. under Walkthroughs. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. and click OK. When you export the walkthrough. Recording the Walkthrough. shaded with edges. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system for Compressor.rvt. reducing the size of the image. and click Save. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI. double-click Walkthrough 1. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walk-through from the location that you specified in step 3. 1 On the File menu. 2 In the Save As dialog box. Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. or with AccuRender raytracing. specifying the number of frames. c_Townhouse. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. The AVI is recorded. click Edit Walkthrough. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. without opening Autodesk Revit Building. hidden line. 5 In the Video Compression dialog box. and drag it to the location shown in the following illustration. 4 Under Format. If you are unsure of what option to use. specify 10 for Frames per Second. 9 On the Options Bar. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. to play the walkthrough. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. 8 If you want to save this exercise.7 Click the third key frame position. click Export ➤ AVI. 3 Under Output Length. click Save As. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 489 . select <Shading> for Display mode. shaded. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise.

490 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

The architect's primary goal in documentation is to communicate the intent of the design. There remain many options in the software that do not quantify specific dimensions so much as they explain the subjective complexity of the work. A majority of tools in Autodesk Revit Building are intended to describe number. tutorials on the Accurender features of Revit Building can be found under Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs." In Revit Building. In this series of exercises. To express texture beyond material specifics. There are two directions you can choose when organizing presentation graphics: realism and stylistics. sections. an outside reviewer. Using the pre-built building model. and details. and line quality without the measurement of its thickness is to transcend "building" and to recognize the "architecture. In this tutorial. and Section Boxes. Whether the audience is the general contractor. you explore the stylistic approach. 491 . tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. They include the Accurender® Plug-in for Rendering. Advanced Model Graphics. Co-house. For the realistic approach. type. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. and other quantifiable elements within the context of contract documents. a consultant. length.Presentation Views 17 In this tutorial. you learn several graphic techniques using these above mentioned tools to create an "analytique. the Linework Tool. or the client. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. elevations. there are several options for expressing the architecture." The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. you learn various methods of effectively communicating your design intent to your audience by creating presentation views.

Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. you create a copy of the plan. 492 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique.rvt located in the Metric folder. click Open. Cnst. right-click 2nd Flr. you create a presentation floor plan. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. and click Duplicate. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click the Training Files icon. expand Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog box. expand Floor Plans. Open m_Cohouse. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. In order for the floor plan to fit into the analytique.

and click OK. navigate to the folder of your choice. Modify visibility/graphics 4 On the View menu. Notice that no annotations display in this view. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 8 Click OK. Modify view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the frame. Down Arrow. This turns off the visibility of all tags. and click Save. 12 Proceed with the next exercise.rvt. 7 Under Visibility. sections. 11 In the Save As directory. dimensions. and Up Arrow. 5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box.2 In the Project Browser. UP Text. Cnst. click the Annotation Categories tab. 3 In the Rename View dialog box. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. this represents the view getting smaller. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. click Visibility/Graphics. click Save As. click the Scale control and select 1: 100. and click Rename. expand the Stairs category. Using Advanced Model Graphics. 10 On the File menu. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 493 . NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. and clear DOWN Text. under Floor Plans. elevations. and so on in this view.

At that place. Under Intensity. 5 Under Sunlight Settings. Within a Project. under Sunlight Settings. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. the darker the shadows. select Cast Shadows. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. The Shadow intensity dictates the darkness of the shadow display. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. and delete multiple locations in order to analyze a single prototype. click . and click OK. Time and Place. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box are applied only to the active view. you can specify one place where the project resides within the world. MA. ■ ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 2 On the View Control Bar. and click Advanced Model Graphics. you can create. Under Shadows Properties. specify 35 for Shadow. 7 Select Boston. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. USA for City. select By Date.Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. The higher the number. click for Place. The Sun and Shadows Settings are shared with Accurender and can also be used when rendering. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog box. modify. NOTE Shadows can be cast in all view styles except Wireframe.rvt. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. click the Place tab. double-click it in the Project Browser. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. 494 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view.

clear Ground Plane. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. you can enter any city you wish. be aware that if you enter a different city. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen depending on the settings that you choose. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. under Sunlight Settings. click OK. 11 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. 14 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. select Ground Plane and select 1st Flr. however. 16 On the File menu. 9 Under Sunlight Settings. . Turn off the ground plane shadows 12 On the View Control Bar. click OK. click Save. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. click This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. Cnst. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. and click OK. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 495 . for At Level. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles.NOTE For this step. 10 Click OK. specify 10/27/2004 for Date and 1:00:00 PM for Time. under Sun and Shadows Settings. and click Advanced Model Graphics.

4 In the Views dialog box. and click OK. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. 6 On the Design Bar. and click to place it. right-click the Design Bar. and click View. 7 Zoom in around the viewport.Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. and click Add View to Sheet. Notice the blank sheet is portrait oriented. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. 496 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . select Arch Portrait. The viewport displays at the tip of the cursor. and notice a view title displays. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the View tab is not available. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. click Add View. click Modify. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Sheet.

click .Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. For this analytique. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 497 . 12 In the Name dialog box. under Graphics. 9 On the Options Bar. To accomplish this. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. and click OK. click OK. enter Presentation. and click OK. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. select No for Show Title. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. Notice the viewport no longer displays a view title. click Duplicate. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box.

19 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and draw a rectangle around the view as shown. click .Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. 18 On the Options Bar. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. If necessary. 17 In the Type Selector. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. click Filled Region. and select Chain. fill properties. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. click . You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. select Invisible Lines. 498 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. 20 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. and click Activate View. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. and the boundary of the region.

enter Presentation for Sheet Name. click the Fill Pattern value and the arrow that displays within it. and click OK. Name the sheet 31 Right-click the edge of the sheet. select Solid Fill. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. 34 Proceed with the next lesson. 33 On the File menu. click Edit/New. 27 In the Type Properties dialog box. 25 In the Type Properties dialog box. 23 In the Type Properties dialog box. 29 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. 24 In the Name dialog box. enter Solid Black. click Finish Sketch. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique | 499 . and click Properties. click OK. 28 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. under Name. you create an elevation and add it to the Presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. scroll down. click Region Properties. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique. select the entire chain (use TAB ) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. When you are finished drawing the chain. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Save. 21 On the Design Bar. 30 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. under Graphics. click Duplicate. and click OK. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson.TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. under Identity Data. and click Deactivate View.

you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Views (all). right-click South. expand Elevations. 500 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .Preparing the Elevation View for the Analytique In this exercise. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. and click Duplicate. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

select Cast Shadows. expand the Doors category. 7 Click the Annotation Categories tab. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. and clear Surface Pattern. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. Apply advanced model graphics 9 On the View Control Bar. 6 Under Visibility. expand the Walls category. and clear Elevation Swing. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 11 Under Shadow Properties. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 On the View menu. 15 In the Name dialog box. click . 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. enter Presentation South Elevation. 13 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. verify that Hidden Line is the selected Style. 3 In the Rename View dialog box. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. right-click Copy of South. click OK. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. and click OK.2 In the Project Browser. and click OK. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. scroll up. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique | 501 . specify 35 for Shadow. click Visibility/Graphics. By changing the angle of the sun. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box are applied only to the active view. specify 2:30:00 PM for Time. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. 12 Under Intensity. scroll down. and click OK. 8 Click OK. and click Rename. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. under Sunlight Settings. under Elevations. 14 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. on the Model Categories tab. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. under Visibility. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. click Duplicate.

502 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .18 On the File menu. click Add View. 19 Proceed with the next exercise. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. and double-click A105 . 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. 3 In the Views dialog box. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. under Views (all). Adding a Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. Add view to sheet 1 In the Project Browser.Presentation. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. expand Sheets. and click Add View to Sheet. click Save.rvt. Adding a Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane.

select Viewport: Presentation. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique | 503 .Notice the viewport displays a view title. 5 In the Type Selector. Notice the view title no longer displays.

504 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . click Save. click Modify. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. 8 On the File menu. 7 On the Design Bar. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. Adding Section Views to the Analytique.

double-click 1st Flr.rvt. 4 Add the section shown below. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. 3 On the Options Bar. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 505 . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Adjust the controls to modify the extents.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. under Floor Plans. click Section. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and use the flip arrows if necessary. select 1: 100 for Scale. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Cnst.

506 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . expand Sections (Callout 1). Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so it is readily identifiable. click Callout. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select 1: 100 for Scale.Section 2 is added to the building model. To accomplish this. you will create a callout around the building model components within the section view. and double-click Section 2. To fit correctly in the analytique. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Options Bar. this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees. 8 Draw a callout around all the building model components within the section view as shown.

click Modify. 16 Under Visibility. and click Rename. click Visibility/Graphics. 15 Under Visibility. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. expand the Doors category. double-click Presentation Section 2. 11 In the Rename View dialog box. click the Model Categories tab. right-click Callout of Section 2. under Sections (Callout 1). enter Presentation Section 2. and click OK. 10 In the Project Browser. scroll up. expand the Walls category. scroll down. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 507 . 12 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Callout 1). and clear Elevation Swing. TIP You can also open the callout in the Project Browser by double-clicking Callout of Section 2 under Sections (Callout 1). Modify Visibility/Graphic Overrides 13 On the View menu. and clear Surface Pattern.

19 Click OK. 508 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 24 Proceed with the next exercise. 23 On the File menu. Hide the crop boundary 20 Select the crop boundary. under Extents. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. Notice the crop region no longer displays. clear Crop Region Visible. click Save. 21 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view.17 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 18 Click the Annotation Categories tab.

click . 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 509 . TIP You may need to move the dialog box off to the side in order to see the view. Notice the shadows on the view provide more contrast and a sense of depth. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. and click OK. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. Under Intensity. Notice that the shadows displayed do not offer much contrast. you create a new Sun and Shadow setting in order to make a presentation view with more contrast. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view.rvt. 5 In the Name dialog box. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. In addition. select Relative to View. under Sections (Callout 1). 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. click Apply. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. 2 On the View Control Bar. open the Project Browser and. Under Shadows Properties. In the steps that follow. under Sunlight Settings. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. specify an Altitude of 70 degrees. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. double-click Presentation Section 2. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. select Directly. Click Apply. specify 35 for Shadow. select Cast Shadows. and click OK. click Duplicate. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings.

NOTE The line style. 11 Proceed with the next exercise. Silhouette Edges. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique. click Save. 10 On the File menu. 9 Under Silhouette Edges. under Silhouette Edges. was added to this dataset for training purposes. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise.TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. Notice application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180 degrees. Apply silhouette edges 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. and click OK. TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. 510 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. You can modify this line style by selecting Line Styles from the Settings menu. select Override Silhouettes.

click Modify. 3 In the Views dialog box.rvt. and click to place the selected view. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. The view title no longer displays. and click Add View to Sheet.Presentation.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Type Selector. select Section: Presentation Section 2. click Add View. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 511 . 6 On the Design Bar. double-click A105 . select Viewport: Presentation. under Sheets (all).

8 Select the callout that you added previously. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of rotation. double-click Section 2. Rotate the callout view 7 In the Project Browser. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. and either enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius.Notice the section needs to be rotated 180 degrees. you click to specify the start radius. 9 On the Edit toolbar. To rotate an object. Using a clock as a reference. click . specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. and press ENTER. In the steps that follow. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. you accomplish this by rotating the callout within the section view. under Sections (Callout 1). 512 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .

Presentation. Notice that the extents need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. Notice the Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180 degrees and now needs to be repositioned.After you enter the rotation value and press Enter. double-click A105 . the callout rotates 180 degrees. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 513 . 12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. under Sheets (all).

15 On the Design Bar. and drag it up and to the left as shown. After applying the view template to a new section view.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. click Modify. you create a view template for presentation views in order to reduce repetitive work while creating subsequent views. click Save. 514 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . Working with a Presentation View Template. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. 16 On the File menu.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. double-click Presentation Section 2. under Sections (Type 1). and click Duplicate. 4 In the View Templates dialog box. enter Presentation Section 1. Now. Apply presentation view template 8 On the View menu. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click OK. click Apply View Template. right-click Copy of Section 1. 2 On the View menu. you can simply apply the presentation view template. right-click Section 1. 7 In the Rename View dialog box.rvt. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 515 . 6 In the Project Browser. 3 In the New View Template dialog box. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. under Sections (Callout 1). and click OK. and click Rename. click OK. under Sections (Type 1). enter Presentation. click Save as View Template. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser.

and click Deactivate View. 14 In the Type Selector. select Presentation. and click Add View to Sheet. 16 On the View menu. Notice the furniture. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. annotations. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. 18 Right-click the viewport. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. click View Properties. 12 In the Views dialog box. select Viewport: Presentation. double-click A105 . and click Activate View. under Sheets (all). Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. select 90 degrees Counterclockwise for View Rotation on Sheet.9 In the Select View Template dialog box. and elevation swings no longer display. select Section: Presentation Section 1. 516 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK.Presentation. and click OK. lighting fixtures. click Add View. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. under Graphics. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. 15 Right-click the viewport.

Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 517 . 21 Proceed with the next exercise.20 On the File menu. such as a tracery window or column capital. Working in a Callout Analytique Traditional analytiques typically contain a detail. In this exercise. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. click Save. Working in a Callout Analytique.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Project Browser. right-click Callout of Section 1. enter Presentation Callout. and click OK. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 518 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . click Modify. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. select the callout. double-click Section 1.rvt. under Sections (Type 1). After you add the callout. under Sections (Callout 1). click Callout. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Rename View dialog box. and click Rename. and modify the extents and the callout head location as shown.

under Sections (Callout 1). under Extents. and click View Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. double-click Presentation Callout. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 519 . and click OK. clear Crop Region Visible. 8 Right-click.6 In the Project Browser. 7 Select the crop boundary and adjust the bottom so that there is a small gap as shown.

and click OK. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Views dialog box. click Modify. 17 On the View menu. double-click A105 . click Add View.Presentation. and move it into the position shown below. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 520 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. select Viewport: Presentation. Modify presentation callout on sheet 16 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. and click Deactivate View. under Sheets (all). and click Activate View. and click Add View to Sheet. click View Properties.Add callout to presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. select Section: Presentation Callout. specify a value of 22 for Scale Value 1. 19 Right-click the callout presentation view. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. 15 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Selector. select Custom for View Scale.

You can sketch all of them at once or one filled region at a time. Apply filled regions to presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 521 . hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as it is a stylized representation of the architectural forms. select Solid Black for Type. In the steps that follow. activate the viewport. click Filled Region. Click Finish Sketch on the Design Bar when you are finished. 24 In the Element Properties dialog box. Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas of contrast. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. and click OK. click Region Properties.NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. and make adjustments as necessary. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog box. When finished. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. 25 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. under Sections (Callout 1). 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 23 On the Design Bar. double-click Presentation Callout.

under Sheets (all). click Filled Region. double-click A105 .Presentation. click . Add poche region 27 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. 29 On the Options Bar. 522 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .26 On the Project Browser. 28 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and sketch the rectangle shown below. and click Activate View.

31 On the View menu. Notice the entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. 33 Select the crop region. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. select Crop Region Visible. and drag the left and bottom extent until the entire poche region displays. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 523 .30 On the Design Bar. under Extents. click View Properties.

and click OK. click Save. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. click View Properties. and click Deactivate View. clear Crop Region Visible. under Extents. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes. 35 In the Element Properties dialog box. 37 On the File menu. 524 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 36 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet.34 On the View menu.

and click 1: 200. and click Advanced Model Graphics.s and apply shadows to the views. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. 3 On the View Control Bar. Create southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. double-click Isometric. click Orient ➤ Southwest. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click the Scale control. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 525 . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. you create three similar isometric views with different cutaway.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. 2 On the View menu.rvt.

for At Level. 7 In the Name dialog box. and click OK.5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. under 3D Views. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. click . Cnst. under Silhouette Edges. Rename and duplicate isometric views 12 In the Project Browser. enter Isometric 1. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. and click Duplicate. and click Rename. 19 In the Element Properties dialog box. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Select 1st Flr. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. 9 Click OK. under Sunlight Settings. and click OK. Specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. 11 Under Silhouette Edges. right-click Isometric. click Duplicate. 16 In the Rename View dialog box. Add a section box to Isometric 2 17 In the Project Browser. specify 35 for Shadow. select Override Silhouettes. Select Ground Plane. double-click Isometric 2. 526 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . and click OK. select Section Box. select Cast Shadows. and click Rename. under Extents. Specify an Altitude of 45 degrees. and click OK. 13 In the Rename View dialog box. 15 In the Project Browser. click View Properties. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. right-click Isometric 1. and click OK. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. Notice the section box that displays around the building model. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. Under Shadows Properties. Under Intensity. under 3D Views. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. 18 On the View menu. enter Isometric 2. 14 In the Project Browser. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Directly. Select Relative to View.

21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 527 .20 Select the section box. click Modify on the Design Bar. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the second floor as shown. You can use this to rotate the section box. When you are finished. TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol. These allow you to modify the extents of the section box. Notice the grips that display on each face of the section box.

under 3D Views. select Crop Region. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. When you are finished. right-click Isometric 2. double-click Isometric 3. 25 In the Project Browser. clear Crop Region Visible. 29 Select the section box. 528 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . either adjust the plane location. 22 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 31 On the View menu. and click OK. click View Properties. 27 In the Element Properties dialog box. 26 On the View menu. select Crop Region. make a copy of the view. click Modify on the Design Bar. the stairs and railings may display. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. under Extents. double-click Isometric 2. Notice the section box no longer displays. In such a case.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. click View Properties. and click OK. and click Duplicate. under Extents. 30 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 28 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 24 In the Rename View dialog box. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. clear Crop Region Visible. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. enter Isometric 3. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. 23 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.

you stack the three isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. under Sheets (all). 34 In the Project Browser. 36 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. select Viewport: Presentation. drag Isometric 3 underneath the left section view as shown and. drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and. select Viewport: Presentation. Notice the filled region partially covers the view. 35 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. double-click A105 . drag Isometric 2 underneath Isometric 3 as shown and.Next. in the Type Selector. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 529 . in the Type Selector. under 3D Views. select Viewport: Presentation.Presentation. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. in the Type Selector. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 33 In the Project Browser.

and click Activate View. 43 On the Design Bar. click Lines. This will make it easier to draw lines. select Concrete for Type. click Edit. and on the Options Bar. and then click Edit/New. 38 Select the poche filled region. 39 On the Design Bar. You change this back to solid fill when you are done. under Graphics. 530 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 42 Click OK twice. 40 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Region Properties. 44 Using the drawing tools. The image below shows the lines redrawn. You may need to use the split tools and trim tools to modify lines along the way.Modify filled region boundaries 37 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 41 In the Type Properties dialog box. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. select Transparent for Background.

50 Proceed with the next exercise. you create the final view for the analytique. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views. click Region Properties. click Finish Sketch. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. 49 On the File menu. 47 On the Design Bar. click Save. select Solid Black for Type. and click Deactivate View. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 531 . After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. a cutaway perspective view. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout view. and click OK. 46 In the Element Properties dialog box.45 On the Design Bar. you add it to the presentation sheet.

532 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . under Floor Plans. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. then you specify the eye direction and range. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown.rvt. Adding a camera is a two-click process: first you specify the eye location. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. The view opens immediately. click Camera. double-click 1st Flr. Cnst.

click . 5 On the View Control Bar. specify 35 for Shadow. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. Under Shadows Properties. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 533 . select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. Under Intensity. select Cast Shadows. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric for Name.4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. and click OK. select Override Silhouettes. under Silhouette Edges. and click OK. 9 Under Silhouette Edges. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. click the Advanced Model Graphics control.

You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well. click View Properties. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box.Add a section box 10 On the View menu. 12 Select the section box. under Extents. 13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the following image. A section box now cuts through the building model. Notice the controls that display on each plane. and click OK. select Section Box. 534 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .

14 Select the crop boundary. select Scale (locked proportions). click Size. 21 In the Project Browser. clear Crop Region Visible. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 535 . click View Properties. you must specify the actual size of the image. drag 3D View 2 onto the presentation sheet. under 3D Views.Presentation. double-click A105 . 19 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Change. 18 On the View menu. under Sheets (all). and click OK. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 On the Project Browser. enter 165 mm for Width. under Extents. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. 15 On the Options Bar. 17 Under Size. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog box. go to the Type Selector and select Viewport: Presentation. and click OK. After placing it.

specify a text size of 40 mm. click Duplicate. click Text. click Edit/New. under Text. and click OK. click Edit/New. Annotating the Analytique. under Text. 536 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . select the same font as the title. and click OK. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Save. click Duplicate. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 13 Add a title to the analytique as shown. 9 In the Name dialog box. select a font. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Title. click OK. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. enter Description.rvt. and click OK. 5 In the Name dialog box. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. specify a text size of 6 mm. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. and click OK. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter Title. 2 On the Options Bar. Add a title and description 12 In the Type Selector.22 On the File menu. click . Create new text types 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

16 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. 17 On the Design Bar. 18 On the File menu. click Modify. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 537 . This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. click Save. select Description. 15 In the Type Selector.14 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text.

538 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .

Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project. shape. In this tutorial. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date. thus the term family. they are still related and come from a single source. each with a different size. material set. Even though various types within a family can look completely different.About Families and the Family Editor 18 All elements in Autodesk Revit Building are “family based.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Building to help you manage your data and make changes easily. 539 . or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it.

You provide the information necessary to uniquely describe the family geometry. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . foundation. There are. This makes file management much easier. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. but you cannot create new system families. if you create a family called "double-hung window" that includes types with several sizes. generic. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. such as a dome roof. floors. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects needed to create the particular family type. has wall types that define interior. You also learn about the Family Editor. and partition wall styles. and roofs. Using the Family Editor. and when and how to use it. The basic walls system family. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a new component family based on a variety of family templates. floors. Walls. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Building and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. for example. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. For example. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. 540 | Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor . You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. In this lesson. because there is only one file to track. however. there is another type of family that allows you create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Building recognize it as a particular component type. Revit Building has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit Building and comprise principle building components such as walls. and roofs are examples of these types of families. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. The following dialog box shows how you can select a specific family template to start your family design project. exceptions to this rule.Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit Building is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. exterior.rfa extension. while many more are stored in component libraries. In addition.

and save them from a project file to your library if needed. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. for example. custom wall treatments. Standalone families include columns. and also a standalone furniture family component. You create in-place families only within the current project. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. Host-based families have components that require hosts. The following illustration shows host-based window and door family components in a wall. An example is a door family hosted by a wall family. and the category that you use determines the component’s appearance and display control within the project. Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . so they are useful for objects unique to that project. The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family. You can load them into projects.rfa extension. transfer them from one project to another. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. and furniture. trees.Family templates are either host-based or standalone. Using Families and the Family Editor | 541 .

3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. such as plan. it should be available within the Type Selector. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. To add a family to your project. how to access it. if you change the original family. if you have exhausted your external resources. presume it is a bay window that you require. In this section. and click Open. There is a logical thought process that you should follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. you can double-click any file with an . you will inevitably come to a point where you need a specific component for your design. and when to use it. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. you learn about the Family Editor. such as newsgroups. you can drag it into the document window. navigate to a family file. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. After the family has been loaded in the project. However. it opens within the Family Editor. you need to reload the family in the project to see the updated family. If you find a close match. or you can load it using the Load From Library. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. Also consider any internal family libraries that may exist on the network. 2 On the File menu. or 3D. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. 4 If you can’t find the component you require. This will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. you should then try to find the component that most closely resembles it. 2 If there isn’t a component family loaded in the project. elevation. 542 | Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor . In this case. you should create a new component family using one of the family templates as a starting point.Adding a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family.rfa extension and it will open Revit Building in the Family Editor. select the appropriate template. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. you can click File ➤ Open. you learned about the different types of Revit Building families and when to use them. With Revit Building open. In this exercise. it is saved with the project. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. consider checking the web library and other web resources. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. how to access it. To start a new family. Within the Windows® environment. Load Family command on the File menu. and then load it into the project. 5 Finally. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. 3 Next. and click Open. When the family opens. When to use the Family Editor During the design process. In the final exercise. you learn when to use the Family Editor. open it in the Family Editor. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. modify it as needed. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family.

5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs.General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. 9 Save the newly-defined family. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. Using Families and the Family Editor | 543 . 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry.

544 | Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor .

In addition. When you create an in-place family. a lighting fixture. Using the installed templates. not within the Family Editor. and several annotation families. you create an in-place family. 545 . You create a furniture family. you learn how to create a different type of component. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. you start with a simple door family and then move onto a window family. In each lesson. you learn how to create specific Autodesk Revit Building families. you create it within the project file.Creating Components in the Family Editor 19 In this tutorial.

546 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The door type has a variable height and width. you create new door types based on size and assign parameters respectively. and thickness.Creating a Door Family In this lesson. You also learn how to constrain the door design by adding labelled dimensions to specify values for the door width. you draw the plan view components for the new door family. height. Drawing the Door Plan View Components In this exercise. you create a custom door family based on the definition of a flush exterior door. After you create the door leaf as an extrusion.

and click Open. 9 In the Type Selector. Select Metric Door. 6 Maximize the window. click Tile. sketch a 1000 mm x 50 mm rectangle for the door leaf as shown. part of the door properties. 7 Enter ZF. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.Create a new family based on the default door template 1 Close any open projects or families. 5 On the Window menu. and represent the door opening profile.rft. are also displayed. Draw the door panel plan view representation 8 On the Design Bar. Level. 2 On the File menu. click New ➤ Family. Creating a Door Family | 547 . Labelled dimensions. 10 On the Options Bar. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. The reference planes that display are part of the default door template. click . 4 On the View menu. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. 11 Starting at the door hinge point on the lower left corner of the door opening. The door opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. Notice the four tiled views. select Doors [projection]. Floor Plan: Ref. click Symbolic Lines.

13 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the door panel as shown. click Dimension.Dimension the door panel 12 On the Design Bar. 14 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown. 548 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening. 19 On the Options Bar. Creating a Door Family | 549 . select Thickness for Label. 18 Select the horizontal dimension that references the door thickness. 16 Select the vertical dimension that controls the door width. click Modify.Add dimension labels to the door leaf 15 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all dimensions labelled with it change accordingly. select Width for Label. Because labelled dimensions are parameters.

550 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar. you first specify the arc center. and select the command from the menu. along with the witness line controls. as shown.Draw the door opening plan view arc 20 Select the dimension with the two EQ symbols and move it. select Plan Swing [cut]. click the down arrow button. the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point. 26 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint. so it doesn’t visually interfere with the door swing location. you create the solid geometry of the door leaf with an extrusion. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. When drawing an arc from center and end points. and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point. In the image below. 22 In the Type selector. click . click Symbolic Lines. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry In this exercise. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 21 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. then you specify each end point. 24 Enter SI. 25 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point.

double-click Exterior. and click OK. enter 50 mm for Depth. 7 Select the upper left corner of the door opening for the first corner of the rectangle. under Elevations. 2 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 3 On the Design Bar. select Reference Plane: Exterior for Name. double-click Left. 6 On the Options Bar.1 In the Project Browser. and click . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Creating a Door Family | 551 . click Set Work Plane. and then select the lower right corner of the door opening for the second corner of the rectangle. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. 5 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Finish Sketch. 9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 8 On the Design Bar.

Specify the visibility of the door leaf in plan view 15 On the Design Bar. then click to specify the dimension witness line. select Thickness for Label.10 On the Design Bar. click Modify and select the dimension. 12 On the Design Bar. Level. 13 On the Options Bar. click Dimension. click Modify. under Floor Plans. TIP When you add the witness line to the exterior face of the extrusion. use the TAB key to toggle to the extrusion reference. 14 In the Project Browser. 552 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . double-click Ref. 11 Add a horizontal dimension from the exterior face of the door extrusion to the interior face of the door extrusion.

click Visibility. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Oak. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. under AccuRender. select Front/Back. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. Assigning Materials to the Door Components In this exercise. click Materials.No Gloss. you assign a material to the door leaf. 4 In the Materials dialog box. 18 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. 20 On the Options Bar. click 11 In the Materials dialog box. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. and clear Plan/RCP. Assign the Oak Door material to the door leaf 8 Select the door leaf extrusion. and click OK. click OK. The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material. 7 In the Materials dialog box. This material designation controls how it displays in shaded and hidden line views. Left/Right. Create a new material based on the existing red oak material 1 On the Settings menu. 17 On the Options Bar. Assign the Oak Door material to the door frame 14 Select the interior door frame extrusion. enter Oak Door for Name. 19 Under Detail Levels. 5 In the Material Library dialog box. Assigning Materials to the Door Components. click . click Modify. 3 In the New Material dialog box. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 9 On the Options Bar. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. click Duplicate. click OK.Dark. under Materials and Finishes. and Fine are selected. select Oak Door. click . for Material. It also defines its appearance when rendered. under Name. Creating a Door Family | 553 . and When cut in Plan/RCP. Medium. The solid geometry of the door is now complete. verify that Coarse. 6 Click OK. and click OK.16 Select the door leaf extrusion. select Panel for Subcategory. and click OK. and click OK. 2 In the Materials dialog box. click for Texture. 13 On the Design Bar. under View Specific Display.Red/Stained.

22 Zoom in on a door corner. double-click View 1. 21 On the View Control Bar. 554 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 16 In the Element Properties dialog box. for Material. click . and click OK. under Views (all). click the Model Graphics Style control.15 On the Options Bar. click 17 In the Materials dialog box. select Oak Door for Name. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. and select Shading with Edges. 19 Repeat the previous five steps for the exterior frame extrusion. click OK. The door frame is assigned the new Oak Door material. under 3D Views. View the new door 20 In the Project Browser.

25 In the Family Types dialog box. Notice the door geometry adapts to the new dimension values. 26 Return the door parameters to their original values. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Family Types. Flexing the new family is an important part of the design process. enter 75 mm for Frame Width. By flexing the new component. Flex the door model 23 Zoom out to view the entire door. 27 Click OK. In the Family Types dialog box. Under Other. you ensure it adjusts to the changes it may encounter once loaded into a project. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Defining New Door Types Creating a Door Family | 555 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 2500 mm for Height. Try to move the dialog box off to the side so you can still see the door family next to it. Enter 1000 mm for Width.The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame. This allows you to apply changes made in the dialog box and see how the new door reacts. enter 125 mm for Frame Width. enter 2000 mm for Height. 24 On the Design Bar. Click Apply. Under Other. Click Apply. 28 Proceed to the next exercise.

and click Open. enter 1220 x 2134mm for Name. You now have three new door types defined within your door family. enter 750 x 2100mm for Name. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. under Family Types. click New. you define new door types based on the door model that you have created. and click OK. click New ➤ Project.rte is the Template file. Define the third new door type. Define the second new door type. Place new door types in the project 19 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Name dialog box. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 13 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new door family with the name. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Training Door. and click OK. click Family Types. click Load. 15 In the New Project dialog box. Enter 1220 mm for Width.rfa.rfa. enter 2100 mm for Height. click New. Click Apply. 556 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 18 In the Open dialog box. click New. 8 Under Family Types. enter 925 x 2000mm for Name. Enter 925 mm for Width. and click OK. Define new door types with various heights and widths 1 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Family Types dialog box. verify that DefaultMetric. enter 2000 mm for Height. Training Door. 11 Click OK. click Save. navigate to the location where you saved the door family.Defining New Door Types In this exercise. and click OK. 3 In the Name dialog box. 17 On the Options Bar. enter 2134 mm for Height. 12 On the File menu. Click Apply. Under Create new. click Wall. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. Load the new door family into a new project 14 On the File menu. 20 Draw a wall segment 8000mm long. 5 Under Family Types. Click Apply. under Template file. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Door. 9 In the Name dialog box. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 750 mm for Width. select Project. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. select it. Use the default wall selection in the Type Selector.

22 On the View Control Bar. and select Shading with Edges. select Training Door : 750 x 2100mm. 25 Add the door to the left side of the wall as shown. 27 Add this door to the center of the wall as shown. click . click the Model Graphics Style control. Creating a Door Family | 557 . 23 On the Design Bar. select Training Door : 925 x 2000mm.21 On the View toolbar. 24 In the Type Selector. 26 In the Type Selector. click Door.

30 You can close all files without saving. you create a custom window family based on the definition of a fixed rectangular window with nine lights. Creating a Door Family. default sill height. You then assign parameters to the window family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the nine-light prototype. 29 Add the third door type to the right side of the wall as shown. 558 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . You create the window frame. you assign new dimension values to the window to create new types within the window family. select Training Door : 1220 x 2134mm. and specify values for the window width. and create the window sash as a sweep. Creating a Window Family In this lesson.28 In the Type Selector. height. This completes the lesson. glazing and mullions as extrusions. Finally. You now have three new flush exterior doors based on the new door family prototype. and mullion offset.

Specifying the New Window Parameters In this exercise. 4 On the Window menu. Labelled dimensions. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Creating a Window Family | 559 . you specify the parameters for the new window family. The window opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. equally spaced vertical mullions. click New ➤ Family 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. 7 Enter ZF.rft. Select Metric Window. part of the window properties. The window type has a variable height and width. are also displayed. The reference planes that display are part of the default window template and represent the window opening profile. and click Open. 2 On the File menu. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. Four views are tiled on your display. click Tile. 6 Maximize the exterior elevation view. 5 On the View menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. and the height of the top and bottom row of lights is adjustable. Create a new family based on the default window template 1 Close any open projects or families.

10 In the Family Types dialog box. This process is called “flexing the model. The profile is swept along the path to create the solid geometry. these specific type parameters are adjustable once the window is part of a project.8 Two dimension strings display with their labels. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry. and click Apply. Enter 1800 mm for Width. 11 Enter 1000 mm for Height and 2000 mm for Width. 560 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Click Apply. Height and Default Sill Height. click Family Types. The label name. is one of the type parameters. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry In this exercise. also one of the window properties. Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window opening. Modify the new window type height and width parameters 9 On the Design Bar. and click Apply. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. then sketching the sweep profile. When you add labels to dimensions. enter 1300 mm for Height. you create the solid geometry of the window frame with a sweep. 12 Click OK. Creating sweep geometry requires first sketching the sweep path. This is the starting point for the new window. Notice how the window opening adapts to the changing dimension values. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Change the height and width values again.” and it is done to avoid conflicts and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed.

10 Zoom in on the red dot in the middle of the wall.Create a sweep path for the window frame solid geometry 1 On the Design Bar. 9 On the View Control Bar. click Finish Path. and select 1:10. click Ref Plane. 13 Pick the exterior wall face so that a reference line is offset 50 mm to the left of the exterior wall face as shown. 5 Sketch a rectangle to represent the sweep path starting at the upper left corner of the opening and ending at the lower right corner. 8 In the Go To View dialog box. The red dot indicates the intersection of the sweep path and the profile plane. click Sketch Profile. 6 On the Design Bar. click Sketch 2D Path. click the Scale control. click . select Elevation: Right. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. 11 On the Design Bar. and specify an offset of 50 mm. Snap the cursor to each corner. 12 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. Add a reference plane for the sweep profile 7 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Design Bar. click Lines. click . Creating a Window Family | 561 . and click Open View. 4 On the Options Bar.

click Modify. click Lines. 16 Add a dimension between the exterior wall face and the new reference plane. 24 Below the red dot. enter Sash for the Name. 20 On the Options Bar.14 On the Design Bar. and select the reference plane. 18 Drag the value control off to the side as shown. select Chain and click . and click OK. 562 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Dimension. click . 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. 15 On the Options Bar. click Modify. select Prefer: Wall faces. sketch the frame profile approximately as shown. 23 On the Options Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. and select the dimension. Sketch the window frame profile 22 On the Design Bar. under Identity Data.

and drag it to the exterior face of the wall. When the lock displays. However. Precise dimensions are assigned to the frame profile in subsequent steps. click Modify. and drag it to the interior face of the wall. the exact dimensions are not critical. 27 Select the left edge of the frame section. the frame profile should extend beyond the edges of the wall. click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face. Creating a Window Family | 563 .NOTE When you sketch the frame profile. click it to constrain the frame to the exterior wall face. When the lock displays. 25 On the Design Bar. 26 Select the right edge of the frame section.

click Modify. select the line you want to move. 564 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Dimension. TIP After adding the dimension. and specify the dimension value. When the lock displays. 30 Add a vertical dimension of 40 mm to the left side of the frame and another vertical dimension of 20 mm to the right side of the frame. as shown.28 Select the short line parallel and to the right of the Sash reference plane. Drag it to the left and align it with the Sash reference plane. 29 On the Design Bar. click it to lock the line to the reference plane.

32 Select the 20 mm dimension. 35 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sweep. When the lock displays. click Finish Profile. expand 3D Views. 36 On the Design Bar. TIP If you don’t see the lock icon.Modify each dimension if necessary. zoom out until it displays. click the lock to constrain the present value. click . Align the new profile to the window opening edge 31 Select the 40 mm dimension. select the top horizontal line of the frame profile. If necessary. The window frame profile is swept around the window opening. 34 Select the horizontal reference plane that intersects the red dot. spin the model so you can see the interior of the frame. 37 In the Project Browser. Next. and double-click View 1. 33 On the Tools toolbar. this is the top of the window opening. click the lock to constrain the present value. Lock the alignment when the lock icon displays. under Views (all). Creating a Window Family | 565 . When the lock displays.

and click OK. Pick the sash profile lines 6 Place the cursor over the left side of the frame. 566 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. and select the option. Chain of walls or lines. and select Lock. 4 On the Design Bar. and enter . Specify the window sash extrusion parameters 1 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. 5 On the Options Bar. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry. click . double-click Exterior. press TAB to cycle through the selection options. click Lines. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry In this exercise. you create the solid geometry of the window sash with an extrusion. select Reference Plane: Sash for Name. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box. click Set Work Plane. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 39 Proceed to the next exercise.45 mm for Depth. under Specify a new Work Plane. 2 On the Design Bar.38 In the Project Browser.

50 mm for Offset. set the following options: ■ ■ Click . Creating a Window Family | 567 . Draw offset extrusion lines 7 On the Options Bar. 8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle. Enter . and then specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle. You specify a negative offset value to indicate an extrusion direction inside of the window frame.The entire sash outline is selected. and lock icons display on each line. ■ Click .

10 In the Project Browser. Notice the sash is aligned with the Sash reference plane. The window sash extrusion is now complete. 568 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. double-click Right. double-click View 1. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. under 3D Views.9 On the Design Bar. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry. click Finish Sketch.

you create the solid geometry of the window glass with an extrusion. click . double-click Right. Add a reference plane to specify the glass work plane 1 In the Project Browser. click Ref Plane. 3 On the Options Bar. Creating a Window Family | 569 . 4 Select the left edge of the sash so that a vertical reference plane is added 30 mm to the right. and enter 30 mm for Offset. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. under Elevations.Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry In this exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. as shown.

5 On the Design Bar. 570 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Dimension. 6 Add a horizontal dimension of 30 mm between the left edge of the sash and the reference plane.

Creating a Window Family | 571 . 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. and select Lock. 8 Select the reference plane. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 11 In the Project Browser. double-click Exterior. 17 Place the cursor on one of the sash extrusion lines. and click to create the glass boundary.7 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 9 On the Options Bar. and click OK. press TAB until the chain of lines is preselected. 14 In the Work Plane dialog box. click Modify. under Elevations. click . under Specify a new Work Plane. and click OK. 13 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. click . select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. enter Glazing for the Name instance parameter. under Identity Data. Pick lines to define the glass extrusion 12 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. enter 12 mm for Depth. 15 On the Design Bar.

sash. you can control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog box. under Identity Data. under Elevations. 21 On the Options Bar. After the family is loaded into a project. 23 On the Design Bar. 572 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under 3D Views. double-click Right. and click OK. 24 In the Project Browser. double-click View 1. click .18 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. click Finish Sketch. View the window model with frame. NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. specify Glass for the Subcategory instance parameter. and glass 19 In the Project Browser. 20 Select the glass extrusion. click Modify.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry. Click Apply. 28 Proceed to the next exercise.Flex the window model 25 On the Design Bar. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 27 In the Family Types dialog box. Creating a Window Family | 573 . Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. click Family Types. 26 In the Family Types dialog box. NOTE After flexing the model. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. Under Other. enter 1000 mm for Height. Under Other. Move the Family Types dialog box off to the side so you can see the window model. For example. Click Apply. make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion remains attached to the interior edge of the sash. Enter 2000 mm for Width. enter 1500 mm for Height. Click OK.

the exact location is not critical. NOTE When you draw each reference plane. you create the solid geometry of the window mullions based on reference planes and extrusions.Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry In this exercise. click Ref Plane. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Add a multi-segmented dimension referencing all of the vertical reference planes except the center (Left/Right) as shown. 574 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . double-click Exterior. 4 On the Design Bar. Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines 1 In the Project Browser. click Dimension. under Elevations. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. 3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the mullion centerline locations as shown. After adding the dimension. 2 On the Design Bar. click the EQ symbol to make the dimension segments equal.

9 On the Options Bar. click Modify. Do not be concerned with dimension values.. Creating a Window Family | 575 . 6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane above it. as shown.. Add a mullion offset family parameter 7 On the Design Bar. 8 Select the dimension on the upper-right that references the top two horizontal reference planes.> for Label. select <Add parameter. Do not be concerned with dimension values. as shown.5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane below it.

10 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. select Family parameter. Click OK. you may want to drag the dimension value as shown. Under Group parameter under. click Family Types. 16 Select the dimension on the lower-right. 15 On the Design Bar. and enter 350 mm as the new value. Select Instance. under Dimensions. click Modify. select Dimensions. and click OK. 14 Click the dimension value. TIP Due to the length of the dimension label. Under Parameter Data. 13 Select the horizontal reference plane second from the bottom. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. enter 350 mm for Mullion Offset. 11 On the Design Bar. Notice the dimension value becomes editable. enter Mullion Offset for Name. 576 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 12 In the Family Types dialog box.

under Specify a new Work Plane. enter 14 mm for Depth. 23 On the Options Bar. 24 Sketch a rectangle centered on the left vertical mullion reference plane approximately as shown. After you complete the sketch. 22 On the Design Bar. Creating a Window Family | 577 . 20 On the Design Bar. 25 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height. notice lock icons display on the interior horizontal edges of the sash. click Lines. click Set Work Plane. it is critical that the short horizontal lines align with the horizontal edges of the sash. click Modify. Watch the Status Bar to be sure that the lines are snapping to the sash. 18 On the Design Bar. Create the vertical mullion extrusions 19 On the Design Bar. However. As you did before. and click . select Mullion Offset for Label. 21 In the Work Plane dialog box. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. move the dimension value as shown.17 On the Options Bar. and click OK. Do not be concerned with precise dimensions. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.

26 On the Design Bar. select <Add parameter> for Label. and to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. click Modify. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. 578 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Dimension. Move the dimension values as shown. 28 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. Click the EQ symbol to make both horizontal dimensions equal. 27 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane centered between the vertical mullion extrusion sketch lines. 30 On the Options Bar. 29 On the Design Bar. and place it above the dimension you placed in the previous steps.

select Family parameter. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion on the left. 32 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the right vertical reference plane as shown. Under Group parameter under. select Mullion Width for Label. 33 On the Design Bar. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. Add a dimension between the left and right mullion edges. Select the dimension. Under Parameter Data. Move the Mullion Width value to the left as shown. This is changed in later steps. enter Mullion Width for Name.31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Select Type. select Dimensions. Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. and on the Options Bar. ■ ■ ■ Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width. Creating a Window Family | 579 . specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. Remember. Click OK. click Finish Sketch.

Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window in the drawing area. NOTE After flexing the model. you should pay close attention to the new mullions and make sure they remain centered. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. Notice the mullions remain centered and equally spaced on the reference planes. and the mullions stretch with the new window height. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and aligned with the sash edge. enter 40 mm for Mullion Width. and click Apply. 35 In the Family Types dialog box. In this case. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. click Family Types. evenly spaced. 580 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . or undoing the same. Flex the window model 36 In the Family Types dialog box.Specify the mullion width parameter 34 On the Design Bar. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Click Apply. Under Other. enter 1500 mm for Height. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters.

and then to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. click Dimension. Do not be concerned with the dimension value. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 44 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. Creating a Window Family | 581 . Under Other. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. Enter 2000 mm for Width. and move the EQ values off to each side as shown. 39 On the Design Bar. 45 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane at the center of the mullion. Click OK. as shown. enter 1000 mm for Height. click Set Work Plane. Sketch the horizontal mullion extrusions 38 On the Design Bar. 47 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. 41 On the Design Bar. 46 On the Design Bar. 40 In the Work Plane dialog box. 43 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown. click Lines. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Notice the Depth value on the Options Bar remains at the previously specified value.37 In the Family Types dialog box. under Specify a new Work Plane. and then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash. and click OK. 42 On the Options Bar. Click the EQ symbol to make both vertical dimensions equal. Click Apply. select Reference Plane : Glazing for Name. click .

click Modify. Add a dimension between the upper and lower mullion edges. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion you just completed. select Mullion Width for Label.48 On the Design Bar. 582 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 49 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. 50 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane as shown. ■ ■ ■ 51 On the Design Bar. select Mullion Width for Label. Select the dimension. click Finish Sketch. Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. Remember. Move the dimension value as shown.

under 3D Views. Notice the mullion extrusions are joined. 54 In the Project Browser. spin the model to get a good view of the mullions. Flex the window model 55 Adjust the location of the window model within the drawing area. Join the mullion geometry 52 On the Tools menu. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. Creating a Window Family | 583 .The horizontal mullion extrusions are now complete. 56 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. you can still see the window. 53 Select the horizontal mullions. click Join Geometry. double-click View 1. and select the vertical mullions. If necessary.

Assigning Materials to the Window Components In this exercise. Click Apply. 58 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 2000 mm for Width. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. sash. Enter 1500 mm for Width. 584 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you assign materials to the frame. 59 Proceed to the next exercise. Click Apply. enter 1500 mm for Height. Assigning Materials to the Window Components. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window height. Under Other. enter 1000 mm for Height.57 In the Family Types dialog box. Under Other. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and mullions that you want to display in renderings of the new window.

click for Texture. and click OK. TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions. No Gloss. click Materials. click the Model Graphics Style control. click OK. and mullions 7 In the Project Browser. sash. enter Pine Frame for Name. Dark. 2 In the Materials dialog box. 9 Select the window frame sweep. click Duplicate. and click OK. under Elevations. Yellow/. select Stained. Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame. under AccuRender. 5 In the Material Library dialog box. Creating a Window Family | 585 . 6 In the Materials dialog box.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 8 On the View Control Bar. 4 In the Materials dialog box. and select Shading with Edges. the sash. Create a new material based on the existing yellow pine material 1 On the Settings menu. double-click Exterior. and the mullions. 3 In the New Material dialog box. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Pine.

and click OK. 13 In the Materials dialog box. under Identity Data. and click OK. clear the other view options. and click OK. select Frame/Mullion for Subcategory. 16 Under Detail Levels. Modify the glass visibility 19 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 586 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 18 On the Design Bar. select Edit for Visibility. 21 On the Options Bar. Medium. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. under View Specific Display. double-click Right. under View Specific Display. select Pine Frame for Name. and Fine are selected. under Graphics. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. The window frame is assigned the new Pine Frame material. under 3D Views. 24 In the Project Browser. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). verify that Coarse. click Modify. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. 15 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. click Visibility. click OK. verify that Coarse. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . 23 Under Detail Levels. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. 20 Select the glass extrusion. and Fine are selected. click for Material. Medium. double-click View 1.10 On the Options Bar. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits).

25 Zoom in on a window corner. mullions. Defining New Window Types In this exercise. You begin by adding a formula to the mullion offset parameter to specify horizontal divisions of one third the overall height of the window. Defining New Window Types. The window frame. Creating a Window Family | 587 . 26 Proceed to the next exercise. sash. you define new window types based on the window model that you just created. You then create multiple window types that will be available to the user after the family is loaded into a project. and glass display their assigned materials.

and click OK. enter 2000 mm for Height. and click Apply. In the Family Types dialog box. 3 In the Family Types dialog box.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Add a mullion offset formula to the family type 1 Zoom to fit and move the window model off the side of the drawing area so it will be visible after you open the Family Types dialog box. it is also a good idea to flex the model after a new formula is applied. Flex the window model 4 In addition to flexing the model after the addition or modification of model geometry. 2 On the Design Bar. 588 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter Height/3 in the Formula column for Mullion Offset. click Family Types. The horizontal mullions are now spaced apart at one third the height of the window.

under Family Types. 8 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 1000 mm for Height. enter 2500 w x 1250mm h for Name. 5 In the Family Types dialog box.The window height is doubled. Creating a Window Family | 589 . 9 Under Family Types. 10 In the Name dialog box. click New. Enter 1250 mm for Height. Define new window types with various heights and widths 6 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 2600 w x 1300mm h for Name. and click OK. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2500 mm for Width. and click Apply. but the one third height spacing is maintained in the horizontal mullions. Click Apply. and click OK. click New. 7 In the Name dialog box.

28 Add this window to the center of the wall. 33 Zoom in on the center window. 24 On the Options Bar. 26 Add the window to the left side of the wall. Notice the detail that displays. select Training Window : 1800 w x 1500mm h. 590 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Load.rfa. 13 In the Name dialog box. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 1800 mm for Width. click Modify. 20 In the Open dialog box. and click Open. 31 On the Design Bar. 22 Draw a generic wall segment 12000 mm long. Click OK. Define the final window type 12 Under Family Types. clear Tag on Placement. click Save. 25 In the Type Selector. 14 In the Family Types dialog box. click Window. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rfa file. Load the new window family into a new project 17 On the Standard toolbar. Enter 1300 mm for Height. click Thin Lines. 27 In the Type Selector. click to start a new project based on your default template. 15 On the File menu. navigate to the location of your Training Window. select Training Window : 2500 w x 1250mm h. Click Apply. 32 On the View menu.11 In the Family Types dialog box. You now have three new window types defined within your window family. 19 On the Options Bar. select Training Window :2600 w x 1300mm h. Training Window. Place new window types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2600 mm for Width. click New. select it. enter 1800 w x 1500mm h for Name and click OK. 16 Navigate to the location of your choice and save the new window family with the name. click Window. This is because you set the visibility values to display when cut in plan/RCP. Click Apply. 30 Add the third window to the right side of the wall. 29 In the Type Selector. Enter 1500 mm for Height. click Wall. 23 On the Design Bar.

This completes the Creating a Window Family lesson. and drawers as extrusions. rolltop. you create a custom furniture family based on the definition of a rolltop desk. click the Model Graphics Style control. and specify values for the furniture length and depth. click . and select Shading with Edges. Finally. drawer base. 35 On the View Control Bar. Creating a Furniture Family | 591 . You begin by creating the desktop. you assign new dimension values to the furniture to create new types within the furniture family.34 On the View toolbar. You have three new fixed nine-light windows based on a new window family prototype. You then assign parameters to the furniture family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the prototype. Creating a Furniture Family In this lesson.

click Dimension. 7 Draw two horizontal reference planes. 8 Draw two vertical reference planes. 2 On the File menu. one to the left and one to the right of the existing vertical centerline reference plane as shown. they represent the furniture centerline axes. 5 On the View menu. one above and one below the existing horizontal centerline reference plane as shown. 6 On the Design Bar. you add reference planes and specify the parameters for the new rolltop desk furniture family. 4 Maximize the view. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. click Ref Plane. Floor Plan: Ref.Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters In this exercise. NOTE When you draw the reference planes. and click Open. The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. click New ➤ Family.rft. their exact location is not critical. 592 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 9 On the Design Bar. Create a new family based on the default furniture template 1 Close all open projects or families. Level. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Select Metric Furniture. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder.

11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. as shown. click Modify. 14 Change the horizontal dimension to 2000 mm. add a horizontal dimension string beginning at the left reference plane. 13 Select the left reference plane. Creating a Furniture Family | 593 . 12 On the Design Bar.10 Near the bottom of the drawing area. and ending at the right reference plane. Click the EQ icon to make the segments equal. It should reference the left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown.

click Dimension. add an overall vertical dimension from the upper reference plane to the lower reference plane. and ending at the lower reference plane. as shown. 594 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . add a vertical dimension string beginning at the upper reference plane. 17 To the right of the dimension you just created. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. Click the EQ symbol to make both segments equal. as shown. 16 On the right side of the drawing area.15 On the Design Bar.

click Modify. 22 Clean up the extents of the reference planes and the dimension witness lines as shown.18 On the Design Bar. TIP To do this. Afterwards. horizontal reference plane. click Modify. Creating a Furniture Family | 595 . select each reference plane and drag the extents to the new position. 20 Change the vertical dimension to 1000 mm. 19 Select the upper. 21 On the Design Bar. select each dimension and drag the witness line controls as needed.

For Group parameter under. 28 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. select <Add parameter. 27 On the Options Bar.. 596 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .. select <Add parameter. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type.> for Label. enter Length for Name. 25 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.. Click OK. select Dimensions. select Dimensions. Click OK. Select Type. 26 Select the 1000 mm dimension.23 Select the 2000 mm dimension. 24 On the Options Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. Under Parameter Data. select Family parameter.. enter Depth for Name. select Family parameter. Select Type. Under Parameter Data. For Group parameter under.> for Label.

30 On the Design Bar. it will also adapt to the same changes. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry In this exercise. enter 3000 mm for Length. you can still see the model. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. Creating a Furniture Family | 597 . Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you create the solid geometry of the desktop with an extrusion. 31 In the Family Types dialog box. Click Apply. you should flex the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected. click Family Types. When the solid geometry is snapped to the reference planes.These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to. 32 In the Family Types dialog box. Click Apply. enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters. Therefore. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry. Flex the design 29 Adjust the location of the reference planes within the drawing area. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. so when you open the Family Types dialog box.

Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Your lines may have a lighter weight. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Finish Sketch. select Level: Ref. click . click . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. Level for Name. under Elevations. 8 On the Options Bar. click Set Work Plane. 4 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Options Bar. click Lines. double-click Front. press TAB until the chain of lines is offered as a selection option. the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes. and then select the lower right reference plane intersection for the second corner of the rectangle. 598 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 9 Move the cursor over one of the symbolic lines. 6 In the Work Plane dialog box. NOTE In the image below. Create the desktop using an extrusion 1 On the Design Bar. and click to select all four symbolic lines. and click OK. 11 In the Project Browser. 3 Select the upper left reference plane intersection for the first corner of the rectangle. 10 On the Design Bar. click Symbolic Lines. and enter 100 mm for Depth.

The desktop extrusion extends 100 mm above the reference level. Add height and thickness dimensions 17 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 14 Drag the top edge of the desktop upward until the temporary dimension value is 750 mm.. and select the bottom edge. 22 On the Options Bar. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar.> for Label. 16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 100 mm thick. 18 Add a vertical dimension from the reference level to the top edge of the desktop. Creating a Furniture Family | 599 . and select the top edge. 12 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. Add height and thickness family parameters 20 On the Design Bar. 13 Move the cursor over the top edge of the desktop. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. click Modify. as shown. 15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop.. 21 Select the 750 mm dimension. 19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge. select <Add parameter.

Notice the desk top adapts to the new dimension parameters.23 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. enter 4000 mm for Length. 25 On the Options Bar. Flex the design 28 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area. enter Thickness for Name. Enter 750 mm for Height. Click Apply. 30 In the Family Types dialog box. For Group parameter under. For Group parameter under. click Family Types. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. and click Apply. Enter 1200 mm for Height. Under Parameter Data.> for Label. select <Add parameter. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry In this exercise. 29 On the Design Bar. and click Apply. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type.. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Click OK. Select Type. Under Parameter Data. select Family parameter. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry. 27 On the Design Bar.. and click Apply. Select Type. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. 26 n the Parameter Properties dialog box. enter 2000 mm for Length. you create the solid geometry of the desk drawer base. enter Height for Name. select Dimensions. click Modify. 31 In the Family Types dialog box. Click OK. 24 Select the 100 mm dimension. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. select Family parameter. 600 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you can still see the model. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. select Dimensions.

6 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click . and click to locate a new horizontal reference plane offset 100 mm below it. 4 Move the cursor over the left vertical reference plane. and enter 100 mm for Offset. Click the lock icon as shown. 2 On the Design Bar. Level. double-click Ref. and click to locate a new vertical reference plane offset 100 mm to the right. Creating a Furniture Family | 601 . 5 Move the cursor over the upper horizontal reference plane. click Ref Plane. 7 Add a dimension referencing the left vertical reference plane and the offset plane you added. Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner 1 In the Project Browser. click Dimension.

click Lines. as shown. 12 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. Level for Name. and then specify a point 300 mm to the right and 800 mm down for the second corner of the rectangle. click . click Set Work Plane. 10 On the Design Bar. 602 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Lock the dimension as shown.8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it. 11 In the Work Plane dialog box. select Level: Ref. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. under Specify a new Work Plane. and click OK. 14 Select the intersection of the new offset reference planes for the first corner of the rectangle. Sketch the left drawer base 9 On the Design Bar.

After you complete the rectangle. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. two lock icons display. 16 On the Design Bar. Creating a Furniture Family | 603 . 15 Click both of the lock icons to lock the edges of the extrusion to the reference planes. 17 Add a vertical dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. click Dimension.

click .18 On the Design Bar. . You can also highlight the entire line chain. 21 Select the vertical centerline reference plane as the mirror axis. 22 On the Tools toolbar. A duplicate of the left drawer base is mirrored to create the right drawer base. 19 Select the four sketched lines. 20 On the Tools toolbar. 604 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . using the TAB key. 23 For the align-to reference. click Modify. as shown below at the cursor. TIP You can select multiple elements by holding the CTRL key down. click the Mirror tool. select the horizontal reference plane second from the top.

25 Click the lock icon to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. Add a dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. ■ Creating a Furniture Family | 605 . 27 Add and lock the following two dimensions to the right drawer extrusion: ■ Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base. 26 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension.24 Select the top horizontal line of the right drawer extrusion as shown. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. A lock icon displays.

select <Add parameter.> for Label. one on each extrusion that references the width of the drawer base. select Dimensions. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 606 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Click OK. Select Type. Under Parameter Data. click Modify. For Group parameter under.28 Add two final dimensions. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. select Family parameter. 30 On the Options Bar.. 34 On the Design Bar. as shown. enter Drawer Base Width for Name. 32 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the right extrusion. 29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion.. select Drawer Base Width for Label. 33 On the Options Bar.

37 On the Tools toolbar. 39 Select the upper edge of the drawer base. double-click Front. After the alignment. 38 Select the lower edge of the desktop as the align-to reference. Creating a Furniture Family | 607 . click Finish Sketch.35 On the Design Bar. click it to lock the alignment. under Elevations. a lock icon displays. Extend the drawer base extrusions up to the desktop 36 In the Project Browser. click .

Click Apply. 608 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The solid geometry for the desk drawer base is now complete. click the Scale control and select 1:20. Notice the desk adapts to the new dimension parameters. 49 In the Family Types dialog box. However. and click Apply. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. click Modify. enter 4000 mm for Length. notice that annotations display in this view. you can still see the model. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. and click Apply. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click Apply. 48 In the Family Types dialog box. click Visibility/Graphics. 47 On the Design Bar. Enter 1200 mm for Height. 43 Click the Annotation Categories tab. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry. Flex the design 46 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. 41 On the View toolbar. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. 42 On the View menu. 45 On the View Control Bar. 44 Clear Show annotation categories in this view. enter 2000 mm for Length. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Click OK. and click OK. click . click Family Types. Enter 750 mm for Height.40 On the Design Bar.

Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry In this exercise. as shown. under Elevations. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Create the rolltop extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. click . then move the cursor up 300mm and to the left 400mm. 5 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. 6 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Design Bar. Creating a Furniture Family | 609 . click Lines. click Set Work Plane. you create the solid geometry of the desk rolltop. 7 Sketch the rectangle beginning at the intersection of the desktop and the right reference plane. and click to specify the upper left corner. and click OK. under Specify a new Work Plane. 3 On the Design Bar. double-click Right. select Reference Plane: Center (Left\Right) for Name.

click Dimension. and lock the alignment. Add another dimension to both horizontal sketch lines. and lock it. 9 Select the desk top. and lock it. 12 Add one dimension referring to both vertical sketch lines.8 On the Tools toolbar. 11 On the Design Bar. click . then select the right parallel sketch line. 610 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click the lock icon to lock the alignment. 10 Select the right vertical edge of the desktop extrusion. then the lower horizontal sketch line.

and then move the cursor down and to the right until you create and arc similar to the image below. TIP You may need to click the down arrow button. and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu. The rolltop extrusion outline is complete.13 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. the upper sketch line. Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of the arc radius. 16 On the Design Bar. click the Fillet arc tool. 15 Select the left vertical sketch line. click Lines. 14 On the Options Bar. Creating a Furniture Family | 611 . .

20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base. select the right edge of the rolltop. and click the lock icon. and click the lock icon. under Elevations.Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases 17 In the Project Browser. click . double-click Front. select the left edge of the rolltop. 612 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 19 Select the left edge of the left drawer base. 18 On the Tools toolbar.

Enter 200 mm for Thickness. The desk should adapt to all the changes. The solid geometry of the rolltop is now complete. you can still see the model. Creating a Furniture Family | 613 . Flex the design 22 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box.21 On the View toolbar. and click Apply. click Family Types. 23 On the Design Bar. 24 In the Family Types dialog box. and click Apply. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 1500 mm for Height. and click Apply. click . Enter 1500 mm for Depth. You can also use dimension constraints. enter 4000 mm for Length. If not. and click Apply. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned.

25 In the Family Types dialog box, return the parameters to their original values:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Dimensions, enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Enter 750 mm for Height. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Click Apply. Click OK.

26 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry.

Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you create the solid geometry of the drawers and apply material to the desk.

Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Create the desk drawer extrusions
1 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 2 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box, under Specify a new Work Plane, select Pick a Plane, and click OK. 4 Select the front plane of the right drawer base.

5 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 6 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 7 On the Options Bar, click .

8 Sketch six drawers similar to the image below.

614 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical. 9 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 10 Add a dimension between the vertical edges of the drawer base and the vertical lines of each bottom drawer. Lock each dimension as you add it. There should be four dimensions as shown.

NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important. If you modify the desk length or the drawer base width, these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected. If you cannot see the locks on the dimensions, zoom the view until you do.

11 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

12 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 13 To constrain the four upper drawers, select the left vertical line on the left lowest drawer first, and then select the corresponding left vertical lines of the two drawers above it. After selecting the line of an upper drawer, click the lock that displays to lock the alignment. 14 On the Tools toolbar, click set on the left. 15 On the Tools toolbar, click , and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the drawer

, and repeat the previous two steps on the right set of drawers.

These steps ensure the top drawers remain aligned and flex with the constrained bottom drawer. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Constraints, enter 20mm for Extrusion End, and click OK. 19 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 20 On the View toolbar, click .

Creating a Furniture Family | 615

Apply material to the desk
21 Draw a pick box around the entire desk to select all the extrusions. 22 On the Options Bar, click . for Material.

23 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Materials and Finishes, click 24 In the Materials dialog box, click Duplicate. 25 In the New Material dialog box, enter Desk - Wood, Cherry, and click OK. 26 In the Materials dialog box, under AccuRender, click for Texture.

27 In the Material Library dialog box, navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Cherry and select Stained, Dark, Polished. 28 Click OK. 29 In the Materials dialog box, click OK. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 31 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control, and select Shading with Edges.

Flex the design
32 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box, you can still see the model. 33 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.

616 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

34 In the Family Types dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Dimensions, enter 4000 mm for Length, and click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Depth, and click Apply. Enter 200 mm for Thickness, and click Apply.

The desk should adapt to all the changes. If not, you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. You can also use dimension constraints. 35 In the Family Types dialog box, return the parameters to their original values:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Dimensions, enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Enter 750 mm for Height. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Click Apply. Click OK.

36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson, Defining New Furniture Types.

Defining New Furniture Types
In this exercise, you define new furniture types based on the rolltop desk model that you just created.

Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Creating a Furniture Family | 617

Define new furniture types with various widths and depths
1 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 2 In the Family Types dialog box, under Family Types, click New. 3 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2000 x 1000mm for Name, and click OK. 4 In the Family Types dialog box, verify that Length is 2000 mm and Depth is 1000 mm, and click Apply. 5 Under Family Types, click New. 6 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 2100 mm for Length and 1100 mm for Depth, and click Apply. 8 Under Family Types, click New. 9 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm for Name, and click OK. 10 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 2250 mm for Length and 1250 mm for Depth, click Apply, and click OK. You now have three new furniture types defined within your furniture family. 11 On the File menu, click Save. 12 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new furniture family project with the name, Training Furniture.rfa.

Load the new window family into a new project

13 On the Standard toolbar, click 14 On the View toolbar, click .

to start a new project based on your default template.

15 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control and select Shading with Edges. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Component. 17 On the Options Bar, click Load. 18 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of your Training Furniture.rfa file, select it, and click Open. 19 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 200 x 100mm. 20 Specify a point in the drawing area to add the first desk.

21 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm. 22 Specify a point to the right of the first desk, and add the second desk.

618 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

23 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm. 24 Specify a point in the drawing area to the right of the previous two desks, and click to add the third desk.

You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype. This completes the Creating a Furniture Family lesson.

Creating a Baluster Family
In this lesson, you create a custom baluster and apply it to a set of stair railings. Balusters are simply profile extrusions with an assigned height family parameter.

Drawing a Baluster
In this exercise, you draw a baluster with an extrusion.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Select Metric Baluster.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default profile template
1 Expand the left elevation view. 2 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.

Creating a Baluster Family | 619

The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template. The bottom of the baluster is at the reference level and the baluster has an assigned default height of 750mm. Top and bottom cut angles for the baluster are also displayed.

Draw the baluster plan profile
3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Ref. Level.

4 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane. 6 In the Work Plane dialog box, select Ref. Level for Name, and click OK. 7 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the baluster profile should be centered on the vertical and horizontal reference planes. Draw your profile approximately 30mm wide by 60mm deep. 8 Draw the closed baluster plan profile as shown.

9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 10 In the Project Browser under Elevations, double-click Front.

620 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

By default, the extrusion has a height of 250mm. 11 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the extrusion. 12 On the Options Bar, click .

13 Select the top reference plane and select the top edge of the extrusion. 14 Click the lock icon.

15 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster.rfa. The new custom baluster is now complete.

Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run
In this exercise, you assign the new baluster that you just created to a stair run.

Load the new baluster family into a new project
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rtefile, and click Open. In the New Project Dialog box, click OK.

Draw a straight stair run
3 On the Design Bar, click the Modelling tab. 4 On the Design Bar, click Stairs. 5 Draw a straight stair run as shown.

Creating a Baluster Family | 621

6 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 7 On the File menu, click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 8 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of your Training Baluster.rfa file, select it, and click Open. 9 On the View toolbar, click .

10 On the View menu, click Orient ➤ Southwest. 11 On the View menu, click Shading with Edges.

Apply the custom baluster to the stair run
12 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the existing railing. 13 On the Options Bar, click .

14 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Edit for Baluster Placement. 16 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box, under Baluster Family, select Training Baluster : Training Baluster for the Regular baluster.

17 Clear Use Balusters Per Tread on Stairs. 18 Specify Start and End posts as Training Baluster. 19 Click OK. 20 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 22 Zoom in on the new balusters.

622 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

The stair run is now assigned the new baluster that you created. This completes the Creating a Baluster Family lesson.

Creating Profile Families
A profile is a series of closed two-dimensional lines and arcs. Use profiles to define object cross sections such as railings, balusters, soffits, cornices, and other sweep-defined objects. Create profiles to define frequently used shapes in your details. In this lesson, you create five different profiles: a sweep, a railing, a stair nosing, a reveal, and a host sweep. You then create an in-place sweep based on a 2D path and apply the host sweep to a wall.

Drawing a Sweep Profile
In this exercise, you draw a sweep profile.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default profile template
1 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the sweep profile should begin at the reference plane intersection. 2 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the sweep profile with line and arc segments as shown.

3 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Sweep.rfa. The new sweep profile is now complete.

Creating Profile Families | 623

Drawing a Rail Profile
In this exercise, you create a rail profile.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Rail.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default rail profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open. The reference planes that display are part of the default rail profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the rail centerline and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the rail top. The rail height is measured from the floor elevation to the rail top.

Draw the rail profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the top of the rail profile should coincide with the rail top reference plane. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the rail profile with line segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Rail.rfa. The new rail profile is now complete.

Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile
In this exercise, you create a stair nosing profile.

624 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Stair Nosing.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template
1 Notice the existing planes and text provided within the template. The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface. Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing.

Draw the stair nosing profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, you must draw the stair nosing in the lower-left quadrant. In addition, the top of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the tread surface reference plane and the right edge of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the riser face reference plane. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the stair nosing profile with line and arc segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Stair Nosing.rfa. The new stair nosing profile is now complete.

Drawing a Reveal Profile
In this exercise, you create a reveal profile. Reveal profiles are used with the Reveal tool in the project environment to define a wall cutout.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Reveal.rft, and click Open.

Creating Profile Families | 625

Create a new family based on the default reveal profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open. The reference planes that display are part of the default reveal profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the wall face, and the wall body indicated to the right of the wall face reference plane. The horizontal reference plane represents the offset from floor level to the reveal.

Draw the reveal profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines, their exact location is not critical. However, the left edge of the reveal profile must coincide with wall face reference plane and the reveal must be drawn within the wall body (to the right of the wall face reference plane). 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the reveal profile with line segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Reveal.rfa. The new reveal profile is now complete.

Drawing a Host Sweep Profile
In this exercise, you create a host sweep profile. Host Sweep profiles are similar to reveal profiles and are used with the Host Sweep tool in the project environment to define a shape to add to a host surface, which may be any vertical surface.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Hosted.rft, and click Open.

626 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open. The reference planes that display are part of the default host sweep profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the host face and the host body indicated to the left of the host face reference plane. The reference plane intersection is the origin of the host sweep profile.

Draw the host sweep profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines, their exact location is not critical. However, the left edge of the host sweep profile must coincide with the host face reference plane, and the host sweep profile must be drawn outside of the host body (to the right of the host face reference plane). 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the reveal profile with line and arc segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Host Sweep.rfa. The new host sweep profile is now complete.

Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path
In this exercise, you apply the sweep profile that you just created to a 2D path.

Create a new project
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rte file, and click Open. In the New Project Dialog box, click OK.

Creating Profile Families | 627

Specify the family category
3 On the Modelling menu, click Create. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box, select Generic Models for Family Category, and click OK. 5 In the Name dialog box, enter Sweep for Name, and click OK.

Sketch the 2D sweep path
6 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Sweep. 7 On the Design Bar, click Sketch 2D Path. NOTE When you sketch the 2D path, the exact location of the path is not critical. 8 On the Design Bar, click Lines and sketch the 2D path approximately as shown.

9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Path.

Apply the sweep profile to the 2D path
10 On the Options Bar, click Load Profiles. 11 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of Profile - Sweep.rfa, select it, and click Open. 12 In the Type Selector, beside Load Profiles, select Profile - Sweep. 13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sweep. 14 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family. 15 On the View toolbar, click .

Modify the sweep profile configuration
16 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click South.

628 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

17 Zoom in on the right end of the sweep.

18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 19 Draw a vertical reference plane coincident with the left edge of the profile as shown.

20 Select the sweep profile and, on the Options Bar, click Edit. 21 Select the sweep profile again and, on the Options Bar, click 22 In the Element Properties dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■

.

Under Constraints, enter 600 for Vertical Profile Offset. Enter 25 degrees for Angle. Under Other, select Profile Is Flipped.

23 Click OK. 24 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family.

25 On the View toolbar, click

.

The sweep profile application is now complete.

Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls
In this exercise, you apply the host sweep profile that you created to a group of walls.

Create a new project
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project.

Creating Profile Families | 629

2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rte file, and click Open. In the New Project Dialog box, click OK.

Draw a wall group
3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. NOTE When you draw the walls, their exact location is not critical. 4 Draw four walls as shown.

5 On the View toolbar, click

.

6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Host Sweep ➤ Wall Sweep. 7 On the Options Bar, verify that Horizontal is selected. 8 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep.

9 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep.

630 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

10 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep
11 On the File menu, click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 12 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of Profile - Host Sweep.rfa, select it, and click Open. 13 Select the wall sweep and, on the Options Bar, click 14 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select Profile - Host Sweep : Profile - Host Sweep for Profile, and click OK. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 17 On the View toolbar, click . .

18 In the Dynamic View dialog box, click Spin [Shift]. 19 Move the cursor to rotate your viewpoint to view the host sweep from underneath.

The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile. This completes the Creating Profile Families lesson.

Creating a Room Tag
In this lesson, you create a room tag which displays room name, floor and ceiling finish, and area with labels added to extract project data.

Specifying Room Tag Parameters
In this exercise, you specify the room tag parameters.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files, and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Select M_Room Tag.rft, and click Open.

Creating a Room Tag | 631

Create a new tag based on the default room tag template
1 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.

The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template.

Edit the 3mm label
2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Label. 3 On the Options Bar, click .

4 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box, select Underline, and click OK.

Add a 2mm label
6 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 7 In the Type properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 8 In the Name dialog box, enter 2mm for Name, and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box, enter 2 for the Text Size parameter, clear Underline, and click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.

Combine labels into a room tag
11 On the Design Bar, click Label. 12 In the Type Selector, verify that Label : 3mm is displayed. 13 On the Options Bar, verify that Center and Middle are selected for Text Alignment. 14 Specify the location for the first label as shown.

15 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Name, and click OK. 16 Zoom in on the label.

The name label is displayed with the text underlined. 17 In the Type Selector, select Label : 2mm. 18 Specify a point below the Name label for the next label location. 19 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Floor Finish, and click OK.

632 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

The Area label has a predefined value of 150 SF. The new room tag is now ready for use. In the left pane of the New dialog box. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. This completes the Creating a Room Tag lesson. and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. select Ceiling Finish. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 24 Save the new room tag with the name Finish Area Tag. The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template.20 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location. Notes included with the template specify annotation parameters. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 23 In the Select Parameter dialog box. select Area. and click Open. Creating an Annotation Symbol In this lesson. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol In this exercise.rfa. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol and place it in a new project. 22 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location. and click OK. select Training Files. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol with a circle and lines. Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template 1 In the Project Browser. notice that there is only one view available. Creating an Annotation Symbol | 633 .rft. Select Generic Annotation. and click OK.

5 Drag the cursor and specify a radius of 8mm. click .Sketch a north arrow symbol 2 On the Design Bar. 634 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 6 On the Options Bar. 8 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle. click Lines. 7 Draw a horizontal line from the left side to the right side of the circle through the center point. click . 3 On the Options Bar. 4 Specify the reference plane intersection for the circle center point.

select 3 for Line Weight. 10 On the Design Bar. verify that Generic Annotations is selected for Subcategory of. 13 In the New Subcategory dialog box. and click OK. click Modify. 14 In the Object Styles dialog box. click Object Styles. Creating an Annotation Symbol | 635 . Add an annotation objects subcategory 11 On the Settings menu. under Modify Subcategories. and click OK. 17 On the Design Bar. click Modify. in the North Line row. click New. enter North Line for Name. Apply the new line weight to the upper vertical line 15 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Object Styles dialog box. 16 In the Type Selector. The new north arrow annotation symbol is ready to edit. select North Line. and select the upper vertical line. click Modify.9 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle.

The north arrow annotation symbol is now complete. navigate to the location of Training North Arrow. and click Open. 19 Save the new north arrow with the name. Training North Arrow. and click Open.rfa. select it. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the A0 metric titleblock template. 12 On the Design Bar. 636 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Select the DefaultMetric. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the File menu. 8 In the Open dialog box. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 6 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. click Symbol.18 Select the template notes and press DELETE. click New ➤ Project. select Training Files. click Modify. This completes the Creating an Annotation Symbol lesson. you add the new north arrow annotation symbol that you created to a project. select Training North Arrow.rte file. Load the new north arrow into a new project 1 On the File menu. In the New Project Dialog box. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson. 10 In the Type Selector. 5 Click OK. 2 In the New Project dialog box. click Sheet. Adding the New North Arrow to a Project In this exercise. click OK. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select A1 metric. 11 Specify a point in the lower right corner of the sheet to place the symbol. click Browse. and in the left pane of the New dialog box.rfa.

Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise.rft. Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. graphics. click New ➤ Titleblock. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom A0-size sheet. 4 Specify the upper left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner. 3 On the Options Bar. and enter -25 for Offset. click Lines. You customize the titleblock with a new text style. In the left pane of the New dialog box. text.The titleblock has linework. and labels. Select A0 metric. and then specify the lower right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle. Sketch the inside border 2 On the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Creating a Titleblock Family | 637 . and your project data. and click Open. click . select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder.

and click . 9 Draw a horizontal line 140mm below the upper inside border as shown. and click to draw a new vertical line. 10 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown. click 8 Enter 0 for Offset.Add vertical and horizontal lines 5 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. click . and enter 140 for Offset. 11 Draw a horizontal line 120mm above the lower inside border as shown. 6 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. . 638 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

24 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. 18 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. 15 On the Design Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 13 In the Type Selector. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. Creating a Titleblock Family | 639 . click .12 On the Design Bar. 14 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. select Wide Lines. click Lines. click Modify. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. enter 30 for Offset. 21 On the Options Bar. 19 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. 23 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. press CTRL. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. and enter 20 for Offset. 16 In the Type Selector. 17 On the Options Bar. select Title Blocks. and select the second and third horizontal lines. 20 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 22 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line.

26 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. click Modify. navigate to Training Files/Common. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. and labels to your titleblock. 2 In the Open dialog box. 3 Place the image in the upper right corner of the sheet as shown. text notes. 640 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Company Logo. you add a company logo. The titleblock linework is now complete. click Import/Link ➤ Image.25 On the Design Bar. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu. and click Open.jpg.

4 Zoom in on the logo. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. click Text. click Duplicate. in the text box. 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. click . click Edit/New. Create a new 10mm text style 5 On the Design Bar. and select Bold. 9 In the Name dialog box. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter 10 for Text Size. Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. 11 Click OK twice. enter 10mm Bold for Name. and click OK. Creating a Titleblock Family | 641 . 6 On the Options Bar. under Text. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box.

and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. and drag the text note down as shown. Add consultant name. select Text : 8mm. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 642 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. 17 On the Design Bar. and add an address and phone number as shown. and select the last text note. Press ENTER to add each new line of text and click outside of the text box to complete the text. click Text. click Modify. 18 Select the drag handle. address. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text. 19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line.

26 Move the cursor down 120mm and click to specify the first copied text note position. select Constrain and Multiple. click Modify. click . and select the consultant text note. Creating a Titleblock Family | 643 . 25 Click inside the Consultant text group. 23 On the Edit toolbar. 24 On the Options Bar.22 On the Design Bar.

27 Move the cursor down another 120mm and click to specify the second copied text note location. 644 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

41 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 42 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Date field. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog box. click Label. and enter Drawn By:. under Text. enter 5 for Text Size. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. click . and enter Sheet Number:. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. 36 Draw a text box in the lower right space of the titleblock.Create a new 5mm text style 28 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 34 Click OK twice. and enter Checked By:. select Project Issue Date. 32 In the Name dialog box. select Text : 5mm. and enter Date:. and click to specify the label location. 29 On the Options Bar. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. 37 Draw a text box in the next space up. click Text. click Edit/New. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines. click Duplicate. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 5mm for Name. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box. 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. Creating a Titleblock Family | 645 .

and click OK. and click to specify the label location. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 646 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .44 Select the left drag handle on the label. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog box. select Checked By and click OK. 45 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Drawn By field. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. select Drawn By. and click to specify the label location.

and click to specify the label location. 51 In the Element Properties dialog box. 57 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Sheet Number field. click Duplicate. and click to specify the label location. Creating a Titleblock Family | 647 . 53 In the Name dialog box. 55 Click OK twice. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and click OK. 62 Select the left drag handle on the label. Create a new 15mm label style 49 On the Design Bar. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. click Center and Middle. select Sheet Number. enter 15mm Label for Name. select Label : 15mm Label. Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. under Text. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog box.NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 52 In the Type Properties dialog box. 59 On the Options Bar. click . 54 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. click Label. 50 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. and click OK. select Project Number. enter 15 for Text Size.

68 Select the left drag handle on the label. 71 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Client Name. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 74 In the Type Properties dialog box. 70 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. 648 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 4mm Label. 66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. and click OK. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. and click OK. 67 In the Select Parameter dialog box. click . and click OK. and click to specify the label location. enter 4 for Text Size. click Duplicate. 73 In the Name dialog box. 65 Select the left drag handle on the label.63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field. select Project Name. 72 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click to specify the label location. 64 In the Select Parameter dialog box. click Label. Create a 4mm label style 69 On the Design Bar. 75 Click OK twice. under Text.

and in the left pane of the New dialog box. and labels are now complete. 81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. 5 In the Open dialog box. select File Path. click OK.rte file. 2 In the New Project dialog box. and click Open. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. 79 In the Select Parameter dialog box. text. click Left and Middle. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder.rfa. select 4mm Label. click New ➤ Project. 78 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box.Add Project Path label 76 In the Type Selector. click Browse. 80 On the Design Bar.rfa file. Creating a Titleblock Family | 649 . and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. In the New Project Dialog box. click Sheet. click Load. and click OK. navigate to the location of Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. click Modify. The titleblock graphics. select it. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 On the File menu. 7 Click OK. 77 On the Options Bar. select Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. Select the DefaultMetric. select Training Files. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. and click to specify the label location. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Open.

Enter Jane Smith for Client Name. and click OK. 650 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and add a dome roof and a concave floor with revolved forms as in-place families. enter Name for Drawn By. 2005 for Project Issue Date. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Other. you start with an incomplete building information model of the Pantheon. Enter In Progress for Project Status. This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Project Information. Enter Office Building for Project Name. click . In-place families interact with the building model according to their assigned family category. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson.Modify titleblock properties 8 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Settings menu. You create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family Editor. 11 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter January 1. click Modify and select the titleblock. 9 On the Options Bar. 14 Click OK.

NOTE This project was created using an imperial template and components. set the Area to Square meters. you add a dome roof with oculus (circular opening) to the Pantheon building model. Sketch the roof cross-section with a closed profile in an elevation view. To change the units of measurement to meters. Next. click Project Units. select Training Files and navigate to the Common folder.rvt. Select c_Pantheon. and click Open. you create the dome roof with a revolved form. and set the suffix to None. Set the Length units to millimeters. expand Views (all). Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Open. click Orient ➤ Southeast. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Creating In-Place Families | 651 . on the Settings menu. expand Elevations. 2 In the Project Browser. and double-click South. format the Area to use 2 decimal places. Open the existing Pantheon building model 1 On the View menu.

10 In the Go To View dialog box. 12 On the Options Bar. enter Dome for Name. 5 In the Name dialog box. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. The center wall section view is displayed. and click OK. 7 On the Design Bar. click Create. select Roofs for Family Category. select Section: Wall Section . 13 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form 11 On the Design Bar. Specify the dome roof revolved form parameters 6 On the Design Bar. and click Open View. 652 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . and click OK. select Pick a Plane.Specify the Roofs family category 3 On the Modelling menu. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box.Center. and click OK. 9 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. click Set Work Plane. 8 In the Work Plane dialog box. click Axis. click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Revolve.

15 On the Options Bar. 17 Move the cursor out.Draw the lower face of the dome roof 14 On the Design Bar. Creating In-Place Families | 653 . 16 Specify the intersection of the Upper Cornice horizontal reference plane and vertical axis as the circle center point. click Lines. until it creates an intersection with the level 1 reference plane. click .

The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile. click .The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line. 654 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and select Chain. 20 Specify the reference plane intersection for the start point of the rim profile as shown. 21 Snap to reference plane intersections. 19 On the Options Bar. and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse C as shown. Draw the oculus rim profile 18 Zoom in on the top of the circle.

Creating In-Place Families | 655 . Draw the upper face of the dome roof 26 On the Design Bar. 28 Specify the endpoint of the upper left rim profile line segment as the arc start point. click . 27 On the Options Bar. click Lines. 24 Select a point on the circle to the right of the rim profile.Split the circle 22 On the Tools toolbar. select Delete Inner Segment. The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point. 25 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown. 23 On the Options Bar. click .

32 On the Options Bar. 30 Specify a point on the arc approximately as shown. click and select Chain. click Lines. 656 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 33 Draw a horizontal line from the arc endpoint to the interior edge of the wall.29 Specify the top of the stairs in the wall section as the arc endpoint. and then draw a vertical line down the interior wall face to the lower dome roof face tangent point. Draw two lines to close the dome roof profile 31 On the Design Bar.

Trim the arc below the tangent point 34 On the Tools toolbar. and then select a point on the arc above the tangent point as the segment to keep. click Finish Sketch. 37 In the Element Properties dialog box. click for Material. click .Cast-in-Place Lightweight Concrete for Name. The dome roof in-place family is now complete. click Finish Family. and click OK. click OK. Creating In-Place Families | 657 . 42 On the View toolbar. 35 Select the interior face of the wall. The dome roof closed profile is now complete. 39 In the Element Properties dialog box. Specify lightweight concrete for the dome roof material 36 On the Design Bar. click . under Materials and Finishes. 38 In the Materials dialog box. click Revolution Properties. 41 On the Design Bar. 40 On the Design Bar. select Concrete .

and click OK. double-click South. and click Open View.Center. Draw the axis of rotation for the floor revolved form 10 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Revolve. click . click Axis. 6 On the Design Bar. select Pick a Plane. click Create. and click OK. 3 In the Name dialog box. Specify the concave floor revolved form parameters 1 On the Modelling menu. and click OK.Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family In this exercise. you create the concave floor slab for the Pantheon building model. 658 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 4 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 7 In the Work Plane dialog box. 9 In the Go To View dialog box. select Floors for Family Category. enter Concave Floor for Name. 5 On the Design Bar. 2 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. select Section: Wall Section . 8 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. 11 On the Options Bar. click Set Work Plane.

Creating In-Place Families | 659 . 15 Specify the intersection of the T. click . 16 Drag the cursor up 800 mm. Draw the concave floor profile 13 On the Design Bar. for the start point of the floor profile as shown. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. and select Chain. 14 On the Options Bar. Footing level line and the axis.O. and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown. NOTE You may need to zoom in closer to the intersection to select the first point.12 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. 17 Specify the intersection of the level 1 reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile as shown. click Lines.

Footing level line and the axis for the last point of the floor profile. Specify cobblestone for the concave floor material 20 On the Design Bar. 24 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Materials dialog box.O. This completes the Creating In-Place Families lesson. click Revolution Properties.O. Footing level line and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile. click for Material. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. click OK. 19 Specify the intersection of the of the T. click Finish Sketch. click Finish Family. 25 On the Design Bar.18 Specify the intersection of the T. select Cobblestone for Name. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. The concave floor closed profile is now complete. and click OK. 660 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 26 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. double-click 3D Section View.

The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open-joist wood floor truss. This type of component uses a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor. assigned subcatecories. you will understand the process. During this tutorial. you learn the process and methodology of creating a new family. not specifically how to make a floor truss. At the end of this tutorial. formula-based parameters. In exercises that become increasingly complex. you learn specific techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other families in Autodesk Revit Building. The truss also has multiple types. you create a new parametric component within the Family Editor. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric component creation. the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and grade of the truss chords.Parametric Component Design Techniques 20 In this tutorial. In this case. and detail level controls. and the specific techniques for creating a parametric component. 661 . methodology. In the center of the truss is a mechanical service clearance to accommodate HVAC systems.

Although this solution is possible. Two types should be created.Planning a Parametric Component Family Creating a new parametric component family is no different than any other design process. then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements. In this lesson. For every complexity added to a family. Knowing why you are creating a particular family and what you need it to do will drive the specific design process. and also works intuitively with them. the component should use the point-to-point insertion method with the joist web members adjusting parametrically. 2 What additional design requirements affect the design plan for this beam family? ■ ■ ■ The truss should automatically adjust depth as the length changes. Determining Component Needs In this exercise. a generic floor-based component might work. The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be. Because this component has to interact closely with other structural components. it is an open-joist wood floor truss. you select the best available template with which to begin the new structural beam family. it is not the best solution. If the component did not have to interact so closely with other structural components. If the design requirements can be met with a simple design. In this case. For training purposes. Decide component type and design requirements 1 What type of component are you designing? In this case. A rectangular mechanical clearance opening must be centered within the beam. In addition. This decision dictates which family template you begin with. It should also be an available option within a beam system. you should avoid over-designing the component. this must be a structural beam component. Your assignment is to create a truss that adapts parametrically to changes in the building design. the design spec requires that the floor truss snaps to columns. a 2x3 truss and a 2x4 truss. beams. and structural walls. In the next exercise. you accomplish two main tasks: you determine the component needs and select the family template that is suited to those needs. imagine that your firm specializes in light commercial and residential design. the beam design must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require. you determine the requirements of the new component. there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project. planning ahead is one of the most important steps. In this case. Using the new family within a project 3 How will you use the family within a project? 662 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Take this into consideration during your design planning. NOTE When creating a new family.

What materials remain constant throughout a project? The chord and web material will always be wood. Selecting the Family Template In this exercise.■ What materials need the most control? These materials. ■ ■ ■ You have completed the planning stage for the new family. would require Instance or Type parameters. especially if you are going to be nesting subcomponents that may require separate scheduling. the planning stage and questions may differ. This critical decision reduces the quantity of template options. These materiails can be applied using Object Styles. the means in which to gather the information you require within the schedule needs to be built into the component. you determined that the component type is a structural beam. Depending on the family you are designing. How will the component need to be scheduled? This is an important question. In addition. such as wood type. you determine which family template provides the best starting point for the new beam family. What types are most commonly used? In this training case. 4 Continue with the next exercise. In the previous exercise. only the 2x3 and 2x4 trusses with wood web members are required. Selecting the Family Template. Planning a Parametric Component Family | 663 .

5 In the New dialog box. this template resides within the training folders and should be opened from there.Beams and Braces. NOTE Although this is the template you use to start the tutorial. it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). it is not designed to create a component capable of point-to-point insertion.rft This template is designed for complex framing components and trusses. Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template. do not open this template. It provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). notice the preview. Because of its simplicity. For training purposes. Notice that most of the template names include the component type. NOTE Do not double-click the template or open it. for example: wall based or floor based. ■ Metric Structural Framing . spacing. 3 In the New dialog box. it is not the best starting point for the beam family.Beams and Braces.Review the template options 1 Close any open projects or families. select Metric Generic Model floor based. and display functions required by structural beams. There are two structural framing templates provided. Notice this template offers three horizontal planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane.rft.rft This template is design specifically to accommodate point-to-point insertion and the specific snapping. If you are not in this folder.Complex and Trusses. the template name often includes information how the component would be used with a project. In addition. You should be in the Metric Templates folder. The New dialog box opens to the templates folder that is specified in your Settings ➤ Options dialog box. 4 In the New dialog box. This template is the best starting point for the new family. scroll to the structural framing templates. Select it so that the preview displays. navigate to it.Complex and Trusses. 6 Select Metric Structural Framing . and notice the preview. ■ Metric Structural Framing . 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 664 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Like most generic family templates.rft. 7 Select Metric Structural Framing .rft and notice the preview. These planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping and display requirements of beam components. scroll through the various template options. On the right side of the New dialog box.

rft located in the Metric  ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates ➤  folder. Creating the Component Skeleton. under Elevations.Open the family template 8 In the left pane of the New dialog box.Beams and Braces. double-click View 1. 9 Open Metric Structural Framing . When a beam family based on this template is added to a project. As you add solid geometry later in the tutorial. Level. 11 In the Project Browser. you can see the rectangular beam extrusion and a symbolic line. Level In this view. Floor Plan: Ref. lines. Creating the Component Skeleton | 665 . click the Training Files icon. under 3D Views. you add the reference planes. 10 Maximize the view. the geometry supplied can be used or discarded as needed. Floor Plan: Ref. NOTE When creating or modifying a family. it is not necessary to create a skeleton of reference planes or lines and then align and lock the solid geometry to it. you snap and lock the solid geometry to these reference planes and lines. Notice that the beam extrusion is centered on the level line. creating a skeleton to build upon is the foundation of a new component family. however. Therefore. Like many templates. the top of the beam extrusion is aligned to the associated level of the plan view. This beam extrusion is supplied within the template as a starting point. Creating the Component Skeleton In this lesson. 12 In the Project Browser. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. Dimensioning the solid geometry directly also works. and dimensions that provide a skeleton for the solid geometry. double-click Front. using reference planes and lines is considered more reliable and is therefore a best practice.

2 Place the cursor over the leftmost vertical reference plane until the tooltip displays the name of the plane. notice the location of the beam extents. Review existing reference planes 1 In the Project Browser. ■ Member Left and Member Right: These two planes refer to the left and right extent of the beam solid geometry when displayed in a medium or fine display view of a project. These reference planes act as part of the skeleton to which the solid geometry will align and lock. two steel columns and a steel beam have been added to a project. The two arrows point to the snap points that the left and right reference planes refer to. they do not display when the family is loaded into a project. In the project plan view image below. NOTE The reference planes shown in the project image below were added as a training reference. double-click Ref. The reference planes in this template are designed to accommodate the point-to-point insertion of a beam component. The reference planes and their respective explanations are listed below. ■ Left and Right: These two planes mark the points where the beam intersects with other columns. Reference Plane: Left. The six reference planes shown in the project below were added as a training reference. under Floor Plans. you add reference planes to the beam design. In the image below. 666 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques .Adding Reference Planes In this exercise. 3 Repeat this step for the other two vertical planes on the left side. Level. Reference planes that display within a family file do not display within a project. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you started in the previous exercise. TIP The name also displays on the Status Bar.

Delete existing solid geometry 4 Select the rectangular beam extrusion. it is important to be familiar with the template so you do not create duplicate or conflicting planes. you add the solid geometry for the truss as a sweep. 7 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm above the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). Each family template has a different set of reference planes established within it. click Ref Plane.■ Stick Symbol Left and Stick Symbol Right: These two planes refer to the extents of the stick symbol when it is loaded into a project and the plan view display setting is coarse. Add new reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. Creating the Component Skeleton | 667 . 5 On the Edit Toolbar. NOTE Be careful not to select the symbolic line. In a later exercise. Before adding new reference planes. click .

668 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . under Elevations. 11 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm below the Level: Ref. 10 On the Design Bar. Add ref. select the lower horizontal reference plane. and select the Level: Ref. click Ref Plane. To do this. Level. click on the Edit toolbar. planes to control beam depth 9 In the Project Browser. TIP You can also use the mirror tool to accomplish this task. double-click Front.8 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm below the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). Level. 12 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm above the Level: Ref. Level as the mirror axis. You will use these two reference planes to control the beam width and keep it centered on the reference plane: Center (Front/Back).

18 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Right. The next four reference planes that you add mark the thickness of the truss chords. TIP You can control the direction of the offset by moving the cursor slightly to either side of the line you intend to pick. 16 Place the cursor over the lower horizontal reference plane and when a copy of the reference plane displays above it. click . 17 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Left. and specify an Offset of 38 mm. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. When a copy of the reference plane displays below it.These two reference planes mark the top and bottom extents of the beam. 13 On the Design Bar. click to place it as shown. 15 Place the cursor over the top horizontal reference plane. click to place it as shown. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. 14 On the Options Bar. click Ref Plane. click to place it. click to place it as shown. This beam requires additional reference planes to complete the truss skeleton. Creating the Component Skeleton | 669 .

specify an Offset of 200 mm. 21 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). you must add four additional reference planes to accommodate the center chase. 670 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click to place it as shown. cleaning up some of the extents would make the view easier. Although there is nothing technically incorrect regarding the reference planes in this view. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. 22 On the Options Bar. 24 In the Project Browser. specify an Offset of 238 mm. which you do in the next exercise. click to place it as shown. under Floor Plans. double-click Ref. 23 Use the Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right) to add reference planes to the left and right of it as shown below. 20 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). Notice the reference planes that you added in the elevation view.You have completed the reference planes that make up the skeleton of the chords. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. Level. 19 On the Options Bar. Before you move on to the next exercise.

you add some of the dimensions and constraints that control how the open web floor truss adapts to changes in its geometry. This tool is the aligned dimension tool. NOTE You use this family for the remainder of this tutorial. click . Adding Dimensions and Constraints. Make sure you remember where you saved it. 28 In the Save As dialog box. click Modify.rfa. and click Save. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. Wood Floor Truss. 2 On the Options Bar. Creating the Component Skeleton | 671 . Dimension chord width 1 On the Design Bar. Adding Dimensions and Constraints In this exercise. click Dimension.25 On the Design Bar. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. enter Wood Floor Truss for File name. 3 Select each of the horizontal reference planes and place the dimension to the left as shown. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings during this procedure. By applying dimensions and constraints directly to the skeleton of the family. you can make sure the new family adapts to changes in geometry as expected before adding solid geometry to it. navigate to the folder of your choice. separate the overriding values by dragging the value controls as shown. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. It allows you to dimension between parallel lines. After adding the dimension.

double-click Front. and click the EQ symbol when it displays. under Elevations. 5 Select the dimension you added in the previous step. NOTE The center horizontal reference plane overlaps the level line: Ref. place the dimension to the left as shown. click Modify. This ensures that changes to the chord width are distributed equally across the center reference plane. 7 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane.4 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. Level. 6 On the Design Bar. 10 Select the upper horizontal reference plane. Add the depth dimension and equality constraint 8 In the Project Browser. the Center reference plane. 672 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . and the lower horizontal reference plane. Place the dimension as shown. and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. click Dimension. You may need to use the TAB key to toggle the selection to the reference plane.

Dimension chord thickness 14 On the right side of the model. place the dimension under the lines as shown and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. and place it below the dimension you added previously. Creating the Component Skeleton | 673 . These dimensions refer to the chord thickness. Dimension and constrain the center chase width 12 Add a dimension referring to the three vertical reference planes in the center of the model. add two dimensions as shown.11 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane and move it to the left of the equality constrained dimension you added previously. 13 Add a dimension referring to the reference planes to the left and right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane.

consider making the material parameter an instance parameter. you create new length parameters that control the basic dimensions of the floor truss. When you design a new family. under Floor Plans. they allow you to “flex” the model in order to test your design.15 Add four dimensions as shown. These parameters are the key to providing flexibility within a project. it becomes a parameter. You have finished adding the dimensions and constraints that control how the truss skeleton adapts to changes. Create the chord width parameter 1 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise. If the parameter controls something that usually remains constant by its nature. you will add additional reference planes. Things to consider when deciding “instance” or “type:” ■ ■ If the component comes in standard sizes that must be maintained. When you label a dimension in the Family Editor. Creating New Length Parameters. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness of the vertical members and the members that border the center chase. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. If the component has material that varies per component. You should lean towards simplicity whenever possible. You choose whether to make it an instance or type parameter. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. consider making it a type parameter. consider making it an instance parameter. Throughout the tutorial. and constraints as needed. consider making it a type parameter.rfa. you label the dimensions that you added in the previous exercise. ■ ■ Dataset Continue to use the dataset. double-click Ref. In addition. There are many types of parameters and various ways to create them. The parameters that you create when designing a family are the same parameters used within a project to control the instance and type parameters of that family. In this exercise. Creating New Length Parameters In this exercise. If the component is something that is cut or otherwise extremely flexible. 674 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Wood Floor Truss. Level. you label the dimensions to create instance and type parameters. dimensions. it is important to decide how much control over the component will be required after the component is loaded into a project.

select Add parameter for Label. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. enter Depth for Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. This indicates whether the parameter is a type or instance parameter. select Add parameter for Label. Click OK. select Family parameter. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. double-click Front. Click OK. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. ■ Create truss depth parameter 5 In the Project Browser. Under Parameter Data. 6 Select the dimension on the left that refers to the depth of the truss. enter Chord Width for Name.2 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the chord as shown. select Family parameter. 7 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. Under Parameter Data. Select Type. Select Type. 3 On the Options Bar. Creating the Component Skeleton | 675 .

Create center chase width parameter 9 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the center chase interior. select Family parameter. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Click OK. Select Type. Create chord thickness parameter 12 On the right side of the model. 13 On the Options Bar. select Add parameter for Label. enter Chord Thickness for Name. Click OK. 676 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Under Parameter Data. Under Parameter Data. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. enter Center Chase Width for Name. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the lower horizontal truss chord as shown. 10 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Select Type. select Family parameter. select Add parameter for Label.

16 On the Options Bar. select Chord Thickness for Label. Apply chord thickness label to other dimensions 15 On the right side of the model.TIP You may need to drag the text label downward as shown. Creating the Component Skeleton | 677 . 17 Apply the Chord Thickness label to the vertical chords and the vertical members on the left and right side of the center chase as shown. select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the upper horizontal truss chord.

Flexing the model means to change parameter values. After you verify this. these parameters will be available within the Type Properties dialog box for the beam. When you open the Family Types dialog. Preparing the family for flexing 1 When flexing the model. In this exercise. When you open the Family Types dialog box. ■ 678 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Flexing the Component Model. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Dimensions. You should flex a new family after: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Adding or modifying an element. this is the most accurate way of testing how the family will behave within a project.rfa. In the Family Types dialog box. you should also test it to make sure it works as expected. Wood Floor Truss. If you add a new material parameter. you can add the model geometry to the skeleton and be relatively certain that it will also flex as expected. you flex the model to test the various length parameters that you added in the previous exercise. click Family Types.18 On the Design Bar. or Reduce the Revit window and keep the model centered in the drawing area. you need to be able to see the model within the drawing area and also apply new values within the Family Types dialog box: ■ Maximize the Revit window and adjust the zoom settings so the model is in one corner of the drawing area. When you load this family into a project. Adding or modifying a parameter formula. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. Flexing the Component Model One of the most important steps in the process of creating a new parametric component is the flexing of the model. you can drag it off the Revit window as shown. notice the labelled dimensions display under the list of parameters and under the group. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. When you flex a family. you should always do it from the Family Types dialog box. 19 Click Cancel. it is important to verify that the reference lines adjust to changes as constraints are maintained. Even though you have yet to add any model geometry to the family. you can drag it to the opposing corner. rather than by manually stretching or manipulating the objects within the family. Adding or modifying a parameter. This is not limited to length parameters. click Save. Nesting a component. You should flex the model after any major change to the design. Adding a new constraint. When you change a parameter value and apply the change. 20 On the File menu. thus forcing the model to adapt to the changes.

Level. 2 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. and drag the dialog box so that you can view the model. Verifying that the entire model adapts to changes and making sure nothing “breaks” is the essence of flexing. 800 mm for Center Chase Width. Notice the depth of the truss adapts to the change in dimension value. 80 mm for Chord Thickness. notice that the reference planes marking the chord thickness adapted to the change in depth while maintaining their specified value. Creating the Component Skeleton | 679 . Notice that the model adapts to all of the changes. Also notice the equality constraint spreads the additional depth evenly above and below the Ref. enter 600 mm for Depth. and click Apply. and click Apply. In addition.Adjust your display using one of the two methods before opening the Family Types dialog box. Flex the truss depth 3 In the Family Types dialog box. 4 Enter 450 mm for Depth. under Dimensions.

rfa. Adding Solid Geometry. click Save. 6 On the File menu. Enter 38 mm for Chord Thickness. Click OK. When working within the Family Editor. you constrain them using a combination of locked alignments and labelled dimensions. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. After creating the extrusions. Add chord extrusions 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Solid Geometry In this lesson. you should always flex the design after you add new elements or modify the existing design in any way. Enter 400 mm for Center Chase Width. you load the truss into a project to verify that it works as designed. you align and lock their position. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you create the top and bottom chords of the truss. Creating Solid Extrusions In this exercise. After flexing the design. 680 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . you add the solid geometry using extrusions for the chords and trimmable plywood ends. reset the parameters back to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 300 mm for Depth. Wood Floor Truss.Reset parameters 5 In the Family Types dialog box. 7 Proceed to the next lesson. under Elevations. After adding the chords. double-click Left. 2 Zoom in around the center of the truss design. Click Apply.

9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the top chord sketch as shown. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming. click . 10 On the Design Bar. click the part of the line you want to keep. 5 On the Design Bar. the lines will no longer overlap. 6 On the Options Bar. When using the Trim tool.3 On the Design Bar. and verify that Lock is selected. Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. Adding Solid Geometry | 681 . NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. 11 On the Options Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 8 On the Tools toolbar. and select Lock. select Reference Plane: Member Left. click Name. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. 12 Select the four reference planes that border the bottom chord as shown. click Lines. click . click . click Lines. and click OK. 7 Select the four reference planes that border the top chord as shown.

16 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. 682 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 18 Proceed to the next exercise. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry In this exercise.13 On the Tools toolbar. click . Constrain the extrusion ends 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Front. Wood Floor Truss. under Elevations. 14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the bottom chord sketch as shown. click Finish Sketch.rfa. Notice the chord extrusions and the symbolic line. This makes the chord extrusions more visible within the view. 15 On the Design Bar. 17 On the File menu. The chords need to be aligned and locked to the correct reference planes in order for them to flex with changes in the geometry. this is the keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges. Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry. double-click View 1. under 3D Views. 3 Select the chord extrusions. click Save. 2 Enter SD. you add constraints to the chord extrusions and then flex the family to verify that it works as designed.

You’ll want to set up your screen so you can see the model truss while the Family Types dialog box is open. you must add a new constraint before flexing the length. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value. 5 Drag the left arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Left. Add a new dimension and constraint 9 On the Design Bar. and click Apply. 10 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Left and the reference plane: Member Left as shown. as shown. enter 6000 for Length. not the member right or member left reference planes. click Family Types. Notice that the extrusions did not move or change their length. On the Design Bar. This is because the length dimension references the extreme left and right reference planes.4 Drag the right arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Right. 8 In the Family Types dialog box. Therefore. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. click Dimension. enter 3000 for Length. click Apply. Flex the design 6 Prepare the view for flexing in the same way you did during the flexing exercise. and click OK. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. Adding Solid Geometry | 683 .

and thickness 15 In the Project Browser. you need a truss long enough to add web arrays and do not need to return the truss back to its original length value.11 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Right and the reference plane: Member Right as shown. Notice that the extrusions adjusted to the change in length. TIP If one of the extrusion ends did not adjust as expected. you load this family into a project to test how it works within a project environment. Later in this lesson. enter 6000 for Length. 13 In the Family Types dialog box. Flex the chord width. flex the model once again to make sure the fix works as expected. double-click View 1. and click Apply. This tells you that the constraints on the extrusion ends are working. use the Align tool and add the constraint. 14 Click OK. depth. In this particular case. Flex the length 12 On the Design Bar. you add the web members. In a later exercise. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value. 684 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . adding this constraint to the model has no impact on how it works within a project. Afterwards. Therefore. click Family Types. This is a two-point placement beam family that uses the member left and member right reference planes as the determining extents of this component. under 3D Views.

TIP When flexing. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. try picking a method. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Click Apply. 20 On the File menu.rfa. Enter 200mm for Chord Width. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. it is important to remember the original values so you can reset them afterwards. 18 In the Family Types dialog box. Wood Floor Truss. click Family Types. ■ The chords should adjust to each of the new values. 19 Specify the beam values shown below: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. Creating Additional Solid Geometry In this exercise.16 Enter SD for Shading with Edges. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. you add the extrusions for the truss ends and the center chase. Enter 89mm for Chord Width. Adding Solid Geometry | 685 . Click Apply. 17 On the Design Bar. such as doubling. click Save. Creating Additional Solid Geometry. and click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 600mm for Depth. that allows you to easily return to the original values. Therefore.

vertical member of the center chase as shown. Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. This will make it easier to sketch the center chase extrusions. 2 Zoom in on the center of the truss and select the model line that represents the beam stick symbol. 4 On the Design Bar. 686 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click . and verify that Lock is selected. click the Hide/Isolate control. Level. 6 On the Options Bar. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. the lines will no longer overlap.Add the center chase extrusions 1 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Options Bar. click . 3 On the View Control Bar. and click Hide Object. click . 5 On the Design Bar. double-click Ref. vertical member of the center chase sketch as shown. 10 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming. 8 On the Tools toolbar. 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the left. vertical member of the center chase as shown. 12 Select the four reference planes that border the right. click Lines. click Lines. and verify that Lock is selected. 13 On the Tools toolbar. 7 Select the four reference planes that border the left. click . under Floor Plans. 14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the center chase sketch as shown.

click Align. Adding Solid Geometry | 687 . This next process is very important. 17 Zoom in on the center chase. 21 Align the top edge of the chase extrusions with the reference line coincident with the lower edge of the upper chord. click Finish Sketch.15 On the Design Bar. and lock the alignment as shown. click the lock symbol to lock the alignment. it is considered a best practice to align and lock to reference planes. You may need to press TAB to toggle the selection options. The ends of the chase extrusions must be aligned and locked to the horizontal reference planes coincident with the interior edges of the chords. double-click Front. Although you can align and lock extrusion to extrusion. Align and lock the new extrusions 18 On the Tools menu. 16 In the Project Browser. and after the alignment. under Elevations. 19 For the align-to reference. 20 Click the bottom edge of one of the chase extrusions. select the reference line on the top of the lower chord as shown.

22 On the Design Bar. 27 Clean up the view by moving the dimensions off to the side as shown. Click Apply. Flex the center chase 23 On the Design Bar. Add the truss end extrusions 28 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-left corner as shown. Enter 800mm for Center Chase Width. The truss should adapt to all the changes. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. redo any problematic alignments and constraints. and click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 486mm for Depth. 24 In the Family Types dialog box. 25 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. click Modify. 688 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . This will make subsequent work much easier. click Family Types. 29 On the Options Bar. Clean up the view 26 Zoom to Fit. select Add Parameter for Label. If it does not. Click Apply.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Trimmable End Length for Name. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. select Trimmable End Length for Label. 43 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown. and click OK. double-click Right. 36 Zoom around the truss elements. select the lower horizontal reference plane. under Parameter Data. 31 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-right corner of the view. click Apply. select the upper horizontal reference plane. and verify that Lock is selected. on the lower chord. 41 On the upper chord. enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length. 37 On the Design Bar. Sketch the right end extrusion 35 In the Project Browser. select Reference Plane: Member Right for Name. and click OK.30 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 32 On the Options Bar. click Family Types. Select Instance. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch. enter19mm for Offset. click . 40 On the Options Bar. 33 On the Design Bar. 34 In the Family Types dialog box. Click OK. 42 On the Options Bar. Adding Solid Geometry | 689 . under Elevations. under Dimensions. 38 In the Work Plane dialog box. 39 On the Design Bar. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. click Lines.

and verify that Lock is selected. Sketch the left end extrusion 49 In the Project Browser. 45 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown. select the lower horizontal reference plane. and click OK. on the lower chord. 57 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown. 48 On the Design Bar. 690 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 53 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 56 On the Options Bar. 52 In the Work Plane dialog box. enter 19mm for Offset. 54 On the Options Bar. 51 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch. under Elevations. click Lines. verify that 300mm is specified for the Extrusion End value. select Reference Plane: Member Left for Name. 47 In the Element Properties dialog box. select the upper horizontal reference plane.44 On the Tools toolbar. click . and click OK. 46 On the Design Bar. 50 Zoom around the truss elements. click Extrusion Properties. 55 On the upper chord. double-click Left. click .

under Elevations. and click OK. NOTE This extrusion value must be negative in order to push the extrusion towards the center of the truss. 62 On the Design Bar. 59 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown. Adding Solid Geometry | 691 . 66 Select the Member Left reference plane as the align-to point. 64 Zoom in on the left end of the truss. 65 On the Tools menu. click Finish Sketch. 60 On the Design Bar. double-click Front. click . 61 In the Element Properties dialog box.58 On the Tools toolbar. they are not aligned and locked to those reference planes and would not pass a flex test. click Align. Although the truss ends line up with the reference planes controlling the length of the trimmable ends. click Extrusion Properties. Add alignment constraints 63 In the Project Browser. specify -300mm for the Extrusion End value. under Constraints.

reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. if you select the end extrusion. 692 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 71 On the Design Bar. 69 Select the right edge of the left end extrusion. double-click View 1. Click Apply. 75 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 486mm for Depth. Make adjustments to account for the right side. Click Apply. click Family Types. and click OK.67 Select the left edge of the left end extrusion. click Modify. 70 Repeat the previous five steps for the right end of the truss. Enter 600mm for Trimmable End Length. 68 Select the reference plane coincident with the right edge of the left end extrusion. a lock displays on each side indicating the constraints to the reference planes. and lock the alignment. The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not. 73 In the Family Types dialog box. and lock the alignment. Enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length. 74 In the Family Types dialog box. this is the align-to point. Flex the design 72 On the Design Bar. TIP When you finish the alignments. fix any problematic alignments and constraints.

Testing the Family in a Project In this lesson. Datasets Open the truss family ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. it is recommended that you use the new family in order to ensure consistency. click Open. NOTE Close any open families or projects. Testing the Family in a Project | 693 . The truss family that you use in this lesson is identical to the truss you have created in the previous exercises. If you have experienced any errors or have deviated from the exercises in any way. After you load it into the project. you should close the file and begin with a fresh dataset. Although you could continue using the previous family. 77 Proceed to the next lesson. It is identical to the truss you have been designing. you can continue using it in the next lesson. a sill. A new dataset is provided for you beginning with the next lesson. you add several beam instances and then modify the shape of the foundation to see how the beams adapt. Testing the Family in a Project. Open the m_Wood Floor Truss_1.76 Save the Family. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Loading a Family into a Project In this exercise. you load the family into a project to test it in a real-world environment. and a rim joist. click the Training Files icon.rfa file located in the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families folder. If you are comfortable with your design. you load the truss family into a project that consists of foundation walls.

If you had multiple projects or families open. click m_Wood Floor Truss_1. and notice that the Wood Floor Truss_1 family has been loaded. a dialog box would have displayed asking for you to specify which projects you wanted to load the family into. The truss family is loaded directly into the only other open file. Load the truss family into the project 1 On the Window menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Load into Projects. Notice that the project file is now active. Open the m_WWF1. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you used in the previous exercise.rfa. you add several instances of the truss family to the project. 694 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . and then modify the project to see how the beams adapt. 4 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. Testing a Family Instance in a Project In this exercise. expand Structural Framing.Open the project file ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Testing a Family Instance in a Project. 3 In the Project Browser.rvt file located in the Metric folder. expand Families. click the Training Files icon. click Open.

Add beams to project 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Type Selector. This project consists of foundation walls. under Floor Plans. under 3D Views. click Beam. expand 3D Views. Try to make them approximately equidistant as shown. add three vertical beams that snap to the rim joist at each end. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. therefore.Southeast Isometric. Testing the Family in a Project | 695 . a slab. and double-click 3D . expand Views. 5 Using point-to-point insertion. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. The rim joist was added as a beam. double-click 3D .Southeast Isometric. and a wood rim joist. a wood sill. NOTE Do not be concerned with the exact location of the three beams. double-click Level 1. the truss family you loaded will interact with it as one beam does to another.

7 In the Project Browser. you are merely testing the new floor truss to verify that it adapts to the changes. under 3D Views. 9 In the Project Browser. You do not need to be precise. 8 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until the walls form an approximate square. not the wall or rim joist. under Floor Plans. double-click 3D . double-click Level 1.Southeast Isometric. NOTE Make sure you drag the grid line. 696 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques .Notice the wood truss sits on top of the sill and attaches to the rim joist as expected.

click Save as. 16 Proceed to the next lesson. the wood floor truss family becomes the active view. 10 On the Edit menu. click Undo Drag. click Edit Family. In the next lesson. 14 On the Options Bar. The project and family need to interact based on a consistent file name. Edit a family from within a project 13 Select one of the wooden truss components. Because the family is already open. 12 In the Save as dialog box. Working with Nested Subcomponents In this lesson. 15 When prompted to open the truss family for editing.Notice the wood truss adjusted to the changes. Working with Nested Subcomponents. and create a formula controlled array to fill in the truss. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 697 . The center chase remained the same width while remaining centered. This should return the project to its original dimension. IMPORTANT Do not change the name of the family. you nest wood web members into the floor truss. 11 On the File menu. click Yes. you nest the web components into the truss and create an array that adapts to changes in length. ■ ■ The truss ends remained constant and adapted to the new beam length. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project with its existing name.

The geometry is driven by formula-based parameters that link to the host family. Dataset Continue to use the datasets from the previous exercise. click Component. click Hide/Isolate. 8 Add two instances of the wood web component as shown. and click Hide Object. Place one wood web on each side of the center chase.rfa is the active file. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 698 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click the Training Files icon. This will aid in the placement of the wood web. 4 On the View Control Bar. Level. This family is a single extrusion as shown. You then align and lock the web extents before applying a formula-controlled array.Adding a Nested Component In this exercise. IMPORTANT Make sure you snap the center line of the web components to the center reference line of the truss. ■ ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog box. double-click Ref. Leave a slight gap between the chase and the web. This will make aligning the wood web easier. you nest two wooden web members into the truss.rfa file located in the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families folder. Add two wood web components 6 On the Design Bar. The extrusion is aligned and locked to invisible model lines that make it easier to array within the truss. 7 In the Type Selector. Snap the center line of the web to the center reference plane of the truss. under Floor Plans. Open the m_Wood_Web. 3 Select the symbolic line in the center of the truss. 5 On the File menu. verify that m_Wood_Web: Wood Web is selected. Prepare the view for nesting 1 Make sure that m_Wood Floor Truss_1. 2 In the Project Browser.

click Modify. under Elevations. 13 For the align-to point. IMPORTANT Do not lock the alignment 15 Repeat the previous two steps to align the left edge of the right web component to the right edge of the center chase as shown. In the following steps. double-click Front. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 699 . Notice the model lines that surround the web component.9 On the Design Bar. 14 Select the right vertical model line of the left web component as shown. Align the nested web components 12 Enter . you align the web panel using these lines rather than the extrusion edges. select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the left center chase extrusion. This will be accomplished in the next exercise when you link the nested parameter with the host parameter. 10 In the Project Browser. Do not select it. You will align the left web component first. 11 Place the cursor over the left wood web. they are visible only when you place the cursor over the component. Also notice that the depth of the web members needs to be changed. this is the keyboard shortcut for Align.

Each of these web components represents the starting point of the web arrays that you add later in this lesson. In the steps that follow. you align the reference planes to the center of the web components. In addition. The reference plane you added in the previous step represents half the web width. it is important to note that you should avoid adding unnecessary constraints. Place each reference plane just to the outside of the center of the web components. 18 Add two reference planes as shown. Add reference planes for array anchors 17 On the Design Bar. click Align. 22 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the web component. click Ref Plane. NOTE You do not have to align the top or bottom the web components because the height of the web members will adapt to the truss height after you create and link the parameters in the next exercise. 16 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 19 On the Tools menu. 21 Select the reference plane that you added to the left of the web components center as shown. 700 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 20 Select the center of the left web component as the align-to point.

■ ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the right web component. 25 Add the following two dimensions: ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the left web component. click Dimension. Dimension and label array anchors 24 On the Design Bar. Place the dimension as shown. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the right web component and the outside edge of the center chase. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the right edge of the left web component and the outside edge of the center chase. Place the dimension as shown. ■ Working with Nested Subcomponents | 701 .23 Repeat the previous two steps to align and lock the right web component and the reference plane as shown.

When you refer to another parameter within a formula. enter Depth . 702 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 26 On the Design Bar. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters. you add new parameters to control the web components. click Modify. under Other. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. click Family Types. Select Common for Discipline. click Edit/New. You then link the nested web parameters to the new host parameters. In the Type Parameter dialog box. and click OK. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. click Add. 12 On the Design Bar. ensure you enter it exactly as it is named. Select Type. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. Create a new parameter for web depth 1 On the Design Bar. and click Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. Click OK. 4 In the Family Types dialog box. click the button to the right of the WebHeight value. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. click OK. select WebDepth. Select Length for Type. 5 Click OK. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. notice that “= “displays within the WebHeight button. This formula ensures that the web depth will account for any changes in the chord thickness or truss depth. click Modify. TIP You can expand the width of the Family Types dialog box to facilitate typing within the formula field. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. or the width of the center chase.(Chord Thickness * 2) for the WebDepth Formula. click OK. under Constraints. You also add a formula to the parameter in order to maintain the web position as the truss changes depth. 9 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters In this exercise. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.In the next exercise. under Parameter Data. Link the nested component to the new parameter 6 Right-click the left web component. click Save As. 28 In the Save As dialog box. under Parameters. length. navigate to the same directory in which you saved the project file and save this family there with its current name. 27 On the File menu. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. you label these dimensions. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebDepth for Name.

19 Under Constraints. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. which must remain at least 150mm long. under Parameters. enter Center Chase Width + (2*Chord Thickness) for CC Formula. It will use a formula to add the center chase width and the thickness of the two bordering chords. Select Common for Discipline. Create new formula-controlled parameter for center chase 13 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. under Parameter Data. Select Length for Type. Select Common for Discipline. After you enter the formula. 14 In the Family Types dialog box. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Other for Group parameter under. The additional 300mm is to account for the ends. Create WebArrayLength formula-controlled parameter 17 In the Family Types dialog box. under Parameters. Select Length for Type. under Parameter Data. Click OK. click Add.(CC+300))/2 for WebArrayLength Formula. Select Instance. Create WebArrayNum formula-controlled parameter 20 In the Family Types dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebArrayLength for Name. click Add. click Family Types. do the following: ■ Enter CC for Name. click Add. notice the center of each nested web component is locked to the reference plane that bisects it.Notice the web members are resized to fit more precisely between the chords. 16 Under Other. In addition. under Parameters. enter (Length . the resulting value is displayed as an inactive field. This formula subtracts the length of the center chase and its two bordering chords plus an additional 300mm before dividing it in two to specify the length of each array. This parameter is primarily for convenience. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 703 . Click OK. Select Instance. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.

Click OK. click Family Types. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Webhalflength for Name. 28 On the Options Bar. 23 Click OK. Click OK. enter WebArrayLength/(2*WebDepth) for WebArrayNum Formula. under Parameter Data. 32 Click OK. Select Common for Discipline. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. enter (WebArrayLength/WebArrayNum)/2 for Webhalflength Formula. click Modify. Select Integer for Type. Add parameter to anchor web array 24 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the left web as shown.21 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 25 On the Options Bar. Select Instance. under Parameter Data. 29 On the Design Bar. Add formula for Webhalflength 30 On the Design Bar. 704 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Select Constraints for Group parameter under. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Notice the location of the web components has adapted to the formula. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebArrayNum for Name. 31 Under Constraints. select Webhalflength for Label. 22 Under Constraints. Select Instance. 27 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the right web. select Add parameter for Label.

under Other. and click Properties. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 686mm for Depth. under 3D Views. 36 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. The truss should adapt to all the changes. click OK. select WebArrayLength. click the button to the right of the WebArrayLength value. 39 On the Design Bar. 38 In the Element Properties dialog box. 40 In the Project Browser. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 705 . click Edit/New. Click Apply. 35 In the Type Properties dialog box. 43 In the Family Types dialog box. Because you have added and constrained new components. and click OK. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. 42 On the Design Bar. 37 In the Type Properties dialog box. If it does not. In the Type Properties dialog box. fix any problematic alignments and constraints. click Modify. It is especially important to flex the model before arraying the truss so that you don’t multiply any existing problems. 34 In the Element Properties dialog box. Flex the design 41 Adjust the view so you can flex the truss while in the Family Types dialog box. click OK. click Family Types. it is very important that you flex the model to ensure the nested components and the formulas that controls them work as expected. the button next to the WebArrayLength value should have an equals sign within it.Associate web component parameters 33 Right-click the left web component. double-click View 1.

4 On the Options Bar.44 In the Family Types dialog box. click Array. Select 2nd for Move to. 706 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 46 Proceed to the next exercise. you array the nested web components. Click Apply. Arraying Nested Subcomponents In this exercise. 2 Select the nested web component left of the center chase. 45 On the File menu. First. double-click Front. you specify the move start point. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. under Elevations. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. When picking the corner. click Save. Enter 3 for Number. and link the arrays to the WebArrayNum parameter. Arraying Nested Subcomponents. then you specify the move end point. Array the left web component 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. add alignment constraints. 3 On the Edit menu. Select Constrain. Creating an array requires two basic steps. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Group and Associate is selected. You must use precision when arraying because any error is multiplied as the array grows. 5 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point.

12 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. place the cursor over the boundary between the two left web components until the reference highlights. 14 Press ENTER to complete the array. Enter 3 for Number. When picking the corner. 16 Zoom out to view the truss. 8 On the Design Bar. When picking the corner. 7 Press ENTER to complete the array. Select 2nd for Move to. Select Constrain. click Array. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. Array the right nested web component 9 Select the nested web component right of the center chase. then select the line twice. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Group and Associate is selected. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 707 . click Modify. 18 On the Tools menu. 13 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. click Align. Align and lock the arrays 17 Zoom in on the left array of web components. 11 On the Options Bar. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. click Modify. 15 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Edit menu. 19 In the left array.6 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. When picking the corner.

29 On the Design Bar. you are aligning the two bordering web components to each other. 25 On the Options Bar. If you do not lock the edges of the array. 24 Notice the array line displays above the components with the array value. 27 Select the array line over the web components on the right. align and lock the two boundaries between the three web components. the web components overlap each other when you change the depth of the truss. 21 Within the left array. align and lock the two right web components. Label the arrays 23 Select the middle web component of the left array. Place the cursor over the array line as shown and select it. select WebArrayNum for Label. NOTE This step is very important. click Modify. Use the same techniques as you did in the previous three steps.Because there are two overlapping lines at this location. NOTE Do not select the array value. 708 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . select WebArrayNum for Label. 30 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss. 22 Within the right array. 26 Select the middle web component of the right array. 20 Click the lock symbol to keep the web components locked at their edges. 28 On the Options Bar.

31 Zoom around the left side of the truss. and lock the alignment as shown. You will fix this in later steps by changing the parameter value. This is because earlier in the tutorial. Left. Member Left. 35 Select the reference plane. 36 Select the reference plane.Notice the arrays appear to be too long. you added a dimension to lock the Member Left and Member Right reference plane to the outer Left and Right reference planes. click Align. 33 Delete the dimension. The primary reason for this was to allow for flexing the length. 32 Select the dimension between reference plane Left and Member Left as shown. Notice the end of the array still overlaps the trimmable end. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 709 . 34 On the Tools menu. as the align-to point.

37 On the Design Bar. If it does not. under 3D Views. click Modify. this solution has little. 41 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss. enter 150mm for Trimmable End Length. 39 Delete the dimension between reference plane Right and Member Right. in this case. Click Apply. click Family Types. the wood floor truss normally sits on a sill bordering a rim joist. Enter 900mm for Center Chase Width. significant impact. 40 Align and lock reference plane Right and Member Right. Therefore. however. Flex the design 45 In the Project Browser. fix any problematic alignments and constraints. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 686mm for Depth.NOTE With most beam families. you would not want to align and lock these two reference planes. if any. 43 In the Family Types dialog box. Notice the web arrays fit within the truss without overlapping the ends. click Family Types. 47 In the Family Types dialog box. under Dimensions. The truss should adapt to all the changes. and prepare the view for flexing. Enter 12000mm for Length. and click OK. Change trimmable end length value 42 On the Design Bar. 46 On the Design Bar. double-click View 1. 710 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 44 Click Apply. 38 Zoom in around the right side of the truss.

m_WWF1. the project. select Override parameter values of existing types. click Save. 49 On the File menu. 3 In the Reload Family dialog box. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. you should flex the model in as many ways as possible to verify it is working correctly. should be open. these steps have been reduced. displays. however. for training and time purposes. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 711 . and click OK. 1 Verify that the truss family is active and the 3D View. Reload the truss into the project. 2 On the Design Bar. and click Yes. View 1. 48 In the Family Types dialog box.TIP When flexing a complex model such as this. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. In addition to the truss family. Enter 6000mm for Length. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. Click Apply. Reloading a Family into a Project. You then increase the distance between the foundation walls to see how the truss adapts to the changes in length. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width.rvt. Notice the project file becomes active and the beam has updated with the latest changes. You have completed the design of the primary components of the truss. Reloading a Family into a Project In this exercise. you reload the truss family into the project. click Load into Projects.

7 On the Edit menu. Materials. 712 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 6 In the Project Browser. Notice the truss has adapted to the changes. double-click Level 1. Applying Subcategories. and Parameters In this lesson.4 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. double-click 3D .Southeast Isometric. 5 Drag Grid 2 downward until the shape of the building footprint is almost square. you begin with a new dataset which is identical to both of these files. 9 Proceed to the next lesson. click Undo Drag. In the next lesson. you create and apply subcategories and materials. 8 Save and close the project file and the family file. and Parameters. Applying Subcategories. Materials. You then create a parameter to specifically control material application. under Floor Plans.

In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and Parameters | 713 . Notice no material has been applied to the truss.rvt file located in the Metric folder. In this dataset. four instances of the floor truss were added to the other end of the structure. click the Training Files icon. You then reload the family into the project and apply a material to the subcategory. the truss was added to a beam system that occupies approximately half the building footprint. In addition. Within the family. you create new subcategories within the truss family. Datasets ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.Creating and Applying Subcategories In this exercise. click Open. Open the m_WWF2. Applying Subcategories. Materials. Apply Object Styles 1 Zoom in around beam system. the material values were set to By Category by default.

714 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . and expand the category Structural Framing. enter Wood Floor Truss for Name. and click OK. When you apply a material to the Structural Framing category. Create subcategories within the truss family 9 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. under Modify Subcategories. 5 Click the button that displays in the Structural Framing Material field. In addition. Notice that the Structural Framing category and all of the subcategories have no material value defined. click Object Styles. 3 In the Object Styles dialog box. click in the material field until the button displays as shown. click OK. it would also have the wood material applied to it. 6 In the Materials dialog box. click Edit Family. click Undo Object Styles. 11 Click Yes to open the family for editing. click Wood . 4 On the Structural Framing category line. click New. and click OK. 12 On the Settings menu. Notice the Wood . 7 In the Object Styles dialog box.2 On the Settings menu. 14 In the New Subcategory dialog box. If you create subcategories as you design in the Family Editor. notice that the subcategories do not apply to the wood floor truss that you have designed. 13 In the Object Styles dialog box. 8 On the Edit menu. all subcomponents of that category are assigned that material. you have more control over component visibility within a project. 10 On the Options Bar. If there was a metal beam in this building model.Timber material has been applied to all Structural Framing components. verify that the Model Objects tab is selected. click Object Styles.Timber for Name.

select Natural. click OK. click Check None. 21 In the Object Styles dialog box. 26 In the Element Properties dialog box. 27 On the Design Bar. under AccuRender. Applying Subcategories. Apply the subcategory to the truss components 22 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. click . click . and click OK. click Duplicate. and click OK. click Edit Family. navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine. 23 On the Options Bar. enter Wood Floor Truss. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected. click OK. The web component family opens in a 3D view. 16 In the Materials dialog box. 24 In the Filter dialog box. 30 Click Yes to open the family for editing. Yellow. and click the button to open the Materials dialog box. 18 In the Materials dialog box. 19 In the Material Library dialog box. and click OK. and Parameters | 715 . 25 On the Options Bar. press TAB to toggle to the web component and click to select it.Apply material to subcategory 15 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss subcategory. 29 On the Options Bar. and click OK.No Gloss for Name. click Modify. under Identity Data. 17 In the New Material dialog box. click . Materials. Apply a subcategory to the nested web components 28 Place the cursor over one of the arrayed web components. select Other. select Wood Floor Truss for Subcategory. 20 In the Materials dialog box.

34 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss .Webs subcategory. 36 In the New Material dialog box.Webs for Subcategory. and click OK. Reload web component into truss family 44 On the Design Bar. you can apply a different material to all web components when using this truss within a project. select Wood Floor Truss . select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. 37 In the Materials dialog box. 33 In the New Subcategory dialog box.Webs. 39 In the Materials dialog box. click Load into Projects.rvt. and click OK. click New. click . enter Wood Floor Truss .31 On the Settings menu. navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine. and click OK. 716 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . and click Yes. 32 In the Object Styles dialog box. 43 In the Element Properties dialog box. 41 Select the web extrusion. 38 In the Material Library dialog box. Reload truss into project 47 On the Design Bar. enter Wood Floor Truss . click Object Styles. 45 In the Load into Projects dialog box. select m_WWF2.rfa. 48 In the Load into Projects dialog box. 46 In the Reload Family dialog box. and click OK. and click the button to open the Materials dialog box. under Modify Subcategories. under AccuRender. Yellow. 40 In the Object Styles dialog box. click OK. click Load into Projects. select Override parameter values of existing types. select Natural. and click OK.Webs for Name. click OK. By creating a separate subcategory for the web components. click Duplicate. click .No Gloss for Name. 35 In the Materials dialog box. 42 On the Options Bar. and click OK. under Identity Data.

49 In the Reload Family dialog box. 2 On the Options Bar. Materials. Notice the new object subcategory styles are applied to the truss components. and click Yes. Notice the two new subcategories are listed. 54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog box. Applying Subcategories. 50 On the Settings menu. 53 On the View menu. Creating Material Parameters. 52 Click OK. and Parameters | 717 . Open truss family for editing 1 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. expand Structural Framing. you add a new material parameter that allows you to specify a material for each truss instance. Notice the web extrusions not longer display. clear Wood Floor Truss Webs. Creating Material Parameters In this exercise. navigate to a folder of your preference and save the project with the current name. the stick symbols continue to display. click Edit Family. under Categories. 51 In the Object Styles dialog box. click Undo Visibility/Graphics. click Visibility/Graphics. Dataset Continue to use the dataset that you saved in the previous exercise. You can change the style of only the wood truss components without impacting other structural framing components. click Save As. expand Structural Framing. 57 In the Save as dialog box. 55 On the Edit menu. and click OK. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. click Object Styles. select Override parameter values of existing types. under Visibility. 56 On the File menu. however. 58 Proceed to the next exercise.

Reload truss into project 23 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. 718 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . under Other. When reloaded into a project. and click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. and click Yes. 26 Select a floor truss that is not part of the beam system. select Metal . and click OK. This material parameter allows you to assign a material on an instance parameter. 19 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Family Types. click . click the button to the right of the WebMaterial value field.rvt. click . 17 On the Options Bar. 8 Click OK. this component will continue to use the material assigned to the subcategory by default. under Materials and Finishes. Select Materials and Finishes for Group parameter under. 25 In the Reload Family dialog box. under Parameter Data. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected. under Parameters. press TAB. click Check None. Link truss extrusions to material parameter 9 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. select Structural Framing (Wood Floor Truss). 22 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Floor Truss Material for Name. under Materials and Finishes. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. In this case. 21 Click OK twice. Select Instance. click Modify. select Floor Truss Material. and click OK. select Override parameter values of existing types. 16 Place the cursor over one of the web components. click . Click OK. 29 In the Materials dialog box.Steel for Name. select Floor Truss Material. and click OK. 11 In the Filter dialog box. 28 In the Element Properties dialog box. click the Floor Truss Material field and click the button that displays. and click OK. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog box. click . 27 On the Options Bar. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. notice the default material is By Category. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. do not assign a material to the parameter. select m_WWF2. click Add. click OK. click OK. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed. Select Common for Discipline.Create material parameter 4 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. click Load into Projects. 20 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. Select Material for Type. click the button to the right of the Material value field. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. and select the component.

you designate the display of elements in specific views and at specific detail levels. click Detail Level. notice the floor truss has not changed appearance. and click Coarse. Datasets ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Close. Open the m_WWF3.31 On the Design Bar. However. 34 Close any open files. Change detail levels 1 On the View Control Bar.rvt file located in the Metric folder. click the Training Files icon. Controlling Component Visibility In this lesson. You can save the open files if you wish. In the next lesson. because you have yet to assign a detail level to each of the elements within the truss family. Controlling Component Visibility | 719 . Assigning Detail Level and View Controls In this exercise. click Save. Notice the material is applied only to the selected beam. all elements display at all times in all views. Notice the rim joist no longer displays. Currently within the truss. 35 Proceed to the next lesson. click Modify. click Open. 32 On the File menu. 33 On the File menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you add controls to specify the views in which each element displays and at what detail level. a new dataset is supplied. Controlling Component Visibility.

Click OK. 10 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. click Load into Projects. 18 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Reload Family dialog box. clear Plan/RCP. click Visibility. 7 Click Yes to open the family for editing. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. select Override parameter values of existing types. 16 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. Under Detail Levels. clear Coarse. clear Plan/RCP. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. clear Plan/RCP. click Visibility. 4 Click Yes to open the family for editing. click Visibility. Assign detail level to center chase extrusions 14 Select the center chase extrusions. 15 On the Options Bar. 19 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. Clear Left/Right. 9 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Load into Projects dialog box. Click OK. click Edit Family. and click OK. 8 Select the web extrusion. 720 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques .2 Select a floor truss. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. 6 On the Options Bar. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. Assign detail level to truss ends 17 Select the end extrusions. Under Detail Levels. 3 On the Options Bar. clear Coarse. clear Coarse. Clear Left/Right. Under Detail Levels. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed.rfa. click Edit Family. and click Yes. 11 On the Design Bar. Click OK. Apply detail level controls to web components 5 Select a web component.

28 On the View Control Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ Under Detail Levels. click Load into Projects.Assign detail level to truss chords 20 Select the truss chords. 25 In the Reload Family dialog box. and click Yes. double-click Level 1. and click Coarse. click Detail Level. and click Medium. 26 On the View Control Bar. Reload truss into project 23 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. 21 On the Options Bar. Click OK. Notice the symbolic representation of the beams. clear Coarse. Notice the floor truss solid geometry is displayed. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog box. click Visibility. Controlling Component Visibility | 721 . select Override parameter values of existing types.rvt. Notice that the floor truss solid geometry is not displayed. 27 In the Project Browser. click Detail Level. and click OK. select m_WWF3. under Floor Plans.

Creating Component Types In this lesson. navigate to your preferred location and save the project with the current name. enter 89x38 for Name. Open the truss family for editing 1 Select a floor truss. under Family Types. 6 In the New dialog box. Create new types 4 On the Design Bar. you create multiple types for a 89x38 truss and a 64x38 truss. click Save As. create types for those most frequently used in your projects. 10 Select 89x38 for Name.29 On the File menu. creating predefined types can speed up the design process. Although you can change the parameters of a truss within a project. you create multiple floor truss types to speed up the design process when working in a project. The truss returns to its original designed value. 8 In the New dialog box. Creating Component Types. enter 64x38 for Name. and click Apply. 722 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click Edit Family. and click OK. under Dimensions. and click OK. 2 On the Options Bar. NOTE When creating new components. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. 9 In the Family Types dialog box. 11 Click OK. Creating Multiple Component Types In this exercise. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. TIP You can also use new types to flex the model. click Family Types. Notice the chord changes width. enter 64mm for Chord Width. In the final exercise. and click Apply. 31 Proceed to the next lesson. click New. you create a conditional formula that adjusts the truss depth based on the truss length. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 30 In the Save As dialog box. click New. under Family Types.

under 3D Views. Creating Conditional Formulas. select 89x38. select 64x38. 16 In the Type Selector. Creating Component Types | 723 . 14 In the Reload Family dialog box. enter 8000 for length. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. Notice the two beam types. click Save. <result-if-false>) 5 In the Family Types dialog box. Open the truss for editing 1 Select a floor truss. click Modify. click Beam. 8 In the Family Types dialog box. if(Length < 9000. 23 Proceed to the final exercise. click Load into Projects. Notice the truss depth increases. 15 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Creating Conditional Formulas In this exercise. and click Apply.rvt. 22 On the File menu. and click OK. enter the follow formula for Depth: if(Length < 6600. 19 Add a beam next to the 64x38. double-click 3D . select m_WWF3. 17 Add a beam in the center of the open space.Load new types into the project 12 On the Design Bar. Adding a conditional formula 4 On the Design Bar. click Edit Family. 400))) 6 Click Apply. 21 In the Project Browser.Southeast Isometric. You are going to enter a conditional formula that follows this basic rule: IF ( <condition>. and click OK. click Apply. 400. you create a conditional formula that changes the depth automatically as the truss increases in length. 286. 20 On the Design Bar. Flex the design 7 In the Family Types dialog box. if(Length < 7500. and click Yes. select Override parameter values of existing types. 350. under Dimensions. <result-if-true>. 2 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Load into Projects dialog box. 18 In the Type Selector. click Family Types. enter 6000 for length.

15 Notice the change in floor truss depth.rvt. 10 In the Load into Projects dialog box. double-click Level 1. You have completed this tutorial. under Floor Plans. you probably noticed a change in the amount of time the view needed to regenerate. click Load into Projects. Test the conditional formula within a project 12 In the Project Browser. NOTE You would have to change the depth of the sill and rim joist to accommodate this change. select m_WWF3. 724 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . under 3D Views. 16 On the File menu. Regeneration time and overall performance can be affected by over-designed families. click Save. and click Yes. 14 In the Project Browser.Southeast Isometric. 13 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until it is between 8000-9000mm from Grid 1. and click OK. 17 Close any open files. IMPORTANT When you changed the width of the building footprint. 11 In the Reload Family dialog box. select Override parameter values of existing types. double-click 3D .Load the truss into the project 9 On the Design Bar.

The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. Finally. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed.Area Analysis 21 In this tutorial. 725 .

click Open. right-click in the Design Bar. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. click OK. 4 In the Project Units dialog box. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. select Millimeters. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. your values will be different. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. click Project Units. These schemes define spatial relationships. If you are using metric units. select m2 Click OK. TIP If the Area Settings tab is not visible.Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. 726 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. For Unit Suffix. Open the c_Area. it is not necessary in this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.rvt file located in the Common folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. there are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. click Area Settings. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Units. click the Training Files icon. select Square meters. 2 In the Project Units dialog box. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. You add and modify the area boundaries and apply area tags. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. and click Area Analysis. In the Area Settings dialog box. expand Views (all). In the final exercise. select mm. under Length. For Unit Suffix. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. 6 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. 3 Under Area. For Rounding. You add and modify the area boundaries and apply area tags. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. select 2 decimal places.

When you select Yes in this dialog box. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. forming a closed loop. 10 In the New Area Plan dialog box. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. Create a gross building area plan 9 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. ■ At System Computed Height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. the system-computed height defaults to the level. 13 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. you must manually add these boundary lines. click Area Tag. Click OK. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically.7 In the Area Setting dialog box. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). click the Room Calculations tab. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. 14 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. If you select No. click Area Plan. ■ 11 When the informational dialog box displays. 12 In the Project Browser. ■ 8 Click Cancel. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. under Views (all). Using Area Analysis Tools | 727 . or 0. At Specified Height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated.

click Area Plan. 17 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. you create a new area plan for rentable space. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 15 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. and store area. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. 728 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . A room tag measures the area enclosed within the exterior face of room-defining walls. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. 18 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. Add area boundary lines 19 On the Design Bar. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). click Area Boundary. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. 16 In the New Area Plan dialog box. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. Next. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. common areas. Click OK. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view.

Using Area Analysis Tools | 729 . 22 On the Design Bar. 26 On the Options Bar. 23 In the upper left corner of the building model. click . you can either draw them or pick them.20 On the Options Bar. 24 On the Design Bar. 25 Select the area tag you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. click Modify. click Area Tag. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. If you do not select this option. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. 21 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. When you add area boundary lines. When you pick the walls. the area boundary lines do not update automatically.

Click OK.27 In the Element Properties dialog box. add a tag in the common area to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. 28 On the Design Bar. 33 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. Select Office area for Area Type. Select Office area for Area Type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. 29 Add the tag to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. Click OK. click Modify and select the tag. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 2 for Name. 30 On the Design Bar. click . Click OK. click Area Tag. 31 On the Options Bar. 730 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . In the Element Properties dialog box. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 1 for Name.

and Tenant 4 in the lower right. and select Store Area for Area Type. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. Notice that within the two store areas. Using Area Analysis Tools | 731 . 35 Add the last two area tags to the two areas on the right side of the building model. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. enter Core for Name. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right.34 Add an area tag to the building model core. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type.

2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. name the project Area-in progress. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces.rvt. click Color Fill. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. 37 Navigate to your preferred directory. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. In the next exercise. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule.36 On the File menu. 732 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . click to place it. and when the color legend displays. and click Save. In this exercise. Create a color fill plan 1 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. click Save. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise.

click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. and click OK.3 When the dialog box displays. 7 Under Available fields. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. under Category. select Areas (Rentable). 8 Add the fields Area and Name. 5 In the New Schedule dialog box. click the Fields tab. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog box. Using Area Analysis Tools | 733 . select Area Type and click Add.

734 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog box are displayed as column headings within the schedule.9 Click OK.

and roofs. building elements. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. you can specify the view to display massing elements. After you make building elements. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. In this tutorial. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. floors. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. or both. you then need to update the building face. curtain systems. 735 . If you modify a massing face. At any time. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model.Massing 22 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project.

double-click Level 1. 736 | Chapter 22 Massing . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. sweeps.Using Massing Tools In this lesson. click the Training Files icon. You assign the default wall. under Floor Plans. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. click Create Mass. click Lines. 4 On the Design Bar. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. on the Options Bar. and cutting geometry. Open the m_Massing_Start. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. floor. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. roofs. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. 3 Click OK in the Name dialog box to accept the default name Mass 1. and floors. and click 6 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. 5 On the Sketch Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. under Views (all). and click Massing. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. click Open.rvt file located in the Metric folder. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. Adding a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions.

7 On the Design Bar. 12 On the View toolbar. under Constraints. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Reference. 18 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. click the Value for Material. under Materials and Finishes. and click OK. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Materials and Finishes. and then click . Using Massing Tools | 737 . enter 1550 mm for the Offset. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. enter 25000 for Extrusion Start and 27500 for Extrusion End. 23 On the Design Bar. enter 25000 for Extrusion End. click the Value for Material. click Extrusion Properties. and then click . click . click Lines. under Constraints. and click OK. and click OK. double-click Level 1. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box. 9 In the Materials dialog box. click Extrusion Properties. 14 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. 17 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. select Mass (Opaque) for Name. Create next extrusion form 13 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). on the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. and click 16 On the Options Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. select Mass (Transparent) for Name. 21 In the Materials dialog box. 11 On the Design Bar. Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. 15 On the Sketch Design Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box.

double-click West. under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click {3D} to see the results. 26 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). 27 In the Work Plane dialog box. press TAB to highlight the entire face. 28 In the drawing area. The second form is on top of the first form. Sketch the blend base 31 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. and click OK. 29 Click to select the face. highlight the larger form. click Lines. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. under Views (all). select Pick a plane. TIP If necessary. and click on the Options Bar. Continue creation of next massing form 25 In the Project Browser. 30 On the Sketch Design Bar.24 In the Project Browser. 738 | Chapter 22 Massing .

TIP If you do not see this option. 38 Select the arc and the horizontal line. and delete the vertical construction line. and click to select the line start point. Next. click Modify.32 On the Options Bar. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. click . The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. Using Massing Tools | 739 . 39 On the Edit toolbar. 33 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. 34 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. click . click . and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. 36 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. 37 On the Design Bar. 35 On the Options Bar. click the arrow next to the drawing options.

on the Options Bar. 49 In the Element Properties dialog box. . 50 On the Design Bar. click . 740 | Chapter 22 Massing . under Views (all). 43 In the Project Browser. . 48 On the Design Bar. 46 On the Options Bar. 44 On the Design Bar. click Blend Properties. under Elevations (Building Elevation). click Lines and. click 45 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected for Material and that -92000 is specified for Second End. double-click East. click 47 Create an arc as shown. click Edit Top. Sketching the blend top 42 On the Design Bar.40 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. 41 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. 51 On the View toolbar.

1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). double-click Level 1. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 7 Using the same technique. under Floor Plans. 2 In the drawing area. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. m_Massing_Start. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model.52 Proceed to the next exercise. as shown. Using Massing Tools | 741 . click and enter 15000 for Offset. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. place three more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. In the next exercise. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created.rvt. 4 On the Options bar. In this exercise. click Ref Plane. select the mass.

Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. 19 On the File menu. 742 | Chapter 22 Massing . 11 Sketch two additional void extrusions as shown. click . and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. and then click Hidden Line. click and select Chain.When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. snap the corners to the intersections. click Extrusion Properties. on the View Control Bar. click Lines and. enter 12000 for Extrusion End.rvt. 10 Enter SI for intersection snap. 20 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. 14 Under Constraints. specify Mass (Transparent) for Material. click Save As. under Materials and Finishes. on the Options Bar. and 0 for Extrusion Start. 16 On the Design Bar. When sketching each extrusion. In this exercise. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. click Finish Mass. 15 Click OK. click Void Form ➤  Void Extrusion. 18 On the Mass Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. click NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. 12 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 17 On the View toolbar.

18000 mm for Height. and click OK. 7 Click New and enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm for Name. 5 Click New and enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm for Name. and click OK. you opened a mass family file and created three new types of this family file. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 743 . Finally. 11000 mm for Height. enter 15000 mm for Width. under Other. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm for Name. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Massing folder. 8 Enter 46000 mm for Width. and 6000 mm for Depth. 12000 mm for Height. 10 On the File menu. click New. and click Apply. 11 Save the file as Box-Training.rfa. In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. Open Box. click Open. and click Apply. 9 Click OK. and 18000 mm for Depth. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and 9000 mm for Depth.Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. you create new family types from a mass family file. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. 4 In the Family Types dialog box. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. and click OK. 3 In the Name dialog box. and click Apply. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. 6 Enter 68000 mm for Width. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. Creating three new family types 1 On the Design Bar. click Save As. click Family Types.rfa.

Semi Barrel Vault. you load and place the new family types that you created from the previous exercise. 1 If not already selected.rfa. double-click Site. 3 On the View Control Bar. You also load other existing mass families and place them.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. 7 Open the Box-Training. click on the View toolbar to show the massing model. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family.rfa. 10 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family as shown. Open the m_Massing_In-place. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. click Place Mass. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. 9 In the Type Selector. click the Training Files icon. click Open.rfa. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and Triangle. 2 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 744 | Chapter 22 Massing . under Floor Plans.rfa family files. Arc Dome. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog box.rvt file located in the Metric folder. under Views (all). 4 On the File menu. 6 Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Massing folder.

21 In the Type Selector. select the 3 boxes. and click OK twice. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. 19 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. 24 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 13 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. 17 On the Design Bar. select Rotate after placement. and click . 12 Select the box. 16 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family as shown. select the triangle. and click to place the mass. 15 In the Type Selector. click Modify. and click OK twice. click Place Mass. click Modify. 20 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. 22 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 23 Place the cursor in the drawing area.11 On the Design Bar. click Place Mass. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 745 . enter 90 for Angle. 25 On the Design Bar. and click . 18 Press CTRL. 26 In the drawing area.

You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. click Place Mass. In this exercise. 31 Place the box mass family as shown. you join these mass elements. click . 746 | Chapter 22 Massing . and click OK twice. and click OK twice. click Orient ➤ Northeast. 34 On the View toolbar. In the next exercise.27 Select the triangle. 32 Select the box and click . 30 In the Type Selector. 28 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. 29 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click . 35 On the View menu. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed all overlap. 33 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter.

. and then press ESC to see the result. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. NOTE When you join geometry.rvt file.Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. 3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. Dataset ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. you join and modify the mass elements you placed from the previous exercise. 4 Select the triangle. click . Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 747 . Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar.

748 | Chapter 22 Massing . 11 Drag the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection as shown. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. click 8 On the Options Bar. double-click Site. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. click for Axis. enter SM. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. on the Edit toolbar.Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. under Floor Plans.

17 Press ESC to see the result. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. and then select the triangle. you joined mass elements together. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. click . 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 749 . click 14 On the Tools toolbar.12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. . You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. In this exercise.

12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. 8 On the Options Bar. select Rotate after placement. 1 On the Design Bar. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500.rvt. 7 In the Type Selector. Placing semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Project Browser. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. 10 On the Options Bar. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. 3 On the Design Options toolbar. select Sloped (primary). you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. and select the triangle mass element. clear Curved. 2 On the Window menu. and then click OK. click . double-click Site. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass.Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. under Floor Plans. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. 750 | Chapter 22 Massing . under Views (all). 4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog box. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. enter 90 degrees for Angle. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. click Place Mass. click Modify. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely.

click . and click Wireframe. 22 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. 15 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property.13 On the Design Bar. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. Placing arc dome mass elements 17 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 21 In the drawing area. and click Wireframe. and click OK twice. 23 In the Project Browser. and click OK twice. under Views (all). Using Mass Elements with Design Options | 751 . 20 On the Design Bar. click Place Mass. 25 Move the three arc domes to the position shown. 19 Place 3 arc domes as shown. select the three arc domes. double-click North. click Modify. 16 On the View Control Bar. and click . 24 On the View Control Bar. and click . 14 In the drawing area. TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. click Modify. 18 In the Type Selector. click . select the 2 semi barrel vaults. under Elevations.

31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. clear Sloped. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. 752 | Chapter 22 Massing .rvt. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. 30 On the View menu. 35 Click Close and close the warning that displays. 34 In the Design Options dialog box. 29 In the Project Browser. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. double-click {3D}.Create a Design Option set 26 Select the three arc domes and the two semi barrel vaults. 28 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog box. click the Design Options tab. under Views (all). 27 On the Design Options toolbar. and click OK. you placed mass elements into Design Options. 32 Click the value for Design Option. click . select Curved. click Make Primary. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. under Option. click . you can make it the primary option. select Curved from the Design Option menu. In this exercise. and click OK. 36 On the File menu. select Curved and. click Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Design Options toolbar.

and select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. 3 On the View menu. double-click {3D}. click the Training Files icon. under Views (all). Creating walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Wall by Face.rvt file located in the Metric folder. click Orient ➤ Southeast.Brick on CMU. click to show the massing model. 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. Open the m_Massing_Building_Components. select Basic Wall: Exterior .Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 6 On the Options Bar. The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. click . you pick massing faces to create walls. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 753 . 2 On the View toolbar. 5 In the Type Selector.

under Views (all). under Views (all).8 In the Project Browser. click Wall by Face. 12 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. Click Wall by Face. under Views (all). 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. double-click Level 5. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. 15 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 14 In the Project Browser. 754 | Chapter 22 Massing . under Floor Plans. double-click Level 3. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. 16 In the Type Selector. NOTE If a Warning dialog box is displayed. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red.

under Views (all). under Floor Plans. click . you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. click Wall by Face. 21 On the Design Bar. and click Wireframe. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. In this exercise. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. If desired. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. you pick massing faces to create floors. Creating Floors by Picking Faces In this exercise. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 755 .18 Select all the faces shown in red. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. 20 On the View Control Bar. double-click Level 9. 19 In the Project Browser.

click Floor Area Faces. 756 | Chapter 22 Massing . 6 On the Options Bar. select all levels. and Walls. 4 Click OK. and click OK. clear Curtain Panels. double-click {3D}. 3 On the Model Categories tab.rvt. 7 In the Floor Area Faces dialog box. under Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser. Curtain Systems.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. 2 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics.

select Levels 1-4. clear Exclude Options. click Floor Area Faces. 11 In the Floor Area Faces dialog box. 12 On the Options Bar. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 757 . and click OK. click Orient ➤ Northeast.8 On the View menu. and select the three 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. 9 Press CTRL. 10 On the Options Bar.

click . 22 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities. and select the semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. 19 Drag a pick box over the entire model to select all the floor area faces. 758 | Chapter 22 Massing . 14 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Floor Area Faces dialog box. under Views (all). click Create Floors. 16 In the Project Browser. select Level 1. double-click Mass Schedule. under Floor Plans. verify that Select Multiple is selected. 20 On the Options Bar. click Floor Area Faces. double-click Level 1. click Floor by Face.13 Press CTRL. and click OK. 18 On the Options Bar. 21 On the View toolbar. This shows you the gross floor area of each mass. 17 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.

under Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 759 . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. Creating roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. double-click {3D}. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. You then viewed a massing schedule that listed the gross floor area of each mass in the model. click Roof by Face. you created floors by first creating floor area faces and then picking those faces to create floors.In this exercise. you pick massing faces to create roofs.rvt.

10 Repeat these steps to create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. 12 Click the Model Categories tab. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. 760 | Chapter 22 Massing . Your model should now look as shown. click Create Roof.4 In the Type Selector.400mm. click Visibility/Graphics. select Basic Roof : Generic . 8 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. and then click OK. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. 9 On the Options Bar. select Sloped Glazing in the Type Selector. click Create Roof. and Walls. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. 11 On the View menu. 7 With the Roof by Face command still selected. Curtain Systems. select Curtain Panels. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. click Create Roof.

4 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. under Views (all). you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. 3 In the Type Selector. be sure that Select Multiple is selected. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. double-click {3D}. 5 Press CTRL. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. click Curtain System by Face. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 761 . select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm.In this exercise.

6 On the Options Bar. 762 | Chapter 22 Massing . 7 Repeat the same steps for the two other domes. click Create System.

In this exercise. 10 Click Modify to exit the command. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. select the blended form on the in-place mass. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces.8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 763 . Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. click Create System. 9 On the Options Bar.

click OK. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Views (all). 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. and then click OK. 3 On the Model Categories tab. click Duplicate. Roofs. and click OK. enter 30000 for Width. clear Curtain Panels.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. and Walls. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. Next. Floors. 4 Select the box mass family as shown and click . double-click Site. 764 | Chapter 22 Massing . you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. and click OK. under Floor Plans. Curtain Systems. click Visibility/Graphics. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. 2 On the View menu. 7 Enter Larger Size for Name.

10 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 765 . clear Exclude Options. 11 On the Options Bar. 14 Open the 3D view to see the result. 13 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. 12 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family.

click . click OK. In the next steps. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. click Remake. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. 18 In the Exclude Hosts dialog box. 19 On the View toolbar. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. 17 On the Options Bar. 16 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the three walls shown. 766 | Chapter 22 Massing . Also. TIP To select the curtain wall. under Floor Plans. 15 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). double-click Level 1. you want to select the smaller one.The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family.

Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 767 . you will notice that Revit Building resized the floors. 20 Select the roof as shown. 21 On the Options Bar. click Remake.TIP If you temporarily hide one of the resized walls.

1 Open the 3D view.22 Select the arc dome curtain system. you changed the size of an existing mass family. and click Remake. Turn off massing 2 Click on the View toolbar to turn off massing. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 768 | Chapter 22 Massing . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise.rvt. The 3D view now shows only the building shell. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. In this exercise. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements.

Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 769 . 6 On the Model Categories tab. 4 Rename the view 3D . such as columns and an extruded roof. This concludes the massing tutorial. you can continue adding additional Revit modeling components. and click OK. 8 Click None to clear the selection. 7 Clear one of the check boxes. click Visibility/Graphics. You might create the model shown. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model.Massing only. click All to select all categories. In this exercise. 3 In the Project Browser. to the building shell.Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. 5 On the View menu. If desired. and click Duplicate. right-click on the 3D view. 9 Select Mass.

770 | Chapter 22 Massing .

771 . you use the site tools in Autodesk Revit Building to add and modify site components within a project.Site 23 In this tutorial.

you add a building pad to the site. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. click the Training Files icon. islands. You add property lines manually. In the second part of this exercise. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. 5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. expand Views (all). 4 On the Options Bar. In the final exercises. convert the data to a table. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. and click Site. click Toposurface. 3 On the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. and walkways. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you create a toposurface using two different methods. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. and then modify the data. and double-click Site. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. This project file was created using the default metric template. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. click Point. Open the m_First_Project. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm.Using Site Tools In this lesson. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. click Open. 772 | Chapter 23 Site . The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. Using the first method. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.rvt file located in the Metric folder.

A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. Using Site Tools | 773 .6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. 8 On the Options Bar. enter an absolute elevation of 6000 mm. Use the following illustration as a reference. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000 mm elevation points inside the 3000 mm contour. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide.

14 On the View toolbar. and click OK. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. 774 | Chapter 23 Site . under Increment. enter 1500 mm. under Additional Contours. 15 On the View Control Bar. 13 In the Site Settings dialog box. 11 On the Design Bar. 15000 mm. and 18000 mm absolute elevations. and click Shading with Edges. 12000 mm. Use the following illustration as a reference. This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. click Model Graphics Style. click Finish Surface. click Site Settings. 12 On the Settings menu. click .10 Repeat the previous step for 9000 mm.

click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click the Training Files icon. rename the level Base Site Elevation. under Views (all). DXF. Using Site Tools | 775 . and press ENTER. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. click the elevation value. Click Open. on the Standard toolbar. under Views (all). Under Import or Link. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. and click OK. Before importing the contour data. click Yes. click Modify. 25 On the File menu. SAT. 23 Click the Level 1 text. 21 Click the Level 2 text. rename the level Basement. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. 18 In the Project Browser. Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. click Import/Link ➤ DWG. select Preserve colors. double-click Site. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog box. and press ENTER. click Modify. 24 In the Project Browser. click to delete it. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). under Floor Plans. 19 On the Design Bar. Until it is exploded. and press ENTER. 26 In the Import/Link dialog box: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. enter 1000 mm. 29 Select the imported topography. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. Under Layer/Level Colors. DGN. it is considered an import symbol. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. modify the level names and elevations. 28 On the Design Bar.16 On the View toolbar. and double-click South. select Current view only and choose Select for Layers.

click Visibility/Graphics. and then click OK. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. 34 Under Visibility. When you select the import symbol. when the edges highlight. click Modify. clear C_INDX. click Pin Position.30 On the Edit menu. click the Annotations Categories tab. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. and click OK. clear Elevations. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. 32 On the View menu. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. click Toposurface. 31 On the Design Bar. 776 | Chapter 23 Site . select it. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog box. 36 On the Design Bar. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved.

you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. name the project Site-in progress.39 On the Design Bar. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Using the second method. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click Save As. and click Save. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. Using the first method. click . 42 On the View toolbar. 40 On the View toolbar. this project file is required in its current state. Adding Property Lines. Using Site Tools | 777 . you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data.rvt. click Finish Surface. you add property lines using two methods. Notice the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. 43 On the File menu.

sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. double-click Site.rvt. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog box. If you have not completed the previous exercise. 4 On the Design Bar. click Lines. Site-in progress.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. add an arc line on the right. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. Select and delete the right vertical line. click Property Line. Using the 3-point Arc tool. On the Design Bar. 778 | Chapter 23 Site . click Lines. Click Modify. select Create property lines by sketching. do so before continuing. under Floor Plans. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. 6 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. click Finish Sketch. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes.

select Edit Table. 10 In the Property Lines dialog box. when they highlight. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog box depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. A warning dialog box is displayed.7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. and click OK. 15 Starting in Row #1. on the Standard toolbar. to delete them. click OK. select the lines. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog box. click OK. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. 14 In the Property Lines dialog box. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Using Site Tools | 779 . click Property Line. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. 8 On the Options Bar. 9 In the warning dialog box. click 12 On the Design Bar.

Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. click to place it. This means there is no gap in the property lines. open the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Annotations folder. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. click Tag. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. 27 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click the Imported Categories tab. 780 | Chapter 23 Site . scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. right-click in the Design Bar. 30 Tag the three remaining property lines. click Model Graphics Style. If the gap is not closed. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. click Visibility/Graphics. 16 Click OK. and click Drafting. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog box.rfa and click Open. click to place the property lines. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor.dwg and click OK. 19 In the Tags dialog box. clear Leader. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. and click OK. 23 In the Tags dialog box. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 24 On the View menu. and click Shading with Edges. and open the folder. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. 26 Under Visibility. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.Notice that after you complete the last line. 28 On the Options Bar. 20 Click Load. 31 On the View Control Bar. Before adding property line segment tags. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. 22 Select M_Property Line Tag. 29 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. The tags display more prominently in this view. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. click Training Files.

you modify site settings and contour line visibility. 2 On the Settings menu. click New. In this exercise. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. this project file is required in its current state. In the final step. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. you created two sets of property lines. click Save. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog box. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. In the next exercise. enter the name Working Contour. click Model Graphics Style. Using Site Tools | 781 . Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. In the Object Styles dialog box. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings. Site-in progress. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. verify that it is a subcategory of Topography.rvt. click Object Styles. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.32 On the File menu. and click Wireframe. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog box. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK.

Under Range Type. 9 In the Site Settings dialog box. 11 Click OK. In this exercise. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. 13 Proceed to the next exercise.0 mm. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. Under Subcategory. Under Line Color. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. 12 On the File menu. enter 1000. The object style subcategory. specify an interval of 1000 mm passing through elevation 0. click Site Settings. select Single Value. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. 7 Click OK.6 In the Object Styles dialog box. select Dash dot. click Close. Creating Topographic Subregions. Working Contour. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. Under Line Pattern. 10 Under Additional Contours. select a shade of Brown. 782 | Chapter 23 Site . displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. select Working Contour. under Contour Line Display. The next exercise requires a new dataset. you created a new object style subcategory for topography.

and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. click the Training Files icon. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. try to replicate the location and proportion. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. you create subregions in order to define roads. Open the m_Site. click Subregion. you create topographic subregions to define roads. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. click Lines.In the next exercise. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. NOTE In the Metric dataset. Although the exact dimensions are not important. parking areas. Using Site Tools | 783 . click Open. and islands.rvt file located in the Metric folder. 2 On the Design Bar. parking areas. and islands. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. such as material. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles.

click Shading with Edges. select Site . under Materials and Finishes. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter Parking for Name. expand Schedules/Quantities. and click OK. When you finish the sketch in a later step. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar.Tarmacadam. 784 | Chapter 23 Site .Tarmacadam for Name. under Identity Data. and double-click Topography Schedule. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. 9 On the View menu. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . click the Value for Material. 8 On the Design Bar. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog box. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. click Finish Sketch.Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. and click OK. click Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. 6 In the Materials dialog box.

double-click Topography Schedule. double-click Site.NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. double-click Site. As you create new subregions. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. under Floor Plans. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. click Lines. Using Site Tools | 785 . Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. 21 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 14 On the Options Bar. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. and click Hidden Line. In this training project. 16 On the Design Bar. Delete overlapping lines. and click Shading with Edges. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. click Subregion. 18 In the Project Browser. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. Notice that the project area has increased. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. click Model Graphics Style. they display within this schedule. 12 On the View Control Bar. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. click Model Graphics Style. 17 On the View Control Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. 20 On the Design Bar. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. Within each subregion. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. click Edit Boundary. 22 In the upper-right parking area.

Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. Name each region Island . select Site .Grass. under Identity Data. and click OK. and click OK. You must sketch each region separately. 29 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. and apply the material Site . 786 | Chapter 23 Site . 26 In the Element Properties dialog box. 28 In the Project Browser. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. 24 In the Element Properties dialog box. click the Value for Material.Grass for Name.Grass for Name. 25 In the Materials dialog box. under Schedules/Quantities.23 On the Design Bar. enter Island . click Properties. double-click Topography Schedule. under Materials and Finishes. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog box. click Finish Sketch. under Floor Plans.Grass. 27 On the Design Bar.

WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. 35 On the Design Bar. double-click Topography Schedule. under Schedules/Quantities. click Finish Sketch. under Floor Plans. click Subregion. double-click Site. and apply the material Concrete . 34 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. click Lines.Cast-in-Situ Concrete .30 In the Project Browser. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. Name the subregion Walkway.walkway. 32 On the Design Bar. 33 On the Design Bar. Notice that the schedule has been updated. Add the concrete walkway 31 In the Project Browser. Using Site Tools | 787 .

When you use the grading tool. under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Topography Schedule. this project file is required in its current state. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Grading the Toposurface. there is still only one toposurface. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. 788 | Chapter 23 Site . Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. 37 On the File menu. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice that the schedule has been updated. 38 Navigate to your preferred folder. click Save As. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion.rvt. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. 36 In the Project Browser. and click Save.

under Floor Plans. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. 7 In the Graded Region dialog box.Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. click Graded Region. Using Site Tools | 789 . and click OK. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. click . 2 Select the toposurface. and click Select and Edit. double-click Site. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. under Phasing. Using Phasing. select Existing for Phase Created. 6 On the Design Bar. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. A warning dialog box is displayed. 8 Select the topographic surface. 5 On the Design Bar. select Copy Internal Points. see the tutorial. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. 3 On the Options Bar.

Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. 790 | Chapter 23 Site . Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. 10 Press DELETE. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. and new. demolished.

Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. and click Hidden Line. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. Using Site Tools | 791 . click Point.11 On the View Control Bar. 13 Press DELETE. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. click Model Graphics Style. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. 15 On the Options Bar.

The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display.17 On the Design Bar. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. click . click . 18 On the View toolbar. 19 On the View Control Bar. click View Properties. click Finish Surface. click Model Graphics Style. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. and click Shading with Edges. 792 | Chapter 23 Site . 20 On the View toolbar.

because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. double-click Site. When you add a building pad. specify New Construction for Phase. under Phasing. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. 3 On the Design Bar. only the original toposurface displays. 26 On the File menu. specify Existing for Phase. click Lines. click View Properties. 4 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. this project file is required in its current state. Therefore. Only the graded topography displays.22 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Pad. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Using Site Tools | 793 . and click OK. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. click Save. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. NOTE By default. and click OK.rvt. under Phasing. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. Adding a Building Pad. under Floor Plans. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. you can delete it. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. you create a building pad. the Pick Walls command is active. 25 In the Element Properties dialog box. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. 23 Select the toposurface. 24 On the View menu. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and delete it. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. Site tutorial-in progress. If you have an existing building model.

6 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style.5 On the Design Bar. 7 On the View toolbar. click 8 On the View toolbar. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click pad. . click Finish Sketch. Notice the new building 794 | Chapter 23 Site . . and click Shading with Edges.

5 On the Design Bar. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and select the parking space. click Parking Component. Using Site Tools | 795 .9 On the File menu. NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Adding Site Components.90 deg. click Save.rvt. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. click Modify. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. this project file is required in its current state. 3 In the Type Selector. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Site tutorial-in progress. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Adding Site Components In this exercise. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area.

and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. under Floor Plans. choose any tree type. 12 In the Type Selector. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. click spaces. . double-click Site. click 9 On the View toolbar. . 796 | Chapter 23 Site . 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Notice the new parking Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. 8 On the View toolbar. click Site Component.7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space.

Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface.13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. click . 14 On the View toolbar. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Using Site Tools | 797 . 15 On the View toolbar. click .

the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. Tagging Site and Parking Components. click Save. double-click Site. click Apply. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. under Floor Plans. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. and click OK. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. click Hidden Line. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. 798 | Chapter 23 Site . this project file is required in its current state.NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. click Tag All Not Tagged. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. 16 On the File menu. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. In the following illustration. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise.rvt. Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. In the following exercise. 5 On the View menu. and click Apply. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. Site tutorial-in progress.

2 In the New Schedule dialog box. select Mark. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. and click Add. 8 Under Fields. 5 Under Available fields. select Type. 7 On the File menu. select Parking for Category. and under Heading. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter Size. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 Click the Formatting tab. Site tutorial-in progress. and click Add. Creating Parking Space Schedules.rvt. If necessary. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. select Type. you create a parking schedule. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. select Mark.NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. and click OK. Using Site Tools | 799 . The parking schedule is displayed. and under Heading. click the Fields tab. this project file is required in its current state. enter Space. 4 Under Available fields. click Schedule/Quantities. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. and click OK. 7 Under Fields. click Save.

under Views (all). finish numbering the remaining spaces. under Space. 15 On the File menu. 10 In the Project Browser. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. under Space. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. double-click Site. 11 On the Window menu. click Close Hidden Windows. number the first three spaces consecutively. under Floor Plans. 12 In the Site plan. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. click Save. Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. 13 In the Parking Schedule. 800 | Chapter 23 Site .9 On the Window menu. click Tile. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. 14 In the Parking Schedule.

and then you create a group for a typical toilet room that is nested within the guest room group. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. and modify repetitive units. place. or with those working on a different project. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. you also simplify the modification process. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. you create a model group for a typical hotel guest room. all instances in the building model are updated. For example. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create.Grouping 24 Using the grouping functionality in Autodesk Revit Building. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. By grouping objects. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. you not only simplify their placement. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. 801 . You can also nest groups within other groups. In this tutorial.

and click Rename. Create a group from drawing objects 4 Press and hold CTRL. expand Floor Plans. Creating a Group In this exercise. 802 | Chapter 24 Grouping . and press ENTER. and typical office layouts. click the Training Files icon. 5 On the Edit toolbar. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and click Save. chair. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity.Creating Groups In this lesson. expand Groups. Placing a Group. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. you create a model group for a typical hotel room. click Save As. 8 Enter Typical guest room. 10 Navigate to your preferred directory. and two nightstands. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include hotel rooms. classrooms. Open the m_Grouping. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. click . and double-click Level 2. 7 Right-click Group 1. and select the bed.rvt file located in the Metric folder. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. Specify a view 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser.rvt. name the file Grouping-in progress. and expand Model. After you create a model group. desk. expand Views (all). click Open. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. 9 On the File menu. You zoom in so that you can select objects in the room accurately. The view is zoomed in to the selected room. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 Enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. 3 Draw a rectangle around the populated room.

Creating Groups | 803 . Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. 4 Snap the origin to the wall intersection below the entry door. click Finish.Placing a Group In this exercise. You also mirror an existing instance of a group. Mirror a group 6 In the drawing area. 7 On the Edit toolbar. using an adjacent wall as the axis of reflection. Modify the origin of a group 1 In the drawing area. 5 On the Options Bar. select the group. 8 Select the wall abutted by the desk and tub of the original instance as the axis of reflection. as shown. Drag a group into position 3 In the Project Browser. select Typical guest room and drag it to the room below the original instance of the group. 2 Drag the group origin to the wall intersection directly below the entry door. you use drag and drop functionality to place a new instance of a group in the floor plan.rvt. select the original instance of the group. A second instance of the group is added to the drawing. Grouping-in progress. click .

Grouping-in progress. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. 9 On the File menu. click Save. click Edit Group. as shown. you make changes to a single instance of a group.rvt. select the mirrored instance of the Typical guest room group. Modifying a Group. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. When you finish the editing routine. 2 On the Options Bar. 1 In the drawing area. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. Modifying a Group In this exercise.You should now have three instances of the Typical guest room group in your model: two with the original orientation and one mirrored. 804 | Chapter 24 Grouping .

and is contained in every new instance of the host group that you place in the building model. 7 On the Design Bar. This ensures that the modifications are propagated when each new instance of the host group is added to the building model and also when each stand-alone instance of the nested group is added. 3 Press and hold CTRL. 8 On the File menu. The new group is considered nested within the host group. you create a group that you add to a previously created group. 4 On the Edit toolbar.The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. and select the desk and chair. All other elements in the model are grayed out. When you make changes to a nested group. 6 Click the exterior wall as the move end point. click Save. All instances of the Typical guest room are updated to reflect the change. 5 Click near the left edge of the desk as the move start point. Creating Nested Groups. click . 9 Proceed to the next lesson. click Finish Group. the host group is also updated. Creating Nested Groups In this lesson. The edge of the desk is aligned with the exterior wall. Creating Nested Groups | 805 .

rvt. you create a group for a toilet room that you add to the guest room group. 806 | Chapter 24 Grouping . and press ENTER. and click Rename. right-click Group 1. select all the elements that make up the toilet room and closet. and the wall separating the bathroom and closet. When you nest the toilet room in the guest room. Change the origin of a group 5 Select the original instance of Typical guest room. Create a group 1 In the original instance of the Typical guest room group. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. In the selection. expand Model. Grouping-in progress. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. 2 On the Edit toolbar. The new group is then nested within the original group. expand Groups. 6 Drag the origin of the group to the intersection of the corridor wall and the guest room wall nearest the tub. click . 4 Enter Typical toilet room.Creating a Nested Group In this exercise. 3 In the Project Browser. make sure you also include both doors and their host walls. which acts as the host.

2 In the Type Selector. click Edit Group. verify that Multiple is clear. you add a component to a single instance of the nested toilet room group. Because the modified group is nested. Grouping-in progress. Add a component to the model 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. When you edit the group to add the component. all instances of the nested group are updated in the building model. click Add To Group. Modifying a Nested Group In this exercise. 9 On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Component. click Save. 11 On the Design Bar. place the cursor over one of the toilet rooms and press the spacebar three times to rotate the sink to the orientation shown. everything else is available for selection. click Finish Group. The Typical toilet room group is nested in the Typical guest room group.rvt. 12 On the File menu. 8 On the Design Bar. select the Typical toilet room group. The elements of the group are grayed out in every instance. select m_Pedestal_Sink-3D. 3 In the drawing area. 10 In the drawing area. Modifying a Nested Group. Creating Nested Groups | 807 . and all instances are updated to include the nested group. 13 Proceed to the next exercise.Create a nested group 7 On the Options Bar. the host group is also updated so that new instances of either group contain the new component.

7 Press TAB. and select the nested toilet room group. 11 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. click Finish Group. Edit a nested group 6 Move the cursor over the same instance of the toilet room group in which you placed the sink. click Modify. 10 In the drawing area. 808 | Chapter 24 Grouping . click Edit Group. 5 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. click Add To Group.4 Place the sink on the wall with the toilet in any instance of the Typical toilet room. select the sink.

You then customize the new group for use in the current building model. Working with Groups.rvt. and click Rename. Use Project Browser to duplicate a group 1 In the Project Browser. You create a group based on an existing group by using the Duplicate command. Working with Groups In this lesson. and press ENTER. you draw an axis of reflection at the midpoint of the building model so that the group is mirrored from its location at the top of the building model to a location at the bottom. You then place the new group in the building model. you add door tags to a group. You also create a detail group in the level 2 floor plan that you add to the building model in a different floor plan view. click Save. and customize it so that it fits in the available space and has the correct group nested within it. After you finish the modified group. having created a group that represents a typical layout. 12 On the File menu. A new group definition (Typical guest room 2) is displayed in the Project Browser. Grouping-in progress. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. and click Duplicate. When you load the group from the library into a new project. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. In subsequent exercises. under Groups. 2 Right-click Typical guest room 2. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups. you use the Duplicate command to create a group based on an existing group. Working with Groups | 809 . but automatically create a new group as part of the process to fix the group. and then save the tags as an attached detail group. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. you save it to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. 3 Enter Corner guest room.All instances of the nested group are updated with the change. You use functionality that allows you to not only fix inconsistencies among instances of a group. right-click Typical guest room. Duplicating a Group In this exercise. Lastly.

to specify the group origin. and press DELETE. where the corridor wall and the exterior wall intersect. click Finish. and select the desk and chair. and drag it into the corner guest room. click Edit Group. Nest a group 17 In the Project Browser. select the Corner guest room group. click Finish Group. select Corner toilet room. 5 Click at the upper-right corner of the room. 12 Move the desk and chair so that they are within the room. Edit a duplicated group 8 In the drawing area. 6 On the Options Bar. 10 Press and hold CTRL. click Remove From Group. Notice that the desk overlaps the exterior wall.Place a duplicated group 4 Drag Corner guest room from the Project Browser to the vacant room in the northwest corner of the building. 11 On the Edit toolbar. 13 On the Design Bar. 810 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 14 Select the toilet room. This is because the corner room is smaller than the interior rooms. click OK. 9 On the Options Bar. 7 After a warning message displays. 15 On the Design Bar. 16 Select the same toilet room group. click .

click . 19 In the drawing area. 27 Click the midpoint of the corridor wall as the start point of the axis of reflection as shown. 18 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Design Bar. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. 23 On the Design Bar. for Axis. past the exterior wall. click Save. staying perpendicular to the corridor wall. 25 On the Edit toolbar. click Add To Group. Creating a Detail Group. enter SM on your keyboard to limit snaps to midpoints. and click to specify the end point.Use the inside corner of the exterior wall and the corridor wall as the origin of the group. select the Corner toilet room group. A new instance of the Corner guest room group is added to the southwest corner of the building model. click Unjoin Elements to resolve the errors. 22 In the drawing area. 20 On the Options Bar. 29 On the File menu. select the Corner guest room group. TIP If a warning appears indicating that there are errors that cannot be ignored. 28 Drag the cursor to the left. TIP To help find the midpoint of the wall. Working with Groups | 811 . select the Corner guest room group. click 26 On the Options Bar. click Edit Group. click Finish to finish placing the group. Mirror along a drawn axis of reflection 24 In the drawing area. click Finish Group.

Grouping-in progress. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. Draw a filled region 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and select a point on the interior of the vertical wall. 8 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. 2 On the Options Bar. click Filled Region. 9 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. and click Modify on the Design Bar.rvt. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. click Finish Sketch. click Text. 5 On the Design Bar. 4 Move the cursor down and to the right. 7 On the Options Bar. 812 | Chapter 24 Grouping . Add a text note 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. 10 Enter Tile. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. click to add an arc leader. click to draw a rectangular region. 3 Click the lower-left endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle.

and select the note and the filled region. under Floor Plans. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. 14 Right-click Group 1. under Floor Plans. click Tag. double-click Level 3. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. and expand Detail. 3 On the Options Bar. as shown. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. you add door tags to the Typical toilet room group. expand Groups. and click Rename. 15 Enter Elevator lobby tile. clear Leader.Create a detail group 11 Press and hold CTRL. 13 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. click .rvt. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Add a group instance to a different drawing view 18 In the Project Browser. Using Attached Detail Groups. Modify a group origin 16 In the drawing area. Working with Groups | 813 . double-click Level 2. Grouping-in progress. 4 Place two door tags in the original instance of the Typical toilet room. you must manually attach it to each instance of the Typical toilet room group. 12 On the Edit toolbar. click Save. 19 Drag an instance of the Elevator lobby tile group from the Project Browser into the level 3 view. 20 On the File menu. it cannot be added to a group in the same manner that a drawing component can be added. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. as shown. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Because the detail group contains variables. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser.

A warning dialog box is displayed. click . and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser. 9 Right-click Group 1. and expand Typical toilet room. select Door tags. 7 On the Edit toolbar. 10 Enter Door tags. informing you that an attached detail group has been created for the Typical toilet room group.5 On the Design Bar. 814 | Chapter 24 Grouping . expand Attached Detail. 13 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog box. 12 On the Options Bar. press TAB. and select the two door tags. and select the nested Typical toilet room group. The new instance of the attached detail group is added at the same relative position and orientation as in the original instance of the model group. expand Groups. click Modify. click Place Detail. press and hold CTRL. and click Rename. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. and press ENTER. Place a detail group in another group instance 11 Move the cursor over the Typical toilet room group. (this group is just below the original instance of the Typical guest room group).

14 On the File menu. 5 In the New Project dialog box.NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. under Template file.rvt. as shown. click to draw a square. and then drag the cursor so that all the walls in the square are 6000 mm long. Place an instance of the loaded group 12 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon. ■ ■ ■ In the New Project dialog box. click Save. click Load from Library ➤ Load Group. 6 On the File menu. 11 In the drawing area. and click Open. click Save to Library ➤ Save Group. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. select Typical toilet room. navigate to the directory where you saved the group. Working with Groups | 815 . Grouping-in progress. click OK. Sketch walls 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Typical toilet room for Group To Save.rte file located in the Metric folder. 2 In the Save Group dialog box. 3 Click Save. click Browse. click OK. click New ➤ Project.rvg. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. Save a group to a library 1 On the File menu. 10 On the Options Bar. and click Open. NOTE Groups containing nested groups cannot be saved. Load the group in a new project 4 On the File menu. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. and expand Model. and place it in the upper-right corner of the square. Saving and Loading Groups. drag it into the drawing area. click to specify the start point of the square. click Wall. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. therefore. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. Select the m_Tutorial_Default. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. expand Groups. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog box. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. 13 Select Typical toilet room. 7 In the Load Group dialog box. 15 Proceed to the next exercise.

3 Select the wall shared by the toilet and the sink as the axis of reflection. except for the wall-hosted component for which there is no wall. Automatically Creating a Group. 15 On the File menu.IMPORTANT Be sure to line up the outline of the group with the exterior surface of the walls. so it is important to place the group accurately in order to use the walls you sketched. Automatically Creating a Group In this exercise. Because one of the wall-hosted components in the group does not have a wall in the mirrored group. 14 On the Options Bar. select the instance of Typical toilet room. 1 In the drawing area. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. 816 | Chapter 24 Grouping . click . the software gives you the option of fixing the inconsistency by creating a new group. The Typical toilet room model group is added to the new project. The toilet and the tub are wall-hosted components whose hosts are not part of the group. The new group is created automatically and contains the same components as the existing group. and click Save. 2 On the Edit toolbar. click Finish. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. you mirror the instance of the Typical toilet room group you added to the new project in the previous exercise. Loaded_Group. 16 Enter Loaded_Group for File name. click Save.

and click OK. Working with Groups | 817 .Because there is no wall to host the tub in the mirrored instance. click Create new group types. a warning dialog box is displayed. click Close. and a new group (Typical toilet room 2) is created. 7 On the File menu. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. 5 In the Fix Inconsistent Groups dialog box. click Modify. click Fix Groups. 6 On the Design Bar. The tub component is not included in the new group because there is no wall to host it. The Typical toilet room model group is mirrored. 4 In the warning dialog box.

818 | Chapter 24 Grouping .

columns. After completing level 1. you create framing elevations and add structural braces to the building model. 819 . You begin by adding the structural walls. and beams to Level 1.Structural 25 In this tutorial. you copy the entire structure and use the paste-align command to add the structure to the three levels above it. you use the structural tools in Autodesk Revit Building to create a building model skeleton. In the final lesson.

Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you add structural walls to a project file where only the grid lines have been added. Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. You use an imported DWG file as an underlay to trace the initial outline of the structural walls. click Open.Adding Structural Walls In this lesson.rvt file located in the Metric folder. The DWG file contains walls that you trace in the next exercise to create the structural walls. You then sketch additional walls to which you add dimensions and constraints. 820 | Chapter 25 Structural . click the Training Files icon. you import a DWG file into the Level 2 floor plan. Open the m_Structural.

Import the DWG file 1 Before importing the DWG file. 4 In the Import/Link dialog box. 7 Click Open. Adding Structural Walls | 821 . 2 On the File menu. In this exercise. verify that the Level 2 floor plan is open. If necessary. The DWG file is displayed on the Level 2 floor plan.rvt. you use the linked DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. DXF. Select Current view only. expand Views (all). Sketching Structural Walls. expand Floor Plans. click Save As. DGN. select Automatically place. After you trace the walls. and double-click Level 2. go to the Project Browser. Sketching Structural Walls In this exercise. you imported a DWG file. SAT. 9 Navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project as Structural_tutorial. 5 Under Layer/Level Colors. and add the remaining structural walls to the building model. This project file is required for all subsequent exercises in this tutorial. click the Training Files icon. to trace the initial set of structural walls. This file is used in the next exercise.dwg from the Metric folder. 6 Under Positioning. and select m_wall-import. click Import/Link ➤ DWG. you turn off the visibility of the DWG file. Select All for Layers. select Invert colors. 8 On the File menu. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Link (instead of import). 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog box. under Import or Link. and select Origin to origin.

5 In the Type Selector. Sketch structural walls by tracing the DWG 2 On the View menu. 822 | Chapter 25 Structural . select Basic Wall: Generic .Dataset This exercise requires the project file. and click Structural. rather than the height. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. First. Display the Structural tab of the Design Bar 1 If the Structural tab already displays on the Design Bar. In addition.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. This requires the bottom of the primary view range to be set to the level below in order to see the walls as you sketch them. Right-click the Design Bar. Structural_tutorial. you can add a structural wall by specifying the depth of the wall. Structural walls differ from non-structural walls in several ways. 3 Draw a zoom region around the upper set of lines. 4 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. proceed to Step 2. click Structural Wall. their Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Bearing.200mm.

7 Begin the first wall by selecting the intersection of the upper left corner of the line chain. you sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. ■ ■ ■ Select Chain. In the steps that follow. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Depth. Click . and click the next line intersection. 10 Move the cursor to the right. and click to specify the wall endpoint. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. and click to specify the next wall endpoint. Adding Structural Walls | 823 . 8 Move the cursor over the top right intersection of the line.6 On the Options Bar. 9 Move the cursor downward to the next line intersection. Specify Level 1.

expand Views (all). 13 On the View toolbar. in the View toolbar. 12 On the Design Bar. 824 | Chapter 25 Structural . and double-click Level 2. 15 Zoom around the second chain of lines. click Modify to finish the sketch. TIP If necessary. expand Floor Plans. you can spin the model in a 3D view by clicking the 3D view. Use the tools to modify 14 In the Project Browser. and click to complete the chain of walls. click .11 Move the cursor to the top of the line chain until a reference plane displays indicating the cursor is on a parallel plane with the slanted wall on the left.

Adding Structural Walls | 825 . click . On the Options Bar.16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Structural Wall. ■ ■ 18 On the Design Bar. 17 Using the bulleted steps below. Click each exterior line intersection in a clockwise direction. notice that the wall options you used previously are still selected. click Modify to end the wall chain. you may want to zoom in to ensure you select the intersection of the imported lines and grid C. 19 On the View toolbar. When you reach the endpoint on the lower right corner of the chain. ■ Begin the wall chain by clicking the lower left intersection where the end of the line chain adjoins grid C. sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration.

Move the cursor upward and specify an arc radius of 180 degrees. 21 On the View menu. click the Imported Categories tab. Sketch additional structural walls 24 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 22 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 26 On the Options Bar. select Basic Wall: Generic . specify the following: ■ ■ Clear Chain. click Structural Wall. click . This is the right extent of the arc.Turn off the DWG visibility 20 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2. and click OK. Select the right endpoint of the horizontal wall. 23 Under Visibility. clear m_wall-import. Select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. This is the left extent of the arc. click Visibility/Graphics.dwg. ■ ■ ■ Select the endpoint of the left vertical wall. 28 On the Options Bar. Unselected categories are not visible in the referenced view. 826 | Chapter 25 Structural . 25 In the Type Selector. ■ 27 Follow the sequence of steps in the illustration below to add a 180 degree three point arc. Click to create a three-point arc.200mm.

If it is not. Adding Structural Walls | 827 .29 Add a horizontal wall beginning at the midpoint of the left vertical wall as shown. 30 Move the cursor to the right until it intersects with the slanted wall on the right. 33 Select the vertical wall you added in the previous step and make sure the temporary dimension between the wall and the centerline of the left vertical wall is equal to 1500 mm. and press ENTER. click Modify. enter 1500. click the value. 31 Add a vertical wall between the two horizontal walls as shown. 32 On the Design Bar.

35 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. 36 On the Design Bar. click Structural Wall and on the Options Bar. Both walls are 1200 mm long. 828 | Chapter 25 Structural .34 Select the lower horizontal wall. and press ENTER. Create the final structural walls 37 Begin the first wall on the endpoint shown in the illustration below. In the steps that follow. enter 1500. you create the final structural walls for the project. clear Chain. click the temporary dimension value between it and grid C.

41 On the View toolbar. 40 On the Design Bar.38 Draw the 1200 mm wall parallel to the adjoining wall as shown. click Modify. 39 Create an additional 1200 mm wall as shown. Begin the wall at the top of the right vertical wall and draw it inward so that it is parallel with the wall you sketched in the previous steps. Adding Structural Walls | 829 . click .

After turning off the visibility of the linked DWG. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. 830 | Chapter 25 Structural . Dimensioning and Modifying Walls. In the next exercise. you dimension the structural walls and add an equality constraint to the dimension to keep the walls equidistant. you used the DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you add dimensions and equality constraints to the walls. Add an aligned dimension 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. click Save. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls In this exercise. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. In this exercise. Structural_tutorial. you added the remaining structural walls required for this building model. You also reposition the walls to see how they adapt to changes in the design. double-click Level 2. 2 Zoom around the lower set of walls. in its current state. This project file is required.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. You then make minor modifications to their position.42 On the File menu. click Dimension.

the Options button becomes available. click Options to specify the wall pick options. On the Options Bar.4 On the Options Bar. Select Wall Centerlines for Prefer. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select . and click OK. Adding Structural Walls | 831 . and when it highlights. In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box. 8 Select the dimension you added in the previous steps. and click to place the dimension as shown. After you select Entire Walls. 6 Move the cursor to the left. select it. ■ ■ 5 Move the cursor over the left vertical wall. click Modify. Create an equality constraint 7 On the Design Bar. Select Entire Walls for Pick. select Intersecting Walls.

832 | Chapter 25 Structural .9 Click the EQ symbol to make each of the segments equal. and enter 4000 for the distance between the wall centerline and grid B. Modify wall position 10 Select the upper horizontal wall as shown. 11 Click the temporary dimension value.

Adding Structural Columns and Beams In this lesson. click Save. click Undo Edit dimension length. joists. you add structural columns and different beam types to the building model. In the next lesson. you add structural columns.Notice the horizontal walls remain equally spaced. several different beam types. to continue with the next lesson in this tutorial. 13 On the File menu. Adding Structural Columns and Beams. This project file is required. In this exercise. 12 On the Edit menu. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 833 . and purlins to complete the Level 1 structure. You also repositioned the walls and observed how they adapted to the change in the design. in its current state. you added a dimension to the structural walls and used an equality constraint to keep the walls equidistant.

2 On the View menu. 4 In the Type Selector. press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column. you use the grid intersection tool. and you place a column outside of the grids. double-click Level 1. In addition. you use several different methods to add structural columns: you manually select grid intersections. select M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80. 834 | Chapter 25 Structural . zoom in to place the column. Add columns to grid intersections manually 1 In the Project Browser. and Level 2. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. If necessary. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. select Height. Structural_tutorial.Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. if the column orientation is not similar to the callout shown below. 6 Add a column to C1 as shown. under Floor Plans. you rotate columns by pressing the SPACEBAR when necessary. 5 On the Options Bar. TIP When adding the column. click Structural Column.

and select grids 1-5. This option allows you to place columns at the intersections of selected column grids.7 Add similar columns to C2. and A. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 835 . TIP To create the crossing selection. C3. and C5. and drag your cursor up and to the left as shown below. specify a point under grid A and to the right of grid 5. click Grid Intersection. 9 Use a crossing selection. Add columns using selected grid intersections 8 On the Options Bar.

Columns A3-5 are shown below. zoom out until you can see all the grids. This completes this set of columns. 836 | Chapter 25 Structural . All of the columns on grid A rotate until they are parallel with the vertical grids. Notice the columns rotate until they are parallel with grid A. 13 Press the SPACEBAR until the columns return to their original position. click Finish.10 Notice columns are added to A1-5. 15 On the Options Bar. Rotate the columns 11 Press the SPACEBAR. 14 If necessary. 12 Press the SPACEBAR again.

24 On the Design Bar.Add columns B1-5 16 On the Options Bar. click Grid Intersection. press the SPACEBAR to rotate them. Add a column outside of the grid 22 On the Design Bar. TIP Notice that as you rotate these columns using the SPACEBAR. B3-5 are shown below. That is why you finished the first set and then reentered the grid intersection mode to add columns B1-5. 20 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 21 Select column A5 and delete it. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 837 . 19 On the Options Bar. click Structural Column. 17 Create a crossing selection that includes B1-5. click Modify. The column should be 4200 mm to the left of grid 5. 23 Add a M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80 between B4 and C5. Although you could have added columns B1-5 with the first set of columns. 18 If the columns are not aligned as in the illustration below. click Finish. the columns on A1-5 do not rotate. and 6900 mm below the exterior face of the horizontal wall above it. you could not have rotated them independently of each other.

and use the grid tools to add beams automatically. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. In the next exercise. 6 Add a beam between the column shown below and the horizontal wall above it. you used various methods to add structural columns. 26 On the File menu. and you rotate the columns using the SPACEBAR. you specify the start and endpoint of the beam. 5 Zoom around the right side of the building model. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Structural_tutorial. double-click Level 2. This project file is required. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. 2 On the View menu. Adding Structural Beams and Girders. Different structural conditions exist within the building model that require specific beam conditions.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Add beams using point-to-point insertion 1 In the Project Browser. you add beams manually. click . click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. expand Views (all).25 On the View toolbar. click Save. expand Floor Plans. Start the beam at the column and move your cursor up until it connects with the wall. Adding Structural Beams and Girders In this exercise. you add structural beams to the building model. you learn how to work with these varied conditions. 838 | Chapter 25 Structural . 4 In the Type Selector. To add a beam using point-to-point insertion. click Beam. In this exercise. As you use the beam tool. in its current state. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.

select Girder for Usage. 10 In the Type Selector. and then move the cursor up to grid A. click Modify. 9 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.7. click Beam. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32. 11 On the Options Bar. 12 Add a beam between the midpoint of the structural wall shown and grid A. 8 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown.7 On the Design Bar. TIP Select the midpoint of the wall first. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 839 .

For example.Use the grid tool to add beams between columns 13 In the Type Selector. the Structural Usage parameter of each beam is automatically specified depending on the join conditions. if a beam is joined column-to-column. Use the following table for other conditions. 840 | Chapter 25 Structural . select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. the Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Girder. When you use the grid tool to place beams. click Grid. Column Brace Ho o tal riz n Bracing Other Girder Joist Purlin Other Column* Girder Horizontal Bracing Other Horizontal Bracing Girder Joist Purlin Other Brace Horizontal Brace Girder Joist Purlin Other Other Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Purlin Other Horizontal Bracing Purlin Purlin Purlin Other Other Other Other Other Other *Structural walls produce the same result as columns. 14 On the Options Bar. 15 Create a crossing selection that includes grids 1 and 2.

click Finish. click Grid.16 Notice that beams are added at the grids and connected to each column. 18 On the Design Bar. 19 Zoom in the upper-right quadrant of the building model. 24 Select grid 3. click Beam. and press ENTER. 23 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Type Selector. 21 On the Design Bar. press and hold CTRL. click Modify. and select grid C. 17 On the Options Bar. click the temporary dimension value. enter 8200. Add beams to an intersecting structural wall 20 Select the structural wall that spans grids 3 and 4. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 841 . select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67.

Notice beams are added between columns. click Finish. 28 On the Options Bar. select Chain. Click column B5 to add the first beam. Press ESC to end the chain. and for Usage. select Girder for Usage. 842 | Chapter 25 Structural . Add a chain of beams 26 On the Options Bar. In addition. ■ ■ ■ ■ Click column C5 to start the beam chain. 25 On the Options Bar. Click the intersection of grid 5 and the structural wall as shown to add the final beam in the chain. refer to the following steps and illustration to add two beams to grid 5. 27 Using point-to-point insertion. notice that beams connect to the structural walls that intersect grids. select Girder.

make sure you select the intersection of the grid lines. You may need to zoom in significantly to accomplish this. to snap only to intersections. SI.29 Add a beam between A4 and the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. Add beams that intersect other beams 32 On the Options Bar. Press ESC to end the chain. 31 Add a chain of beams beginning with the end of the structural wall at C4. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 843 . select Girder for Usage. connecting the column at B4. NOTE When you begin the beam chain at C4. click Grid. and ending with the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. 33 Select grid A. 35 Zoom around the beam between A3-4. You can also use the shortcut key. click Finish. Press ESC to end the chain. 34 On the Options Bar. 30 On the Options Bar.

click .7 beam had crossed grid A.The W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 supports the W310x32. and the W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 would have been two separate beams. 38 On the Options Bar. click Grid. click Finish.7 beam that intersects it perpendicularly. If the W310x32. 844 | Chapter 25 Structural . 36 On the Options Bar. it would have become the supporting beam because it was placed first. 37 Select grid B. 39 On the View toolbar.

you use point-to-point insertion to add the beam between the two short wall segments that adjoin grids 4 and 5. select M_Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 200 x 500mm. enter SE (shortcut key for endpoints). In the steps that follow. click Beam. 43 In the Type Selector. 42 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. double-click Level 2. select Girder for Usage. 44 On the Options Bar. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 845 . and click the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 5 as shown below. 48 On the View toolbar. 47 On the Design Bar. 45 Specify the beam start point at the centerline and endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 4 as shown below.Add a concrete beam 40 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 41 Zoom around the upper structural walls between A4-5. 46 Move the cursor to the right. click .

In the steps that follow. 54 Begin the beam chain by selecting the intersection of the wall centerline and grid 3. double-click Level 2. and click when it intersects grid 2. click Beam. 52 In the Type Selector. select Girder. 51 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. you add two W310x67 beams parallel to the wall that intersects grid 3. Add remaining girders 49 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 53 On the Options Bar. and select Chain. 50 Zoom around the A1-B3 region. 55 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall and grid A.Notice the concrete beam you added in the previous step. 846 | Chapter 25 Structural . for Usage.

click . Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 847 . 57 On the View toolbar. and click when it intersects grid 1.56 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall. Press ESC twice to end the beam placement mode.

while allowing the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. For example.7. double-click Level 2. Do not worry about the exact placement at this time. M_W-Wide Flange. you add joists. You then create a joist array. under Floor Plans. Structural Framing. 848 | Chapter 25 Structural . Add the beam a few feet to the right of grid 1.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. in its current state. click W310x32. Add a W-Wide Flange joist 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. In the next exercise. the structural usage of the beams is automatically set to purlin. Structural_tutorial. and their display within the plan view adjusts accordingly.B3 quadrants. 5 Add one beam between the A1-2 girder and the parallel girder below it. you replace some of the existing girders with trusses. click Save. 4 In the Project Browser. Adding Joists and Purlins In this exercise. Adding Joists and Purlins. when you use the automatic beam tool to add beams between joists. You begin by adding W-Wide Flange joists. and purlins to the building model. You used the grid tool to add beams to selected grids and learned how varied structural conditions affect the outcome of the automatically placed beams. 2 Zoom around the A1 . Dataset This exercise requires the project file. click Beam.58 On the File menu. In this exercise. under Families. You also add joists and purlins to the building model. you added beams and girders using the point-to-point insertion method. This project file is required.

click Array. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. the Automatic option was selected by default in the Options Bar. 7 Select the beam you added in the previous steps. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 849 . 10 Click OK. The beam needs to be 1250 mm right of grid 1. Create a joist array 11 On the Edit menu. any beam added between two girders becomes a joist when the Automatic option is selected. click on the Options Bar.6 On the Design Bar. Modify the temporary dimension value if necessary. In addition. This value was set automatically because when you created the beam. notice that the Structural Usage parameter value is Joist. 8 With the beam selected. according to the table shown at the beginning of this lesson. click Modify.

13 Enter SI to snap only to intersections. 15 Move the cursor to the right and parallel to grid A. 14 Click the intersection of the upper extent of the joist and grid A as shown to specify the array start point.12 On the Options Bar. Select 2nd for Move to. Once the direction is set. 850 | Chapter 25 Structural . Clear Group and Associate. Enter 14 for Number. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . Make sure the cursor is over grid A. enter 1250 and press ENTER. This creates an array of 14 joists that are parallel to grid A.

Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 851 .7 beam from the midpoint of the first joist to the right of grid 2 that stretches perpendicularly to the next joist on the right as shown. 18 Zoom in around the area surrounding the purlin. 17 Add a W310x32.Add purlins 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Beam.

and purlins. 852 | Chapter 25 Structural . Select 2nd for Move to. This is the array start point. style. Enter 7 for Number. 21 On the Options Bar. Their display in plan view is dependent on their Structural Usage value. joists. 20 On the Edit menu. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . 19 Select the purlin you created in the previous steps. click Array. NOTE You can control the structural framing line weight. and click. 22 Click the endpoint of the left joist as shown. Clear Group and Associate. and color within the Object Styles dialog box.Notice the difference between the line weights and patterns of the girders. 23 Move the cursor to the endpoint of the next joist on the right.

and click OK. 26 In the Filter dialog box. clear all options except Structural Framing. 27 On the Options Bar. Turn on connection symbol visibility 24 Zoom in around the structural framing below A1-2. and create a crossing selection that includes all the structural framing members in this portion of the view. click .The purlins array along the midpoints of the joists. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 853 . click . 25 On the Options Bar.

and adjust the view until it resembles the image below. you create new levels and copy the level one structure to the upper levels of the building model. 854 | Chapter 25 Structural . Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels In this lesson.28 In the Element Properties dialog box. This technique saves significant design time and ensures consistency on each level. click Modify. in its current state. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels. 29 On the Design Bar. This project file is required. change the following instance parameters: ■ ■ ■ Select Moment Connection Last Select Moment Connection First Click OK. you added different joist types and allowed the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. click Save. click . you create new levels. In this exercise. In the next lesson. 31 On the File menu. and notice the connection symbols display. You then copy the entire structure that you have designed up to this point and use the paste-align command to create the structure on the upper levels. 30 On the View toolbar.

These levels are required in the next exercise where you copy the existing structural components to the new levels. Click to add Level 3. 3 Drag the upper grid control up to move the grid heads out of the way of the new levels. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels | 855 . 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Move the cursor over the right extent of Level 2. 5 On the Options Bar.Defining New Levels In this exercise.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. expand Elevations. 6 Sketch the new level line 3000 mm above Level 2 as shown below using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Click the level line starting point 3000 mm above the left extent of Level 2. You need at least 3 meters of space. and double-click Building Elevation. Create three new levels 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Structural_tutorial. select Make Plan View. you create several new levels. click Level. 2 Select grid 1.

rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 856 | Chapter 25 Structural .In the Project Browser. you copy the structural elements and use the paste-align command to add them to the new levels. where you copy the structural elements and paste align them to the new levels. Duplicating the Existing Design. notice that the Level 3 floor plan is displayed. Each level is 3000 mm high. 8 On the File menu. This technique saves you significant time compared to manually recreating the design on each level. These levels that are required in the next exercise. you created three new levels. In this exercise. in its current state. Duplicating the Existing Design In this exercise. This project file is required. click . Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Structural_tutorial. click Save. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. Copy the structural elements 1 On the View toolbar. 7 Repeat the steps above to create Levels 4 and 5 as shown.

click Modify. click OK. Although you can select and copy the components from any view. 3 On the Edit menu. Make sure the entire building model is included. click Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. click Copy to Clipboard. and select Levels 3 and 4. 5 On the Edit menu. Paste the structural components on the new levels 4 On the Design Bar. it is often easier and more certain to copy from a 3D view if your intent is to select the entire building model. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels | 857 . press and hold CTRL. click Modify. 7 In the Select Levels dialog box. select Level 2. 6 In the Select Levels dialog box. 8 On the Design Bar.2 Draw a selection box around the entire design.

10 On the File menu. In this exercise. you create a framing elevation. click Save. double-click Building Elevation. Creating a Framing Elevation In this exercise. 858 | Chapter 25 Structural . you create a framing elevation in order to add structural braces. You then add C-channel bracing to one level and array it to the remaining levels.9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. You copied the Level 1 structure elements and use the paste-align command to create the structure on the upper levels. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. you create a framing elevation in order to provide a view in which to place structural bracing members. In the next lesson. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation In this lesson. in its current state. You use this elevation view in the next exercise to place structural braces. This project file is required. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation.

Elevation 1-a. 3 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. click Framing Elevation. Structural_tutorial. You can now view the new elevation. double-click Level 2. and click. at the midpoint between grids 2 and 3. Create a framing elevation 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Design Bar.Dataset This exercise requires the project file. in the Project Browser. 4 Place the cursor over grid C. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation | 859 . 6 Double-click the elevation head in order to open the view. make sure Attach to Grid is selected.

you add structural braces to the building model.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you add c-channel bracing to the building model. You are ready to add the structural braces.Notice the stick framing representation. This is because the Detail Level of this view is automatically set to coarse. Structural_tutorial. 860 | Chapter 25 Structural . Adding Structural Braces In the final exercise of this tutorial. 7 On the File menu. In this exercise. click Save. You begin by adding a set of braces to level 4. in its current state. In the next exercise. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. you created an elevation view design specifically to add structural braces. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. This project file is required. Adding Structural Braces. You then array the braces to the remaining levels. Also notice that grid 3 is identified within the view.

and using the shape grips. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation | 861 .Expand the view extents 1 Before adding the braces.4. click Brace. 3 In the Type Selector. ■ ■ SM: Snap only to midpoints of objects. you use point-to-point insertion. SE: Snap only to endpoints of objects. Because it is often necessary to make sure you snap to the endpoints and midpoints. When adding the braces. you should use the following snap shortcut keys when applicable. 4 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint at the intersection of grid 2 and Level 4. select M_C-Channel: C75x7. 5 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. select the grids and drag the grid heads above level 5. drag the left and right extents until you can see the grid heads for 2 and 3 as shown. select the view crop box. NOTE If necessary. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.

11 On the Options Bar. Clear Group and Associate. 7 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint at the intersection of grid 3 and Level 4. click Array. 862 | Chapter 25 Structural . Array the braces 8 On the Design Bar. Select 2nd for Move to. The second brace is displayed. The braces are arrayed to Level 1. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . click Modify. 13 Click the intersection of Level 4 and grid 2 to specify the array endpoint. Select Constrain. 12 Click the intersection of Level 5 and grid 2 to specify the array start point. 10 On the Edit menu. Enter 4 for Number.The brace displays. 9 Select both braces on Level 4. 6 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5.

and click OK. click . click Tag All Not Tagged. select Structural Framing Tags. 15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box.14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the View toolbar. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation | 863 .

click Save. 864 | Chapter 25 Structural . you added structural braces to the design and created a brace array.17 On the File menu. In this exercise.

you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. In this tutorial. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. called Worksharing. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. doors. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Autodesk Revit Building®. they cannot make changes to it. such as walls.Sharing Projects 26 When working with large building projects. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. A workset is a collection of building elements. floors. You can enable Worksharing for any project. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. 865 . however. stairs. Using Worksharing. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. and so on. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. All other team members can view this workset. This prevents possible conflicts within the project.

You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. When you are working on a shared project. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. Elements specific to a view. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. Working in a shared project In a shared project. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog box. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. you specify an active workset. a dialog box displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. 866 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. such as a tenant interior. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog box for that element. After the project is shared. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. you must first enable Worksharing. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. and click Editable. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. select the desired workset. you can select which worksets are open or closed. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. In a multi-story structure. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. To make a workset editable. In the next exercise. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Building by opening only those worksets required for your work. When setting up Worksharing. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. The first time you activate worksets within a project. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. In the lessons and exercises that follow. After learning the fundamentals. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team.Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. such as annotations and dimensions. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. Instead. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. go to the Worksets dialog box. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. ■ Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. use Element Borrowing. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion.

Regardless of the default setting. Using Worksharing in a Project | 867 . Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. By subdividing the project based on these task roles.■ Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. each team member has control over a portion of the design. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. if a workset named Interior was created. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. When creating the new worksets. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. ■ Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. for a typical project. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. Shared Levels and Grids. You should have at least one workset for each person. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. On this tab. For example. not including the Project Standards. When you create a new workset. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. Step 2: Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. Experience has shown that. the file is saved as the central file. with each assigned a specific functional task. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. Therefore. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. and View worksets. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. In most projects. ■ Team member roles Typically. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. As new members create worksets for their own use. designers work in teams. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. Generally. This allows Revit Building to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed.

your changes propagate to the entire team. you should then save to your local file. your changes are saved. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. This is called “Selective Open. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. save to the central file. proceeds as usual. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. make any required worksets editable. This makes them available to other team members. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. When working remotely. however. In this instance. When finished or at regular intervals. When you save to the central file. or 868 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . When you save to the central file.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. you can select which workset is active. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. if you know who checked out the required workset. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. After saving to the central file. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. As you work. Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. On the Options Bar. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. you make that workset editable by you.Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. Step 9: Work on the project Work on the project. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. you work no differently then you would in the office. However. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. and then save the local file. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. In this situation. within the local file. When you save locally (to your local file). you should use it only when: ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file.

In this conceptual exercise. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. using VPN. In the next exercise. you should check out the Materials workset. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. and make that workset editable. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to default worksets. click the Training Files icon. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. for instance. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Building. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. Open the c_Worksets.rvt file located in the Common folder. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely using AccuRender® is supported. A dialog box displays suggesting that any user new to Worksharing should complete this training. Using Worksharing in a Project | 869 . Alternatively. The Worksets dialog box is displayed. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. To do this. click Worksets. click Open. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options.■ You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence." Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. reload the latest changes from the central file. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names.

11 Enter Furniture Layout. and Views. Your username displays as the present owner. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. 4 In the Worksets dialog box. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 5 Scroll down the list of workset names. a small number of team members are working on the building model. 13 Click Rename. 12 In the Worksets dialog box. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. imagine four users including yourself. 10 Click New. Project Standards. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. currently named Workset1. it is better to make them visible by default.3 Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. Therefore. you can rename the default workset. 8 Enter the name Interior Layout. For training purposes. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. another is assigned the interior layout. Creating new worksets 7 In the Worksets dialog box. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. Only User-Created worksets should display. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. click New. Because the interior walls appear in many views. 9 Click OK. In this simple training project. select Workset1. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. under Show. and click OK. In this case. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. turn off Families. clear Visible by default in all views. 870 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . 6 Under Show. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. and notice all are editable by you.

type the name Exterior Shell. Subdividing the project into worksets 16 In the Project Browser. 20 Click OK. 21 Select one of the interior walls. under Identity Data. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. When you initially activate Worksharing. under Identity Data. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell.14 In the Rename dialog box. expand Floor Plans. and click OK. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. 22 On the Options Bar. In this training file. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. and double-click Level 1. 19 In the Element Properties dialog box. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. 24 Select all of the interior elements. click OK. and walls. including the interior doors. 17 In the drawing area. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. however. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. You do. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. click . stairs. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. 18 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Worksets dialog box. click . select Interior Layout for Workset. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. expand Views (all). Using Worksharing in a Project | 871 .

click Save As. 29 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. If any interior elements remain.25 On the Options Bar. 31 On the View menu. 37 In the Element Properties dialog box. 32 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 26 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Interior Layout for Workset. 30 Click OK. 35 In the drawing area. click Visibility/Graphics. click Visibility/Graphics. click . 34 In the Project Browser. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. select all of the interior elements of the building model. 872 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . and click OK. under Floor Plans. under Identity Data. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. double-click Level 2. 28 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 36 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. click the Worksets tab. 33 Select Interior Layout. select Interior Layout for Workset. and click OK. 27 On the View menu. click the Worksets tab. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. and click OK. click . Create the central file 38 On the File menu. under Views (all).

2 In the Open dialog box. 40 Click Save. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. make sure you remember the location of this central file. 7 In the File Save Options dialog box. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. click Close. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. 5 On the File menu. check out worksets. select Specify. 4 In the Opening Worksets dialog box. click Non Editable. 6 In the Save As dialog box. If you have not yet completed the exercise. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. 42 In the Worksets dialog box. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. In addition. and click OK. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. click Worksets. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work.Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. select the central file and. Now that you have created the central file. click Open. Next. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. 3 Click Open. under Open Worksets. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. make modifications to the building model. 45 On the File menu. please do so before continuing. you enabled Worksharing on a project. 43 On the right side of the dialog box. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. select all the User-Created worksets. Checking out worksets 9 On the File menu. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. and click OK. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. 44 Click OK. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. click Worksets. 39 In the Save As dialog box. and click Save. Using Worksharing in a Project | 873 . click Options. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. In this exercise. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets. click Save As. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. You have created a local file which is for your use only. Checking in the worksets 41 On the File menu. you create your local file.

22 On the File menu. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. 17 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. Verify that it is cleared. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. If this is selected. and double-click Level 1. 21 Click OK. 11 Click OK. select Interior Layout. click . In this case. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 23 Click OK. 13 On the Worksets toolbar. 20 On the Options Bar. On the Options Bar. 12 On the Window menu.The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. and click OK. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . however. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. 10 In the Worksets dialog box. select Interior Layout for Name. Revit Building borrows it for you and applies your changes. Because this element is not owned by another user. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. notice the Editable Only option. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. 874 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . under Identity Data. 14 In the Project Browser. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. click Worksets. In the Worksets dialog box. click Modify. expand Floor Plans. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. you can still edit this wall. If it was owned by another user. and select Yes for Editable. 19 Under Constraints. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. Before working on the model. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. In this case. 16 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line.

27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Using Worksharing in a Project | 875 . and modify the length so that the corridor is open. click Door. 30 On the Design Bar. 29 Using the following illustration as a guide. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Wall. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. 28 In the Type Selector. select Basic Wall: Interior .Modify the building model 24 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. 31 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. The precise location is not important. 25 Delete the door. 33 In the Type Selector.126mm Partition (2-hr). 26 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. click Modify.

If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. For training purposes. skip the following section. add two door openings into the rooms you created. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. 876 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. which matches the information in the Status Bar. The Save to Central dialog box is displayed with the path to the central file automatically filled in. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. leave this file open in its current state. and save locally immediately afterward. In this particular case. 36 In the Save to Central dialog box. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. checked out worksets. If you have not yet completed these exercises. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Building and setting the username to User 2. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. You modified the building model. displays the workset as well as the element type. click Save to Central. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. make elements editable. If you place the cursor over any of the new elements. In the following section of this exercise. and reload the latest changes. please do so before continuing. two users access the central file through a network connection. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. you should relinquish all worksets. In addition.34 Using the following illustration as a guide. you should perform regular saves. it is recommended. When working in your local file. Whenever you save. and proceed to Creating a local copy. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 37 Click OK. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). each user must check out worksets. Borrowed Elements is selected. you created your local file. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. In this exercise. By default. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. a tooltip. Throughout the process. Saving your work 35 On the File menu. At the end of a work session. save to central.

and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. return to the Settings dialog box. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. and reset the Username to your computer login name. 12 In the File Save Options dialog box. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. User 2: Create a local file. 8 Click Open. Using Worksharing in a Project | 877 . 2 Start a new Revit Building session by double-clicking the Revit Building icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. You now have a local copy of the project. and click OK. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file.Using a second Revit Building session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Building window. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. click Worksets. In addition. 3 On the Settings menu. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. under Username. specifically sequenced. 11 In the Save As dialog box. enter User 2. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. and click OK. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. click Open. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 10 On the File menu. click Save As. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. select the central file and. and click Save. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. instructions are staggered. consider that person to be User 1. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. select all the User-Created worksets. You are now the owner of that workset. For training purposes. This file is for your use only. and select Yes for Editable. click Options. 7 In the Open dialog box. 15 Select the Exterior Shell workset. 14 On the File menu. 4 Click the General Tab and. and click OK. select Specify. under Open Worksets. 13 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive.rvt. 9 In the Opening Worksets dialog box. This is a system setting. one user has already created a local file. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. click Options. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 16 Click OK.

26 On the File menu. 21 Select the Interior Layout workset. 28 Click OK. expand Views (all). it becomes the active workset. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. 23 In the Project Browser. 25 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. and publish changes 17 User 1 should still have the local file open. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. 27 In the Save to Central dialog box. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. and select Yes for Editable. 22 Click OK. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2.User 1: Check out worksets. 19 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. expand Views (all). and move it upward approximately 2 meters. click Save to Central. If it is not open. expand Floor Plans. If you only have one workset checked out. 18 On the File menu. select the lower exterior wall. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. modify the building model. 20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog box. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. 24 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. open it now. click Worksets. 878 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 29 In the Project Browser.

The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. select Yes for Editable. right-click Copy of Level 1. and click Rename. 35 Using the following illustration as a guide. 33 In the Save to Central dialog box. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. click Save to Central. When you save to central. Click Yes. However. and click OK. click Reload Latest. and click OK. 36 On the File menu. 42 On the Project Browser. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. under Floor Plans. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. 48 On the Design Bar. 51 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. click Save to Central. right-click Level 1. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. 45 On the Project Browser. the Visible by default option was not selected. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. 46 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and check out additional worksets 39 On the File menu. The changes User 2 made are apparent. 43 On the Project Browser. 34 Click OK. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. under Floor Plans. 50 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 37 In the Save to Central dialog box. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 47 In the Type Selector. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. click Worksets. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. click Modify. and click inside any room. under Views (all). 31 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. you should create a furniture plan view. User 1: Reload latest worksets. under Floor Plans. choose any desk. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. 38 Click OK. Before adding any furniture. 41 Select Furniture Layout. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. 49 On the View menu. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. 44 In the Rename View dialog box. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. Using Worksharing in a Project | 879 . and click OK. 40 On the File menu. click Component. Therefore. click the Worksets tab. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. click Visibility/Graphics. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. 32 On the File menu. and click Duplicate. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view.

59 In the Rename dialog box. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 67 Click OK. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section.200mm. leave this file open in its current state. click Save to Central. select Project Standards. 57 In the Element Properties dialog box. 58 In the Type Properties dialog box. 66 In the Save to Central dialog box. User 1: Reload latest. 63 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users. 56 Right-click the upper exterior wall. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 55 On the File menu. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. 54 Click OK. 61 On the File menu. 53 In the Save to Central dialog box. and click OK. and click OK.52 On the File menu. and published their changes back to the central file. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully In this exercise. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. In the final exercise of this tutorial. enter Exterior Wall . 60 Click OK twice. 64 Click OK. 69 On the File menu. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. Each user checked out worksets. 65 On the File menu. click Save to Central. 880 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . leave this file open in its current state. 70 In the Save to Central dialog box. Checking out worksets. If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. select the following. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. click Rename. click Worksets. under Show. click Reload Latest. and click Properties. click Edit/New. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. select Save to Central. 62 In the Worksets dialog box. modified the building model. select Reload Latest. and save 68 On the File menu.

you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). As each of you work. Set the Username to User 2. 4 In the File Save Options dialog box. click Options. User 1: Create local file 6 For the sake of simplicity. This is the local file for User 1. and click OK. User 2: Create local file 12 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. This exercise requires two users and. click the Training Files icon. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. Open the c_Worksets Project-Central. and click OK. you save the dataset as a central file. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. 3 In the Save As dialog box. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). Save training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. and these problems are rectified. click Open. 9 In the Save As dialog box. throughout this training. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages.Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Save As. finished the previous workset exercises. click Options. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. At the appropriate point in this exercise. NOTE When you open the training dataset for this tutorial. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 11 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. The central file should still be open. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. 5 Click Save. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this.rvt file located in the Common folder. click Options. In subsequent steps. and click Save. select Make this the Central location after save. 10 In the File Save Options dialog box. you need to set up your central and local files. and still have your local files open. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. Only one user needs to open the dataset and save the central file to a network location. On the Settings menu. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Building and setting the username to User 2. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Building by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. ■ ■ ■ Using Worksharing in a Project | 881 . 7 On the File menu. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. Click the General tab of the Options dialog box. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. There are specific instructions for each user. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. click Save As. Each user must have network access to the central file.

under Floor Plans. 15 Click Open. and then click OK. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. 23 In the Worksets dialog box. 27 In the Worksets dialog box. 19 In the File Save Options dialog box. select them. In addition.This Revit Building session is now set up for User 2. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. User 1: Check out worksets 22 On the File menu. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. select the Interior Layout workset. verify that Editable Only is cleared. and click Save. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. return to the Settings dialog box. and select Yes for Editable. You have created a local file which is for your use only. Checking out worksets 21 Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. Next. You are now the owner of that workset. 17 On the File menu. and then click OK. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. and reset the Username to your computer login name. 882 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . You are now the owner of that workset. select Interior Layout. 24 Select the Exterior Shell workset. click Worksets. and select Yes for Editable. select the second window from the top. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. 31 On the left exterior wall. select Specify. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. and click Open. double-click Level 1. This is a system setting. click Save As. click Worksets. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. click Open. click Options. 13 On the File menu. and click OK. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 29 On the Project Browser. if any User-Created worksets are not open. select the central file and under Open Worksets. and click OK. 14 In the Open dialog box. User 2: Check out worksets 26 On the File menu. select Exterior Shell. Afterwards. 25 Under Active Workset. 30 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Save As dialog box. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. 28 Under Active Workset.

33 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. 39 Click OK. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 34 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. After you submit the request. A message informs you that your request has been granted. click Check Now.A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. Using Worksharing in a Project | 883 . a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. select the request submitted by User 2. At this point. and click Editing Requests. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. User 2: Check for editability grant 38 In the Check Editability Grants dialog box. and notice the window is in the new location. 37 Click Close. click the File menu. 32 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. 35 In the Editing Requests dialog box. Leave this dialog box open until User 1 grants permission. 36 Click Grant. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values.

click Close. select Save to Central. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 42 On the File menu. 41 In the Save to Central dialog box. In this multi-user exercise. to Local.User 1 and 2: Save to Central. select the following. In this case. and click OK. and the other user granted it. and close 40 On the File menu. 884 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . you requested permission to edit the element.

you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option).Creating Multiple Design Options 27 When working with a building model. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. Using design options. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. 885 . In this tutorial.

2 In the Design Options dialog box. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. In this particular case. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. In addition. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. The client has asked you to create various options.Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. each with multiple design options. click Open. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. click the Training Files icon. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. you design each of the structural options. The first time you open the Design Options dialog box within a project.rvt file located in the Metric folder. In the first exercise in this lesson. and each option set can have multiple schemes. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. the only available command is to create a new option set. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. In the final exercise of this lesson. click New. At any time in the design process. you can edit it. Open the m_Urban_House. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. make your final design decision. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. With the second option. In the second exercise. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. After you create a design option. For example. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. 886 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. and delete the unwanted options from the project. you set up multiple design option sets. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. under Option Set. After you and the client agree on the final design. you can have multiple sets of design options. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes.

add three columns. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. expand Floor Plans. 4 In the Project Browser. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 887 . make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. expand Views (all). the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. therefore. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.TIP In this exercise. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. and the third column centered between the two. TIP To center the middle column. or add a dimension string between the columns. each is constructed for interchangeability. the roof and structure systems must work together. 11 On the Edit toolbar. By selecting Multiple. 5 On the View menu. click Modify. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. In the following illustration. click Column. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. 9 On the Design Bar. In this case. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. and click Close. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. select: ■ ■ ■ . click Edit Selected. click 12 On the Options Bar. select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. 3 Select Option 1 (primary). 7 In the Type Selector.

A copy of the three selected columns is added. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. 888 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . Because of the size of the columns. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. using the same technique. click . 18 On the View toolbar. they are difficult to see in this view. 17 Zoom out and.15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. Notice the 12 columns that you added. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. When you are finished.

you add the beams that span the columns. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. The second click specifies the end of the beam. 19 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. select Round Bar : 50mm. click Beam. click . 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. 21 In the Type Selector. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 889 . and click at its center to set the beam start point. 25 On the Edit toolbar. Zoom in on the upper right column. 23 On the Design Bar. In it. double-click TOP OF CORE. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. Adding a beam is a two-click process. click Modify. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.Next. The first click specifies the beam start point. Use the following illustration as a guide. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam.

29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. zoom into the left column. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. move down to the next set of columns. 30 On the View toolbar.26 On the Options Bar. 28 Zoom out. and click the center point. Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. click . and select the center of the column to add a copy. 890 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . select: ■ ■ ■ Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch.

32 In the Design Options dialog box. 37 Select Option 2 and. click Rename. under Option Set. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. under Option. and click OK. click Rename. and click OK. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 891 . 34 In the Design Options dialog box. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. 33 Click Finish Editing. click New.Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. enter Brackets for New. enter Structure for New. not a new option set. 40 In the Rename dialog box. under Option. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). 36 In the Rename dialog box. under Option. click Rename. and click OK. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 38 In the Rename dialog box. enter Beam for New.

Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. select Edit Selected. click New. There should now be two roofing design options. click Rename. it will resemble the following illustration. and click OK. 46 Under Option. under Option Set. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. This allows you to more easily manage the project. Under Now Editing. select Option 2. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. and click OK. click Rename. and click OK. 47 Under Roofing. 41 Under Option Set. you create the second design option. under Structure. under Option. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. 45 Under Roofing. 51 Under Edit. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. 43 In the Rename dialog box. name the option Sunscreen. 48 Under Option. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. When finished. select Option 1 (primary). click Rename. 892 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . click New. name the option Louvers. 52 Click Close. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. 50 In the Design Options dialog box. enter Roofing for New. select Beam.

Refer to the following illustration. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 893 . 55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select M_Roof Beam. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. double-click ROOF TERRACE. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. under Floor Plans. 58 On the Tools menu. click Component.53 In the Project Browser. The second click represents the plane that is moved. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. click Align. 56 In the Type Selector. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs.

894 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . on the Edit toolbar. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam.60 After aligning the beam. click Modify. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . 61 On the Design Bar. The second click represents the move end point. The first click sets the move start point. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. Click to indicate the end point of the move. 62 Select the beam and. Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam.

each with multiple design options to pick from. Notice that even before you close the dialog box. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. and click Save. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. 68 In the Design Options dialog box. Design optio